Beechcraft 1900D Efis-84

ûú7l_ed_Yi#<#9ecckd_YWj_edi
9ebb_di
EFIS-84
Electronic Flight
Instrument Systems
(Using DPU-84/MPU-84)
installation manual
Collins General Aviation Division

Collins Divisions
Rockwell International Corporation
400 Collins Road NE
Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52498
319.395.1000
Cable: COLINRAD Cedar Rapids
ûù
March 30, 1995
TO: HOLDERS OF COLLINS EFIS-84 ELECTRONIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENT SYSTEM MANUAL

(523-0775963)
3RD EDITION HIGHLIGHTS
The attached installation manual completely replaces the existing publication. The interconnect
drawings, 2-tube, 3-tube, 4-tube, and 5-tube, have been upgraded with new formats and enhancements
to further benefit the user. In addition, HIRF and lightning information and documentation is
addressed, as necessary, in appropriate sections of the manual. Also provided is updated information
and corrections to minor errors.
All changes have been implemented in a manner that retains information required to service earlier
equipment models. All revisions are identified by black bars in the margin of the page.
This new edition does not include copies of the service bulletins and service information letters issued
for this equipment. A listing of all service bulletins and service information letters issued to date is on
the new edition of the bulletins section title page. Remove any SBs and SILs from your old edition and
add them to the bulletins section of your new edition. Discard the remainder of the old edition.
PUBLICATIONS DEPARTMENT
1/2
#85603::8<960336446,
3rd Edition, 30 March 1995
9ebb_di
EFIS-84
Electronic Flight
Instrument Systems
(Using DPU-84/MPU-84)
installation manual
This publication includes:
General Information 523-0775964

Installation 523-0775965
Operation 523-0775966
Theory of Operation 523-0775967
Maintenance 523-0775968
Bulletins 523-0775969

Rockwell Collins, Inc.
Printed in the United States of America
© 1995 Rockwell Collins, Inc.
õ(),6ðåéB,0B0$5Bêíîäèô
WARNING
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information subject to the International Traffic in Arms
Regulation (ITAR) or the Export Administration Regulation (EAR) of 1979 which may not
be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside of the United
States without first obtaining an export license. A violation of the ITAR or EAR may be
subject to a penalty of up to 10 years imprisonment and a fine of up to $1,000,000 under
22 U.S.C.2778 of the Arms Export Control Act of 1976 or section 2410 of the Export
Administration Act of 1979. Include this notice with any reproduced portion of this
document.
CAUTION
The material in this publication is subject to change. Before attempting any

maintenance operation on the equipment covered in this publication, verify
that you have complete and up-to-date publications by referring to the
applicable Publications and Service Bulletin Indexes.
SOFTWARE COPYRIGHT NOTICE
© 1993-1995 Rockwell Collins, Inc.
All Software resident in this equipment is protected by copyright.
We welcome your comments concerning this publication. Although every effort

has been made to keep it free of errors, some may occur. When reporting a
specific problem, please describe it briefly and include the publication part
number, the paragraph or figure number, and the page number.
Send your comments to: Publications Department MS 106-124
Rockwell Collins, Inc.
or by Internet E-Mail to:
GENAVPUB@COLLINS.ROCKWELL.COM
GENERAL ADVISORIES FOR ALL UNITS
Warning
Service personnel are to obey standard safety precautions, such as wearing safety glasses, to prevent
personal injury while installing or doing maintenance on this unit.
Warning
Use care when using sealants, solvents, and other chemical compounds. do not expose to excessive heat or
open flame. Use only with adequate ventilation. Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors and avoid prolonged
contact with skin. Observe all cautions and warnings given by the manufacturer.
Warning
Remove all power to the unit before disassembling it. Disassembling the unit with power connected is
dangerous to life and may cause voltage transients that can damage the unit.
Warning
This unit may have components that contain materials (such as beryllium oxide, acids, lithium, radioactive
material, mercury, etc.) that can be hazardous to your health. If the component enclosure is broken, handle
the component in accordance with OSHA requirements 29CFR1910.1000 or superseding documents to
prevent personal contact with or inhalation of hazardous materials. Since it is virtually impossible to
determine which components do or do not contain such hazardous materials, do not open or disassemble
components for any reason.
Warning
This unit exhibits a high degree of functional reliability. Nevertheless, users must know that it is not
practical to monitor for all conceivable system failures and, however unlikely, it is possible that erroneous
operation could occur without a fault indication. The pilot has the responsibility to find such an occurrence
by means of cross-checks with redundant or correlated data available in the cockpit.
Caution
Turn off power before disconnecting any unit from wiring. Disconnecting the unit without turning power off
may cause voltage transients that can damage the unit.
Caution
This unit contains electrostatic discharge sensitive (esds) components and esds assemblies that can be
damaged by static voltages. Although most esds components contain internal protection circuits, good
procedures dictate careful handling of all esds components and esds assemblies.
i
GENERAL ADVISORIES FOR ALL UNITS (CONT)
Obey the precautions given below when moving, touching, or repairing all esds components and units
containing esds components.
a. De-energize or remove all power, signal sources, and loads used with the unit.
b. Place the unit on a work surface that can conduct electricity (is grounded).
c. Ground the repair operator through a conductive wrist strap or other device using a 470-kΩ or 1-MΩ
series resistor to prevent operator injury.
d. Ground any tools (and soldering equipment) that will contact the unit. Contact with the operator's hand
is a sufficient ground for hand tools that are electrically isolated.
e. All esds replacement components are shipped in conductive foam or tubes and must be stored in their
shipping containers until installed.
f. Esds devices and assemblies, that are removed from a unit, must immediately be put on the conductive
work surface or in conductive containers.
g. Place repaired or disconnected circuit cards in aluminum foil or in plastic bags that have a layer of, or
are made with, conductive material.
h. Do not touch esds devices/assemblies or remove them from their containers until they are needed.
Failure to handle esds devices as described above can permanently damage them. This damage can cause
immediate or premature device failure.
ii
EFIS-84 installation manual 523-0775963
RECORD OF ADDENDUMS
INSERTION
SECTION ED/REV DATE ADDENDUM DATE
DATE/BY
General Information 3/0 30 Mar/95 1 10 Dec/96

3 20 Oct/97
4 18 Feb/99
Installation 3/0 30 Mar/95 2 10 Dec/96
Operation 3/0 30 Mar/95 None
Theory Operation 3/0 30 Mar/95 None
Maintenance 3/0 30 Mar/95 None
Bulletins 3/0 30 Mar/95 None
NOTE: Addendum sheets should not be removed from a manual unless otherwise specified.
Addendum information will be incorporated in the next edition of the manual.
iii
(Follows Advisories page)
z523-0775964-003118
9ebb_di
EFIS-84
Electronic Flight Instrument Systems
General Information
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
1.1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.1 Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI) ..............................................................................................................1-1
1.2.2 Electronic Horizontal Situation Indictor (EHSI)...........................................................................................................1-1
1.2.3 Display Select Panel (DSP) ............................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2.4 Display Processor Unit (DPU)........................................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.5 Multifunction Display (MFD).........................................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.6 Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU) .............................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.4HIRF AND LIGHTNING COMPLIANCE............................................................................................................. 1-44
1.5EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED .............................................................................................. 1-44
1.5.1 Purpose of Equipment ..................................................................................................................................................1-44
1.5.1.1 Remote Data Programmer (RDP-300) ......................................................................................................................1-44
1.5.1.2 Checklist Entry Unit (CEU-85( ))..............................................................................................................................1-44
1.5.1.3 Fan Monitor Module (FMM-85) ................................................................................................................................1-45
1.5.1.4 Air Data Adapter (ADA-85) .......................................................................................................................................1-45
1.5.2 Related EFIS Equipment Specifications .....................................................................................................................1-47
NOTICE: This section replaces second edition dated 20 May 1992 and revision.
List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.
Page No Issue Page No Issue Page No Issue
* Title ......................................... 30 Mar 95 * 1-9............................................. 30 Mar 95 * 1-33 .......................................... 30 Mar 95

* List of Effective Pages............. 30 Mar 95 1-10 thru 1-17 ..........................20 May 92 1-34 ........................................... 28 Apr 93
* 1-1 ............................................ 30 Mar 95 * 1-18 thru 19 ............................. 30 Mar 95 1-35 thru 1-37.......................... 20 May 92
1-2 ............................................ 20 May 92 1-20 thru 1-24 ..........................20 May 92 1-38 thru 1-41........................... 28 Apr 93
1-3 ............................................. 28 Apr 93 * 1-25........................................... 30 Mar 95 1-42 .......................................... 20 May 92
* 1-4 ............................................ 30 Mar 95 1-26...........................................20 May 92 * 1-43 thru 1-52.......................... 30 Mar 95
1-5 ............................................ 20 May 92 * 1-27........................................... 30 Mar 95 * 1-53 Added............................... 30 Mar 95
* 1-6 ............................................ 30 Mar 95 1-28 thru 1-31 ..........................20 May 92 * 1-54 Blank Added.................... 30 Mar 95
1-7 thru 1-8.............................. 20 May 92 1-32............................................28 Apr 93
RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF

Record of Revisions REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL, AND ENTER DATE
INSERTED AND INITIALS.
REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED
1st Ed 11 Jul 90 None
2nd Ed 20 May 92 None
1st Rev 28 Apr 93 None
3rd Ed 30 Mar 95 SIL 2-93

section I
general information
1.1 INTRODUCTION temperature warning output that can drive an ex-

This publication provides all the specifications, ternal installer-supplied annunciator. This annun-
principles of operation, and information necessary ciator will illuminate if the internal temperature of
to install, test, and troubleshoot the EFIS-84 the EFD reaches +95 °C (+203 °F) in still air.
Electronic Flight Instrument System. Typical 1.2.2 Electronic Horizontal Situation Indictor
EFIS equipment is shown in Figure 1-1. Refer to (EHSI)
Table 1-1 for a list of equipment covered. The EFD-84 used as an Electronic Horizontal Situa-
tion Indicator (EHSI) presents a multicolor crt dis-
Note
play of the aircraft horizontal navigation situation.
Throughout this installation manual the term Information displayed includes compass heading and
EFIS (Electronic Flight Instrument System) is sensor type annunciation, selected heading, primary
used when referring to the EFIS-84 system. VOR/LOC course arrow or LNV desired track, navi-
gation sensor annunciation for primary course, lat-
1.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT eral deviation from selected course including annun-
An EFIS system consists of two or more electronic dis- ciation of type, to/from information, distance to sta-
play units and their associated drive and control units. tion/waypoint, bearing pointer sensor annunciations,
The display units use high resolution, black matrix, vertical deviation, NAV data display of ground
shadow mask, and color cathode ray tubes (crt’s) as speed, wind, time-to-go or elapsed time, preselected
the display medium. The separate equipment may be course arrow (lateral deviation and annunciation),
configured into a variety of system configurations. digital selected course/desired track readout,
Typical configurations consist of two or four crt’s. weather radar target alert, DR, MSG, and waypoint
The crt’s display the attitude and navigation infor- alert (if available) when LNV selected as active
mation now found on the electromechanical ADI and course, excessive ILS deviation (when Cat II config-
HSI. Additional information, such as weather radar, ured), ILS and heading comparator warnings (ILS
navaid/waypoint locations, FCS mode annunciation, only if Cat II configured), alternate heading annun-
and diagnostic messages may also be displayed. ciation, back course annunciation, and DME hold
annunciation. The EFD also provides a high tem-
1.2.1 Electronic Attitude Director Indicator perature warning output that can drive an external
(EADI) installer-supplied annunciator. This annunciator will
The EFD-84 used as an Electronic Attitude Director illuminate if the internal temperature of the EFD
Indicator (EADI) presents a multicolor crt display of reaches +95 °C (+203 °F) in still air.
aircraft pitch and roll attitude, autopilot mode an-
nunciations, vertical deviation, lateral deviation, 1.2.3 Display Select Panel (DSP)
autopilot engage status, attitude/heading comparator
warnings, and decision height set. Other displays are The DSP-84 Display Select Panel provides EHSI for-
displayed as a function of pilot selection or operation mat selection (MAP, ARC, HSI, ARC WX, MAP WX),
mode. These are attitude source, radio altitude, ex- active and preset navigation sensor selection, bearing
cessive ILS deviation and comparator warning, pointer selection, NAV data selection (ground speed,
fast/slow deviation or angle-of-attack deviation, and time-to-go, wind, and elapsed time), and weather ra-
marker beacon. Interconnect strapping enables more dar on the EHSI. The DH SET knob allows decision
display options such as crosspointer or command height to be set on the EADI. Additionally, course,
bars, speed deviation display inhibit, enable or in- course direct to, heading, and heading sync are se-
hibit rising runway, and enable or inhibit composite lected from the DSP. (Display dimming is controlled
format in reversion. The EFD also provides a high by an external airframe-supplied control.)
Revised 30 March 1995 1-1

general information 523-0775964
Figure 1-1. EFIS-84 Electronic Flight Instrument System
Revised 20 May 1992 1-2

1.2.4 Display Processor Unit (DPU) management system such as the Collins FMS-90.
Additional functions available include waypoint
The DPU-84 Display Processor Unit provides sen-
definition, display of multiple waypoints, and re-
sor input processing and switching, the necessary
mote data. The MFD also provides a high-
deflection and video signals, and power for the elec-
temperature warning output that can drive an ex-
tronic flight displays. The DPU normally drives two
ternal installer-supplied annunciator. This annun-
electronic flight displays with different deflection
ciator will illuminate if the internal temperature of
and video signals; for example, an EADI on one
the MFD reaches +78 °C (+172 °F) in still air.
display and an EHSI on the other. The DPU also
provides backup drive for the cross-side electronic 1.2.6 Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU)
flight displays in the event of a failure of the cross-
The multifunction processor unit provides sensor
side DPU. The DPU also provides a high-
input processing and switching and the necessary
temperature warning output that can drive an ex-
deflection and video signals for the multifunction
ternal installer-supplied annunciator. This annun-
display. The MPU provides the backup deflection
ciator will illuminate if the internal temperature of
and video signals to the EADI and EHSI displays in
the DPU reaches +100 °C (+212 °F) in still air.
the event of failures to either or both display proc-
1.2.5 Multifunction Display (MFD) essor units. The MPU is similar to the DPU except
that the MPU has expanded input/output capabili-
The MFD-85B Multifunction Display is a multicolor
ties for a second set of airplane sensors. The MPU
crt display unit that mounts in the instrument
also provides a high-temperature warning output
panel in the space normally provided for the
that can drive an external installer-supplied an-
weather radar indicator. Standard functions dis-
nunciator. This annunciator will illuminate if the
played by the unit include weather radar, pictorial
internal temperature of the MPU reaches +135 °C
navigation maps, and page data.
(+275 °F) in still air.
Additional functions are available when the multi-
function display is used with a compatible flight
Table 1-1. Equipment Covered.
EQUIPMENT COLLINS DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER UNITS REQUIRED
2-TUBE 3-TUBE 4-TUBE 5-TUBE

DPU-84 Display processor unit 622-9682-002 1 1 2 2
DSP-84 Display select panel 1622-9683-00X 1 1 2 2
EFD-84 Electronic flight display 2622-9681-0XX 2 2 4 4
MFD-85B Multifunction display 622-7876-01X - 1 - 1
MPU-84 Multifunction processor unit 622-9684-002 - 1 - 1
Notes
HIRF AND LIGHTNING: Non-HIRF and Lightning LRU versions can be installed in compliance with DO-160C section 20 HIRF
requirements and sections 22 and 23 Lightning requirements by following the notes provided on the LRU’s Outline and Mounting
Diagrams and the Interconnect Drawings. Those LRU versions identified as “HIRF versions” (HIRF qualified, certified, or compli-
ant) can be installed with reduced wiring effort compared to the non-HIRF and Lightning LRUs as noted on the interconnect
drawings.
1DSP-84: -0X1 for black; -0X2 for gray. -011 and -012 do not have WIND position on NAV DATA knob. -021 and -022 do not have
ARC WX or MAP WX position on format switch. HIRF and Lightning version units: -2XX. Panel lighting is 5 V or 28 V via connec-
tor jumpers.
2EFD-84: -0X1 for black; -0X2 for gray. HIRF and Lightning version units: -1XX. *Inclinometer lighting is 5 or 28 V dc.
EFD PART NUMBER COLOR BEZEL TRIM RING

622-9681-001 Black Octagonal
622-9681-002 Gray Octagonal
622-9681-011 Black Round
622-9681-012 Gray Round
622-9681-101 Black Octagonal, HIRF cover
622-9681-102 Gray Octagonal, HIRF cover

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered.
EQUIPMENT COLLINS DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER UNITS REQUIRED
2-TUBE 3-TUBE 4-TUBE 5-TUBE

*An inclinometer is a separate element which is mounted on the proper EFD. The available inclinometers are:
INCLINOMETER
PART NUMBER COLOR LIGHTING VOLTAGE EFD USED ON
634-2056-001 Black Unlighted -001, -011, -101
634-2056-002 Gray Unlighted -002, -012, -102
634-4320-001 Black 5 V (requires 0.23 A nominal) -001, -011, -101
634-4320-002 Gray 5 V (requires 0.23 A nominal) -002, -012, -102
634-4320-003 Black 28 V (requires 0.05 A nominal) -001, -011, -101
634-4320-004 Gray 28 V (requires 0.05 A nominal) -002, -012, -102
MFD (-01X) = -011 for black (with thermal switch) or -012 for gray (with thermal switch). Panel lighting for MFD is 5 V or 28 V as
determined by the interconnect.
Mounts are required for several EFIS equipments. The available mounts are listed below. The UMT-14/15 does not have a built-in
cooling fan. The UMT-14A/15A has a built-in ac cooling fan; the UMT-14B/15B has a built-in dc cooling fan.
TYPE COLLINS PART NUMBER USED WITH

UMT-14 622-6171-001 DPU-84
UMT-14A 622-6901-001 (optional) DPU-84
UMT-14B 622-7265-001 (optional) DPU-84
UMT-15 622-6172-001 MPU-84
UMT-15A 622-6902-001 (optional) MPU-84
UMT-15B 622-7266-001 (optional) MPU-84
IMT-300 622-4333-001 MFD-85B
IMT-85 622-6878-001 (optional) MFD-85B and WXP-85C/850A
The optional FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module checks the rpm of the dc blower motor used for forced-air cooling. A signal is sent to
control an external annunciator should the rpm drop below a certain level. Refer to EFIS-85/86 SIL 1-83 for additional instructions
about system forced-air cooling.

FMM-85 622-7154-001 Rotron dc blower pn 032105
FMM-85 622-7154-002 UMT-14B/15B dc blower motor
The optional ADA-85 Air Data Adapter converts Manchester digital bus air data with discrete valid to CSDB digital bus format.
One ADA-85 is required for each ADC-80( ) connected to EFIS.

ADA-85 634-2695-001 ADC-80( )

1.3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS b. Input Signals and Format (Table 1-5)

Refer to Table 1-2 for system specifications that AC ANALOG DC ANALOG
include environmental, physical size, weight,
mounting, cooling, and input power requirements. Roll angle ADF bearing
Table 1-5 provides input specifications and Pitch angle Radio altitude
Table 1-16 provides output specifications for the Heading Roll steering
EFIS-84. A summary of EFIS system interfaces is VOR/TCN bearing Pitch steering
listed below by associated equipment and by signal ADF bearing Localizer deviation
format. Glideslope deviation
AOA or F/S deviation
a. Associated Equipment
SERIAL DIGITAL DC DISCRETES
ASSOCIATED PRIMARY ADC data To/from
EQUIPMENT DATA FORMAT DME data Sensor valids
ALT-50/55, AL-101 Dc analog VLF/INS/RNV/LRN/ Sensor modes
ADC-80 & ADA-85 CSDB FMS/LNV data EFIS and I/O straps
ADC-82/85/86 CSDB DSP data FCS modes
VIR-30A AC sin/cos Cross-side data CAT II request
VIR-31 3-wire synchro WXR data Localizer tuned
VIR-32 CSDB MLS glidepath and DG mode
VIR-432 ARINC 429 LS azimuth Master warn reset
DME-40 ARINC 568 FCS modes and data Comparator reset
DME-42 CSDB Attitude/heading/ Marker beacons
DME-442 ARINC 429 LS acceleration
TCN-40/42 Analog, ARINC 568 ADF data
TCN-118 ARINC 582 (6-wire) VOR data
TCN-500 ARINC 429 LS TCN data
ADF-60A 3-wire synchro
c. Output Signals and Formats (Table 1-16)
ADF-60B Dc sin/cos
ADF-462 ARINC 429 LS AC ANALOG DC ANALOG
332D-11 3-wire synchro
MC-103/MCS-65 3-wire synchro Heading error Lateral deviation
FCS-65 Ac/dc analog, discretes, Course datum error Vertical deviation
CSDB SERIAL DATA DC DISCRETES
FCS-80 Ac/dc analog, discretes
APS-85 CSDB DSP control To/from
FMS-90, VLF, INS, LRN ARINC 429 HS, ARINC FMS waypoint load Back course
561, or CSDB output FCS data Modes/status/valids
RNV ARINC 429 LS Cross-side data Master warn
AHC-85 CSDB
Comparator warns
AHC-85E ARINC 429 HS
WXP-85C/D, Serial digital CAT II amber
WXP-850A/B CAT II green
ASI-80D/F, Dc analog High temperature warn
MSI-80C/D/E DH out
AOA or FAST/SLOW Dc analog RA test
MLS ARINC 429 LS
Excessive deviation
DF-301E Ac synchro
Excessive attitude

Table 1-2. EFIS System Specifications.
CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION
Maintenance requirement On condition

Applicable documents FAA TSO
DSP-84 C6c (Direction Instrument, Magnetic Gyro)
C52a (Flight Director)
DPU-84 C3b (Turn and Slip Instrument)
C4c (Bank and Pitch Instruments)
C6c (Direction Instrument, Magnetic Gyro)
C34c (ILS Glideslope Receiver)
C36c (ILS Localizer Receiver)
C40b (VOR Receiver)
EFD-84 C3b (Turn and Slip Instrument)
C40b (VOR Receiver)
MFD-85B C6c (Direction Instrument, Magnetic Gyro)
C63b (Weather Radar)
MPU-84 C3b (Turn and Slip Instrument)
C40b (VOR Receiver)
Environmental Listed below are the DO-160A categories to which the EFIS units are tested.
EFD-84, MFD-85B D1/A/PKS/XXXXXXAZAAA:
DSP-84 D1/B/PKS/XXXXXXAZAAA:
DPU-84, MPU-84 F2/A/MNO/XXXXXXAZAAA:
Note
DO-160C compliance —
See paragraph 1.4 HIRF AND LIGHTNING COMPLIANCE.
Temperature and Altitude Categories D1 and F2.
Temperature
Operating Category D1: –20 to +55 °C (–4 to +131°F)
Storage Category D1: –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185°F)
Operating Category F2: –55 to +70 °C (–67 to +158 °F)
Storage Category F2: –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185°F)

Altitude Category D1. Certified for installation in a nonpressurized but controlled temperature
location in an aircraft that is operated at altitudes up to 15 200 m (50 000 ft) msl.
Category F2. Certified for installation in a nonpressurized and noncontrolled tempera-
ture location in an aircraft that is operated at altitudes up to 16 800 m (55 000 ft) msl.
Humidity Category A. Certified for a Standard Humidity Environment.
Category B. Certified for a Severe Humidity Environment — Level I.

Shock
Operational Tested at 6 g peak
Crash safety Tested at 15 g (11 ms duration)
Vibration Categories PKS and MNO
Category P. Certified for panel, console, or vibration isolated equipment rack mounting in
a piston or turbine rotary wing aircraft.
Category K. Certified for panel, console, or vibration isolated equipment rack mounting
in a fixed-wing turbojet or turbofan aircraft.
Category S. Certified for panel, console, or vibration isolated equipment rack mounting in
a piston or turboprop fixed-wing aircraft.
Category M. Certified for fuselage or equipment rack mounting in a single or mul-

tiengine, piston or turboprop, fixed-wing aircraft less than 5700 kg (12500 lb). Also certi-
fied for equipment rack mounting in a multiengine piston or turboprop fixed-wing aircraft
over 5700 kg (12500 lb).
Category N. Certified for equipment rack mounting in a piston or turbine rotary wing
aircraft.
Category O. Certified for equipment rack mounting in a fixed-wing turbojet or turbofan

aircraft.
Explosionproofness Category X. Certified for installation in a location where the probability of an explosive
atmosphere existing is so low that it can be disregarded.
Waterproofness Category X. Certified for installation in locations not subject to falling water (including
condensation), rain water, or sprayed water.
Fluid susceptibility Category X. Certified for installation in locations not exposed to fluid contamination from
fuel, hydraulic fluids, oil, solvent, etc.
Sand and dust Category X. Certified for installation in a location not subject to blowing sand and dust.
Fungus resistance Category X. Fungus resistance test not performed.
Salt spray Category X. Salt spray test not performed.
Magnetic effect Category A. Unit causes a 1-degree deflection or an uncompensated compass at a distance
between 0.3 m (1.0 ft) and 1.0 m (3.3 ft).
Power input Category A. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems where primary power is from
constant frequency ac generators and the dc system is from a transformer-rectifier.
Category Z. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems not applicable to any other
category. For example, a dc system from a variable range generator where a small capac-
ity or no battery is floating on the dc bus.
Voltage spikes Category A. Certified for installation in systems where a high degree of voltage spike
protection is required.
Audio frequency susceptibility Category A. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems where primary power is from
constant frequency ac generators and the dc system is from a transformer-rectifier.

Electromagnetic compatibility Category A. Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation is de-
sired.
Physical
Weight (nominal)
DPU-84 6.4 kg (14.1 lb)
DPU-84 6.4 kg (14.1 lb) The UMT-14 weighs 0.50 kg (1.2 lb) or UMT-14A/14B weighs 0.95 kg
(2.1 lb).
MFD-85B 4.37 kg (9.6 lb). The mounting tray (IMT-300) weighs 0.18 kg (0.4 lb). The combined
mounting tray (IMT-85) weighs 0.27 kg (0.6 lb).
MPU-84 7.7 kg (17.0 lb) max. The UMT-15 weighs 0.68 kg (1.5 lb) or UMT-15A/15B weighs 1.18 kg
(2.6 lb).
DSP-84 1.31 kg (2.9 lb)
EFD-84 2.3 kg (5.0 lb)
Size (reference)
MFD-85B 159.5 mm (6.28 in) wide x 120.14 mm (4.730 in) high x 314.4 mm (12.38 in) deep
(measured from rear of bezel to rear of case)
MPU-84 3/4-ATR short, full height; 195.60 mm (7.70 in) wide x 194.8 mm (7.67 in) high x 372.1
mm (14.65 in) deep
DPU-84 1/2-ATR short, full height; 128.9 mm (5.08 in) wide x 194.8 mm (7.67 in) high x 372.1 mm
(14.65 in) deep
DSP-84 146.1 mm (5.75 in) wide x 47.62 mm (1.875 in) high x 203.2 mm (8.00 in) deep (measured
from rear of front panel to rear of case)
EFD-84 106.04 mm (4.175 in) wide x 106.04 mm (4.175 in) high x 259.08 mm (10.2 in) deep
(measured from rear of bezel to rear of case)
Mounting
DPU-84 Rack mounted using UMT-14 (CPN 622-6171-001), UMT-14A (CPN 622-6901-001), or
UMT-14B (CPN 622-7265-001).
DSP-84 Mount equipment on standard 9.52-mm (0.375-in) increment rail spaces on 136.27-mm
(5.365-in) centers per MS25212. Secure unit using two Dzus fasteners.
EFD-84 Front mounted using mooring plate (CPN 553-6590-004) or tap panel for 0.138-32 (#6-32)
UNC-2A mounting screws per ARINC Specification No 408A. For rear mounting use
mooring plate (CPN 553-6590-004).
MFD-85B Panel mounted using an IMT-300 Mounting Tray (CPN 622-4333-001). The IMT-300 is
equipped with self-locking nuts and requires four 0.138-32 UNC-2A (#6-32) flathead
screws.
MPU-84 Rack mounted using UMT-15 (CPN 622-6172-001), UMT-15A (CPN 622-6902-001), or
UMT-15B (CPN 622-7266-001)

Power input. All units are designed INPUT CURRENT (AMPERES)

to use +27.5 V dc (+4.7 V dc, –9.5 V UNIT TYPICAL MAX
dc). Steady-state current require-
ments are listed to the right. DPU-84 2.4 3.7
DSP-84 0.20 0.25
EFD (EADI) 2.0 3.6
EFD (EHSI) 1.5 2.7
ADA-85 0.10 0.09
MPU-84 3.2 4.9
MFD-85B 1.5 2.3
Note
The DPU supplies power to the EFD.
Controls with lighting require +5 or LIGHTING CURRENT (AMPERES)

+28 V dc supplied from a dimmer- 5-V DC 28-V DC
controlled lighting bus. UNIT DIMMER BUS DIMMER BUS
MFD-85B 0.92 0.21

DSP-84 0.82 0.28
EFD inclinometer 0.23 0.05
Cooling The EFD-84, DPU-84, MFD-85B, and MPU-84 require forced-air cooling. These units are
capable of operation for a short time at the elevated operating temperatures specified in
the environmental section of this specification without cooling air. However, operation at
these levels is not considered normal. Refer to the installation section for cooling re-
quirements and blower recommendations.

Table 1-5. EFIS-84 Input Specifications.
SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS
1.0 RADIO ALTITUDE
Radio Altitude, DPU(P2-6,5) Pro Line Radio Format: 2-wire dc, single polarity
ProLine MPU(P1-6,5)1 Altimeter Analog: –20 to +500 ft, V = 0.02 h + 0.4
H,L MPU(P3-6,5)2 (ALT-50/55) Analog: +500 ft and greater, V = 0.003 (h – 500) + 10.4
Input impedance: 100 kΩ (nom) balanced to gnd
Max common mode voltage: ±40 V dc
Max differential voltage: ±80 V dc
Max input voltage: <+28 V dc
Radio Altitude DPU(P2-6,5) Radio Altimeter Format: 2-wire dc, single polarity
ARINC MPU(P1-6,5)1 (AL-101) Analog: –20 to +480 ft, V = 0.02 h + 0.4
H,L MPU(P3-6,5)2 Analog: +480 to +2550 ft, V = 10 ln (h + 20) – 52.1461
Max input voltage: <+28 V dc
Input impedance: 100 kΩ (nom) balanced to gnd
Max differential voltage: ±80 V dc
Radio Alt Valid DPU(P2-124) Radio Altimeter Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-124)1 Radio alt valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-124)2 Radio alt invalid: 0 to +3.0 V dc
Input impedance (to gnd): NLT 10 kΩ
Radio Altitude Type, Go to 13.0 in this table for strapping information.

I/O Straps 7 and 8
2.0 AIR DATA SYSTEM INPUTS
Air Data Information DPU(P2-93,97) Air Data Computer Format: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus (CSDB)
A,B MPU(P1-93,97)1 (ADC-82/85/86 or Data transfer rate: 12.5 kb/s
MPU(P3-93,97)2 ADC-80 and Input load: NLT 12 kΩ
ADA-85) Words: See below.
WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/s

PRESSURE ALTITUDE/VALID, BARO ALTITUDE/VALID, STRUT SWITCH, TEST A0 20
VERTICAL SPEED/VALID, IAS/ VALID, ADS VALID, TEST A1 20
TAS/VALID, STRUT SWITCH, TEST A2 20
MACH (display)/VALID, MACH (true)/VALID, MACH DISPLAY, TEST A3 10
VERT SPEED BUG/VALID, IAS BUG/VALID, TEST A4 10
SAT/VALID, VMO/MMO/VALID, OVERSPEED WARN/TEST, TEST A6 10
TAT/VALID, PRESELECT ALTITUDE/VALID, TEST A7 10
ADC DIAGNOSTICS F3 10
ADC DIAGNOSTIC PAGE DATA F5 10

2.0 AIR DATA SYSTEM INPUTS (Cont)
Fast/Slow Deviation DPU(P2-109,144) MSI-80C/80D/ Format: 2-wire dc, polarity reversing

+Slow/Incr, MPU(P2-146,143)1 80E, ASI-80D/ Analog: 1.1 volt/dot
+Fast/Decr MPU(P2-157,147)2 80F, or angle of Zero: at 0 volt dc
attack system Max common mode voltage: ±17 V dc
Max diff current: ±34 mA
Input impedance: NLT 1 kΩ
Fast/Slow Valid DPU(P2-114) MSI-80C/80D/80E Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-114)1 or ASI-80D/80F Fast/slow valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-114)2 Fast/slow invalid: 0 to +3.0 V dc
Speed Devn I/O Go to 13.0 in this table for strapping information.

Straps 13 and 23
3.0 ANGLE OF ATTACK
AOA Data DPU(P2-109,144) Aircraft wiring Format: 2-wire dc, polarity reversing
+Decr, +Incr MPU(P2-146,143)1 Analog: 1.1 volt/dot or 1.1volt/10 knots too fast
MPU(P2-157,147)2 Zero: at 0 volt
Input resistance: NLT 1 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±17 V
AOA Valid DPU(P2-114) Aircraft wiring Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-114)1 Valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-114)2 Invalid: 0 to +3.0 V dc
Speed Devn I/O Go to 13.0 in this table for strapping information.

Straps 13 and 23
4.0 NAVIGATION RECEIVER INPUTS (VOR/ILS/MB/MLS MUST MEET THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS)
4.1 Analog Navigation Receivers
VOR Bearing DPU(P2-23,31,27) NAV Receiver (VIR- Format: 4-wire ac sin/cos

Sin,Cos,Com MPU(P1-23,31,27)1 30A/32) Voltage: 7.4 V ±2.4 V peak
MPU(P3-23,31,27)2 Scaling: 5° per dot
Input load: 100 kΩ minimum
Max diff voltage: ±60 V
Zero: at 180° bearing

4.1 Analog Navigation Receivers (Cont)
VOR Bearing, AC DPU(P2-23,31,27) NAV Receiver (VIR- Format: 3-wire synchro reference to ground
X, Y, Z, MPU(P1-23,31,27)1 31) Analog: X to Y = (11.8 Vrms) x (sine of the bearing angle)
MPU(P3-23,31,27)2 Zero: at bearing angle equal to 0°
Max differential voltage: ±60 V
Freq/phase: must be phase locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: The X to Y voltage is out of phase with a 400-Hz power
ccw bearing condition.
LOC Deviation DPU(P2-39,43) NAV Receiver (VIR- Format: 2-wire, dc, polarity reversing
+RT,+LT MPU(P1-39,43)1 30A/32) Analog: ±1 mA max, 75 mA/dot, 2 dots full-scale
MPU(P3-39,43)2 Zero: at beam center
Input resistance: 1 kΩ
Glideslope Deviation DPU(P2-56,60) Glideslope Rcvr Format: 2-wire, dc polarity reversing

+DN,+UP MPU(P1-56,60)1 (VIR-30A/32) Analog: ±1 mA max, 75 mA/dot, 2 dots full-scale
MPU(P3-56,60)2 Zero: at beam center
Input resistance: 1 kΩ
Localizer Mode DPU(P1-146) NAV Receiver (VIR- Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P2-41)1 30A/32) LOC mode: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P2-44)2 VOR mode: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
NAV Valid DPU(P2-157) NAV Receiver (VIR- Format: 1-wire discrete

(VOR/LOC) MPU(P1-157)1 30A/32) VOR/LOC valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-157)2 VOR/LOC invalid: 0 to +3.0 V dc
Glideslope Valid DPU(P2-138) Glideslope Rcvr Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-138)1 (VIR-30A/32) Glideslope valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-138)2 Glideslope invalid: 0 to +3.0 V dc
Marker Beacons: NAV Receiver Format: 1-wire with respect to ground

Outer Marker DPU(P2-47) (VIR-30A/32) Marker on: greater than 3.5 ±10% V dc or RMS
MPU(P1-47)1 Marker off: less than 3.5 ±10% V dc
MPU(P3-47)2 Frequency:
Inner, 3000 Hz
Middle Marker DPU(P2-52) Middle, 1300 Hz
MPU(P1-52)1 Outer, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-52)2 Input load: 200 kΩ minimum
Inner Marker DPU(P2-48)

MPU(P1-48)1
MPU(P3-48)2

ADDENDUM 4
TO
COLLINS EFIS-84 ELECTRONIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENT SYSTEM

INSTALLATION MANUAL
PART NUMBER 523-0775963-00311A, 3RD EDITION, DATED 30 MARCH 1995
Insert this addendum sheet facing page 1-12

of the General Information Section (523-0775964-003118)
This addendum revises the following analog input specifications in Table 1-3.
Locate the LOC Deviation +RT,+LT SIGNAL NAME in Table 1-3. Change the Analog entry In the SIGNAL
CHARACTERISTICS column for the LOC Deviation +RT,+LT SIGNAL NAME as follows:
Change from Analog: ±1 mA max; to Analog: ±850 µA max; (the remainder of this entry is unchanged).
Locate the Glideslope Deviation +DN,+UP SIGNAL NAME in Table 1-3. Change the Analog entry In the SIGNAL
CHARACTERISTICS column for the Glideslope Deviation +DN,+UP SIGNAL NAME as follows:
Change from Analog ±1 mA max; to Analog: ±850 µA max; (the remainder of this entry is unchanged).
(Changes are shown in bold type.)
Addendum 4
18 Feb 1999 Sheet 1 of 1
523-0775963-04311A (Facing Page 1-12)
4.1 Analog Navigation Receivers (Cont)
VOR Reference DPU(P2-9,10) Aircraft wiring Format: 2-wire, ac

H,C MPU(P1-9,10)1 Voltage: 26 V ac, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-9,10)2 Input resistance: NLT 20 kΩ
4.2 Digital Navigation Receivers
Navigation Data DPU(P2-72,76) Navigation Format: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus (CSDB)
A,B MPU(P1-72,76)1 Receiver Data transfer rate: 12.5 kBd/s
MPU(P3-72,76)2 (VIR-32/432) Input load: NLT 12 kΩ
Words: See below.
VOR BEARING/VALID, VOR FREQUENCY/VALID, 2/5 TUNE, MARKER BEACONS/ 21 10

SENSITIVITY, ROT MOD FILTER, TEST, SOURCE IDENT
GS DEVIATION/VALID, LOC DEVIATION/VALID, MARKER BEACON/ 22 10

SENSITIVITY, GLS/NO, TEST, SOURCE IDENT
NAV DIAGNOSTICS F3 10
NAV DIAGNOSTICS PAGE DATA F5 10
ILS Mode Ground DPU(P1-146) Navigation Receiver Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P2-41)1 (VIR-32/432) LOC mode ground: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P2-44)2 Not LOC mode: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Note: Required only if ILS bit is not present on label 22
Navigation Data DPU(P1-125,129) Navigation Format: 2-wire ARINC 429

A,B MPU(P2-86,87)1 Receiver Data transfer rate: 12.5 kBd/s
MPU(P2-91,94)2 (VIR-432) Input load: NLT 12 kΩ
Words: See below.
WORDS OCTAL LABEL UPDATE RATE/s
ILS/VOR FREQUENCY 034 20

LOCALIZER DEVIATION 173 20
GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION 174 20
BEARING 222 20
MAINTENANCE WORD 350 20
Nav I/O Straps info. Go to 13.0 in this table for strapping information.
16, 31, 32

4.3 Microwave Landing System
MLS Data DPU(P2-90,95) Microwave Landing Format: 2-wire, ARINC 429

A,B MPU(P1-94,95)1 System Data transfer rate: 12.5 kBd/s
MPU(P3-94,95)2 Words: See below.
4.3 Microwave Landing System (Cont)

MLS LOC DEVIATION 173 20
MLS GS DEVIATION 174 20
5.0 DME INPUT
DME Data A,B DPU(P1-154,158) DME Receiver Format: 2-wire, commercial standard digital bus (CSDB)
MPU(P2-45,49)1 (DME-42/442) Data transfer rate: 12.5 kBd/s
Words: See below.
FREQ/VALID, DISTANCE/VALID, SQUITTER/TRACK, DME HOLD, TEST, CHANNEL 25 10

IDENT
TIME-TO-STATION/VELOCITY/VALID, SQUITTER/TRACK, TEST, CHANNEL IDENT 26 5
DME IDENT VALID, 1ST CHAR/VALID, 2ND CHAR/VALID, 3RD CHAR/VALID, 4TH 27 5
CHAR/VALID, ANALOG AND 568 DATA, SQUITTER/TRACK, TEST, CHANNEL IDENT
DME DIAGNOSTICS F3 5
DME DIAGNOSTICS PAGE DATA F5 5
Note
Each label is sent at the given rate for each of the three DME channels. Labels F3 and F5 are sent at a rate of 5 times/second (not
per channel).
DME Data DME Receiver Format: 6-wire, ARINC 568 format

(DME-40/42) Words: DME DISTANCE
Update rate: 5 times/second minimum
Data H,L DPU(P2-24,28)

MPU(P1-24,28)1
MPU(P3-24,28)2
Clock H,L DPU(P2-32,36)

MPU(P1-32,36)1
MPU(P3-32,36)2
Sync H,L DPU(P2-40,44)

MPU(P1-40,44)1
MPU(P3-40,44)2

5.0 DME INPUT
DME Valid DPU(P1-143) DME Receiver Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P2-150)1 (DME-40/42) DME valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P2-154)2 DME invalid: +3 V dc or less
DME Hold DPU(P1-147) Ext Switch or CTL- Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P2-151)1 30/32 DME hold valid: 100 kΩ (open)
MPU(P2-155)2 DME hold invalid: 3 V dc (gnd)
DME Data DPU(P2-8,12) DME Receiver Format: 2-wire, ARINC 429

A,B MPU(P1-8,12)1 (DME-442) Data transfer rate: 12.5 kBd/s
Words: See below.

TIME TO GO (BCD) 002 5
GROUND SPEED (BCD) 012 5
FREQUENCY (BCD) 035 10
DISTANCE (BCD) *201 10
DISTANCE (BNR) 202 10
IDENT CHARACTERS **300 5
MAINTENANCE WORD ***350 5
*This word is not sent by the DME-442.
**Two words for each channel, each sent 5 times/second.
***5 times/second, not per channel.
6.0 ADF INPUT
6.1 Analog ADF
ADF Bearing, DC DPU(P2-14,18,22) Automatic Format: 3-wire dc resolver (sin/cos)

Sin, Cos, Com MPU(P1-14,18,22)1 Direction Finder Analog: 8 V dc max
MPU(P3-14,18,22)2 (ADF-60A/60B) Input load: 10 kΩ minimum
ADF Bearing, AC DPU(P2-14,18,22) Automatic Format: 3-wire reference to gnd

X,Y,Z MPU(P1-14,18,22)1 Direction Finder Analog: X to Y = (11.8 V rms) x (sine of bearing angle)
MPU(P3-14,18,22)2 (ADF-60A/60B) Zero: at bearing angle equal to 180 degrees
Max diff voltage: ±60 V dc
Freq/phase: must be phased locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X-to-Y voltage shall be out of phase with the 400-Hz
power ccw bearing condition.
ADF Valid DPU(P1-90) Automatic Format: 1-wire reference to gnd

MPU(P1-133)1 Direction Finder ADF valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-133)2 (ADF-60A/60B) ADF invalid: +3.0 V dc or less
Input load: NLT 10 kΩ

6.1 Analog ADF
ADF Reference H,C DPU(P2-41,42) ADF Receiver Format: 2-wire ac Voltage: 26 V ac Freq: 400 Hz Input resis-
MPU(P1-41,42)1 Sensor tance: 20 kΩ minimum
MPU(P3-41,42)2 Max common mode voltage: ±100 V max
Max diff voltage: ±200 V max
6.2 Digital ADF
ADF Data A,B DPU(P2-101,98) Automatic Format: 2-wire, ARINC 429

MPU(P1-101,116)1 Direction Finder Data transfer rate: 12.5 kBd/s
MPU(P3-101,116)2 (ADF-62/462) Words: See below.

ADF FREQUENCY/VALID 032 5
ADF BEARING/VALID 162 20
ADF MAINTENANCE WORD 350 5
ADF I/O Straps 15 Go to 13.0 in this table for strapping information.

and 34
7.0 FLIGHT DIRECTOR/AUTOPILOT
7.1 Analog Flight Director/Autopilot
FD Valid DPU(P2-143) Flight Control Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-143)1 System (FCS-80, FD valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-143)2 FCS-A,B) FD invalid: open
FD In View Bias DPU(P2-137) Flight Control Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-137)1 System FD in view bias: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-137)2 (FCS-80, FCS-A/B) FD out of view: open
Pitch Command DPU(P2-1,2) Flight Control Format: 2-wire dc, polarity reversing
+DN,+UP MPU(P1-1,2)1 System Signal source analog:
MPU(P3-1,2)2 FCS-80: 150 mV/deg
FCS-65: 150 mV/deg
FCS-A: 120 mV/deg
FCS-B: 50 mV/deg
Zero: at 0 volt

7.1 Analog Flight Director/Autopilot
Roll Command DPU(P2-37,38) Flight Control Format: 2-wire dc, polarity reversing
+LT,+RT MPU(P1-37,38)1 System Signal source analog:
MPU(P3-37,38)2 FCS-80: 150 mV/deg
FCS-65: 150 mV/deg
FCS-A: 66 mV/deg
FCS-B: 50 mV/deg
Zero: at 0 volt
FCS Reference DPU(P2-9,10) Flight Control Format: 2-wire ac

H,C MPU(P1-9,10)1 System Voltage: 26 V ac
MPU(P3-9,10)2 Freq: 400 Hz
Input resistance: 20 kΩ minimum
Mode Annunciators See below. Flight Control Format: 1-wire with respect to ground for each
System (FCS-80, Annunciator on: gnd
65, FCS-A) Annunciator off: open
ANNUN NO FUNCTION LEGEND COLOR DSP PIN FCS-80 PIN
1 Heading select HDG Green J1-10 FGC P3-45

2 Lateral arm Note 1 White J1-22 FGC P3-37
3 Lateral capture Note 1 Green J1-23 FGC P3-49
4 Approach ---- ---- J1-11 FGC P3-25
5 Dead reckon DR White J1-24 FGC P3-33
6 YD disconn gnd YD Note 4 J1-12 APP P1-39
7 Roll hold ROL Green J1-25 APC P2-50
7 HDG hold ROL Green J1-25 APC P2-42
8 Glideslope arm Note 1 White J1-13 FGC P2-41
9 Glideslope capture Note 1 Green J1-16 FGC P2-53
10 VNAV arm VNV White J1-15 FGC P2-57
11 VNAV capture VNV Green J1-14 FGC P2-45
12 Altitude preselect Note 6 Note 6 J1-17 Note 6
13 Altitude hold ALT Green J1-18 FGC P2-33
14 Mach hold MACH Green J1-19 FGC P2-25
15 IAS hold IAS Green J1-20 FGC P2-49
16 Vert speed hold VS Green J1-21 FGC P2-17
17 Pitch hold PIT Green J1-9 FGC P2-4
18 Go around GA,Note 2 Green J1-8 FGC P2-13
19 AP transfer Note 5 Note 5 J1-7 APC P2-15
20 AP disconnect (flash) Note 5 Note 5 J1-5 APP P2-10
21 AP disconnect gnd Note 5 Note 5 J1-4 APP P1-18
22 Mistrim TRIM,Note 3 Yellow J1-3 APC P3-23
23 Altitude preselect Note 6 Note 6 J1-2 Note 6
24 Annunciator test ---- Note 7 J1-1 External sw to gnd
(EFIS test)

7.1 Analog Flight Director/Autopilot (Cont)
Note 1. Lateral arm and capture annunciations reflect the active sensor selection on the EHSI per input strapping and DCP sensor
selection.
Note 2. GA appears in the active vertical and lateral mode lines. If a new lateral mode is selected (ie, HDG) that mode replaces GA
in the lateral line. If a new vertical mode is selected, both the vertical and lateral lines are changed.
Note 3. The APC P3-23 is the elevator mistrim annunciator; P2-43 is the aileron mistrim annunciator. These may be wired together
so either causes the TRIM annunciation.
Note 4. The yaw damper status is annunciated as follows:
YD DISCONNECT
GROUND LEGEND COLOR
Open YD Green
Gnd YD *Yellow flashing
*Flashes for five seconds after a disconnect, then goes blank.
Note 5. The three autopilot modes (straps 19, 20, 21) will be annunciated as follows:
Dual FCS-80/FCS-A
(ANNUN NO. 21) (ANNUN NO. 20) (ANNUN NO. 19)

AP DISCONN GND AP DISC (FLASH) AP TRANSFER LEGEND COLOR
Open Open Open AP/L Green
Open Open Gnd AP/R Green
Gnd Gnd Open *AP/L Red
Gnd Gnd Gnd *AP/R Red
Gnd Open Open AP/L White
Gnd Open Gnd AP/R White
Open Gnd Open None Open
Gnd Gnd None
Single FCS-80/FCS-A
AP DISCONN GND AP DISC (FLASH) LEGEND COLOR

Open Open AP Green
Gnd Gnd *AP Red
Gnd Open None
Open Gnd None
*The flashing occurs after a disconnect as controlled by the AP disconnect logic of the FGC-80 until canceled by
flight crew.

Note 6. The three altitude preselect modes (arm, capture, and track) are annunciated according to the following table:
ANNUNCIATOR FGC
12 23 PIN NO MODE LEGEND COLOR
Open Open None Open
Gnd P1-52 Track ALTS Green
Gnd Open P1-60 Arm ALTS White
Gnd Gnd P1-56 Capture ALTS CAP Green
P1-56 must be diode isolated from P1-52 and P1-60.
Note 7. In a particular installation, any unused annunciator inputs should be grounded through the annunciator test switch so that
the EFIS system can detect failed inputs. With these conditions met and with the TEST switch applying a ground to strap
24, a yellow PASS or FAIL annunciation is displayed.
Mode Annunciators See below. Flight Control Sys- Format: 1-wire with respect to ground
tem (FCS-65) Annunciator on: gnd
Annunciator off: open
ANNUN NO FUNCTION DSP PIN GROUND TO

18 Dual AP J1-8 Enable
19 AP transfer J1-7 Enable, Note 1
20 DR J1-5 Delete
21 Sync J1-4 Delete
22 Trim (all) J1-3 Delete
23 YD annunciator J1-2 Delete
24 AP annunciator J1-1 Delete
Dual FCS-65 AP Annunciations
DIGITAL BUS BIT STATUS ANNUNCIATION

AP ENGAGE AP DISENG AP XFER (Note 1) LEGEND COLOR
On Off Off AP/L Green, Note 2
On Off On AP/R Green, Note 2
On On Off AP/L Yellow
On On On AP/R Yellow
Off Off Off AP/L White
Off Off On AP/R White
Off On On/Off Blank
Single FCS-65 AP Annunciations

AP ENGAGE AP DISENG LEGEND COLOR
On Off AP Green, Note 2
On On AP Yellow
Off Off Blank
Off On Blank

FCS-65 Yaw Damper Annunciations

YD ENGAGE YD DISENG LEGEND COLOR
On Off YD Green, Note 2
On On YD Yellow
Off Off Blank Off
On Blank
Note 1. AP XFER is a function of a ground supplied from an external strap or switch.
Note 2. The green AP/YD annunciation state is inhibited after both the AP ENG and AP DISENG bits are on simultaneously. If this
occurrence is for more than 1 second, an internal EFIS flashing function is activated and causes the AP/YD annunciation to
flash yellow at a nominal 1-Hz rate. If both the AP ENG and AP DISENG bits go to the off state or if following the EFIS
flashing function, the AP/YD DISENG bit turns off for more than 2 seconds, the static truth tables apply.
This provides a continuous flashing of the EFIS annunciation for an automatic (fault induced) AP/YD disconnect. It also
provides proper AP/YD disconnect annunciation during and after a manual SYNC operation.
Flight Control Data Primary Bus FCS-65 Format: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus (CSDB) Input
A,B DPU(P2-15, 19) resistance: NLT 12 kΩ
MPU(P3-15,19)2
Secondary Bus
DPU(P1-3,4)
MPU(P1-3,4)1
MPU(P3-3,4)2

GLIDESLOPE EXT/CAP/ARM, NAV-1 CAP/ARM, SPD HOLD, ALT PRESELECT AA 10
HOLD/CAP/ARM, APP CAP/ARM, REPORT CODE BAD, ALT HOLD, IAS HOLD, MACH
HOLD, TST, VS, CLI, GO AROUND PITCH/ROLL, PITCH, ROLL, VNAV CAP/ARM, BC, DR,
HEADING SELECTED/HOLD, TRB, XFR, DESCENT, HLF, NAV-2 CAP/ARM, RADIO
COUPLE, OUT-OF-TRIM RUD/AIL/ELE, DISCONNECT YD/AP, TRIM BAD, NAC TST, V-
BAR IN VIEW, STR VLD
HDG BUG SYNC, R-STR IN VIEW, P-STR IN VIEW, AIRCRAFT WEIGHT HVY/MED/LT, AB 10
LEVEL, REVERSE, GA, YD ENGAGE, AP ENGAGE, SOFTRIDE, DESCENT, TRIM RUN,
AP FAIL
7.2 Digital Flight Director/Autopilot
Flight Control Data Primary Bus APS-85( ) Format: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus (CSDB) Input
A,B DPU(P2-15,19) resistance: NLT 12 kΩ
MPU(P3-15,19)2
Secondary Bus
DPU(P2-3,4)
MPU(P1-3,4)1
MPU(P3-3,4)2

7.2 Digital Flight Director/Autopilot

GLIDESLOPE EXT/CAP/ARM, NAV-1 CAP/ARM, SPD HOLD, ALT PRESELECT AA 10
HOLD/CAP/ARM, APP CAP/ARM, REPORT CODE BAD, ALT HOLD, IAS HOLD, MACH-
HOLD, TST, VS, CLI, GO AROUND PITCH/HOLD, PITCH, ROLL, VNAV CAP/ARM, BC,
DR, HEADING SELECTED/HOLD, TRB, XFR, DESCENT, HLF, NAV-2 CAP/ARM, RADIO
COUPLE, OUT-OF-TRIM RUD/AIL/ELE, DISCONNECT YD/AP, TRIM BAD, NAC TST, V-
BAR IN VIEW, STR VLD
HDG BUG, R-STR IN VIEW, P-STR IN VIEW, AIRCRAFT WEIGHT HVY/MED/LIT AB 10
ALTITUDE REF/VALID, PITCH STEERING VALID, ROLL STEERING VALID 2A 10
CRT ASCII MESSAGES 70 20
VERT SPEED REF/VS REF DISPLAY CMD, IAS REF/IAS REF DISPLAY CMD, MACH 72 10
REF/MACH REF DISPLAY CMD, VS BUG/IAS BUG
Mode Annunciators See below. APS-85( ) Format: 1-wire with respect to ground
Annunciator ON: gnd
Annunciator OFF: open
ANNUN NO FUNCTION DSP PIN GROUND TO
16 Single autopilot J1-21 Enable

17 Red AP disengage J1-9 Enable
18 Airspeed advisories J1-8 Delete
19 Sync annun J1-7 Delete
20 Yaw damper ENG/DIS J1-5 Delete
21 Autopilot ENG/DIS J1-4 Delete
22 Aileron mistrim annun J1-3 Delete
23 Elevator mistrim annun J1-2 Delete
24 Rudder mistrim annun J1-1 Delete
Dual APS-85( ) AP Annunciations

AP ENGAGE AP DISENG AP XFER LEGEND COLOR
On Off Off AP/L Green
On Off On AP/R Green
Off On Off AP/L *
Off On On AP/R *
Off Off Off AP/L White
Off Off On AP/R White
On On On/Off Blank

7.2 Digital Flight Director/Autopilot (Cont)
Single APS-85( ) AP Annunciations

AP ENGAGE AP DISENG LEGEND COLOR
On Off AP Green
Off On AP *
On On Blank Off
Off Blank
APS-85( ) Yaw Damper Annunciations

YD ENGAGE YD DISENG LEGEND COLOR
On Off YD Green
Off On YD Yellow
On On Blank Off
Off Blank
*Flashing yellow or red, dependent on DCP/DSP strapping.
Flight Control system I/O straps 1, 2, and 3 (AP type and FD Refer to 13.0 in this table for strapping information.
dual/single); strap 33 (FCS CSDB bus select primary/secondary)
8.0 ATTITUDE/HEADING INPUT
8.1 Analog Attitude/Heading
8.1.1 Attitude
Pitch Data DPU(P2-88,84,92) Vertical Gyro Format: 3-wire synchro

X,Y,Z MPU(P1-88,84,92)1 (332D-11) Analog: X to Y = (11.8 V rms) x (sine of pitch angle)
MPU(P3-88,84,92)2 Zero: at zero pitch angle
Freq/phase: must be phase locked to 400-Hz power.
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with 400-Hz power
when in a noseup condition.

8.1.1 Attitude (Cont)
Roll Data DPU(P2-89,85,81) Vertical Gyro Format: 3-wire synchro

X,Y,Z MPU(P1-89,85,81)1 (332D-11) Analog: X to Y = (11.8 V rms) x (sine of roll angle)
MPU(P3-89,85,81)2 Zero: at zero roll angle
when in a right bank.
Attitude Reference DPU(P2-9,10) Aircraft supplied Format: 2-wire ac

MPU(P3-9,10)2 Input load: 10 kΩ minimum
Attitude Valid DPU(P2-117) Vertical Gyro Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-117)1 (332D-11) Attitude valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-117)2 Attitude invalid: +3.0 V dc or less
8.1.2 Heading
Heading Data DPU(P2-96,104,100) Magnetic Compass Format: 3-wire synchro

X,Y,Z MPU(P1-96,104,100)1 (MC-103/MCS-65) Analog: +11.8 V rms max
MPU(P3-96,104,100)2 Zero: at zero heading angle
when in a right heading.
Heading Reference DPU(P2-9,10) Aircraft wiring Format: 2-wire, ac

MPU(P3-9,10)2 Load: NLT 10 kΩ
Heading Valid DPU(P2-118) Magnetic Compass Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-118)1 (MC-103) Heading valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-118)2 Heading invalid: 0 to +3.5 V dc
DG Mode DPU(P2-57) Magnetic Compass Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-123)1 (MC-103/MCS-65) DG mode: +28 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-123)2 Slaved: 0 to +3.0 V dc

8.2 Digital Attitude/Heading
Attitude/Heading DPU(P2-7,11) Attitude Heading Format: 2-wire, commercial standard digital bus (CSDB)
A,B MPU(P1-7,11) System (AHS-85) Data transfer rate: 50 kBd/s
MPU(P3-7,11) Words: See below.

PITCH RATE (body axis), ROLL RATE (body axis), YAW RATE (body axis), DATA VALID, 40 52
DG MODE, STRUT SWITCH, TEST, SOURCE IDENT
LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION (body axis), LATERAL ACCELERATION (body axis), 41 52

NORMAL ACCELERATION (body axis), DATA VALID, DG MODE, STRUT SWITCH, TEST,
SOURCE IDENT
ALONG HDG ACCELERATIONS, CROSS HDG ACCELERATIONS, VERTICAL ACCEL- 42 5.2

ERATIONS, DATA VALID, DG MODE, STRUT SWITCH, TEST, SOURCE IDENT
PITCH ATTITUDE, ROLL ATTITUDE, ATTITUDE VALID, MAGNETIC HEADING, 43 52

HEADING VALID, REV MODE, TEST, SOURCE IDENT
MAGNETIC HEADING, ATTITUDE VALID, HEADING VALID, LATITUDE, STIMULUS- 47 5.2

MODE CYCLE IDENT, MODE 1, DEGREES DIFF COMPASS CARD SLAVING, TEST,
SOURCE IDENT
AHRS DIAGNOSTICS F3 5.2
AHRS DIAGNOSTICS PAGE DATA F5 5.2
AHS ARINC 429 DPU(P1-134,130) Attitude Heading Format: 2-wire, ARINC 429
Bus 1 A,B MPU(P2-25,29)1 System (IRS/INS) Data transfer rate: 100 kBd/s
COLLINS
WORDS OCTAL LABEL AHRS RATE/s
TRUE HEADING *314 52
MAGNETIC HEADING 320 52
PITCH ANGLE 324 52
ROLL ANGLE 325 52
BODY LONGIT ACCEL 331 52
BODY LATERAL ACCEL 332 52
BODY NORMAL ACCEL 333 52
MAINTENANCE WORD 350 5.2
*Not sent by all AHRS/IRS/INS systems.
AHS ARINC 429 DPU(P2-66,78) Attitude Heading Format: ARINC 429

Bus 2 A,B MPU(P1-106,139)1 System (IRS/INS) Data transfer rate: 100 kBd/s
MPU(P3-106,139)2 Words: Same as ARINC 429 Bus 1.
Attitude/Heading I/O Straps 14, 24, 35, and Go to 13.0 of this table for strapping information.
38 (attitude/heading type)

9.0 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
The vertical navigation must be compatible with the selected lateral navigation or part of the same data.
Vertical Navigation Go to 13.0 of this table for strapping information.

I/O Strap 18 (VNAV
source)
10.0 LONG RANGE NAVIGATION INPUT
LNV Data FMS-90, VLF/ Format: 6-wire, ARINC 561 format

Omega or INS Words: See below.
Data H,L DPU(P2-24,28) (Note: This input cannot be FMS #3. Strap 36 applies to ARINC
MPU(P1-24,28)1 429 bus input only.)
MPU(P3-24,28)2

MPU(P1-32,36)1
MPU(P3-32,36)2

MPU(P1-40,44)1
MPU(P3-40,44)2

DISTANCE *001 4
TIME TO GO *002 4
CROSSTRACK DISTANCE *003 4
GROUNDSPEED *012 4
WIND VELOCITY *015 1/(10 s)
WIND DIRECTION *016 1/(10 s)
MAGNETIC VARIATION 031 1/(10 s)
STATUS WORD 110 4
BEARING TO WAYPOINT 115 4
VERTICAL DEVIATION 117 4
BANK COMMAND 121 10
DISPLAY DEVIATION 155 4
DISTANCE TO NTH WAYPOINT 156 1/(10 s)
DESIRED COURSE TO NTH WAYPOINT 157 **4
*ARINC 561 definition

**4/s to the TO waypoint, 1/(10 s) for the rest.
LNV ARINC 429 DPU(P1-142,138) LNV ARINC 429 Format: ARINC 429 high speed or low speed
Bus 1 A,B MPU(P2-17,21)1 source Data transfer rate: 100 kBd/s or 12.5 kBd/s
Note: The DPU and MPU strap 21 selects between high- or low-
speed input rates.

10.0 LONG RANGE NAVIGATION INPUT (Cont)

DATA RECORD HEADER 074 Note 1
ACTIVE WPT TO/FROM DATA 075 Note 2
CHECKSUM 113 Note 3
DESIRED TRACK 114 16
WAYPOINT BEARING 115 16
CROSSTRACK DISTANCE 116 16
VERTICAL DEVIATION 117 16
ROLL COMMAND 121 10
PITCH COMMAND 122 10
GREENWICH MEAN TIME 125 10
MAGNETIC VARIATION 147 1
LOCALIZER DEVIATION 173 25
GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION 174 25
DISTANCE TO GO 251 5
TIME TO GO 252 5
STATUS WORD 275 3
STATION DECL, TYPE AND CLASS 300 Note 5
MESSAGE CHARACTERS 7-9 301 Note 4
MESSAGE LENGTH, TYPE AND NUMBER 303 Note 3
NAV/WPT/ARPT LATITUDE 306 Note 3
NAV/WPT/ARPT LONGITUDE 307 Note 3
PRESENT POSITION LATITUDE 310 5
PRESENT POSITION LONGITUDE 311 5
GROUNDSPEED 312 20
TRACK ANGLE 313 20
TRUE HEADING 314 20
WIND SPEED 315 10
WIND DIRECTION 316 20
DRIFT ANGLE 321 20
ESTIMATED TIME TO DESTINATION 352 1
MANUFACTURERS IDENT CODE 371 1
Note 1. Sent once at the beginning of the waypoint data transfer records sequence.
Note 2. Can be sent 10 times/second or with label 074.
Note 3. Each label in a record is sent 10 times per second.
Note 4. Sent only if required by the particular waypoint/navaid.
Note 5. Sent only for navaid records.
Note 6. When approach bit is set in label 275, EFIS changes lateral scale from 7.5 nautical miles full scale to 1.25 nautical miles full
scale.

10.0 LONG RANGE NAVIGATION INPUT (Cont)
LNV ARINC 429 DPU(P1-122,126) LNV ARINC 429 Format: ARINC 429 high speed or low speed
Bus 2 A,B MPU(P2-33,37)1 source Data transfer rate: 100 kBd/s or 12.5 kBd/s
MPU(P2-36,40)2 Words: Same as bus 1 above.
Remote Data MFD(P1-17,25)1 FMS-90, VLF/ Format: 2-wire, RS-422A serial bus
H,L MFD(P1-32,40)2 Omega or INS Data rate: 22 500 baud ±17
(Optional) MFD(P1-18,11) Data: alphanumeric character set
(OPT) Input resistance: 120 W nominal
LNV I/O Straps 4, 5, Go to 13.0 in this table for strapping information.

6, 16, 31, and 32
(LNV annun/NAV
data type)
11.0 TACAN INPUTS
11.1 Analog TACAN
Relative Bearing DPU(P2-23,27,31) TACAN Nav Format: 3-wire synchro

X, Y, Z MPU(P1-23,27,31)1 System Analog: X to Y = (11.8 V rms) x (sine of heading angle)
MPU(P3-23,27,31)2 (BRG-40/42) Zero: at zero bearing
when in a right heading deviation condition.
Distance Data DME Receiver Format: 6-wire, ARINC 568 format

(DME-40/42) Update rate: 5 times/s minimum
Word: DME DISTANCE

MPU(P1-24,28)1
MPU(P3-24,28)2

MPU(P1-32,36)1
MPU(P3-32,36)2

MPU(P1-40-44)1
MPU(P3-40,44)2
Heading Reference DPU(P2-9,10) Aircraft wiring Format: 2-wire ac

MPU(P3-9,10)2 Load: NLT 20 kΩ

11.1 Analog TACAN (Cont)
TACAN Valid DPU(P2-157) (BRG-40/42) Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-157)1 HSI WARN valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-157)2 HSI WARN invalid: 0 to +3.5 V dc
11.2 Digital TACAN
Digital TCN TCN-118 Format: 6-wire, ARINC 582 format

Words: See below.

MPU(P1-24,28)1
MPU(P3-24,28)2
Clk H,L DPU(P2-32,36)

MPU(P1-32,36)1
MPU(P3-32,36)2

MPU(P1-40,44)1
MPU(P3-40,44)2

TIME TO STATION (TTG) 002 10
STORED CONTROL WORD 141 10
DISTANCE 201 10
BEARING 222 10
RANGE RATE (VELOCITY) 362 10
TACAN 429 Bus DPU(P1-125,129) TCN-500 Format: 2-wire, ARINC 429 low speed
A,B MPU(P2-86,87) Data rate: 12.5 kBd/s
or
DPU(P1-142,138)
MPU(P2-17,21)1
MPU(P2-20,24)2

TIME TO GO 002 10
DISTANCE 201 10
BEARING 222 10
STORED CONTROL WORD 270 10
VELOCITY 362 10

11.2 Digital TACAN (Cont)
Area Navigation DPU(P1-122,126) RNV ARINC 429 Format: 2-wire, ARINC 429 low speed
A,B MPU(P2-33,37)1 Source Data rate: 12.5 kBd/s

DISTANCE 202 10
BEARING 222 10
GROUNDSPEED 251 10
TIME TO GO 252 10
12.0 HOVER MODE INPUTS (RESERVED)
Hover Vx DPU(P2-45,46) Doppler NAV Format: 2-wire dc analog

H,L MPU(P1-45,46)1 Analog: To be supplied (TBS)
(Reserved) MPU(P3-45,46)2 Zero: TBS
Input resistance: TBS
Max common mode voltage: TBS
Max differential current: TBS
Hover Vy DPU(P2-150, 154) Doppler NAV Format: 2-wire dc analog

H,L MPU(P1-150,154)1 Analog: TBS
(Reserved) MPU(P3-150,154)2 Zero: TBS
Input resistance: TBS
Max common mode voltage: TBS
Max differential current: TBS
Hover Vx Valid DPU(P2-149) Doppler NAV Format: 1-wire discrete

(Reserved) MPU(P1-149)1 Hover valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-149)2 Hover invalid: +3 V dc or less
Hover Vy Valid DPU(P2-153) Doppler NAV Format: 1-wire discrete

(Reserved) MPU(P1-153)1 Hover valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-153)2 Hover invalid: +3 V dc or less

STRAP INPUTS UNIT PIN NUMBER I/O STRAP CHARACTERISTICS

NUMBER
13.0 DPU-84/MPU-84 STRAPPING DEFINITIONS
FD DUAL/
SINGLE AND
AUTOPILOT INTERFACE
TYPE DCP DISCRETES TYPE/VENDOR
Autopilot Type DPU(P2-61,115,121) 1 2 3
MPU(P2-1,5,9)1 0 0 0 *Dual, FCS-80 All annunciators Analog/Collins
MPU(P2-4,8,12)2 1 0 0 Dual, FCS-A All annunciators Analog/Sperry
0 1 0 Both, FCS-B No annunciators Analog/univ
1 1 0 Both, APS-65 Inhibits Digital/Collins
0 0 1 Both, APS-65 Inhibits Analog/Collins
1 0 1 *Single, FCS-80 All annunciators Analog/Collins
0 1 1 Single, FCS-A None Analog/Sperry
1 1 1 Both, APS-85 Inhibits Digital/Collins
*One of these strap combinations should be used for APS-65
installations without an annunciator bus.
LNV Port Ann DPU(P2-

123,128,132) 4 5 6
MPU(P2-13,53,57)1 0 0 0 Reserved
MPU(P2-16,56,60)2 1 0 0 Reserved
0 1 0 INS# annunciation
1 1 0 LNV# annunciation
0 0 1 VLF# annunciation
1 0 1 RNV# annunciation
0 1 1 LRN# annunciation
1 1 1 FMS# annunciation
Annunciation for # is 1 for left, 2 for right, and 3 for secondary
(see strap 36).
Radio Alt Type DPU(P2-133,134) 7 8

MPU(P2-61,65)1 0 0 ALT-50 (0 to 2000 feet)
MPU(P2-64,68)2 1 0 ALT-55 (0 to 2500 feet)
0 1 AL-101 (0 to 2500 feet)
1 1 None
X-Side Data Flag DPU(P2-135) 9

Display MPU(P2-69)1 0 2-tube system (inhibits flag)
MPU(P2-72)2 1 3-, 4-, and 5-tube system (normal)
Sky Display Select DPU(P2-136) 10

MPU(P2-73)1 0 Racetrack
MPU(P2-76)2 1 Full sky
DPU Side DPU(P2-140) 11 DPU use only

0 Left DPU (left side I/O annunciated)
1 Right DPU (right side I/O annunciated)
Note
0 = ground
1 = open


NUMBER
13.0 DPU-84/MPU-84 STRAPPING DEFINITIONS (Cont)
Comparator Reset DPU(P2-141) 12

MPU(P2-81) 0 Cancel/inhibit (gnd to reset or inhibit)
MPU(P2-82)2 1 Enable
Speed Deviation Type DPU(P2-142,159) 13 23

Select MPU(P2-85,126)1 0 0 Inhibit scale
MPU(P2-88,127)2 0 1 Reserved
1 0 AOA enabled and annunciated
1 1 Analog fast/slow enabled and annunciated
Attitude/Heading DPU 14 24 35 38 *ATT SENSOR/HDG SENSOR **ANNUNCIATION

(P2-145,116,21,112) 0 0 0 0 Gyro/Gyro ATT# HDG#
MPU(P2-89,130 1 0 0 0 AHRS/Gyro ATT# HDG3
P1-21,112)1 0 1 0 0 AHRS/Gyro ATT# HDG4
MPU(P2-92,131, 1 1 0 0 AHRS/429 Bus 2 ATT# HDG3
P3-21,112)2 0 0 1 0 429 Bus 1/Gyro ATT# HDG4
1 0 1 0 AHRS/429 Bus 2 ATT# HDG4
0 1 1 0 429 Bus 2/429 Bus 2 ATT4 HDG4
1 1 1 0 429 Bus 2/429 Bus 2 ATT3 HDG3
0 0 0 1 429 Bus 1/Gyro ATT# HDG3
1 0 0 1 Gyro/Gyro ATT3 HDG3
0 1 0 1 AHRS/AHRS ATT4 HDG4
1 1 0 1 AHRS/429 Bus 1 ATT4 HDG#
0 0 1 1 AHRS/AHRS ATT3 HDG3
1 0 1 1 AHRS/429 Bus 1 ATT3 HDG#
0 1 1 1 429 Bus 1/429 Bus 1 ATT# HDG#
1 1 1 1 AHRS/AHRS ATT# HDG#
*429 Bus 1 is 429 primary, 429 Bus 2 is 429 secondary.
**Annunciation for # is 1 for left side and 2 for right side. Head-
ing annunciation is DG, MAG, TRU, or HDG depending on
heading type.
ADF Type DPU(P2-146,17) 15 34

MPU(P2-93,P1-17)1 0 0 None
MPU(P2-96,P3-17)2 1 0 ARINC 429 digital 2-wire
0 1 Dc bearing (sin/cos)
1 1 Ac bearing (3-wire synchro)
NAV Bus Type Select DPU(P2-147,33,34) 16 31 32 VOR/DME TACAN PORT FMS

MPU(P2-97, 0 0 0 ANA/6-wire LS429 VOR HS/LS429
P1-33,34)1 0 0 1 429/429 HS/LS429 FMS 6-wire
MPU(P2-100, 0 1 0 429/429 ANA/6-wire FMS HS/LS429
P3-33,34)2 0 1 1 429/429 6-wire FMS HS/LS429
1 0 0 CSDB/CSDB 6-wire FMS HS/LS429
1 0 1 CSDB/CSDB LS429 VOR 6-wire
1 1 0 CSDB/CSDB ANA/6-wire FMS HS/LS429
1 1 1 CSDB/CSDB LS429 VOR HS/LS429
Note
0 = ground
1 = open


NUMBER
Heading DPU(P2-148) 17
MPU(P2-102)1 0 True heading sensor
MPU(P2-103)2 1 Mag heading sensor
VNAV Inhibit DPU(P2-151) 18

MPU(P2-106)1 0 Off, inhibit VNAV
MPU(P2-107)2 1 On, enable VNAV
Reversionary Display DPU(P2-152) 19

MPU(P2-110)1 0 No change in EADI format
MPU(P2-111)2 1 Composite format
Command Bars DPU(P2-155) 20

MPU(P2-114)1 0 Crosspointer
MPU(P2-115)2 1 V-bars
LRN Bus Speed DPU(P2-156) 21

MPU(P2-118)1 0 Low-speed ARINC 429
MPU(P2-119)2 1 High-speed ARINC 429
Master Warn Reset DPU(P2-158) 22

MPU(P2-122)1 0 Cancel/inhibit (gnd to reset or inhibit)
MPU(P2-142)2 1 Normal
Speed Deviation Type 23 See strap 13.

Select
Attitude/Heading 24 See strap 14.
Attitude Source DPU(P1-103) 25

MPU(P2-14)1 0 Use cross-side attitude
MPU(P3-83)2 1 Use on-side attitude
Heading Source DPU(P1-107) 26

MPU(P2-3)1 0 Use cross-side heading
MPU(P3-82)2 1 Use on-side heading
Reserved DPU(P1-111) 27
MPU(P2-7)1 0
MPU(P3-77)2 1
DSP Source DPU(P1-135) 28

MPU(P2-11)1 0 Use cross-side display select panel
MPU(P3-79)2 1 Use on-side display select panel
Note
0 = ground
1 = open
Revised 28 April 1993 1-32


NUMBER
Rising Runway DPU(P1-139) 29

MPU(P2-15)1 0 Enable rising runway
MPU(P3-78)2 1 Disable rising runway
Heading Select DPU(P1-99) 30

MPU(P1-134)1 0 Separate heading set knobs (CHP-86B, DSP-84)
MPU(P3-134)2 1 Common heading set knob (CHP-85D)
NAV Bus Type Select 31 32 See strap 16.
FCS CSDB Bus DPU(P2-13) 33

Select MPU(P1-13)1 0 Secondary FCS bus
MPU(P3-13)2 1 Primary FCS bus
ADF Type 34 See strap 15.
ARINC 429 LNV Port DPU(P2-80) 36 LRN annunciation ARINC 429 LRN PORT
Number MPU(P1-80)1 0 3 2
MPU(P3-80)2 1 1 or 2 (see straps 4, 5, 6) 1
Analog NAV Select DPU(P2-108) 37

MPU(P1-108)1 0 Synchro VOR/TCN input
MPU(P3-108)2 1 Ac sin/cos VOR/TCN input
Sensor/GS Side DPU(P1-95) 39

Select MPU(P1-135)1 0 Glideslope scale on left side
MPU(P3-135)2 1 Glideslope scale on right side
Cross-side Drive Xfer DPU (P2-105) 40 Drive transfer annunciator, 4-tube only, -002 status and above.
Annun
3-Tube/5-Tube MPU(P2-83) 41 (MPU only)

0 3-Tube
1 5-Tube
Note
0 = ground
1 = open

14.0 DPU-84/MPU-84 PROCESSOR STRAP OR SWITCH DEFINITIONS
DPU/MPU Test DPU(P1-91) *External switch Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P2-2) Normal: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Test: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
EADI Drive Transfer DPU(P1-98) *External switch Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-109)1 Drive normal = NLT 100 kΩ (open)
MPU(P3-109)2 Drive transfer = NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
EHSI Drive Transfer DPU(P1-105) *External switch Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P2-90)1 Drive normal = NLT 100 kΩ (open)
MPU(P3-91)2 Drive transfer = NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
Composite/Off DPU(P2-125) *External switch Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-125)1 Normal operation = NLT 100 kΩ (open)
MPU(P3-125)2 EADI composite/EHSI off = NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
Off/Composite DPU(P2-129) *External switch Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-129)1 Normal operation = NLT 100 kΩ (open)
MPU(P3-129)2 EADI off/EHSI composite = NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
Cross-side Drive DPU(P2-105) Cross-side Format: 1-wire discrete

Transfer Drive Transfer X-side drive normal: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Switch X-side drive transfer: NMT +3
*These inputs are switched externally on an individual drive unit basis or together on a same-side basis.
15.0 SENSOR STRAP OPTIONS
15.1 DSP-84 Sensor Straps
Sensor strapping on the DSP-84 is used to define navigation input configurations. For example, if properly strapped, all aircraft
navigation sensors can be displayed by either EHSI. Each DSP-84 is strapped independently. These inputs are usually hard-wired to
DSP-84 pins P2-35, 36,37, 38, 39, 40, 41.
DSP DSP
PIN NO STRAP NO SENSOR NUMBER OF SENSORS
P2-11 1 VOR
0 Dual VOR
1 Single or no VOR
P2-12 2 TCN
0 Dual TACAN
1 Single or no TACAN
P2-13 3 LNV
0 Dual LNV
1 Single or no LNV
P2-7 4 ADF
0 Dual ADF
1 Single or no ADF
P2-8 5 MLS
0 Dual MLS
1 Single or no MLS

15.1 DSP-84 Sensor Straps (Cont)
DSP DSP ACTIVE AND PRESELECT

PIN NO STRAP NO COURSE SELECTION SINGLE/NONE DUAL
P2-10 6 VOR
0 Included On-side only
1 Excluded Both sides
P2-14 7 TCN
P2-15 8 LNV
P2-16 9 Reserved
P2-17 10 MLS
DSP DSP
PIN NO STRAP NO #1 BEARING SELECT SINGLE/NONE DUAL
P2-18 11 VOR
0 VOR VOR 1
1 None VOR 1/VOR 2
P2-19 12 TCN
0 TCN TCN 1
1 None TCN 1/TCN 2
P2-48 13 LNV
0 LRN LRN 1
1 None LRN 1/LRN 2
P2-49 14 ADF
0 ADF ADF 1
1 None ADF 1/ADF 2
P2-34 15 Reserved
DSP DSP
PIN NO STRAP NO #2 BEARING SELECT SINGLE/NONE DUAL
P2-50 16 VOR
0 VOR VOR 2
1 None VOR 2/VOR 1
P2-3 17 TCN
0 TCN TCN 2
1 None TCN 2/TCN 1
P2-6 18 LNV
0 LRN LRN 2
1 None LRN 2/LRN 1
P2-20 19 ADF
0 ADF ADF 2
1 None ADF 2/ADF 1
P2-23 20 Reserved

15.1 DSP-84 Sensor Straps (Cont)
Cat II A Request DSP(P2-9) External switch Format: 1-wire, discrete

CAT II request: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
No request: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Cat II B Request DSP(P2-44) External switch Format: 1-wire, discrete

CAT II request: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
No request: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Drive Transfer DSP(P2-42) External Switch Format: 1-wire, discrete

Drive transfer: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
Drive normal: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
15.2 DPU I/O Strap Pin Numbers
I/O DPU MPU MPU

STRAP NUMBER PIN NUMBER LEFT PIN NUMBER RIGHT PIN NUMBER
1 P2-61 P2-1 P2-4
2 P2-115 P2-5 P2-8
3 P2-121 P2-9 P2-12
4 P2-123 P2-13 P2-16
5 P2-128 P2-53 P2-56
6 P2-132 P2-57 P2-60
7 P2-133 P2-61 P2-64
8 P2-134 P2-65 P2-68
9 P2-135 P2-69 P2-72
10 P2-136 P2-73 P2-76
11 P2-140 — —
12 P2-141 P2-81 P2-82
13 P2-142 P2-85 P2-88
14 P2-145 P2-89 P2-92
15 P2-146 P2-93 P2-96
16 P2-147 P2-97 P2-100
17 P2-148 P2-102 P2-103
18 P2-151 P2-106 P2-107
19 P2-152 P2-110 P2-111
20 P2-155 P2-114 P2-115
21 P2-156 P2-118 P2-119
22 P2-158 P2-122 P2-142
23 P2-159 P2-126 P2-127
24 P2-116 P2-130 P2-131
25 P1-103 P2-14 P3-83
26 P1-107 P2-3 P3-82
27 P1-111 P2-7 P3-77
28 P1-135 P2-11 P3-79
29 P1-139 P2-15 P3-78
30 P1-99 P1-134 P3-134
31 P2-33 P1-33 P3-33
32 P2-34 P1-34 P3-34
33 P2-13 P1-13 P3-13
34 P2-17 P1-17 P3-17

15.2 DPU I/O Strap Pin Numbers (Cont)

35 P2-21 P1-21 P3-21
36 P2-80 P1-80 P3-80
37 P2-108 P1-108 P3-108
38 P2-112 P1-112 P3-112
39 P1-95 P1-135 P3-135
40 — — —
41 — — P2-83
Table 1-16. EFIS-84 Output Specifications.
SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER DESTINATION SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS
1.0 ANNUNCIATION OUTPUTS
Cat II Amber DPU(P2-30) External Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P2-160)1 annunciator Amber on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-90)2 Amber off: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25°C
Cat II Green DPU(P2-49) External Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-142)1 annunciator Green on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-142)2 Green off: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Category II DPU(P2-29) External Format: 1-wire discrete

Comparator Warn MPU(P1-141)1 annunciator Warn on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-141)2 Warn off: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Master Warn DPU(P2-35) External Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-35)1 annunciator Master warn on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-35)2 Master warn off: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Excessive Attitude DPU(P2-119) External Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-119)1 annunciator Annunciated: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-119)2 Normal: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Excessive ILS DPU(P2-120) External Format: 1-wire discrete

Deviation MPU(P1-120)1 annunciator Annunciated: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)

1.0 ANNUNCIATION OUTPUTS
Attitude Comparator DPU(P2-77) External Format: 1-wire discrete

Warn MPU(P1-145)1 annunciator Warn on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
Heading Comparator DPU(P2-65) External Format: 1-wire discrete

Warn MPU(P1-146)1 annunciator Warn on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
Decision Height DPU(P2-139) External Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P2-158)1 annunciator DH annunciated: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
Overtemperature DPU(P1-102) External Format: 1-wire discrete

EFD(P2-24) annunciator Overtemperature: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P1-110) Normal: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
MFD(P1-35) Trip point: 100°C (for DPU), 95 °C (for EFD),
135°C (for MPU), 78°C (for MFD)
2.0 OUTPUTS TO ANALOG FCS
VOR/LOC Mode DPU(P1-60) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-115)1 computer +28 V dc when any VOR or LOC has been selected as the active
MPU(P3-115)2 NAV sensor.
Message on: +18 to +31 V dc (+28 V dc)
Message off: NMT +3 V dc (open)
LNV Mode DPU(P1-118) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-147)1 computer +28 V dc when any LNV has been selected as the active NAV
MPU(P3-147)2 source.
TCN Mode DPU(P1-109) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-158)1 computer +28 V dc when any TACAN has been selected as the active NAV

2.0 OUTPUTS TO ANALOG FCS
MLS Mode DPU(P2-113) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-113)1 computer +28 V dc when any MLS has been selected as the active NAV
Message off: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Max current out: 75 mA at 25 °C
Sensor Number DPU(P2-53) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P2-159)1 computer Ground (NMT +3 V dc) when the sensor selected as the active
MPU(P3-87)2 NAV source is the number 1 sensor.
Message on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
Message off: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Lateral NAV Valid DPU(P1-24) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-30)1 computer +28 V dc when the flag being received from the active NAV
MPU(P3-30)2 source is valid.
Open (NLT 100 kΩ) at all other times including no course
selected.
Vertical NAV Valid DPU(P2-110) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-65)1 computer +28 V dc when the flag being received from the sensor associated
MPU(P3-65)2 with the active EHSI vertical deviation is valid.
Open (NLT 100 kΩ) at all other times including no vertical de-
viation present.
LOC Tune DPU(P2-131) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-131)1 computer Ground (NMT +3 V dc) when VOR1/VOR2 has been selected as
MPU(P3-131)2 the active NAV source and a LOC frequency tuned ground signal
from the applicable NAV receiver is received.
Open (NLT 100 kΩ) at all other times.
Back Course DPU(P2-127) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-127)1 computer +28 V dc when VOR1/VOR2 has been selected as the active NAV
MPU(P3-127)2 source, a LOC frequency tuned ground signal is received from
the applicable NAV receiver, and the selected course is greater
than 105° from the aircraft’s heading. Open at all other times.

2.0 OUTPUTS TO ANALOG FCS (Cont)
Linear Deviation DPU(P1-20) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-29)1 computer +28 V dc when LNV1/LNV2 has been selected as the active NAV
MPU(P3-29)2 sensor.
FCS Clear DPU(P1-113) Flight guidance A +28-V pulse for 250 ±20 ms when active. Open all other times.
MPU(P1-144)1 computer Maximum current out: 75 mA at 25 °C. Pulse active = A(B + C +
MPU(P3-144)2 D) + E + F where:
A = active NAV sensor changes (includes VOR to LOC and LOC
to VOR)
B = FCS NAV arm or capture
C = APS-85/86
D = (APS-65 and FCS bus fault) or (FCS-80 and DCP bus fault)
E = TRUE/MAG heading change
F = Cross-side DCP select change
Note
The clear pulse shall not be generated if LNV is the active

source and magnetic variation is absent from the bus.
Lateral Deviation DPU(P2-69,73) Flight guidance Format: 2-wire, dc, polarity reversing
+RT, +LT MPU(P1-69,73)1 computer Analog: ±0.5 V dc max, 75 mV/dot
MPU(P3-69,73)2 “ANG” lateral deviation is a reversible dc analog signal which is
proportional to the angular displacement of the aircraft from
selected VOR(5°/dot) or localizer course (0.775 DDM/dot).
“LIN” lateral deviation is proportional to the lateral displace-
ment of the aircraft from the selected VOR course, calculated
using the above angular displacement and distance to the station
or waypoint (5 nmi/dot if not FCS approach mode, 1 nmi/dot if
FCS approach). For long-range navigation systems, this signal is
crosstrack deviation and is proportional to the lateral displace-
ment of the aircraft from the desired track.
Vertical Deviation DPU(P2-58,63) Flight guidance Format: 2-wire, dc, polarity reversing
MPU(P1-74,75)1 computer Analog: ±0.5 V dc max, 75 mV/dot
MPU(P3-74,75)2 A reversible dc analog signal which is proportional to the active
vertical deviation. This may be ILS glideslope, MLS glideslope,
or VNAV.
TO/FROM +TO, DPU(P2-126,130) Flight guidance Format: dc analog reversing polarity

+FROM MPU(P1-126,130)1 computer Signal: ±0.36 V dc ±0.06 V dc
MPU(P3-126,130)2 TO: pin 126 positive with respect to pin 130
FROM: pin 130 positive with respect to pin 126

2.0 OUTPUTS TO ANALOG FCS (Cont)
Course Datum Error DPU(P2-25,26) Flight guidance Signal: 11.8 V ac max, 400 Hz
H,L MPU(P1-25,26)1 computer Analog: 30SINθ, where θ is the angle between lubber line and
MPU(P3-25,26)2 course.
Phase: in phase with reference if course line is left of lubber line.
A reversible-phase 400-Hz (NMT 11.8 Vac) signal which is pro-
portional to the difference between the aircraft’s heading (eg,
lubber line on the EHSI display) and the selected course.
Heading Error H,L DPU(P2-68,64) Flight guidance Signal: 11.8 V ac, max 400 Hz
MPU(P1-68,64)1 computer Analog: 30 SINθ, where θ is the angle between lubber line and
MPU(P3-68,64)2 heading bug.
Phase: in phase with reference if heading bug is left of lubber
line.
A reversible-phase 400-Hz (NMT 11.8 V ac) signal which is pro-
portional to the difference between the aircraft’s heading (eg,
lubber line on the EHSI display) and the selected heading.

3.0 OUTPUTS TO DIGITAL FCS
Digital FCS A,B DPU(P2-16,20) APS-85( ) Format: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus (CSDB)
MPU(P1-16,20)1 Data transfer rate: 12.5 kBd/s

EFIS STATUS, DRIVE TRANSFER LEFT, DRIVE TRANSFER RIGHT, TEST, SOURCE C0 10
IDENT, NAV DEV TYPE & SCALE CODE (ACTIVE), NAV DEV TYPE & SCALE CODE
(PRESEL),LATERAL NAV PULSE CLEAR, GS DISPLAY ON, VNAV DISPLAY ON, V-BAR
OR XPTR, FD DISPLAY, MARKER BEACON, VERTICAL NAV PULSE CLEAR
HEADING VALID, HEADING ERROR VALID, MAG/TRUE, SOURCE IDENT, HEAD- C1 10

ING(mag/true), HEADING ERROR
ACTIVE COURSE ERROR/VALID, PRE COURSE ERROR/VALID, SOURCE IDENT C2 10
RADIO ALTITUDE/VALID, RADIO ALTITUDE ON SCALE, DECISION HEIGHT, RA TEST, C3 10

SOURCE IDENT
LAT DEVIATION/VALID, VERT DEVIATION/VALID, DEVIATION TYPE, BACK LOC, LOC C4 10

FREQUENCY, SOURCE IDENT
PRE LAT DEVIATION/VALID, PRE VERT DEVIATION/VALID, DEVIATION TYPE, BACK- C5 10

LOC, LOC FREQUENCY, SOURCE IDENT
ROLL COMMANDS/VALID, PITCH COMMANDS/VALID, COMMAND ROLL, AVAIL C6 10

PITCH, REM CAP, REM ARM, SOURCE IDENT
LOC DEVIATION/VALID, GS DEVIATION/VALID, SOURCE IDENT C7 10
FCS DISTANCE/VALID, PRE FCS DISTANCE/VALID, ELEVATION CORRECTION, DME C8 10

HOLD (active and pre), SOURCE IDENT
WIND VELOCITY, WIND DIRECTION, WIND VALID, WIND AVAILABLE, SOURCE C9 10

IDENT
SELECTED COURSE/VALID, PRESEL COURSE/VALID, TO/FROM (active), TO/FROM(pre), CA 10

SOURCE IDENT
PITCH COMMANDS VNI/VALID, VNI DEVIATION/VALID, VNAV STATE, FCS VNAV CAP, B0 10
VNAV ENABLE, SOURCE IDENT

4.0 ADDITIONAL OUTPUTS
Joystick and MPU(P1-151,155)1 FMS-90, LNV, INS Format: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus (CSDB)
Pushbutton Data MPU(P3-151,155)2 Data transfer rate: 12.5 kBd/s
A,B Words: See below.
WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/S

JOYSTICK CURSOR POSITION CB *
MFD KEYSWITCH STATUS CC **
*Sent for 2 seconds at 10 times/second for each push of the enter key.
**Sent at 10 times/second as long as any key is pushed.
Radio Altitude Test DPU(P2-122) ALT-50/55 AL-101 Format: 1-wire discrete

Out MPU(P1-122)1 Test: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)

1.4 HIRF AND LIGHTNING COMPLIANCE 1.5 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BUT NOT SUP-
PLIED
Installing non-HIRF and Lightning version LRUs,
which are TSO certified to DO-160A or DO-160B, to be Refer to Table 1-20 for a list of the associated equip-
compliant with DO-160C HIRF (High Intensity Radi- ment, provisions, and formats necessary to interface
ated Field) and Lightning requirements, (sections 20, with the DPU units. The letter “I” indicates that, in
22, and 23), is accomplished by following the installa- general, the representative equipment shall provide
tion instructions and techniques provided in the text data to EFIS. The letter “O” indicates that EFIS pro-
on the outline and mounting diagrams and on the in- vides outputs to the external equipment.
terconnect drawings in this manual. The following
paragraphs describe the regulatory documents appli- The EFIS system accepts weather radar data from
cable to the HIRF and Lightning requirements. a Collins-compatible weather radar rt unit. The
WXP-85C/85D or WXP-850A/850B Weather Radar
RTCA document DO-160A titled “Environmental
Panel provides the pilot interface and control sig-
Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
nals to the rt similar to the controls provided by the
Equipment” defines the environmental conditions
weather radar indicator normally used by the
used to test Collins equipments and systems when
WXT-250B. When the TWR-850 is used (with the
DO-160A was in effect starting April 6, 1981 (see
WXP-850A/850B Weather Radar Panel), advanced
Advisory Circular 21-16). Since that time there
features displayed on EFIS include turbulence de-
have been a number of revisions to DO-160. As of
tection, ground clutter suppression, autotilt, stabi-
this printing, the latest version is change no. 3 to
lization, slave mode, and gain-level annunciation.
DO-160C dated May 13, 1993. DO-160C contains
major changes to Section 20, compared to DO-160A,
1.5.1 Purpose of Equipment
and Sections 22 and 23 are added. Section 20 is the
Radio Frequency Susceptibility (Radiated and Con-
1.5.1.1 Remote Data Programmer (RDP-300)
ducted) test procedures. Today the testing de-
scribed in Section 20 is commonly referred to as
The RDP-300 is a handheld keyboard that plugs
HIRF tests. Section 22 is the Lightning Induced
into a jack on the front face of the MFD-85B Multi-
Transient Susceptibility test procedure. Section 23
function Display, where it receives power and is
is the Lightning Direct Effects test procedure.
used to enter or change checklist page and emer-
Since specific HIRF and lightning test levels as de- gency data in the MFD. The RDP-300 is normally
fined by Sections 20 and 22 of DO-160C have not used before and during preflight, it is rarely used
been required by the regulations, the FAA (and during flight. The unit should be stored (not
European JAA) have produced Special Conditions mounted) in a location accessible to the flight crew.
(JAA Certification Review Item or CRI) to require
specific test requirements for new technology sys- 1.5.1.2 Checklist Entry Unit (CEU-85( ))
tems. These Special Conditions (JAA CRIs) do not
affect the basic TSO environmental requirements. The handheld CEU-85( ) is used to enter 100 pages
(For a description of Special Conditions see FAR of combined checklist page and emergency page
21.16 and FAR 11.28.) However, they do place addi- data into the MFD instead of entering it manually
tional testing over and above the TSO testing for using the RDP-300. The CEU-85( ) plugs into a jack
HIRF and lightning. The result is specific LRUs on the front face of the MFD-85B Multifunction
and systems carry a TSO nameplate annunciating Display, where it receives power and is normally
the DO-160A or DO-160B test criteria and the used before preflight; it is rarely used during flight.
HIRF and Lightning requirements are applied as The checklist is loaded into the CEU-85 from an
requirements to the airframe certification in accor- Apple®* II Plus/IIe/IIe Enhanced computer that
dance with FAR Part 23, 25, 27, 29. The Special contains a Collins Pro Line II interface card and
Conditions may allow use of the RTCA DO-160C checklist processing disk software. The checklist is
procedures to perform the actual tests. loaded into the CEU-85A from an IBM-PC or com-
patible computer.
*Apple® is the registered trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc.

1.5.1.3 Fan Monitor Module (FMM-85) 1.5.1.4 Air Data Adapter (ADA-85)
The FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module mounts directly The ADA-85 Air Data Adapter mounts in the air-
onto any one of the four fan frame sides and is used craft radio equipment rack and converts Manches-
to monitor fan motor speed. If fan motor speed falls ter format serial air data from the ADC-80( ) Air
below a preset level, the FMM-85 will sense this Data Computer into Commercial Standard Digital
change and provide a ground to energize an in- Bus (CSDB) format serial air data to interface with
staller-furnished, instrument-panel mounted “LOW the DPU-84 units.
FAN SPEED” annunciator.
Table 1-20. Associated Equipment, Interface Provisions, and Formats.
EQUIPMENT CATEGORIES I/O DPU MPU PRIMARY DATA FORMAT

(REPRESENTATIVE TYPE) PORTS PORTS
Radio altimeter
(ALT-50/55) I 1 2 Dc analog
(AL-101) I 1 2 Dc analog
O Discrete
Air data
(ADS-82/85/86) I 1 2 CSDB
(ADS-80 and ADA-85) I 1 2 Manchester bus into ADA-85, CSDB into EFIS
NAV receiver
(VIR-30A) I 1 2 Ac sin/cos, dc, discretes
(VIR-31) I 1 2 3-wire synchro, dc, discretes
(VIR-32) I 1 2 CSDB
(VIR-432) I 1 2 ARINC 429
DME
(DME-40) I 1 2 ARINC 568
(DME-42) I 1 2 CSDB
(DME-442) I 1 2 ARINC 429
ADF
(ADF-60A) I 1 2 3-wire synchro
(ADF-60B) I 1 2 Dc sin/cos
(ADF-462) I 1 2 ARINC 429
Attitude
(332D-11) I 1 2 3-wire synchro
(AHS-85) I 1 2 CSDB
(AHS-85D) I 1 2 ARINC 429 serial digital bus (only one at a time)
Heading
(MC-103/MCS-65) I 1 2 3-wire synchro
(AHS-85) I 1 2 CSDB
(AHS-85D) I 2 4 ARINC 429 serial digital (one at a time) (CSDB and ARINC 429 are
shared with attitude)
Flight control
(FCS-80) I/O 1 2 Ac/dc analog, discrete
(FCS-85) I/O 2-I/1-O 4-I/2-O CSDB and discretes
(FCS-65) I/O 2 2 Ac/dc analog, discrete, and CSDB
Lateral NAV
(VLF/Omega or INS) I/O 1-I/1-O 2-I/2-O All 6-wire and CSDB
I/O 2-I/1-O 4-I/2-O ARINC 429 + CSDB (one at a time)
Vertical NAV (FMS) I 1 2 ARINC 429 (part of LNV)

Table 1-21. Associated Equipment, Interface Provisions, and Formats.
EQUIPMENT CATEGORIES I/O DPU MPU PRIMARY DATA FORMAT

(REPRESENTATIVE TYPE) PORTS PORTS
RNAV
(RNAV) I Shared with LRN ARINC 561 digital 6-wire
receivers
I Shared with LRN ARINC 429
receivers
TACAN
(TCN-40/42) I Shared with analog Analog + 568 digital 6-wire
VOR/DME receivers
(TCN-118) I Shared with LRN/ ARINC 582 digital 6-wire
DME receivers
(TCN-500) I 1 2 ARINC 429
Angle of Attack
(AOA computer) I 1 2 Dc analog
MLS I 1 2 ARINC 429

1.5.2 Related EFIS Equipment Specifications power requirements. Refer to Table 1-23 for a list of
related EFIS publications. Table 1-24 lists abbrevia-
tions acronyms, and mnemonics that are used in this
Refer to Table 1-22 for a list of the related EFIS
publication to describe the EFIS system.
equipment specifications that include environmental,
physical size, weight, mounting, cooling, and input
Table 1-22. Related EFIS Equipment Specifications.
Maintenance requirement On condition
Environmental Listed below are the DO-160A categories to which the EFIS units are tested.
ADA-85 (FAA TSO-C52a) A2E1/B/JY/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZA
CEU-85( ) None, not used during aircraft flight.
FMM-85 (not TSO’ed) D2/B/JY/XXXXXXZ/BZ/AZZ
RDP-300 None, not used during aircraft flight.
Note
DO-160C compliance —
See paragraph 1.4 HIRF AND LIGHTNING
COMPLIANCE.
Temperature and Altitude Categories A2E1 and D2.
Temperature
Operating Category A2: –15 to +70°C (+5 to +158°F)
Storage Category A2: –55 to +85°C (-67 to +185°F)
Operating Category D2: –55 to +70°C(-67 to +158°F)
Storage Category D2: –55 to +85°C(-67 to +185°F)
Altitude Category A2. Certified for installation in a partially controlled temperature and pres-
surized location where pressures are no lower than an altitude equivalent of 4600 m
(15 000 ft) msl.
Category E1. Certified for installation in a nonpressurized and noncontrolled tem-

perature location in an aircraft that is operated at altitudes up to 21 300 m (70 000 ft)
msl.
Category D2. Certified for installation in a nonpressurized and noncontrolled tem-

perature location in an aircraft that is operated at altitudes up to 15 200 m (50 000 ft)
msl.
Humidity Category B. 95% at +65°C for 10 days.
Vibration Category J. Certified for fuselage mounting in a fixed-wing turbojet or turbofan air-
craft.
Category Y. Certified for fuselage mounting in a piston or turbojet rotary wing air-
craft.
Explosion proofness Category X. Certified for installation in a location where the probability of an explo-
sive atmosphere existing is so low that it can be disregarded.
Waterproofness Category X. Certified for installation in locations not subject to falling water
(including condensation), rain water, or sprayed water.

Fluid susceptibility Category X. Certified for installation in locations not exposed to fluid contamination
from fuel, hydraulic fluids, oil, solvent, etc.
Sand and dust Category X. Certified for installation in a location not subject to blowing sand and
dust.
Fungus resistance Category X. Fungus resistance test not performed.
Salt spray Category X. Salt spray test not performed.
Magnetic effect Category Z. Unit causes a 1-degree deflection of an uncompensated compass at a dis-
tance less than 0.3 m (1.0 ft).
Power input Category B. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems where primary power is
from engine-driven alternator/rectifiers or dc generator where a significant capacity
battery is floating on the dc bus at all times.
Category Z. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems not applicable to any other
category. For example, a dc system from a variable range generator where a small
capacity or no battery is floating on the dc bus.
Voltage spikes Category A. Certified for installation in systems where a high degree of voltage spike
protection is required.
Audio frequency susceptibility Category Z. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems not applicable to any other
category. For example, a dc system from a variable range generator where a small
capacity or no battery is floating on the dc bus.
Electromagnetic compatibility Category A. Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation is
desired.
Category Z. Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation is

required.
Physical
Weight (approx)
ADA-85 (without mount) 0.18 kg (0.4 lb)
CEU-85 0.32 kg (0.70 lb)
FMM-85 0.08 kg (0.18 lb)
RDP-300 0.32 kg (0.70 lb)
Size (reference)
ADA-85 26.40 mm (1.040 in) wide x 81.58 mm (3.330 in) high x 141.7 mm (5.580 in) deep
CEU-85 91.44 mm (3.60 in) wide x 28.44 mm (1.12 in) high x 146.05 mm (5.75 in) deep
FMM-85 37.3 mm (1.47 in) wide x 31.08 mm (1.225 in) high x 114.30 mm (4.500 in) deep
RDP-300 78.11 mm (4.075 in) wide x 116.21 mm (4.575 in) high x 32.89 mm (1.295 in) deep

Mounting
ADA-85 Mounted in aircraft radio equipment rack by a special mount (CPN 653-9015-001).
CEU-85 Not aircraft mounted; plugs into MFD-85( ) DATA jack.
FMM-85 Mounts directly onto any one of the four fan-frame sides.
RDP-300 Not aircraft mounted; plugs into MFD-85( ) DATA jack.
Power input
ADA-85 2.75 W nominal (0.1 A at +27.5 V dc).
CEU-85 +5 V dc, 350 mA. Provided by MFD-85( ) DATA jack.
FMM-85 +28 V dc, 0.5 A.
RDP-300 +5 V dc, 350 mA. Provided by MFD-85( ) DATA jack.
Table 1-23. Related Publications.
PUBLICATION COLLINS PART NUMBER
ADA-85 Air Data Adapter Instruction Book 523-0774682
ADS-80 Air Data System Installation Manual 523-0767654
ADS-81/82 Air Data System Installation Manual 523-0772425
AHS-85 Attitude Heading System Installation Manual 523-0772305
APS-65 Autopilot/FGS-65 Flight Guidance System Installation Manual 523-0771862
APS-85 Autopilot System Installation Manual 523-0772076
CEU-85 Checklist Entry Unit Instruction Book 523-0774328
Collins Installation Practices Manual 523-0775254
FCS-80 Flight Control System Installation Manual 523-0766515
FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module Installation Manual 523-0773893
FMS-90 Flight Management System Installation Manual 523-0771082
LRN-85 Long Range Navigation System Installation Manual 523-0770599
Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse System Installation Manual 523-0772719
RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer Instruction Book 523-0770244
TWR-850 Turbulence Weather Radar System Installation Manual 523-0774651
UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II Connectors Installation Manual 523-0772277

Table 1-24. Abbreviations, Acronyms, and Mnemonics.
TERM MEANING
ACCEL Acceleration
ACT Active
A/C Aircraft
ADA Air data adapter
ADC Air data computer
ADF Automatic direction finder or ADF receiver
ADI Attitude director indicator
ADS Air data system
AER Aileron/Elevator/Rudder
AHC Attitude heading computer
AHRS Attitude heading reference system
AHS Attitude heading system
ALT Altitude or radio altimeter
ALT SEL Altitude, preselect
ALTS Altitude select
ANG Angular
ANNUN Annunciation
AOA Angle of attack
AP Autopilot
APPR Approach
ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ASCII American standard code for information interchange
ATC Air traffic control or automatic trim coupler
ATCRBS Air traffic control radar beacon system
ATT Attitude
B/C Back course (localizer)
BARO Barometric pressure
BCD Binary coded decimal
BNK Bank
BNR Binary
BRG Bearing
BRT Brightness (stroke intensity control)
CAP Capture
CAT Category
CCW Counter-clockwise
CEU Checklist entry unit
CLM Climb
CLR Clear
COM Communication
COMM Communication
CPN Collins part number
CRS Course
CRT Cathode ray tube
CSDB Commercial standard digital bus
CW Continuous wave or clockwise
DA Drift angle
DDM Difference in depth modulation
DEG Degree
DES Descend
DEV Deviation
DG Directional gyro
DH Decision height
DIR Direct
DIST Distance
DME Distance measuring equipment or DME transceiver
DME HLD DME hold
DMR Diagnostic/maintenance routines
DN Down
DP Display processor

TERM MEANING
DPU Display processor unit

DR Dead reckoning
DSABL Disable
DSP Display select panel
EADI Electronic attitude director indicator
EFD Electronic flight display
EFIS Electronic flight instrument system
EHSI Electronic horizontal situation indicator
EMG Emergency
EMI Electromagnetic interference
ENABL Enable
ETA Estimated time of arrival
ETE Estimated time en route
FAR Federal air regulation
FCC Flight control computer
FCP Flight control panel
FCS Flight control system
FD Flight director
FLT PLAN Flight plan
FMC Flight management computer
FMM Fan monitor module
FMS Flight management system
FR From
G Gain
GA Go-around
GCS Ground clutter suppression
GMT Greenwich mean time
GND Ground
GND CLTR SPRS Ground clutter suppression
GS Glideslope or ground speed
GSPD Ground speed
H Hold or high-speed profile
HDG Heading
HF High frequency
HIRF High intensity radiated fields
HLD Hold
I/O Input/output
IAS Indicated airspeed
ID Identification
ILS Instrument landing system
IM Inner marker
IMT Instrument mounting tray
IN HG Inches of mercury
INS Inertial navigation system
IRS Inertial reference system
ISA International standard atmosphere temperature
KBD/S Kilo Baud/second
KN Knots
L Left, number 1, or pilot side
LAT Latitude
LIN Linear
LNAV Long range navigator
LNV Long range navigator
LOC Localizer
LON Longitude
LRN Long-range navigation
LRU Line replaceable unit
M Mach

TERM MEANING
MAG Magnetic
MAGVAR Magnetic variation
MAN Manual
MAZ Microwave azimuth
MB Marker beacon or millibars
MDA Minimum decision altitude
MFD Multifunction display
MGP Microwave glidepath
MKR BCN Marker beacon
MLS Microwave landing system
MM Middle marker
MMO Mach, max operating
MPR Multiport random access memory
MSG Message
MUX Multiplexer
NA Not applicable
NAV Navigation
NCD No computed data
NDB Nondirectional beacon
NEG Negative
NLT Not less than
NMI Nautical miles
NMT Not more than
NOM Nominal
NORM Normal
OM Outer marker
PIT Pitch
PRE Preset or preselect
PRES POS Present position
PRI Primary
PTCH Pitch
PTR Pointer
R Right, number 2, or copilot side; rudder
RA Radio altitude
RAD Radial
RAM Random access memory
RCL Recall
RDP Remote data programmer
RDR Radar
REV Reversion
RMI Radio magnetic indicator
RMS Root mean square
RMT Remote
RNAV Area navigation
ROL Roll
RTA Weather radar receiver/transmitter/antenna
SAT Static air temperature
SEC Sector
SEL Select
SKP Skip
SMT Servo mounting tray
SPD Airspeed
STBY Standby
STD Standard
STIM Stimulate
SYNC Synchronize
T Tilt
TAS True airspeed

TERM MEANING
TAT Total air temperature

TEMP Temperature
TGT Target
TRB Turbulence
TRK Track
TRUs True
TSO Technical standard order
TST Test
TTG Time to go
TTL Transistor-transistor logic
TTS Time to station
TURB Turbulence
UART Universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UMT Universal mounting tray
USTB Unstabilized
VIR VHF navigation receiver
VMO Airspeed, max operating
VNAV Vertical navigation
VNV Vertical navigation
VOR VHF omnirange
WPT Waypoint
WX Weather
WXP Weather radar panel
WXR Weather radar
XFR Transfer
XTRK Crosstrack

z523-0775965-002118
2nd Edition, 30 March 1995
9ebb_di
EFIS-84
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page Paragraph Page
2.1 GENERAL ............................................................ 2-1 2.7.4.1Installation .........................................................2-10

2.7.4.2 Removal .............................................................2-10
2.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING EQUIPMENT2-1 2.7.5 MFD-85( ) Multifunction Display ........................2-10
2.7.5.1 Installation ........................................................2-11
2.3 PREINSTALLATION CHECK............................ 2-1
2.7.5.2 Removal .............................................................2-11
2.4 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS................................ 2-1 2.7.6Combined MFD-85( ) and WXP-85C/-850A
Installation Using IMT-85 Mounting Tray...........2-11
2.5 PLANNING .......................................................... 2-1 2.7.6.1 Installation ........................................................2-11
2.5.1 Installation Configurations ...................................2-2 2.7.6.2 Removal .............................................................2-12
2.5.2 Strapping Options..................................................2-2 2.7.7 DPU-84 Display Processor Unit (DPU) and UMT-
2.5.3Loading Considerations..........................................2-2 14/14A/14B Mount .................................................2-12
2.5.4Cooling Considerations...........................................2-2 2.7.7.1Installation .........................................................2-12
2.5.4.1 EFD Forced-Air Cooling Requirements .............2-2 2.7.7.2 Removal .............................................................2-12
2.5.4.2DPU and MPU Forced-Air Cooling Requirements2-3 2.7.8 MPU-84 Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU) and
2.5.4.3 MFD Forced-Air Cooling Requirements ............2-3 UMT-15/15A/15B Mount........................................2-12
2.5.5 Power Switching (Suggestions) .............................2-3 2.7.8.1Installation .........................................................2-13
2.6 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS ............................... 2-3 2.7.8.2 Removal .............................................................2-13
2.6.1 General ...................................................................2-3 2.7.9Mating Connector Kit (CPN 634-1020-001) Assembly
2.6.2 Connector Contact Assembly and Installation.....2-4 Instructions.............................................................2-13
2.6.3 Interconnect Wiring Check....................................2-4 2.7.10 FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module ...........................2-13
2.7.10.1FMM-85 (-001) Installation .............................2-14
2.7 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES ...................... 2-9 2.7.10.2 FMM-85 (-002) Installation ............................2-14
2.7.1 HIRF and Lightning Considerations ....................2-9 2.7.10.3Removal ............................................................2-14
2.7.2EFD-84 Used as an Electronic Attitude Director 2.7.11 ADA-85 Air Data Adapter..................................2-14
Indicator (EADI) ....................................................2-10 2.7.11.1 Installation ......................................................2-14
2.7.2.1 Installation........................................................2-10 2.7.11.2Removal ............................................................2-14
2.7.2.2Removal ..............................................................2-10
2.8 TESTING............................................................ 2-14
2.7.3 EFD-84 Used as an Electronic Horizontal Situation
Indicator (EHSI) ....................................................2-10 2.8.1 Preinstallation Testing ........................................2-14
2.7.3.1 Installation........................................................2-10 2.8.2 Postinstallation Testing.......................................2-14
2.7.3.2 Removal .............................................................2-10 2.8.2.1 Power Requirements .........................................2-14
2.7.4 DSP-84 Display Select Panels .............................2-10 2.8.2.2 Diagnostic Information .....................................2-14
* Title ......................................... 30 Mar 95 2-22 thru 2-24 ..........................20 May 92 * 2-87 thru 2-119........................ 30 Mar 95
* List of Effective Pages............. 30 Mar 95 2-25............................................28 Apr 93 2-120 Blank ............................. 20 May 92
2-1 thru 2-3.............................. 20 May 92 2-26...........................................20 May 92 * 2-121 thru 2-165 ...................... 30 Mar 95
* 2-4 thru 2-5.............................. 30 Mar 95 * 2-27........................................... 30 Mar 95 * 2-166 Blank ............................. 30 Mar 95
2-6 ............................................ 20 May 92 2-28 Blank..................................11 Jul 90 * 2-167 thru 2-186 ...................... 30 Mar 95
* 2-7 thru 2-14 ............................ 30 Mar 95 * 2-29 thru 2-51 .......................... 30 Mar 95 * 2-187 thru 2-193 Added........... 30 Mar 95
2-15 thru 2-16 .......................... 20 May 92 2-52 Blank................................20 May 92 * 2-194 Blank Added .................. 30 Mar 95
* 2-17 thru 2-18 .......................... 30 Mar 95 * 2-53........................................... 30 Mar 95 * 2-195 thru 2-205 Added........... 30 Mar 95
2-19 Blank ............................... 20 May 92 2-54 Blank..................................11 Jul 90 * 2-206 Blank Added .................. 30 Mar 95
2-20 .......................................... 20 May 92 * 2-55 thru 2-85 .......................... 30 Mar 95
2-21 ........................................... 28 Apr 93 2-86 Blank..................................11 Jul 90



section II
installation
2.1 GENERAL 2.4 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
This section provides all information needed to in- The following instructions must be followed to en-
stall the EFIS-84 system. Installation data in this sure proper installation of the EFIS-84 Electronic
section consists of aircraft wiring procedures and Flight Instrument System.
precautions, installation and removal of EFIS-84
units, and system interconnect diagram. Caution
Improper operation may occur if the fol-

Note lowing instructions are not followed.
The information and instructions provided a. The minimum wire size for power lines is #20
in this section are recommendations and do AWG. #22 AWG wire can be used for all other
not necessarily correspond with any actual lines.
aircraft installation and wiring. This sec-
Note
tion cannot be used in place of a supple-
mental type certificate (STC) or type certifi- Aircraft approved wire must always be used
cate (TC). and extra care must be used when selecting
any wire smaller than #22 AWG.
2.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING
EQUIPMENT b. Read all notes on drawings and interconnects
and the planning paragraph before installing
Unpack the equipment carefully and make a care- any units or cabling.
ful visual inspection of each unit for possible ship- c. All straps on the DPU-84, MPU-84, and DSP-84
ping damage. All claims for damage should be filed have specific return pins on the rear con-
with the transportation company involved. If claims nectors. Straps used must be connected to the
for damage are to be filed, save the original ship- appropriate return pin to ensure reliable
ping container and packing materials. If no damage operation.
can be detected, replace packing materials in the
shipping container and save for future use, such as 2.5 PLANNING
storage or reshipment. Proper and careful planning prior to installation is
essential for reliable performance and easy mainte-
Caution nance. The following list is a sample of the points to
be considered in planning an installation:
Do not store or place the EFD-84 or MFD- a. Single or dual installation — isolation of the no 1
85( ) on metal surfaces within the proximity system from no 2 system may be required. Refer
of a strong magnetic field because the crt to applicable FARs for specific requirements.
display can be altered. b. Installation location — adequate airflow for
cooling, good bonding to aircraft ground, ease of
2.3 PREINSTALLATION CHECK cable routing, room for single or dual mounting
(piggyback or side-by-side).
Before installing the equipment in the aircraft, per- c. Installation configuration.
form the acceptance test in the maintenance section d. Compatibility with other equipment — loading
of this manual or connect units in a system mock- considerations.
up to verify proper operation. e. Cooling considerations.

installation 523-0775965
2.5.1 Installation Configurations The DSP-84 performs properly with convection

cooling at ambient air temperatures up to +55 °C
The number of display tubes determines the installa- (+131 °F). However, as with all electronic equip-
tion configuration of the EFIS-84 system. The typical ment, lower operating temperatures extend equip-
2-tube EFIS-84 system consists of one DPU-84 Dis- ment life. On the average, reducing the operating
play Processor Unit providing the drive signals for temperature by 15 to 20 °C (25 to 35 °F) doubles the
two EFD-84 Electronic Flight Displays. One EFD-84 mean time between failure (MTBF).
provides the EADI Electronic Attitude Director Indi-
cator function and the other EFD-84 provides the Units tightly packed in the radio rack heat each other
EHSI Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator func- through radiation, convection, and sometimes by di-
tion. Control of the electronic flight displays is pro- rect conduction. If space permits, separate the units
vided by one DSP-84 Display Select Panel. A 4-tube from each other to significantly improve reliability.
EFIS-84 system has the same equipment comple-
ment installed on both the pilot and copilot sides. Even a single unit operates at a much higher tem-
The 5-tube system adds the MFD-85B Multifunction perature in still air than in moving air. Fans or
Display and MPU-84 Multifunction Processor unit. some other means of moving the air around elec-
tronic equipment are usually a worthwhile invest-
2.5.2 Strapping Options ment. If a form of ram air cooling is installed, make
certain that rainwater cannot enter and be sprayed
Refer to general information section Table 1-4 for on the equipment.
DPU-84, MPU-84, and DSP-84 rear connector
strapping functions. It is required that the forced air-cooling system be
operating whenever the EFIS equipment is ener-
Caution gized. In addition, it is required that there be at
least one blower for each DPU, MPU and MFD, and
All connector straps should be kept as short for each EFD unit in the EFIS system. If the UMT-
as possible, preferably under 75 mm (3 in). 14A/15A Mount (or other ac-powered fans) or UMT-
14B/15B Mount (or other dc-powered fans) are used
Caution on the system components, the installation should
be designed to ensure that the equipment is not
To provide reliable lightning protection, each strap energized unless the fans are also energized.
is assigned a unique return pin on the rear connec- Ground operation of the system without the cooling
tor. Always strap to the assigned return pin, never air should not be allowed.
strap directly to ground.
When any maintenance activity is performed on the
2.5.3 Loading Considerations EFIS system, the supporting cooling system should
be checked for proper operation.
Figures 2-27 through 2-31 are EFIS system sche-
2.5.4.1 EFD Forced-Air Cooling Requirements
matics. These diagrams are prepared for all EFIS
boxes. They show all input and output pin numbers
The EFD is enclosed in a housing which has cooling
with a schematic first or last stage to show loading.
air holes on the top, bottom, both sides, and rear sur-
The system schematics are included to aid installa-
faces. The EFD-84 has an integral cooling fan
tion planning.
mounted on the rear of the unit. The unit mounting
flange is attached to the outer surface of the instru-
2.5.4 Cooling Considerations ment panel. Vertical mounting of the circuit cards
results in a low-resistance internal path for cooling
The EFD-84, MFD-85( ), MPU-84, and DPU-84 re- air entering the bottom and sides and flowing over
quire that forced-air cooling be provided. These the components to exit through the top surface. High
units are capable of operation at the short time ele- dissipation components are mounted on a finned
vated operating temperatures as specified in the heat sink located on the top of the unit. The tempera-
environmental requirements without forced-air ture of the forced air should be maintained as low as
cooling. However, continuous operation at these possible and must never exceed the rated operating
levels is not considered normal. temperature of the equipment. The forced air acts to

augment the natural convection cooling and results 2.5.5 Power Switching (Suggestions)
in substantially reduced operating temperatures.
Although the EFIS system components are exten-
2.5.4.2 DPU and MPU Forced-Air Cooling sively protected from voltage transients on the +28-
Requirements V dc power inputs (it meets TSO environmental
requirements), it is recommended that provisions
The DPU and MPU are designed to make effective be included that allow the systems to be powered
use of forced-air cooling. Cooling air enters through down during engine starts and during any other
a pattern of openings at the bottom, flows over the major aircraft electrical system activity. Improve-
components of the vertically mounted circuit cards, ments in reliability will be seen over systems that
and exits through air holes in the top and side sur- are not powered down during transients.
faces of the cover. 2.6 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS
It is required that forced air be introduced at the 2.6.1 General

base of the units and allowed to exit through the
top surface. The inlet temperature of the forced air Interconnect cables should be prepared in accor-
should be maintained as low as possible and must dance with the interconnect diagrams, figures 2-2
never exceed the rated operating temperature of through 2-5. Since this interconnect represents a
the equipment typical system, variations or modifications to meet
customer requirements are inevitable. Refer to
Uniformly distributed air flow of 2 pounds per min- paragraph 2.5 Planning, for information on some of
ute (approximately 30 cubic feet per minute) is re- the options that can affect the interconnect cabling.
quired for each DPU and 2.6 pounds per minute Refer to Collins Installation Practices Manual (523-
(approximately 40 cubic feet per minute) is re- 0776006) for guidelines concerning the installation
quired for the MPU. of avionics equipment.
The mounts, mating connectors, and contacts re-

Note quired to install an EFIS-84 system are listed in
Table 2-2. Table 2-1 lists the special tools required
Refer to EFIS-85/86 SIL 1-83 for additional for installation. Figure 2-1 illustrates the mating
and more detailed forced-air cooling instal- connector pin assignments.
lation requirements. Service information
letters are available from Collins General Warning
Aviation Division of Rockwell International.
Ensure that the aircraft battery master
2.5.4.3 MFD Forced-Air Cooling Requirements switch is turned off before installing any of
the interconnect cabling.
The construction of the MFD is similar to the EFD.
A mounting tray attaches to the inner surface of During preparation of the interconnect wiring ca-
the instrument panel, and openings are provided in bles, observe the following precautions:
the tray for cooling air. High dissipation compo- a. Read all notes on drawings and interconnect
nents are mounted on a finned heat sink at the diagrams prior to fabricating interconnect
connector end of the unit. wiring cables.
b. Bond and shield all parts of the aircraft electrical
Forced-air cooling of the MFD is accomplished by system, such as generator and ignition systems.
providing a stream of air directed at the perfo- c. Keep interconnect cables away from circuits
rated lower surface and finned heat sink. The carrying heavy current, pulse-transmitting
temperature of the forced air should be main- equipment, and other sources of interference.
tained as low as possible and must never exceed d. Make all external connections to the equipment
the rated operating temperature of the equipment. through designated connectors listed on
The air velocity should be between 100 and 200 interconnect wiring diagrams.
feet per minute. The forced air augments the e. For balanced connections, use a twisted-pair
natural convection cooling and results in substan- shielded wire for minimum pickup of electrostatic
tially reduced operating temperatures. and magnetic fields. Avoid long runs of wire, and

f. keep input and output circuits separated as much 6. Remove the crimped contact from the
as possible. crimping tool.
g. All interconnect wires and cables should be
marked in accordance with the Aircraft Note
Electronics Association Wire Marking Standard
(refer to Figure 2-26). Be sure that the wire insulation has not
h. Avoid excessive cable lengths, but allow suffi- been crimped into the wire barrel. The end
cient slack for movement due to vibration. portions of the insulation barrel should
i. After installation of the cables in the aircraft meet after crimping to form a complete
and before installation of the equipment, check loop. The wire barrel section of the contact
to ensure that aircraft power is applied to only should be completely closed after crimping.
the pins specified on the interconnect diagrams
and that all other wires and shields are b. Contact Insertion Instructions
properly terminated.
1. Use insertion tool (refer to Table 2-1 for part
2.6.2 Connector Contact Assembly and number) and insert each wired contact into the
Installation appropriate connector hole from the rear and
push until locked. Pull gently on each wire to
For more detailed instructions on contact crimping, ensure that the pin is properly locked into the
contact insertion, and contact extraction refer to connector. Refer to Figure 2-1 for the DPU-84,
Collins UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II Connectors EFD-84, DSP-84, MFD-85B and MPU-84
manual (523-0772277). mating connector pin locations and functions.
c. Contact Extraction Instructions

Note
Each connecting wire must be crimped in the con- 1. From the mating side of connector, insert
tact so that the crimped portion of the contact can the extraction tool (refer to Table 2-1 for
enter the connector shell. The crimped portion must part number) as far as possible into the
enter the shell to provide positive locking of the cavity containing the contact to be removed.
contact in the shell. 2. Push the ejector plunger of the extraction tool
forward, holding the handle in position to keep
a. Contact Crimping Instructions the tool from backing out of the connector.
3. Holding the tool in position, grasp the wire
1. Strip approximately 3.2 mm (0.125 in) of in- and gently pull the contact free from the
sulation from each interconnect wire. connector.
2. Place the contact into crimp tool (refer to
Table 2-1 for part number) with the tool lo- 2.6.3 Interconnect Wiring Check
cator resting between the wire barrel and
the insulation barrel. All Avionics Service Information Letter 1-88 Aircraft
3. Hold the contact in place and gently close Wiring Checkout Techniques contains suggested
the handles until the contact is held in methods of checking an aircraft wiring harness. Col-
place without deforming either the wire or lins CTS-9 Breakout Box Test Set (CPN 622-6720-001)
insulation barrel. is recommended for any DPU-84 and MPU-84 wiring
4. Hold wire straight and insert the stripped checkout and troubleshooting that requires a breakout
portion into the wire barrel until the insula- box for Thinline II full-height 160-pin connectors. A
tion butts against the tool locator. The bare breakout box is also recommended for EFD-84 and
wire should extend beyond the front of the DSP-84 wiring checkout and troubleshooting. Figure
wire barrel but no more than 0.8 mm (1/32 2-25 contains a parts list and schematic diagram to
in). Insulation should be aligned with the fabricate a breakout box to extend Cannon D-sub
insulation barrel. miniature connectors. Other cables may be fabricated
5. Hold the wire in place and complete the as required to extend units with different types of
crimp by closing the crimping tool handles connectors. This assembly may be fabricated according
until the ratchet releases. to Figure 2-25 or ordered from JcAIR Instrumentation
(pn 01-0314-00).

Table 2-1. Mating Connector Contacts and Special Tools.
DESCRIPTION PREFERRED ALTERNATE
VENDOR NAME VENDOR NAME

COLLINS AND COLLINS AND
PART NUMBER PART NUMBER PART NUMBER PART NUMBER
DSP-84, EFD-84,
FMM-85, ADA-85
Contact, crimp socket 371-0213-110 CNN 031-1007-067
Crimp tool 359-8102-010 QPL M22520/2-01
Locator 359-8102-080 QPL M22520/2-08
Insertion/extraction tool 371-8445-010 CNN CIET-20HD 370-8053-020 AMP 91066-4
MFD-85( )
Contact, crimp socket 359-0608-110 QPL M39029/57-354
Crimp tool 359-8102-010 QPL M22520/2-01
Locator 359-8102-060 QPL M22520/2-06
Insertion/extraction tool 359-8032-010 QPL M81969/14-01
UMT-14A/14B, UMT-15A/15B
Contact, crimp socket 359-0032-020 QPL M39029/32-259
Crimp tool 359-8102-010 QPL M22520/2-01
Locator 359-8102-020 QPL M22520/2-02
Insertion tool 359-4078-010 QPL MS24256A20
Extraction tool 359-4078-020 QPL MS24256R20
DPU-84, MPU-84
Contact, female tuning fork 1372-2514-110
Contact, female tuning fork 1372-2514-180
Required tools for female tuning fork contacts
Kit, tool (contains all 359-0697-0X0 part num- 359-0697-080 DAN DMC593
bers listed below)
Crimp tool 2359-0697-010 DAN GMT221 3623-8579-001

4623-8580-001
Insertion tool 359-0697-050 DAN DAK188 359-8029-010 QPL MS3323-22

(tweezer type) (probe type)
Extraction tool 359-0697-060 DAN DRK188 372-8091-010
a. Replacement probes (qty 2) 359-0697-070 DAN DRK188-1
b. Replacement ejector 359-0697-030 DAN DRK188-3
1372-2514-110 female fork type contacts are used with wire insulation diameters up to 1.27 mm (0.050 in). Wire with insulation di-
ameters from 1.27 mm (0.050 in) to 2.03 mm (0.080 in) use contact 372-2514-180. Installer must order the quantity of each desired.
Alternates to the preferred contacts 372-2514-110 and 372-2514-180 are 372-2514-010 and 372-2514-080 respectively.
2This crimp tool has two jaw openings, one for each range of insulation diameter given.
3This crimp tool is for use with contacts 372-2514-110 only.
4This crimp tool is for use with contacts 372-2514-180 only.
Vendor codes: AMP = AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL = Military Spec

Table 2-2. EFIS-84 Systems Installation Hardware Listing.
QTY/ COLLINS VENDOR NAME

UNIT DESCRIPTION NOTES PART NUMBER AND
PART NUMBER
EFD-84 INSTALLATION HARDWARE
1 P1 mating connector housing, 25 pin D subminiature (3) 371-0213-030 CNN DBMA25S-A183-F0
1 P2 mating connector housing, 25 pin D subminiature (3) 371-0213-030 CNN DBMA25S-A183-F0
50 Contacts, crimp socket (2) 371-0213-110 CNN 031-1007-067
2 Hood/cable clamp 371-0146-000 CNN DB24659
2 Screw lock assembly kit (2 per kit) 371-0040-010 CNN D20419-120
1 Key plug kit (2 per kit) 629-8381-001
4 Machine screw (0.138-32 UNC-2A) Customer

supplied
1 Mooring plate, EFD-84 553-6590-004
1 Inclinometer, used for EADI position only (Refer to Table 1-1

for a complete list)
DSP-84 INSTALLATION HARDWARE
1 P1 mating connector housing, 25-pin D subminiature (3) 371-0213-030 CNN DBMA25S-A183-F0
1 P2 mating connector housing, 50-pin D subminiature (3) 371-0213-050 CNN DDMA50S-A183-F0
1 Screw lock assembly kit for P1 (2 per kit) 371-0040-010 CNN D20419-120
1 Screw lock assembly kit for P2 (2 per kit) 371-0040-040 CNN D20420-98
1 Hood/cable clamp for P1 371-0146-000 CNN DB24659
1 Hood/cable clamp for P2 371-0148-000 CNN DD24661


PART NUMBER
DPU-84 INSTALLATION HARDWARE
2 Mating connector kit, Collins Thinline, 160 pin, 4-row, full 634-1020-001
height
320 Contacts, female tuning fork (2)(4) 372-2514-110

(2)(4) 372-2514-180
1 UMT-14 Mount, 1/2-ATR short, full height (1) 622-6171-001
UMT-14A Mount, 1/2-ATR short, full height with built-in ac (1)(6) 622-6901-001
fan
UMT-14B Mount, 1/2-ATR short, full height with built-in dc (1)(6) 622-7265-001
fan (19300 rpm fan, Rotron pn 504558 (CPN 009-0271-010))
1 Mating connector for UMT-14A/14B cooling fan (3 contacts (2) 359-0301-790 QPL MS3126F8-3S
supplied with connector)
1 UMT-14( ) grounding bracket 634-2626-001
DPU-84 INSTALLATION HARDWARE (Cont)
1 or 2 Cooling fan, includes hard-wired Rotron blower pn 032105 (6) 009-1965-030 ROT 032105
with 3150 rpm fan motor. +28 V dc power and 6.44 W max.
Used with UMT-14 Mount.
1 or 2 FMM-85 (-001) Fan Monitor Module, compatible with Rotron (4) 622-7154-001
blower pn 032105 with 3150 rpm fan motor. (optional)
1 FMM-85 (-002) Fan Monitor Module, compatible with Rotron 622-7154-002

dc blower pn 504558 with 19 300 rpm fan motor. Used with (optional)
UMT-14B Mount.
MFD-85( ) INSTALLATION HARDWARE
1 Mating connector without grounding fingers (55 contacts sup- (1)(2) 359-0635-180 QPL MS27473T16F-35SB
plied with connector)
Mating connector with grounding fingers (55 contacts sup- (1)(2) 359-0645-170 QPL MS27484T16F-35SB
plied with connector)
1 Clamp, strain relief, straight (1) 359-0637-050 QPL MS27506F16-2
Clamp, strain relief, 90-degree (1) 359-0637-150 QPL MS27507F16
1 IMT-300 Mounting Tray (1) 622-4333-001
IMT-85 Combined mount for MFD and WXP (1) 622-6878-001
1 Finger guard, used with IMT-85 009-1766-050
1 Cooling fan, includes hard-wired Rotron blower pn 032105 (6) 009-1965-030 ROT 032105
1 FMM-85 (-001) Fan Monitor Module, compatible with Rotron (4) 622-7154-001
blower pn 032105 with 3150 rpm fan motor. (Optional)


PART NUMBER
MPU-84 INSTALLATION HARDWARE
3 Mating connector kit, Collins Thinline, 160 pin, 4-row, full 634-1020-001
height
480 Contacts, female tuning fork (2)(4) 372-2514-110

(2)(4) 372-2514-180
1 UMT-15 Mount, 3/4-ATR short, full height (1) 622-6172-001
UMT-15A Mount, 3/4-ATR short, full height with built-in ac (1)(6) 622-6902-001
fan
UMT-15B Mount, 3/4-ATR short, full height with built-in dc (1)(6) 622-7266-001
fan (19300 rpm fan, Rotron pn 504558 (CPN 009-0271-010))
1 Mating connector for UMT-15A/15B cooling fan (3 contacts (2) 359-0301-790 QPL MS3126F8-3S
supplied with connector)
1 UMT-15( ) grounding bracket 634-2627-001
1 or 2 Cooling fan, includes hard-wired Rotron blower pn 032105 (6) 009-1965-030 ROT 032105
Used with UMT-15 mount.
MPU-84 INSTALLATION HARDWARE (Cont)
1 or 2 FMM-85 (-001) Fan Monitor Module, compatible with Rotron (4) 622-7154-001
blower pn 032105 with 3150 rpm fan motor. (optional)
1 FMM-85 (-002) Fan Monitor Module, compatible with Rotron (4) 622-7154-002
dc blower pn 504558 with 19300 rpm fan motor. Used with (optional)
UMT-15B mount.
FMM-85 INSTALLATION HARDWARE
1 P1 mating connector housing, 9-pin D subminiature (3) 371-0213-010 CNN DEMA9S-A183-F0
1 Hood/cable clamp/latch 371-0399-240 PTR MD9-000-J-VL-464.1
1 Adapter bracket for -002 (supplied with FMM-85 (-002)) 653-1303-001


PART NUMBER
ADA-85 INSTALLATION HARDWARE
1 P1 mating connector housing, 50-pin D subminiature (3) 371-0213-050 CNN DDMA50S-A183-F0
1 Hood/cable clamp/latch 371-0399-280 PTR MD50-000-J-VL-

464.5
1 Mount 653-9015-001
(1) Choose one.

(2) Refer to Table 2-1 for contact tooling information.
(3) Mating connector part number does not include snap-in crimp socket contacts.
(4) Choose as required for total quantity per unit.
(5) Vendor codes: CNN = ITT Cannon, QPL = Military Spec, PTR = Positronics ROT = EG&G Rotron.
(6) Cooling air is required for DPU, MPU, and MFD.
2.7 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES For HIRF version equipment, ensure that the in-
strument panel or pedestal to which the equipment
The following paragraphs provide instructions for is mounted is adequately grounded to the aircraft
installing the EFIS-84 Electronic Flight Instrument airframe. HIRF version LRUs are grounded to the
System. If other associated equipment is to be in- aircraft airframe through the front or back
stalled, refer to the applicable equipment manual (depending on the installation) mounting surface of
for installation procedures. the panel or pedestal. In order to ensure proper
grounding, the mounting surface must be clean and
Warning free of paint in the areas indicated on the equip-
ment’s outline and mounting (O&M) diagram.
Ensure that the aircraft battery master Clean the paint free areas with a suitable solvent.
switch is turned off before installing any Apply a chromate solution (CPN 287-0004-010)
equipment, mounts, or interconnect cables. with a swab or brush to the areas. After approxi-
mately 15 seconds, remove any excessive solution
with a damp cloth. See the LRUs O&M diagram for
2.7.1 HIRF and Lightning Considerations
any additional mounting information and the inter-
connect drawings for wiring requirements.
All versions of the EFD-84, DSP-84 AND MFD-85( )
can comply with DO-160C HIRF and lightning re-
Non-HIRF version LRUs are grounded to the aircraft
quirements by using proper installation techniques.
airframe with RF ground straps connected from the
Those equipments identified as “HIRF versions”
connector backshell of UMT mount to the airframe.
(HIRF and Lightning qualified, certified or compli-
The instrument panel or pedestal must also be ade-
ant) require less wiring effort to comply with the
quately grounded to the aircraft airframe. See the
HIRF and lightning requirements. (See intercon-
LRUs outline and mounting diagram for
nect drawing notes.)

additional installation information and the Intercon- desired panel cutout and outline and mounting di-
nect Drawings for wiring requirements. mensions. Note that the EHSI can be either front or
rear mounted and the panel cutouts are different for
2.7.2 EFD-84 Used as an Electronic Attitude the two methods.
Director Indicator (EADI)
2.7.3.1 Installation
Degauss the EADI and mount it directly above the
electronic horizontal situation indicator, laterally Connect the twist-lock interconnect cable to the
centered on the pilot’s instrument panel. Position it rear connector of the EHSI. Then slide the unit into
so that the top of the instrument remains visible the instrument panel and secure with four screws,
when the pilot’s seat is in the highest and most inserting one in each corner. EFD-84 is secured by
forward position. four 0.138-32 UNC-2A (#6-32) screws. If a mooring
plate (CPN 553-6590-004) is used, it must be in-
Note stalled over the instrument case before the cable is
connected.
Be sure that the inclinometer is installed on
the front of the EADI. Inclinometer shall be 2.7.3.2 Removal
levelled by the installer.
Remove the four screws, one in each corner, that
The EADI is mounted from either the front or back secure the EHSI to the aircraft instrument panel.
of the aircraft flight instrument panel. It is secured Slide the instrument out of the panel and remove
by four screws. Refer to Figure 2-8 for the desired the interconnect cable.
panel cutout and the outline and mounting dimen-
sions. Note that the EADI can be either front or 2.7.4 DSP-84 Display Select Panels
rear mounted and that the panel cutouts are differ-
ent for the two methods of mounting. Mount the DSP-84 in the aircraft center pedestal
or in any convenient location that allows pilot
2.7.2.1 Installation and copilot easy access to the controls. Refer to
Figure 2-7 for outline and mounting dimensions
Connect the twist lock interconnect cable to the rear and connector keying information. Remember that
connector of the EADI. Then slide the unit into the one DSP-84 is required for each side in a 4-tube crt
instrument panel and secure with four screws, in- system.
serting one in each corner. EFD-84 is secured by four
0.138-32 UNC-2A (#6-32) screws. If a mooring plate 2.7.4.1 Installation
(CPN 553-6590-004) is used, it must be installed over
the instrument case before the cable is connected. Connect the screw lock cable assemblies to the
DSP-84 rear connectors. Insert the display control
2.7.2.2 Removal panel into the proper location and secure with the
two Dzus fasteners.
Remove the four screws, one in each corner, that
secure the EADI to the aircraft instrument panel. 2.7.4.2 Removal
Slide the EADI out of the aircraft instrument panel
until the mating connector can be reached. Discon- Unlock Dzus fasteners, remove the display select
nect the twist-lock connector, and carefully remove panel from its mounting location, and disconnect
the unit. the screw lock cable assemblies.
2.7.3 EFD-84 Used as an Electronic 2.7.5 MFD-85( ) Multifunction Display

Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI)
The multifunction display is to be installed in the
Degauss the EHSI. It should be mounted in the cockpit in a location on the instrument panel that
flight instrument panel under the EADI where it is allows good visibility and control access by both the
close to and slightly below the pilot’s line of vision. It pilot and copilot. The MFD-85( ) uses the IMT-300
is secured by four screws. Refer to Figure 2-8 for the Mounting Tray. Refer to Figure 2-9 for the data
necessary to install the MFD-85( ) and IMT-300.

Note the cable assembly is not getting caught on the

tray.
Some installations require that the MFD- c. Disconnect the mating connector and cable
85( ) and the WXP-85C/850A be stack assembly and remove the MFD-85( ).
mounted using a single mounting tray. Re- d. Remove the IMT-300 tray, if necessary, by first
fer to paragraph 2.7.5 for the procedure removing the four 0.138-32 UNC-2A (#6-32)
using the IMT-85 Mounting Tray. flat-head screws. The IMT-300 is equipped with
self-locking nuts.
2.7.6 Combined MFD-85( ) and WXP-85C/-850A
To install the MFD-85( ) and IMT-300, observe the Installation Using IMT-85 Mounting
following precautions: Tray
a. The size of the panel cutout is shown in
Figure 2-9.
b. Drill the four holes as shown in Figure 2-9 to
To install the MFD-85( ), WXP-85C/-850A, and
attach the IMT-300.
IMT-85, refer to the following steps.
c. Clean the area of the screw holes on the back of
the instrument panel where the tray will be a. Read all the notes on the IMT-85 outline and
attached. This is to ensure a good electrical mounting diagram, Figure 2-10, before con-
contact. tinuing. Pay attention to the caution in note 7.
d. Install the IMT-300 into the instrument panel b. Cut out the instrument panel for installation of
using four 0.138-32 UNC-2A (#6-32) flathead the equipment. The size of the panel cutout is
screws. The IMT-300 is equipped with self- shown in Figure 2-10.
locking nuts. c. Refer to Figure 2-10, read note 10, and select a
e. Before installing the MFD-85( ) into the IMT- mounting hole pattern for the IMT-85. Drill the
300, make sure the locking pawls on the bottom specified holes.
of the unit are properly retracted so that unit d. Clean the area of the screw holes where the
will slide easily into the tray. tray will be attached. This is to ensure a good
f. If the cable is long enough, bring the cable out electrical contact.
through the panel opening and connect it to the e. Refer to Figure 2-10, note 5. Install the blower
unit connector. Make sure that it is properly fan (not supplied with the IMT-85). Mounting
and securely engaged. hole patterns (note 6) for the fan are provided
g. Slide the MFD-85( ) into the IMT-300 but do on the center line of the tray or 0.250 inch on
not force. If it does not slide into position easily, either side of center line if needed to avoid
check alignment of the indicator with the index aircraft structure.
pins on the rear of the IMT-300. If the mating f. Dress and route WXP-85C/-0850A wiring
connector is already installed, make sure the harness over the center of the fan in a manner
cable assembly is not getting caught on the that will minimize the restriction of air flow
tray. from the blower.
h. After full insertion, use a Phillips-head screw-
driver to tighten the two twist-lock pawls to Caution
secure the unit to the tray.
i. If not already connected and locked, connect Use a finger guard (CPN 009-1766-050 or
mating connector to MFD-85( ). equivalent) with the blower to protect the
WXP-85C/-0850 A wiring harness from the
2.7.5.2 Removal
rotating fan blades.
To remove the MFD-85( ) and IMT-300, observe the
following procedures: g. Connect the screw lock cable assemblies to the
WXP-85C/-850A rear connectors. Insert the
a. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to loosen the unit in its proper location and secure it with
two twist-lock pawls that secure the MFD-85( ) integral turnlock fasteners. Use a 0.093 hexkey
to the IMT-300 tray. drive to tighten the fasteners. Clearance is
b. Slide the MFD-85( ) out of the tray far enough to required on rear surfaces of panel in two places
allow access to the mating connector. Make sure for the turnlock fasteners.

h. Before installing the MFD-85( ), make sure the c. Verify orientation of mating connector keyway
locking pawls on the bottom of the unit are pins (part of mating connector kits). Refer to
properly retracted so that the unit will slide Figure 2-1 (sheets 2 and 3) for mating connector
easily into the tray. keyway pin indexing. Darkened part of keyway
i. If the MFD-85( ) mating cable is long enough, indicates the blocked portion.
bring the cable out through the panel opening d. Position DPU interconnecting cables, with
and connect it to the MFD-85( ) rear connector. mating connectors, into rear of mount. Secure
Make sure that it is properly and securely mating connectors to connector bracket at rear
engaged. of mount.
j. Slide the MFD-85( ) into the panel opening and e. Verify all interconnect wiring before pro-
onto the mounting tray but do not force it. If ceeding. Make sure +28-V dc input power is
the mating connector cable is attached pull or applied only to pins P1-82, 83, and P2-50, 51,
push it back through the rear opening of the 82, and 83.
tray. Make sure that the cable is not getting f. Remove aircraft power and slide DPU into
caught on the tray. mount until mating connectors are fully
k. After full insertion, use a Phillips-head screw- engaged.
driver to tighten the two twist-lock pawls to g. Position knurled knobs on front of mount to
secure the unit. engage DPU holddown hooks. Tighten knurled
l. If the mating connector is not already con- knobs to secure unit to mount. Safety-wire the
nected and locked, connect it to the MFD-85( ). knurled knobs.
h. Ensure that a good electrical bond exists
2.7.6.2 Removal between the unit and the mount.
i. Assemble the cooling fan mating connector kit.
Reverse the procedure used in paragraph 2.7.6.1. Make sure that UMT-14A 115-V ac 1φ, 400-Hz
input power is applied to pins P3-A and P3-B.
Make sure that UMT-14B +28-V dc input power
2.7.7 DPU-84 Display Processor Unit (DPU)
is applied to pin P3-B, power ground is P3-A,
and UMT-14/14A/14B Mount
and optional fan sensor output is P3-C.
j. Secure cooling fan mating connector to
The DPU-84 is normally mounted in the radio
connector J3 at rear of mount.
equipment rack with the UMT-14( ) Universal
Mount. Refer to Figure 2-6 for DPU outline and 2.7.7.2 Removal
mounting dimensions. The UMT-14, UMT-14A, or
UMT-14B is the equipment mount for the DPU. a. Remove safety wire, and loosen the knurled
Refer to Figure 2-12 (UMT-14), Figure 2-13 (UMT- knobs that secure the unit to the mount.
14A), or Figure 2-14 (UMT-14B) outline and b. Slide the DPU straight out to disconnect it from
mounting dimensions. The UMT-14/14A/14B con- the mount connectors. Pin and socket damage
nector mounting accommodates 4-row Collins may occur if the unit is moved up or side-ways
Thinline II type connectors. The mating connectors while connectors are still engaged.
are not supplied with the mount. Two mating con-
nector kits (CPN 634-1020-001) are required for 2.7.8 MPU-84 Multifunction Processor Unit
installation of the DPU-84. One cooling fan mating (MPU) and UMT-15/15A/15B Mount
connector kit (CPN 371-6917-000) is required for Refer to Figure 2-11 for MPU outline and mounting
UMT-14A or UMT-14B. dimensions. The UMT-15, UMT-15A, or UMT-15B is
the equipment mount for the MPU. Refer to
2.7.7.1 Installation Figure 2-15 (UMT-15), Figure 2-16 (UMT-15A), or
Figure 2-17 (UMT-15B) for outline and mounting
a. Assemble the two Thinline mating connector kits dimensions. The UMT-15( ) connector mounting ac-
according to procedures in Collins UMT-( ) commodates 4-row Collins Thinline type connectors.
Mount and Thinline II Connectors manual (523- Mating connectors are not supplied with the mount.
0772277). Refer to paragraph 2.7.9 for additional Three mating connector kits (CPN 634-1020-001) are
mating connector kit assembly instructions. required for installation of the MPU-84. One cooling
b. Install the UMT-14( ) Mount. fan mating connector kit (CPN 371-6917-000) is re-
quired for UMT-15A or UMT-15B.

a. Assemble the three Thinline mating connector

kits according to procedures in Collins UMT-( )
Mount and Thinline II Connectors manual (523-
0772277). Refer to paragraph 2.7.8 for additional
mating connector kit assembly instructions.
b. Install the UMT-15( ) Mount.
c. Verify orientation of mating connector keyway
pins (part of mating connector kits). Refer to
Figure 2-1 (sheets 6, 7, and 8) for mating
connector keyway pin indexing. Darkened part
of keyway indicates the blocked portion.
d. Position MPU interconnecting cables, with mating
connectors, into rear of mount. Secure mating
connectors to connector bracket at rear of mount. a. Install capscrews (CPN 324-2609-000) into
e. Verify all interconnect wiring before pro- counterbore of connector (CPN 634-1388-001).
ceeding. Make sure that 28-V dc input power is The cap-screws require a 0.109 hexdrive socket
applied only to pins P1-78, 79, 82, and 83. (not supplied).
f. Remove aircraft power and slide MPU into
mount until mating connectors are fully Note
engaged.
g. Position knurled knobs on front of mount to Modify hexdrive wrench (not supplied) as
engage MPU holddown hooks. Tighten knurled shown and use it on a long extension to aid
knobs to secure unit to mount. Safety-wire the connector installation into the mount.
knurled knobs.
h. Ensure that a good electrical bond exists
between the unit and the mount.
i. Assemble the cooling fan mating connector kit.
Make sure that UMT-15A 115-V ac, 1φ, 400-Hz
input power is applied to pins P4-A and P4-B.
Make sure that UMT-15B +28-V dc input power
is applied to pin P4-B, power ground is P4-A,
and optional fan sensor output is P4-C.
j. Secure cooling fan mating connector to con-
nector J4 at rear of mount.
2.7.8.2 Removal
a. Remove safety wire, and loosen knurled knobs b. Install and orient the keyway as shown on the
that secure unit to mount. outline and mounting diagram for the DPU
b. Slide the MPU straight out to disconnect it (Figure 2-6) and MPU (Figure 2-11). The beveled
from mount connectors. Pin and socket damage portion of the keyway faces the mating side of
may occur if the unit is moved up or sideways the connector as shown. Secure each indexing
while connectors are still engaged. keyway (CPN 768-3401-003) to the connector
with a setscrew (CPN 328-5030-000).
2.7.9 Mating Connector Kit (CPN 634-1020-001)
Assembly Instructions 2.7.10 FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module
Refer to the illustration below and the following Refer to Figure 2-19 and Figure 2-21 for outline
steps to assemble DPU mating connector kit (CPN and mounting dimensions and figures 2-20 and 2-
634-1020-001). The assembled kit will be wired to 22 for interconnect diagram. Use #22 AWG wire for
an interconnect cable, then it will be installed on a interconnect wiring.
mount (such as the UMT-14( )/15( ).

2.7.10.1 FMM-85 (-001) Installation 2-23. After the mount has been installed and the in-
terconnect cable verified, tighten the Phillips-head
The FMM-85 (-001) may be located directly on any screw on the front of the mount, securing the ADA-
one of the fan’s four sides, depending on space 85 in place. Ensure that polarizing key plugs (CPN
requirements/limitations. Refer to Figure 2-18 for 629-8339-001) have been installed in positions 39
tubeaxial fan (CPN 009-1965-030) outline and and 46 on the mating connector. Install the mating
mounting diagram. connector on the front of the ADA-85 and secure the
latch.
2.7.10.2 FMM-85 (-002) Installation
2.7.11.2 Removal
The FMM-85 (-002) is attached to the UMT-14B
Universal Mount blower plenum with an adapter
bracket (CPN 653-1303-001) that is supplied with Open the mating connector latch and disconnect
the FMM-85 (-002). Use the bracket to mount in the mating connector from the front of the ADA-85.
any convenient location. Loosen the Phillips-head screw on the front of the
mount, and remove the ADA-85.
a. Attach FMM-85 (-002) to adapter bracket with
two 0.138 x 0.31 screws (CPN 343-0168-000) 2.8 TESTING
that are supplied with the FMM-85.
b. Remove bottom blower plenum mounting 2.8.1 Preinstallation Testing
screws from mount (four from the UMT-14B).
c. Attach FMM-85 (-002) and adapter bracket to
mount with three 0.112-40 x 0.31 screws (CPN To verify proper operation before installing the
343-0134-000),supplied with the FMM-85 equipment in the aircraft, perform the acceptance
(-002). Install screws into screw holes vacated test in the maintenance section of this manual or
in step b. connect unit in a system mock-up.
2.7.10.3 Removal 2.8.2 Postinstallation Testing
For short time removal, cap and secure connectors Ensure that all equipment connectors and mating
to prevent wire and connector damage. No other connectors are securely mated. After all cabling has
special removal instructions are required. been installed and equipment mounted in the air-
craft, perform the following test procedure to verify
2.7.11 ADA-85 Air Data Adapter the operation of the EFIS-84 in the aircraft. Refer
to Table 2-4 for postinstallation tests. If a FAIL in-
To minimize wire length, the ADA-85 should be dication appears on any crt at any time, perform
mounted in the radio equipment rack adjacent to the test procedures that are located in the mainte-
the ADC-80( ) Air Data Computer. An ADA-85 nance section.
mount (CPN 653-9015-001) is required for each
unit. This single mount allows the ADA-85 to be
mounted either vertically or horizontally. Two units 2.8.2.1 Power Requirements
can be mounted end to end in approximately the
same length as an ADC-80( ). Refer to Figure 2-23 All power required to perform the system tests is
for the ADA-85 outline and mounting diagram. provided by the aircraft in which the system is
Refer to Figure 2-24 for the ADA-85 interconnect installed.
diagram.
2.8.2.2 Diagnostic Information
Install the mount for the ADA-85 using the dimen- Refer to the maintenance section of this manual for
sions shown in outline and mounting diagram figure diagnostic code information.

Table 2-4. EFIS-84 Postinstallation Test.
TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULT
1.0 POWER UP
1.1 Connect the aircraft battery and apply power to the EFIS-84 Check that the EADI and EHSI displays are normal. Re-
system and turn on the cooling air blowers. Apply power to place any blown fuses and reset any circuit breakers that
any other systems that supply data to the EFIS-84 system tripped.
(such as FCS, NAV, DME, AHRS, air data, radio altitude,
and weather radar). Provide valid input signals to these
sensors as required to eliminate all warning flags.
Note
The EFIS displays in this system flag certain sensor failures by removing affected display elements. To be able to test
these elements, it is necessary to supply valid sensor inputs.
1.2 Turn the external DIM controls. Verify that EADI and EHSI brightness is controlled.
Note
Beginning here, unless otherwise specified, the following steps refer to the no 1 side units, but should be repeated for the
no 2 side, reading all references to no 1 as no 2.
2.0 DSP-84 CONTROLS
2.1 Set DSP-84 format switch to HSI. Verify that pictures appear on the EADI and EHSI. The
EADI attitude and EHSI heading displays will be random
but should be steady.
2.2 Decision Height
a. Turn the DSP DH SET knob. Verify that it controls the DH display (lower right corner)
on EADI.
b. Verify DSP-84 DH SET range is 0 to 999 feet. DH flashes at 0 foot.
c. Push the TST pushbutton (part of DH SET knob). Verify that both the radio altitude and DH set values are
displayed on the EADI.
d. Release TST pushbutton.
2.3 EHSI Formats
a. Set DSP FORMAT switch to ARC and MAP positions. Verify that the EHSI picture changes to an expanded
compass sector.
b. Turn the DSP RNG (range) knob. Verify that the EHSI range is controlled by the RNG
knob.
c. Set DSP FORMAT switch to WX ARC and WX MAP Verify that the EHSI picture changes to an expanded
positions. compass sector with the WX mode annunciated at the end
of the half-scale range arc.
(Cont) d. Turn the WXP-85( )/-850( ) RANGE knob. Verify that the EHSI range is controlled by the WXP
RANGE knob.

Warning
2.3
The area within the scan arc and within 5 meters (15 feet) of an operating WXR-300 Weather Radar System constitutes
(Cont) a hazardous area. Do not operate the system in any mode other than standby (STBY) or test (TST) when the antenna
might scan over personnel within that range. Never turn the transmitter on while in a hangar. FAA Advisory Circular
20-68B or superseding documents provide additional details regarding the radiation hazards associated with ground op-
eration of airborne weather radar.
e. Turn the WXP-85( )/-850( ) MODE switch to TEST. Weather radar test pattern is displayed on the EHSI.
EHSI displays the mode selected on the WXP panel (see
below).
WXP-85( ):
OFF — system deenergized
STBY — system energized, but no transmitter output
TEST — test pattern, but no transmitter output
WXP-850( ):
f. Return DSP FORMAT switch to HSI position. Weather radar display is removed.
2.4 Active Course Menu
a. Set DSP COURSE switch to ACT (active) course.
b. Push the CRS SEL button repeatedly to cycle through The active course annunciator changes to white inside a
the active course sensor menu. white box. Verify that different navigation sources are
displayed on the left side of the EHSI. Possible sensor
selections are VOR/LOC1, FMS1, MLS1, TCN1,
VOR/LOC2, FMS2, MLS2, and TCN2.
b. When the desired sensor is displayed, push and hold in The white active course annunciator changes to the same
for greater than one second to select an active course color as the active course arrow and the white box is re-
sensor. Not pushing the CRS SEL button for 5 seconds moved.
causes the active course to return to the previously se-
lected sensor.
Note
Only those navigation sources enabled by interconnect strapping will be shown as possible selection.
c. Rotate the CRS knob on the DSP. Verify that the active course arrow on the EHSI rotates.
d. Push the PUSH CRS DIRECT button. Verify that the active course arrow automatically rotates
directly toward the station or waypoint until the naviga-
tion source selected provides zero crosstrack deviation.

2.5 Preset Course Menu
a. Set DSP COURSE switch to PRE (preset) course.
b. Push the CRS SEL button repeatedly to cycle through Note that different navigation sources are displayed on
the preset course sensor menu. The last sensor displayed the left side of the EHSI below the active course annun-
remains in view. ciation. Possible sensor selections are VOR/LOC1, FMS1,
MLS1, TCN1, VOR/LOC2, FMS2, MLS2, and TCN2.
c. Push and hold in for greater than one second to remove

a preset course sensor if displayed or return it for dis-
play if previously blanked.
2.5 d. Rotate the CRS knob on the DSP. Verify that the preset course arrow on the EHSI rotates.
2.6 Course Transfer
Set DSP COURSE switch to XFR (transfer) course. The The preset course is transferred to the active course and
transfer position is a spring-loaded momentary switch. the previous active course is transferred to the preset
course but is not displayed.
2.7 Bearing Pointer Select
a. Push the DSP single bar button repeatedly to cycle Single bar bearing pointer appears on the EHSI. Possible
through the bearing pointer menu. The last sensor dis- sensor selections are VOR1, VOR2, ADF1, ADF2, TCN1,
played remains in view. TCN2, FMS1, FMS2, and off for the pilot's side and VOR2,
VOR1, ADF2, ADF1, TCN2, TCN1, FMS2, FMS1, and off
for the copilot's side.
b. Push the DSP double bar button repeatedly to cycle Double bar bearing pointer appears on the EHSI. Possible
through the bearing pointer menu. The last sensor dis- sensor selections are VOR1, VOR2, ADF2, TCN1, TCN2,
played remains in view. FMS1, FMS2, and off for the pilot's side and VOR2, VOR1,
ADF2, ADF1, TCN2, TCN1, FMS2, FMS1, and off for the
copilot's side.
2.8 Heading Select
a. Rotate the DSP HDG knob. Verify that the heading cursor moves along the edge of the
compass card.
b. Push the DSP PUSH HDG SYNC button. Verify that the heading cursor rotates to match the air-
plane heading under the lubber line on the EHSI.
2.9 NAV DATA Select
a. Rotate DSP-84 NAV DATA switch to WIND, GSP, AND Verify that dashes appear or 00.00 appears in upper right
TTG. corner of EHSI, and label changes from ---> (for wind di-
rection), GSP, and TTG.
b. Rotate DSP-84 NAV DATA switch to ET (elapsed time). Verify that 00.00 appears in upper right corner of EHSI.
c. Repeatedly push the S/S (start/stop) button. Verify that sequential pushing of the S/S button starts,
stops, and resets the elapsed timer display.
d. Rotate the TIMER SET knob to enter the timer count Verify a time appears in the upper right corner of EHSI.
down mode. Push the S/S (start/stop) button. Verify that sequential pushing of the S/S button starts,
stops, and resets the time display.

3.0 SELF-TEST MODE
Note
Self-test is enabled when an external installer supplied switch or switches (labeled EFIS TEST or similar) is actuated
and held for longer than 4 seconds.
3.1 Initiate EFIS self-test mode. Verify that an increment of 10 degrees is added to the
current values of pitch and roll, and 20 degrees is added to
the heading. A positive value is added to the pilot's side; a
negative value, to the copilot's side.
3.1 Verify that PIT, ROL, and HDG comparator warning mes-
sages are displayed.
Verify that the attitude display is removed from view and

all flags associated with the EADI and EHSI displays are
brought into view.
3.2 Release the EFIS self-test switch. Verify that the displays return to normal operation.
3.3 Reset the PIT, ROL, and HDG comparators by pushing the Resetting the button or switch once stops the indications
external installer supplied comparator reset button or from flashing. Resetting a second time eliminates the
switch. comparator messages if the conditions causing the com-
parator warning messages have been eliminated.
4.0 MFD-85(B) CHECKOUT
a. Push MFD front panel PWR button to turn unit on. Verify there is a picture on the MFD-85B.
b. Push RDR button on MFD-85B. Verify the MFD-85B displays the mode selected on the
WXP-85( )/850( ) control panel.
c. Push RDR button again. Verify that radar display is removed.
d. Push NAV button. Verify that a NAV display is shown.
e. Push the line select button opposite the boxed arrow. Verify the NAV menu appears for additional selections if
desired.
f. Push RMT button. Verify the RMT menu appears for additional selections if
desired.
g. Push NAV button. Verify the NAV display returns.
h. Push MFD front panel PWR button to turn unit off.

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 1 of 8). Mating

Connector Pin Assignments
(DSP-84 Display Select Panel)

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 2). Mating














SCHEMATIC CHANGES
REVISION DESCRIPTION OF REVISION SERVICE

IDENTIFICATION AND REASON FOR CHANGE BULLETIN EFFECTIVITY
Add 2-tube interconnect diagram to None REV -

manual.
Added strap 21 (LRN bus speed) and None REV B

various minor corrections.
Enhanced 2-tube interconnect diagram None

and upgrades.
Figure 2-2 (Sheet A). EFIS-84 Electronic

Flight Instrument System,
2-Tube Interconnect Diagram
Revised 30 March 1995 2-27/(2-28 blank)

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 1 of 23). EFIS-84 Electronic


Figure 2-2 (Sheet 2). EFIS-84 Electronic












































SCHEMATIC CHANGES

Add 3-tube interconnect diagram to None REV -

manual.
Added strap 21 (LRN bus speed) and None REV B


and upgrades.






























































SCHEMATIC CHANGES

Various minor corrections None REV C
Added strap 21 (LRN bus speed) and None REV E


and upgrades.


































































SCHEMATIC CHANGES

Add 5-tube interconnect diagram to None REV A

manual.
Added strap 21 (LRN bus speed) and None REV C


and upgrades.


































































Figure 2-6. DPU-84 Display Processor Unit,

Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-7. DSP-84 Display Select Panel,


Figure 2-8 (Sheet 1 of 2). EFD-84 Electronic Flight

Display, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-8 (Sheet 2). EFD-84 Electronic Flight

Display, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-9. MFD-85B Multifunction

Display and IMT-300 Mount,

Figure 2-10 (Sheet 1 of 2). IMT-85 Mounting Tray,


Figure 2-10 (Sheet 2). IMT-85 Mounting Tray,


Figure 2-11. MPU-84 Multifunction

Processor Unit, Outline
and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-12. UMT-14 Mount for DPU-84,


Figure 2-13 (Sheet 1 of 2). UMT-14A Mount for

DPU-84, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 2). UMT-14A Mount for


Figure 2-14 (Sheet 1 of 2). UMT-14B Mount for


Figure 2-14 (Sheet 2). UMT-14B Mount for


Figure 2-15. UMT-15 Mount for MPU-84,


Figure 2-16 (Sheet 1 of 2). UMT-15A Mount for

MPU-84, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-16 (Sheet 2). UMT-15A Mount for


Figure 2-17 (Sheet 1 of 2). UMT-15B Mount for


Figure 2-17 (Sheet 2). UMT-15B Mount for

Revised 30 March 1995vvvvv 2-171

Figure 2-18. Tubeaxial Fan (CPN 009-1965-030),

Revised 30 March 1995vvvvv 2-172

Figure 2-19. FMM-85 (-001) Fan Monitor Module,



Interconnect Diagram





Figure 2-23. ADA-85 Air Data Adapter,


Figure 2-24. ADA-85 Air Data Adapter,


Figure 2-25. Breakout Box, Parts List

and Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-26. Wire Marking Standard

Figure 2-27 (Sheet 1 of 8). DPU-84 Display Processor

Unit, System Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-27 (Sheet 2). DPU-84 Display Processor














Figure 2-28 (Sheet 1 of 2). EFD-84 Electronic Flight

Display, System Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-28 (Sheet 2). EFD-84 Electronic Flight

Display, System Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-29 (Sheet 1 of 2). DSP-84 Display Select

Panel, System Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-29 (Sheet 2). DSP-84 Display Select

Panel, System Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-30. MFD-85B Multifunction Display,

System Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-31 (Sheet 1 of 11). MPU-84

Multifunction Processor Unit,

Figure 2-31 (Sheet 2). MPU-84




















z523-0775966-003118
9ebb_di
EFIS-84
Operation
Table of Contents
3.1 GENERAL ............................................................ 3-1 3.5 EFD-84 ELECTRONIC FLIGHT DISPLAY (EFD)
FORMATS ........................................................... 3-9
3.2 DSP-84 DISPLAY SELECT PANEL (DSP),
DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS DESCRIPTION 3-1 3.5.1 Attitude Display ...................................................3-11
3.5.2 Attitude Sensor Annunciation.............................3-11
3.2.1 Format Switch........................................................3-1
3.5.3 Flight Director Command Bar Display ...............3-11
3.2.2 Range (RNG) Knob ................................................3-2
3.5.4 Vertical Deviation Display...................................3-12
3.2.3 COURSE Switch ....................................................3-2
3.5.4.1 Glideslope Deviation .........................................3-12
3.2.4Course Select (CRS SEL) Pushbutton ...................3-2
3.5.4.2 MLS Glidepath (MGP) Deviation .....................3-12
3.2.5 Course Knob ...........................................................3-3
3.5.4.3 Vertical Navigation Deviation ..........................3-12
3.2.6 Course Direct To (PUSH CRS DIRECT) Button ..3-3
3.5.5 Lateral Deviation Display....................................3-13
3.2.7 Decision Height Set (DH SET) Knob ....................3-3
3.5.5.1 LOC/MAZ (MLS Azimuth) Deviation...............3-13
3.2.8 Radio Altimeter Test (TST) Pushbutton...............3-3
3.5.5.2 VOR Deviation...................................................3-13
3.2.9 Navigation Data (NAV DATA) Knob ....................3-3
3.5.5.3 FMS Deviation ..................................................3-13
3.2.10 ET Start/Stop (S/S) Pushbutton and TIMER SET
3.5.5.4 RNV Deviation ..................................................3-13
Knob .........................................................................3-3
3.5.5.5 TCN Deviation...................................................3-13
3.2.11 Bearing Select Pushbuttons ................................3-3
3.5.6 Radio Altitude Display.........................................3-13
3.2.12 Heading Select Knob............................................3-4
3.5.7 Decision Height Display ......................................3-13
3.2.13 Heading Sync (PUSH HDG SYNC) Button ........3-4
3.5.8 Decision Height Annunciator ..............................3-14
3.3 WXP-85( ) WEATHER RADAR PANEL ............. 3-4 3.5.9Radio Altitude Test ...............................................3-14
3.3.1 MODE Control .......................................................3-5 3.5.10 Speed Deviation Scale........................................3-14
3.3.2 GAIN-MAX/MIN Control.......................................3-5 3.5.11 Flight Control Mode Annunciation ...................3-14
3.3.3 TILT Control ..........................................................3-5 3.5.12 Autopilot/Yaw Damper and Trim Annunciation3-15
3.3.4 RANGE Control .....................................................3-5 3.5.12.1 Autopilot/Yaw Damper Annunciation ............3-15
3.3.5 Target Alert (TGT) Pushbutton.............................3-6 3.5.12.2Trim Annunciation...........................................3-15
3.3.6 Hold (HLD) Pushbutton.........................................3-6 3.5.13 Marker Beacon Display......................................3-15
3.3.7 Stabilization (STB) Enable Pushbutton ...............3-6 3.5.14 Inclinometer .......................................................3-16
3.4 WXP-850( ) WEATHER RADAR PANEL ........... 3-6 3.6 EHSI DISPLAY FORMATS .............................. 3-16
3.4.1 MODE Control .......................................................3-6 3.6.1HSI Format............................................................3-16
3.4.2 GAIN Control .........................................................3-8 3.6.1.1 Compass Display ...............................................3-16
3.4.3 TILT Control ..........................................................3-8 3.6.1.2 Heading Sensor Annunciation..........................3-16
3.4.4 RANGE Control .....................................................3-8 3.6.1.3 Active Selected Course Display ........................3-17
3.4.5 Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) Pushbutton ..3-8 3.6.1.4 Preset Course Display.......................................3-19
3.4.6 Hold (HLD) Pushbutton.........................................3-8 3.6.1.5 Selected Heading...............................................3-19
3.4.7 Slave (SLV) Pushbutton ........................................3-9 3.6.1.6 Bearing Pointer Display ...................................3-19
3.4.8 Autotilt (AUTO) Switch .........................................3-9 3.6.1.7 Vertical Deviation Display................................3-20
3.4.9 Stabilization (STB) Pushbutton ............................3-9 3.6.1.8 Distance Display ...............................................3-21
3.4.10 Sector (SEC) Pushbutton.....................................3-9 3.6.1.9 Data Display......................................................3-21
3.6.1.10 Wind Annunciation .........................................3-21 3.8.7 Pitch Comparator ................................................ 3-51
3.6.1.11 Weather Target Alert Annunciation ..............3-21 3.8.8 Category II Comparators .................................... 3-51
3.6.2 ARC and ARC WX Formats .................................3-21 3.8.8.1 Localizer or MLS Azimuth Comparator .......... 3-51
3.6.2.1 Compass Sector Display....................................3-21 3.8.8.2 Glideslope or MLS Glidepath Comparator...... 3-51
3.6.2.2 Active Selected Course Display ........................3-21 3.8.8.3 Radio Altitude Comparator.............................. 3-52
3.6.2.3 Preset Course Display.......................................3-22 3.8.9 Category II Excessive Deviation Warnings........ 3-52
3.6.2.4 Range .................................................................3-23 3.8.9.1 Excessive Localizer or MLS Azimuth Deviation3-52
3.6.2.5 Bearing Pointer Display ...................................3-23 3.8.9.2 Excessive Glideslope or MLS
3.6.2.6 Vertical Deviation Display................................3-23 Glidepath Deviation .................................................... 3-52
3.6.2.7 Peripheral Displays...........................................3-23 3.8.10 Category II Outputs .......................................... 3-53
3.6.2.8 ARC WX Format................................................3-23 3.9 EFIS SELF-TEST...............................................3-53
3.6.3 MAP and MAP WX Formats................................3-23
3.6.3.1 Compass Sector Display....................................3-23 3.10 REVERSIONARY MODES OF OPERATION 3-54
3.6.3.2 Active Selected Course Display ........................3-23 3.10.1 EFD-84 Electronic Flight Display (EFD) Failure3-54
3.6.3.3 Preset Course Display.......................................3-25 3.10.2 DPU-84 Display Processor Unit (DPU) Failure3-54
3.6.3.4 Selected Heading...............................................3-25 3.10.3 DSP-84 Display Select Panel (DSP) Failure .... 3-54
3.6.3.5 Range .................................................................3-25 3.10.4 MPU-84 Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU)
3.6.3.6 Bearing Display.................................................3-25 Failure.................................................................... 3-55
3.6.3.7 Other MAP Format Displays ............................3-26 3.10.5 MFD-85B Multifunction Display Failure......... 3-55
3.6.3.8 MAP WX Format ...............................................3-26 3.10.6 Attitude Switching ............................................ 3-55
3.7MFD-85B MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY, 3.10.7 Compass Switching ........................................... 3-55
DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS DESCRIPTION3-26 3.11SUMMARY OF EFIS SYMBOLOGY ................3-56
3.7.1 MFD-85B Front Panel Controls ..........................3-26
3.12 SUMMARY OF MFD-85B ANNUNCIATORS
3.7.2 MFD-85B Weather Radar (RDR) Display ...........3-28
AND FLAGS.......................................................3-65
3.7.3 MFD-85B Navigation (NAV) Display..................3-29
3.7.3.1 Compatibility Between Navigation Display and 3.13PROGRAMMING MFD-85( ) PAGE (PGE) AND
Heading Source ......................................................3-31 EMERGENCY (EMG) DATA USING THE RDP-
3.7.3.2 Joystick Operation ............................................3-32 300 REMOTE DATA PROGRAMMER .............3-66
3.7.3.3 Heading Up Navigation Format .......................3-32
3.7.3.4 North Up-A/C Center Navigation Format .......3-33 3.14 RDP-300 REMOTE DATA PROGRAMMER ....3-68
3.7.3.5 North Up-Max View ..........................................3-34 3.14.1 Programming the MFD-85( ) Multifunction
3.7.3.6 Plan Mode ..........................................................3-34 Display ................................................................... 3-69
3.7.4 Remote Data (RMT) .............................................3-35 3.14.2 Programming a New MFD-85( ) Multifunction
3.7.4.1 Extended Data Display .....................................3-36 Display ................................................................... 3-71
3.7.5 Page (PGE) and Emergency (EMG) Procedures .3-36 3.14.3 Changing an Already Programmed MFD-85( )
Multifunction Display ........................................... 3-74
3.8EFIS COMPARATORS AND MASTER WARN.3-49
3.8.1Master Warn..........................................................3-49 3.15 CEU-85( ) CHECKLIST ENTRY UNIT...........3-75
3.8.2 Comparator Reset ................................................3-49 3.16 ADA-85 AIR DATA ADAPTER ........................3-75
3.8.3 EADI Comparator Warnings ...............................3-49
3.8.4 EHSI Comparator Warnings ...............................3-50 3.17FMM-85 FAN MONITOR MODULE ................3-76
3.8.5 Heading Comparator............................................3-50
3.8.6 Roll Comparator ...................................................3-50
* Title ......................................... 30 Mar 95 * 3-17........................................... 30 Mar 95 3-56 .......................................... 20 May 92

* List of Effective Pages............. 30 Mar 95 3-18...........................................20 May 92 * 3-57 thru 3-58.......................... 30 Mar 95
3-1 thru 3-2.............................. 20 May 92 * 3-19........................................... 30 Mar 95 3-59 thru 3-64.......................... 20 May 92
* 3-3 ............................................ 30 Mar 95 3-20 thru 3-22 ..........................20 May 92 * 3-65 .......................................... 30 Mar 95
3-4 thru 3-5.............................. 20 May 92 * 3-23........................................... 30 Mar 95 3-66 thru 3-67.......................... 20 May 92
* 3-6 ............................................ 30 Mar 95 3-24 thru 3-26 ..........................20 May 92 * 3-68 .......................................... 30 Mar 95
3-7 .............................................. 11 Jul 90 3-27............................................28 Apr 93 3-69 thru 3-74.......................... 20 May 92
* 3-8 thru 3-9.............................. 30 Mar 95 3-28...........................................20 May 92 * 3-75 .......................................... 30 Mar 95
3-10 ............................................ 11 Jul 90 * 3-29 thru 3-30 .......................... 30 Mar 95 3-76 .......................................... 20 May 92
* 3-12 thru 3-14 .......................... 30 Mar 95 3-31 thru 3-48 ..........................20 May 92
3-15 thru 3-16 .......................... 20 May 92 * 3-49 thru 3-55 .......................... 30 Mar 95



section III
operation
3.1 GENERAL Unit where it is processed for display on the MFD-

85B Multifunction Display.
This section of the EFIS installation manual con-
tains a description of the EFIS controls and indica- 3.2.1 Format Switch
tors. Each unit is discussed in the following
paragraphs. The 5-position format switch controls the EHSI dis-
play format. In the HSI position, the EHSI full com-
3.2 DSP-84 DISPLAY SELECT PANEL (DSP), pass rose format is displayed in a manner similar to
DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS the conventional electromechanical HSI. Information
DESCRIPTION displayed includes compass heading, selected head-
ing, selected VOR, localizer, MAZ, or LNAV course
Following is a brief description of the DSP controls. and deviation (including annunciation of deviation
Refer to Figure 3-1. The DSP provides for pilot input type), navigation source annunciation, digital se-
of selected heading and selected course for the EFIS lected course/desired track readout, excessive ILS
system as well as providing the user with the con- deviation (when Category II configured), heading
trols needed to select the various operating formats source annunciation, ILS and heading comparator
and functions for the EHSI. The DSP controls associ- warnings (ILS only if Category II configured),
ated with the EADI are the DH SET knob and the to/from information, back course annunciation, dis-
radio altimeter test (TST) pushbutton. In addition to tance to station/waypoint, glideslope, MGP, or VNAV
the front panel controls, the DSP stores course and deviation, ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time or
heading information in nonvolatile memory and wind, course information and source annunciation
transmits it to the DPU-84 Display Processor Unit from a second navigation source, weather radar tar-
associated with that DSP. This same information is get alert, waypoint alert when LNAV or RNAV is the
transmitted to the MPU-84 Multifunction Processor navigation source, and two bearing
Figure 3-1. DSP-84 Display Select Panel, Controls and Indicators

operation 523-0775966
pointers that can be driven by VOR, LNAV or ADF cross-side sensors for the pilot are VOR 2,
sources as selected on the display select panel. LNV 2, DME 2, etc. Conversely, for the co-
pilot, the on-side sensors are VOR 2, LNV 2,
The ARC (approach) position selects an expanded
DME 2 etc, and the cross-side sensors are
compass segment (approximately 80 degrees) across
VOR 1, LNV 1, DME 1, etc.
the top of the display with the airplane symbol at
the bottom. This format gives the pilot information, 3.2.2 Range (RNG) Knob
similar to that presented in the full compass rose
mode, in an enlarged, easy-to-read format. The RNG knob, concentric with the format switch,
selects range on the EHSI when ARC or MAP for-
The MAP position uses the expanded compass seg-
mat is selected. A single cyan dashed range mark is
ment but places VOR and/or waypoint symbols for
in the center of the display and one half of the full
both active and preset course in proper rho-theta
scale range is displayed at the right end of the
position with respect to the airplane symbol and se-
range arc. Available full scale ranges are 5, 10, 25,
lected range. A selected course line is drawn through
50, 100, 200, 300, and 600 nmi. Range information
the VOR symbol with its position controlled by the
is maintained in nonvolatile memory.
CRS knob on the DSP. The station ident is displayed
next to the VOR symbol on the side nearest the cen- 3.2.3 COURSE Switch
ter of the display. Waypoint strings (up to five way-
points) are shown with the waypoint number next to The rotary COURSE switch allows selection and
the symbol and with the symbols connected by de- control of the ACT (active) or PRE (preset) course
sired track lines. For both the ARC and MAP for- and XFR (transfer) of the preset course to the active
mats, range is selected from the DSP. course on the EHSI. The COURSE switch has 3-
positions PRE, ACT, and XFR. The PRE position
The WX ARC position adds weather radar informa-
allows selection of the preset course using the CRS
tion to an expanded compass segment (approx-
SEL button. The preset course arrow is a solid
imately 80 degrees) across the top of the display
head, dashed, double-shaft arrow. The CRS knob
with the airplane symbol at the bottom. This format
and push direct button control the preset course.
gives the pilot information, similar to that pre-
The ACT position allows selection of the active
sented in the full compass rose mode, in an en-
course using the CRS SEL button. The active
larged, easy-to-read format.
course arrow is a solid-head, single-shaft arrow.
The WX MAP position adds weather radar informa- The CRS knob and push direct button control the
tion to an expanded compass segment but places active course. The transfer (XFR) position is a
VOR and/or waypoint symbols for both active and spring-loaded momentary action switch that causes
preset course in proper rho-theta position with re- the preset course to be transferred to the active
spect to the airplane symbol and selected range. A course. The previous active course is transferred to
selected course line is drawn through the VOR the preset course but removed from the display.
symbol with its position controlled by the CRS knob
on the DSP. The station ident is displayed next to 3.2.4 Course Select (CRS SEL) Pushbutton
the VOR symbol on the side nearest the center of
the display. Waypoint strings (up to five waypoints) The CRS SEL button selects the active or preset
are shown with the waypoint number next to the course sensor depending on the position of the
symbol and with the symbols connected by desired COURSE switch. If the course switch is in the ACT
track lines. For both the WX ARC and WX MAP position, the CRS SEL button allows selection of the
formats, range is selected from the WXP. sensors strapped on the DSP. The first push (greater
than 1 second) causes the annunciator display on the
Note EHSI to change to white in a white box. Subsequent
pushes cause the next sensor annunciation to be dis-
The following definition of on-side sensors played. Possible sensor selections are as follows:
and cross-side sensors are used throughout VOR/LOC1, FMS1, MLS1, TCN1, VOR/LOC2, FMS2,
this operation section: The on-side sensor is MLS2, TCN2. When the desired sensor is displayed,
the navigation sensor normally associated pushing and holding the CRS SEL button in for
with the side on which the displays appear. greater than 1 second will cause that sensor to be-
For example, for the pilot, the on-side sen- come the active sensor. Not pushing the CRS SEL
sors are VOR 1, LNV 1, DME 1, etc. The button for 5 seconds causes the active course to

return to the previously selected sensor. The sensor 3.2.10 ET Start/Stop (S/S) Pushbutton and
selection is maintained in nonvolatile memory. TIMER SET Knob
If the course knob is in the PRE position, the preset
The ET (elapsed time) mode is selected by turning
course sensor may be selected using the CRS SEL
the NAV DATA knob to the ET position. The output
button. The operation is the same as the ACT ex-
from an elapsed timer is displayed on the EHSI.
cept holding the CRS SEL button in for longer than
The ET display can be an elapsed or countdown
1 second removes the preset display if displayed or
timer. Count-down mode is selected by turning the
returns it for display if previously blanked.
TIMER SET knob to set the desired time. The timer
3.2.5 Course Knob is controlled by the start/stop (S/S) pushbutton. The
timer has three modes: reset, start, and stop. Each
The course knob controls the position of the time the start/stop switch is actuated, the timer
VOR/LOC, TCN, or MAZ course arrow on the EHSI. advances to the next mode in the sequence. In reset
The course knob is continuously variable and the mode, the display initializes at 00:00 (min min:sec
selected course value is stored in nonvolatile mem- sec). When start mode is initiated, the timer begins
ory. This value is retained if OFF or LNAV is se- counting. Minutes and seconds are displayed in
lected and/or power is lost. XX:XX format from 00:00 to 59:59. Continuing from
3.2.6 Course Direct To (PUSH CRS DIRECT) 59:59, the format switches to HZ:XX, displaying
Button hours and minutes from H1:00 to H9:59. Beyond
H9:59, the display indicates --:-- (overrun). Pushing
The course knob includes a center PUSH CRS DI- the S/S pushbutton again stops the timer, and the
RECT button which provides a direct to function. present count on the display is held until the timer
When the PUSH RS DIRECT button is pushed and sequence is advanced to reset mode again. After the
a navigation sensor is being displayed on the pri- timer is counting, TTG, GSP or WIND can be se-
mary course arrow, the course arrow is automati- lected via the NAV DATA button without disturb-
cally rotated directly toward the station until the ing the ET count. NAV DATA selection is stored in
deviation is zero. nonvolatile memory and the last selection will ap-
pear at the next power on. If ET is that selection,
3.2.7 Decision Height Set (DH SET) Knob
the display will reset to 00:00 at power on.
The DH SET knob is used to set the decision height
displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the The TIMER SET knob can be turned to set a de-
EADI. Clockwise rotation of the knob increases desired time. When the knob has been turned, the
cision height. The DH SET value is held in nonvola- timer enters a countdown mode. In this mode, when
tile memory when power is removed from the unit. the count reaches zero, it will flash for 5 seconds
then change to dashes.
3.2.8 Radio Altimeter Test (TST) Pushbutton
The TST pushbutton (part of DH SET knob) is a 3.2.11 Bearing Select Pushbuttons
momentary action switch that enables the radio
altimeter test function. When pushed, the EADI The two pushbuttons with arrows on them are used
displays the radio altitude that is output by the ra- to select different bearing pointers. Both selections
dio altimeter when it is in self-test (50 ft for ALT- work the same but one pointer is a single line while
50/55). DH annunciation is displayed if the DH SET the other is a dual line. At power on, the bearing
value is greater than the test altitude. pointers are off. Each push of the appropriate button
enables the next NAV sensor display in the se-
3.2.9 Navigation Data (NAV DATA) Knob quence. The selection sequence is VOR1, VOR2,
The NAV DATA knob provides selection of GSP ADF1, ADF2, TCN1, TCN2, FMS1, FMS2, and off for
(ground-speed), WIND, TTG (time to go), or ET the pilot’s DSP and VOR2, VOR1, ADF2, ADF1,
(elapsed time) in the upper right corner of the EHSI. TCN2, TCN1, FMS2, FMS1, and off for the copilot’s
Time to go and ground-speed are associated with the DSP. Only sensors enabled by DSP strapping are
navigation sensor currently driving the primary annunciated. Holding the button down longer than
course arrow. Time to go, and ground-speed displays 1.0 second causes the bearing selection to cycle di-
are dashed if valid data is not being received. NAV rectly to the off state.
DATA selection is stored in nonvolatile memory.

3.2.12 Heading Select Knob radar information on the EFD-84 Electronic Flight
Display. The WXP-85C and -85D are identical in
The heading knob is used to position the heading appearance to earlier WXP-85A and -85B versions,
cursor on the on-side EHSI. The heading knob on but are different in function. The WXP-85C and -
the left side DSP also controls the heading cursor 85D both provide a four color (green, yellow, red,
on the MFD unless control has been transferred to magenta) display with PAC Alert (Path Attenua-
the right side. The heading knob is continuously tion Compensation). The purpose of the PAC Alert
variable and the selected heading value is stored in feature is to alert the pilot when the radar encoun-
nonvolatile memory. This value is retained if power ters a target having rainfall rates heavy enough to
is lost. attenuate the beam so much that targets behind it
may be hidden. With the PAC Alert feature, a yel-
3.2.13 Heading Sync (PUSH HDG SYNC) low band will occasionally appear at the outer pe-
Button rimeter of the range being displayed. Whenever
this band appears, that portion of the radar’s scan
The heading knob includes a PUSH HDG SYNC but- may be missing certain distant targets that are
ton which, when pushed, causes the heading cursor masked by intervening areas of rainfall.
to rotate and match the airplane heading under the
The following paragraphs describe the WXP-85C and
lubber line on the EHSI.
-85D. If a WXP-85A or -85B is installed, there will be
3.3 WXP-85( ) WEATHER RADAR PANEL no fourth color (magenta) or PAC Alert feature. Re-
fer to Figure 3-2.
The WXP-85( ) Weather Radar Panel provides the
data processing, mode control, range selection, and
system operating controls for the display of weather
Figure 3-2. WXP-85( ) Weather Radar Panel, Controls and Indicators

3.3.1 MODE Control NORM — Same as WX mode except automatic cy-

clic contour circuits are disabled. The most reflec-
The MODE control is a rotary switch that is used to tive targets will appear in magenta, and indicate
select the various operating modes of the weather rainfall rates of two inches per hour or more. The
radar system. These modes are as follows: next most reflective targets will appear in solid red
(will not alternate between red and black). NORM
OFF — Removes power from the weather radar is displayed in the upper left of the MFD and at the
receiver/transmitter. OFF is annunciated in cyan at left end of the range mark on the EHSI if weather
the left end of range mark on the EHSI. radar is selected.
MAP — Selecting MAP mode also disables the
STBY — Power is applied to the radar system and a
automatic cyclic contour circuits. MAP and range
60-second warmup period is initiated for the WXT-
annunciators will be displayed in cyan. Ground tar-
250B receiver/transmitter. The weather display,
gets will appear in cyan, yellow, and magenta (least
radar transmitter, and radar antenna scan drive
reflective to most reflective).
circuits are inhibited during the 60-second warmup
period and whenever STBY is selected. STBY ap- 3.3.2 GAIN-MAX/MIN Control
pears at the left end of the range mark on the EHSI
if weather radar is selected. The GAIN-MAX/MIN control is a 5-position switch
that controls the gain of the radar receiver. The
TEST — Initiates the radar self-test function. After highest gain occurs in MAX position, with each of
system warmup time (approximately 60 seconds) the other four positions reducing receiver sensitiv-
has elapsed, the radar self-test display should ap- ity by 6 dB for a total reduction of 24 dB in the MIN
pear. For a normal-size test pattern, the 25-nmi position. The GAIN-MAX/MIN control can be used
range should be selected. Selecting other ranges with the WX, NORM, and MAP modes. The ability
will increase or decrease the test pattern size, re- of a target to be displayed is dependent on the par-
sulting in an incomplete test pattern. TEST will be ticular GAIN setting used. All detectable targets
displayed at the left end of the range mark on the will be shown in one of four distinct colors: green,
EHSI if weather radar is selected. yellow, red, magenta (least reflective to most reflec-
tive) for WX and NORM; or cyan, yellow, magenta
WX — The radar antenna begins to scan and, after (least to most reflective) for MAP plus the black
the 60-second warmup period has elapsed, the radar indicator screen. If any GAIN position except MAX
transmitter is energized. This position also selects is selected, the mode annunciator (left end of range
the weather detection mode and enables the auto- mark on EHSI if weather radar is selected) will al-
matic cyclic contour circuits. Contouring storm cells ternate between GAIN and the selected mode at a
alternate between red and black at a one-cycle-per- 1-Hz rate (that is, GAIN-MAP-GAIN-MAP, etc).
second rate. Detectable weather will appear as one of The alternating words serve to remind the user
four colors: green, yellow, red, and magenta (least that the system is operating in a reduced gain con-
reflective to most reflective). The radar’s STC dition and some targets may not be displayed.
(sensitivity time control) circuit allows distant tar-
gets to appear with the same relative brightness or 3.3.3 TILT Control
intensity as close-in targets.
The radar antenna is fully stabilized in both the
pitch and roll axis. The TILT control manually ad-
When using a WXP-85C or -85D with WX mode se-
justs the pitch axis of the stabilized radar antenna
lected, the PAC Alert (Path Attenuation Compensa-
from approximately +15 to –15 degrees to allow the
tion) feature is automatically enabled. The purpose
best target presentation. (When stabilization (STB)
of PAC Alert is to alert the pilot when the radar
is on, the TILT control continues to function.)
encounters a target having rainfall rates heavy
enough to attenuate the beam so much that targets 3.3.4 RANGE Control
behind it may not be displayed. With the PAC Alert
feature, a yellow band will occasionally appear at The RANGE control is a rotary switch that is used to
the outer perimeter of the range being displayed. select the maximum display range of the weather
Whenever this band appears, that portion of the radar system. All of the selected ranges provide one
radar’s scan may be missing certain distant targets range mark in the center of the display with half-
that are masked by intervening areas of rainfall. scale range annunciation at the right hand end of the

range mark. The selectable ranges and range mark end of the EHSI range mark will alternate
annunciations are as follows: between GAIN and HOLD at a 1-Hz rate
with no operating mode displayed.
SELECTED RANGE, RANGE MARK
NMI (MAXIMUM) ANNUNCIATION 3.3.7 Stabilization (STB) Enable Pushbutton
10 5
25 12.5 The latching push-on/push-off STB switch enables
50 25 or disables the radar antenna pitch and roll stabili-
100 50 zation circuits. The switch is normally pushed in to
200 100 the on position. The switch is out to the off position
300 150 in case of gyro input signal failure to the radar
antenna.
3.3.5 Target Alert (TGT) Pushbutton
3.4 WXP-850( ) WEATHER RADAR PANEL
The target alert feature notifies the user when a
return signal of contour strength is detected within The WXP-850( ) Weather Radar Panel provides
60 to 150 nmi and ±15 degrees of dead ahead, re- data processing, mode control, range selection, and
gardless of RANGE selected. The TGT pushbutton other system operating controls for the TWR-850
is a latching push-on/push-off switch. If RDR has Turbulence Weather Radar System. The WXP-850A
been selected on the MFD with target alert enabled and -850B both provide a four color (green, yellow,
on the WXP and not in OFF, STBY, or MAP mode, red, and magenta) display with the following fea-
a yellow box with the yellow letter T inscribed will tures, air turbulence detection, PAC Alert (Path
appear nonflashing to the right of the lubber line on Attenuation Compensation), target alert, and GCS
the EHSI. There is no annunciation when RDR is (Ground Clutter Suppression). The following para-
selected and TGT is not selected. The EHSI dis- graphs describe the WXP-850A and -850B. Refer to
plays a steady boxed T when radar is on but not Figure 3-3.
selected and TGT is selected. The T annunciation
will flash when a target is detected. If the TGT 3.4.1 MODE Control
switch is on and MAP mode selected, the target
alert circuits are disabled (T will not be displayed) The MODE control is a rotary switch that is used to
but will become functional again when WX or select the various operating modes of the weather
NORM mode is reselected on the WXP. radar system. These modes are as follows:
3.3.6 Hold (HLD) Pushbutton OFF — Removes power from the weather radar
Pushing the nonlatching momentary action HLD receiver/transmitter/antenna. OFF will be dis-
button allows the weather display on the EHSI (if played in cyan at the left end of range mark on the
weather radar is selected) to be frozen until the but- EHSI. OFF does not remove power from the WXP-
ton is pushed again, or until power is removed from 850( ) control panel.
the system.
STBY — Power is applied to the RTA-85X Receiver-
Target updating will not occur when operating in Transmitter-Antenna with a short (approximately 3
the HOLD mode. The weather radar mode annun- second) initialization period. During the initializa-
ciator (upper left corner of MFD and left end of tion process, the RTA drives its antenna to the
range mark on EHSI if weather radar is selected) boresight position (zero degrees azimuth and zero
will alternate between HOLD and the selected degrees tilt). The antenna will stay in this position
mode at a 1-Hz rate (HOLD-WX-HOLD-WX, etc). as long as STBY is selected. The weather display,
The alternating words serve to remind the pilot radar transmitter, and, after initialization, the ra-
that the system is in the HOLD mode and the dar antenna scan drive circuits are inhibited when-
weather radar display is not being updated. ever STBY is selected. STBY appears at left end of
range mark on EHSI if weather radar is selected.
Note
TEST — Initiates the radar self-test function and
If the GAIN-MAX/MIN control is not at
causes the radar self-test display to appear. Any
MAX gain and hold (HLD) is selected, the
range can be selected for the self-test function. The
weather radar mode annunciator at the left
radar self-test display consists of eight colored arcs

Figure 3-3. WXP-850A Weather Radar Panel, Controls and Indicators
evenly spaced across the full sector of the display. arc will be displayed in white (the range arc is cyan in
Each arc represents a distinct precipitation intensity all other radar modes. Ground targets will appear in
level. The inner two arcs are the black screen itself cyan, green, yellow, and magenta (least reflective to
and represent no detectable moisture. The next arc is most reflective).
green and represents the least intense precipitation
level. Progressing outward, the fourth arc is yellow, WX — Selecting WX mode allows the weather radar
followed by a red arc and a double ring of magenta system to operate in the weather detection mode.
representing the most intense precipitation level or Detectable weather is color coded with the black
turbulence. The last arc at the perimeter is yellow screen representing no detectable moisture, while
and represents PAC Alert. TEST will be displayed in detectable weather will appear as one of four colors:
cyan at the left end of the range mark on the EHSI if green, yellow, red, and magenta (least reflective to
weather radar is selected. most reflective). WX will be displayed in cyan in the
upper left of the MFD.
TGT — Target alert mode allows weather targets to
be detected and annunciated when the MFD is be- When using a WXP-850C or -850D with WX mode
ing used to display other data (eg, checklists, reselected, the PAC Alert (Path Attenuation Compen-
mote data, etc). When target mode is selected, the sation) feature is automatically enabled. The pur-
radar transmitter is energized, the antenna scans, pose of PAC Alert is to alert the pilot when the ra-
and a yellow box with TGT inscribed will appear dar encounters a target having rainfall rates heavy
nonflashing to the right of the lubber line on the enough to attenuate the beam so much that targets
EHSI. Target alert range is from 7 to 200 nmi (50 behind it may not be displayed. With the PAC Alert
nmi maximum range for turbulence detection) and feature, a yellow band will occasionally appear at
±15 degrees of dead ahead, regardless of the range the outer perimeter of the range being displayed.
selected on the WXP. The TGT annunciation Whenever this band appears, that portion of the
flashes when a precipitation target is detected radar’s scan may be missing certain distant targets
within range. The TGT annunciation alternates that are masked by intervening areas of rainfall.
with TRB when turbulence is detected. This func-
tion is enabled on the EHSI whenever TGT mode is
WX+T — Same as WX mode except that precipita-
selected on the WXP-850( ).
tion-related turbulence is detected and displayed in
MAP — Selecting MAP mode automatically disables the 5-, 10-, 25-, and 50-nmi RANGE positions. Tur-
the PAC alert and GCS features. MAP and range an- bulence cannot be detected at ranges greater than 50
nunciators will be displayed in cyan, and the range nmi. Detectable weather is color coded with black
11 July 1990 3-7

representing no detectable moisture, while detect- radar system. All of the selected ranges provide one
able weather appears as one of four colors: green, range mark in the center of the display with half-
yellow, red, and magenta (least reflective to most scale range annunciation at the right-hand end of
reflective). Detected turbulence will be displayed in the range mark. The selectable ranges and range
magenta, and will consist of precipitation areas mark annunciations are as follows:
where horizontal wind velocity shifts in excess of
16.40 feet-per-second (5 meters-per-second) are de- SELECTED RANGE, RANGE MARK
tected. WX+T will be displayed in cyan in the upper NMI (MAXIMUM) ANNUNCIATION
left of the MFD.
5 2.5
TURB — TURB mode removes all weather radar tar- 10 5
gets from the display except for areas of turbulence 25 12.5
which appear in magenta. This position of the MODE 50 25
switch is spring loaded; the operator must hold the 100 50
MODE switch in the TURB position. Releasing the 200 100
MODE switch returns it to the WX+T position and 300 150
restores the full weather display. As in the WX+T
mode, the TURB mode can display turbulence only in 3.4.5 Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS)
the 5-, 10-, 25-, and 50-nmi RANGE positions. Pushbutton
3.4.2 GAIN Control The ground clutter suppression feature is enabled by

pushing the GCS button. This button is a nonlatch-
The GAIN control is a 7-position switch that controls
ing momentary action pushbutton switch which is
the gain of the radar receiver. Each of the minus set-
operable only in the WX and WX+T modes. When
tings (–1, –2, –3) reduces receiver sensitivity below
selected, GCS reduces the intensity of ground re-
the CAL level by 6 dB for a total reduction of 18 dB
turns so that most of them disappear from the dis-
when in the –3 position. Adjusting the GAIN control
play allowing better definition of precipitation tar-
in the clockwise (+ direction) increases the system
gets. Any MODE or RANGE change automatically
sensitivity by appropriating sensitivity factors from
cancels GCS. GCS should only be used to identify
other features. The GAIN control can be used in the
ground targets (clutter). In most systems, GCS is
MAP, WX, WX+T, and TURB modes. The ability of a
configured to operate only while the button is
target to be displayed is dependent on the particular
pressed. In other systems, momentarily pushing the
GAIN setting used. All detectable targets will be
GCS button enables the GCS feature for approxi-
shown in one of four distinct colors: green, yellow,
mately 12-seconds after which normal operation is
red, magenta (least reflective to most reflective). If
restored automatically. This is selectable at installa-
any GAIN position except CAL is selected (CAL is
tion by means of a special grounding strap. When
not annunciated), the selected GAIN is annunciated
selected, GCS is displayed in cyan in the upper left of
(G-1, G+3, etc.), in the lower left corner of the EHSI.
the MFD and lower left of the EHSI.
3.4.3 TILT Control
3.4.6 Hold (HLD) Pushbutton
The radar antenna is fully stabilized in both the
pitch and roll axis. The TILT control manually ad- Pushing the nonlatching momentary action HLD
justs the pitch axis of the stabilized radar antenna button allows the weather display on the EHSI (if
from approximately +15 to –15 degrees to allow the weather radar is selected) to be frozen until the
best target presentation. (When stabilization (STB) button is pushed again, or until power is removed
is on, the TILT control continues to function.) The from the system. Target updating will not occur
tilt angle is displayed in tenths of a degree (eg, when operating in the HOLD mode. The weather
+10.7, –5.3, etc), in cyan at the right end of the radar mode annunciator (left end of range mark on
range mark on the EHSI. EHSI if weather radar is selected) will alternate
between HOLD and the selected mode at a 1-Hz
3.4.4 RANGE Control rate (HOLD-WX-HOLD-WX, etc). The alternating
words serve to remind the pilot that the system is
The RANGE control is a rotary switch that is used in the HOLD mode and the weather radar display
to select the maximum display range of the weather is not being updated.

3.4.7 Slave (SLV) Pushbutton switch. When SEC is selected, the antenna azimuth
scan angle is reduced 50 percent from ±60 degrees
The SLV (slave) mode is available only in those in- to ±30 degrees on either side of the nose of the air-
stallations that have dual WXP-850( ) panels. craft. The reduced scan angle doubles the weather
Pushing the SLV button on the WXP-850( ) selects radar display update rate. Sector mode is annunci-
the slave mode and causes the EHSI on that side to ated by narrowing the range mark to the new re-
display the MODE, RANGE, TILT, and GAIN se- duced sector scan area.
lected by the cross-side WXP-850( ). (Weather radar
3.5 EFD-84 ELECTRONIC FLIGHT DISPLAY
must be selected on the EHSI’s control panel along
(EFD) FORMATS
with a sector format.) All annunciations except range
become yellow on the slaved EHSI display. An amber The EFD is a high-resolution, multicolor crt display
X is displayed in front of the selected radar mode to unit that contains the crt, deflection yoke, video
indicate cross-side control. The HLD function is still and deflection amplifiers, and a high-voltage power
available from the on-side WXP-850( ) when control supply. Both stroke writing and raster scanning
has been transferred. Selecting SLV on both WXP- techniques are used to provide large area color
850( ) panels places the TWR-850 in the standby background and sharp alphanumerics and symbols
mode, and STBY is annunciated on the EHSIs. Mo- with greater than normal illumination. An EFD
mentarily pushing the SLV button a second time re- may be used as an electronic attitude director indi-
turns the system to normal operation. cator (EADI) or as an electronic horizontal situation
indicator (EHSI). An inclinometer may be mounted
3.4.8 Autotilt (AUTO) Switch to either EFD. With the addition of the inclinome-
ter, that EFD normally becomes the EADI.
Autotilt is selected by pulling outward on the
AUTO switch (located concentric with the TILT The EADI has one basic mode of operation which
control). When autotilt is on and a different mode provides attitude, FCS mode annunciation, vertical
or range is selected, or the aircraft changes alti- deviation, autopilot engage status, attitude compara-
tude, the RTA-85X automatically tilts the antenna tor warnings, and decision height set. Refer to Figure
to maintain the same relationship between beam 3-4. Several additional parameters are available as a
deflection and display. Altitude information is in- function of pilot selection or operational mode of the
ternally derived from ground return data and tilt airplane, and include the following:
angle. Pushing the AUTO switch back to its in posi- • Attitude source (ATT1, ATT2, ATT3, or ATT4)
tion turns off the autotilt feature. The system pow- • Flight director commands
ers up with autotilt not selected. Autotilt is annun- • Vertical deviation (GS, MGP, or VNV)
ciated with an A preceding the tilt angle in tenths • Lateral deviation (VOR, LOC, MAZ, TCN, RNV,
of a degree (eg, A+10.7, A-5.3, etc) in cyan at right or FMS)
end of range mark on the EHSI. • Radio altitude is displayed only when the radio
altimeter system is within range or in test
3.4.9 Stabilization (STB) Pushbutton
• CAT II excessive deviation and comparator
The latching push on/push off STB button enables warning
or disables the radar antenna pitch and roll stabili- • Speed deviation from fast/slow or angle-of-attack
zation circuits. The STB button is normally pushed system
in to the on position. The button is out to the off • Marker beacon annunciation
position to disable stabilization. If stabilization is In addition, interconnect wiring straps allow sev-
not selected, USTB is displayed in cyan at the right eral EADI format changes to be made. These are:
end of the range mark on the MFD. If stabilization
is selected there is no annunciation. If an attitude • V-bar commands or crosspointer commands (and
fault is detected, the USTB annunciation appears airplane symbol style)
and flashes for ten seconds, then becomes steady. • Inhibit speed deviation display
• Rising runway or no rising runway
3.4.10 Sector (SEC) Pushbutton • Composite format or no composite format in re-
versionary mode
The sector scan switch is a nonlatching momentary • Full sky or racetrack attitude presentation
switch located concentric with the RANGE control.
Sector scan is selected by pushing in on the SEC

Figure 3-4. EADI Display Formats With Integrated Commands (Top) or Crosspointer Commands (Bottom)
11 July 1990 3-10

3.5.1 Attitude Display For a Collins AHS-85 Attitude Heading System

with CSDB output to EFIS, a double stroked red
Pitch and roll attitude are indicated by the position
STIM with stim sequence number is displayed be-
of the blue sky and brown ground area containing
low the roll pointer to indicate the AHS-85 driving
the pitch scale with reference to the airplane sym-
the attitude is in stim mode. The following annun-
bol. The airplane symbol is either a yellow trian-
ciations are used:
gular-shaped outline with a black interior (V-bar
option) or a figure consisting of a square nose STIM 0A Sequence of all tests
flanked by L-shaped wings (crosspointer option).
Precise pitch attitude is indicated by the position of STIM 01 Roll tests
the pitch scale with reference to the nose of the air-
plane symbol, and precise roll attitude is indicated STIM 02 Pitch tests
by the position of the moving roll pointer with ref-
erence to the bank scale. STIM 03 Heading tests
In the extreme pitch attitudes, a portion of the blue For a Collins AHS-85E Attitude Heading System
(sky) or brown (ground) area is retained in view to with ARINC 429 output to EFIS, a double stroked
aid in interpretation of pitch attitude. The pitch red ATT TEST is displayed below the roll pointer to
markings will continue to move to provide accurate indicate the AHS-85E driving the attitude is in the
pitch information. If the pitch attitude exceeds +30 test mode.
or –20 degrees, or if the bank attitude exceeds ±65
degrees, all information except aircraft symbol, at- 3.5.2 Attitude Sensor Annunciation
titude, attitude sensor annunciation, and the indi-
cated airspeed display is removed from the EADI. Attitude sensor annunciation is displayed in the
As pitch-up attitude increases, a red downward lower right center portion of the EADI when any
pointing wedge appears between the +40- and +60- attitude sensor except the primary sensor is dis-
degree pitch markings. A larger red downward played. A maximum of four attitude sensors, either
pointing wedge appears between the +60- and +90- gyro, ARINC 429, or CSDB AHRS may be selected
degree pitch markings. These red downward for display. The pilot’s primary sensor is #1 and his
pointing wedges indicate pitch down is required to secondary is #3. The copilot’s primary sensor is #2
correct for the excessive pitch-up attitude. As pitch- and his secondary is #3 with three attitude sensors
down attitude increases, a red upward pointing or #4 with four attitude sensors. Table 3-1 lists the
wedge appears between the –30- and –45-degree annunciations and colors for different selections.
pitch markings. Another red upward pointing
Table 3-1. Attitude Sensor Annunciation.
wedge (slightly larger than the first one) appears
between the –45- and –60-degree pitch markings, SELECTED
and a larger red upward pointing wedge appears EADI ANNUNCIATION
ATTITUDE SENSOR
between the –60- and –90-degree pitch markings.
These red upward pointing wedges indicate pitch PILOT’S COPILOT’S PILOT’S COPILOT’S
up is required to correct for the excessive pitch-
#1 #2 None None
down attitude. If the airplane passes through the #1 #3 None ATT3 (white)
vertical, the display will switch 180 degrees in the #1 #4 None ATT4 (white)
roll axis and continue to provide the correct ground- #3 #2 ATT3 (white) None
sky attitude reference during the inverted portion #3 #4 ATT3 (white) ATT4 (white)
#1 #1 ATT1 (yellow) ATT1 (yellow)
of the maneuver. All information is restored when
at +25 or –15 degrees of pitch or ±60 degrees of roll. #3 #3 ATT3 (yellow) ATT3 (yellow)
Should the attitude source fail, the attitude display
and command bars (if in view) will disappear and a
red box with the letters ATT inscribed will appear 3.5.3 Flight Director Command Bar Display
above the airplane symbol. ATT will flash for 10
seconds, then become steady. This flag will remain The magenta command bars will be in view when
until an alternate source is supplied or until the the flight director is being used. Command bars are
fault is cleared. out of view when the flight director is turned off or
flagged, the attitude is extreme, the in-view strap is
11 July 1990 3-11

removed, or the FD off input is grounded. With a Table 3-2. Vertical Deviation.
zero command input, the integrated command bars
will flank the airplane symbol. The command bars NAVIGATION EADI VERTICAL EHSI VERTICAL
SOURCE DEVIATION DEVIATION
will move up or down to command ±15 degrees of
pitch. If the pitch command exceeds ±15 degrees, LOC GS GS, VNAV, or blank
the command bars will remain at the ±15 degree LOC B/C VNAV or blank VNAV or blank
position until the command decreases to that value. VOR VNAV or blank VNAV or blank
At that time, the command bars and the pitch scale ARINC 429 FMS VNAV or blank VNAV (ARINC 429)
will move in unison. The integrated command bars or blank
will also rotate with respect to the airplane symbol ARINC 561 FMS VNAV or blank VNAV (ARINC 561)
to command 15 degrees of right or left bank. If the or blank
bank command exceeds l5 degrees of right or left TACAN VNAV or blank VNAV or blank
bank, the command bars will remain at the respec- RNAV VNAV or blank VNAV or blank
tive 15 degree position until the command de- MLS MLS GS MLS GS, VNAV, or
creases to that value. Alternate crosspointer com- blank
mand bars can be obtained as a strapping option in
the interconnect wiring. For crosspointers, the roll
steering bar moves left or right to command left or
each of the outer scale dots represents a 1/2-degree
right bank and the pitch steering bar moves up or
displacement. If FMS APPROACH mode is being
down to command pitch-up or pitch-down. The
used to control pitch and bank commands during
commands are satisfied when the steering bars are
approach, the letters APPR are annunciated imme-
centered over the airplane reference symbol.
diately above the lateral deviation scale to indicate
Should the flight director system fail, the command
that the scaling of the displayed deviation has been
bars will disappear and a red box with the letters
changed. The scaling changes from 3.75- to 1-nmi per
FD inscribed will appear to the left of the left tip of
dot for lateral dev and from 400- to 200-feet per dot
the airplane symbol and will flash for 10 seconds
for vertical deviation. If a CAT II approach is being
before becoming steady. The FD flag will not ap-
conducted, the pointer changes to yellow and flashes
pear if the flight director has been turned off unless
when glideslope deviation exceeds the CAT II limits.
the failure occurs when in FCS approach mode.
If a failure of the glideslope receiver is detected, a
3.5.4 Vertical Deviation Display red box with the letters GS inscribed will appear to
the right of the center index and will flash for 10 sec-
A scale and pointer on the right side (or left side onds before becoming steady. The flashing can be
depending on strap 39) of the EADI indicates devia- eliminated by pushing the master warn reset. The
tion from a selected vertical path. The scale consists glideslope scale is removed from view when in back
of two white dots above and two white dots below a course condition and B/C is annunciated on the EHSI
yellow center index. to the right of the lubber line.
Table 3-2 defines the possible scales which may be

3.5.4.2 MLS Glidepath (MGP) Deviation
displayed on the EADI and the possible scales
which may be selected for simultaneous display on
the EHSI. If the flight control system is in VNAV or The MLS glidepath deviation pointer is identical to
APPR mode, the EHSI VNAV scale will display the the glideslope pointer. The CAT II logic and limits
deviation that the FCS is using. are the same as in glideslope deviation. If an MLS
failure is detected, the letters MGP appear boxed
and in red and flash for ten seconds before becom-
3.5.4.1 Glideslope Deviation
ing steady. The flashing can be eliminated by reset-
The glideslope deviation pointer is a dual green tri- ting the master warn.
angle for the on-side sensor and a dual yellow trian-
gle for the cross-side sensor. The glideslope pointer 3.5.4.3 Vertical Navigation Deviation
represents the center of the glideslope beam, and the
center of the glideslope scale represents airplane po-
The VNAV pointer is a white star-shaped symbol.
sition relative to beam center. Each of the inner scale
Full-scale deflection represents ±400 feet deviation
dots represents a 1/4-degree displacement;

from the selected path. If a VNAV failure is de- always linear. The symbol moves laterally left or
tected, the scale and pointer are removed from view right. For an ARINC 429 FMS, the linearized scale
and a red box with VNV inscribed is displayed. is 3.75 nmi per dot when in enroute mode and 0.625
nmi per dot when in approach mode.For an ARINC
3.5.5 Lateral Deviation Display 561 FMS, the linearized scale is 75 µA per dot.
A scale and pointer in the bottom center of the EADI 3.5.5.4 RNV Deviation
indicates deviation from a selected lateral navigation The RNV deviation pointer is a green octagonal
path. The scale consists of two white dots on either shaped symbol with two vertical lines for the on-
side of a white center index. If a sensor failure is de- side sensor or a yellow symbol for the cross-side
tected by loss of the valid or by an internal monitor, sensor. The symbol moves laterally left or right.
the appropriate red letters (LOC, VOR, MAZ, TCN, The system always linearizes deviation when dis-
or FMS) appear above the scale, flash for 10 seconds tance is present or when linearization has not been
and then become steady. The flashing can be elimi- deselected by an external input. The linearized
nated by pushing the master warn reset. The point- scale is 5 nmi per dot unless autopilot approach
ers are not removed if the valid signal from the sen- mode is selected, then the scale factor increases to 1
sor is lost. nmi per dot.
3.5.5.1 LOC/MAZ (MLS Azimuth) Deviation 3.5.5.5 TCN Deviation
A scale and pointer in the bottom center of the When displaying TCN deviation, the pointer is a
EADI indicates deviation from a selected LOC/MAZ green vortac symbol for the on-side sensor or a yel-
navigation path. The scale consists of two white low symbol for the cross-side sensor. The symbol
dots on either side of a white center index. The moves laterally left or right and has the same scale
pointer is a green trapezoid when using the on-side factor as the RNV deviation scale on the EHSI.
sensor or yellow if using the cross-side sensor. If
CAT II is configured and deviation is excessive, the 3.5.6 Radio Altitude Display
pointer changes to yellow and flashes. The pointer Radio altitude is displayed in the lower right corner
starts to expand when radio altitude is at 200 feet. in green digits. The radio altitude display appears
At zero feet, the top edge of the pointer is at the automatically when the radio altitude system is
bottom edge of the aircraft symbol. If radio altitude within range (2500 feet with the ALT-55 Radio Al-
is invalid, the pointer continues to display deviation timeter System or 2000 feet with the ALT-50 Radio
but does not expand. The expanding feature of the Altimeter System) and will change in 50-foot incre-
runway may be inhibited via strapping. ments above 1000 feet, and 10-foot increments below
1000 feet. If a failure of the radio altimeter system is
3.5.5.2 VOR Deviation
detected, the radio altitude display will disappear
When displaying VOR deviation, the pointer is a and a red box with the letters RA inscribed will ap-
green octagonal shaped symbol with two vertical pear flashing for 10 seconds before becoming steady.
center lines for the on-side sensor or a yellow sym- The flashing can be eliminated by pushing the mas-
bol for the cross-side sensor. The system always ter warn reset. DH set and the DH annunciator are
linearizes deviation when DME is present and not also removed. The radio altitude data is rate limited
in DME hold or when linearization has not been by a 300 ft/sec rate limiter. Primary purpose of this
deselected by an external switch. The linearized limiter is to prevent nuisance radio altimeter com-
scale is 5 nautical miles per dot unless autopilot parator warns as the result of fast changing data
approach mode is selected, then scale sensitivity (uneven terrain).
increases to 1 nautical mile per dot. The symbol 3.5.7 Decision Height Display
moves laterally left or right and has the same scale
factor as the course deviation scale on the EHSI. Decision height is displayed in the lower right corner
of the display with the letters DH left of the digits.
3.5.5.3 FMS Deviation This indication is cyan in color if set from the on-side
DSP or yellow if from the cross-side DSP. The deci-
The FMS deviation pointer is a white star-shaped sion height digits will flash when the aircraft is be-
symbol for the on-side sensor or a yellow symbol for tween decision height +50 feet and decision height.
the cross-side sensor. The deviation displayed is

Below 6 feet radio altitude, flashing of the decision With an AOA air data input, the letters AOA are
height set is inhibited and remains inhibited until a positioned below the scale. If analog air data based,
DH +100 feet altitude level is reached. The decision the letters SPD are positioned below the scale. This
height display is removed if the radio altimeter sys- data is only available from the on-side air data
tem fails. source even if cross-side air data is selected. These
letters are always cyan.
3.5.8 Decision Height Annunciator
When decision height is reached during descent, If an AOA failure is detected when displaying AOA-
the letters DH will appear in the upper left center based speed deviation, the speed deviation pointer
portion of the display (adjacent to the pitch scale in and scale are removed from view and a red box
the blue sky portion of the display) in yellow, will with the letters AOA inscribed will appear at the
flash for 5 seconds, and then become steady. The left center of the scale and flash for 10 seconds be-
DH annunciator will extinguish when radio alti- fore becoming steady. The flashing can be elimi-
tude is 6 feet or less and remains inhibited until a nated by pushing the master warn reset.
DH+100 feet altitude level is reached. The decision
height annunciator is removed if the radio altime- If an analog speed deviation input failure is detected
ter system fails. The DH annunciator may be re- when displaying analog based speed deviation, the
moved by setting DH SET to 0. speed deviation pointer and scale are removed from
view and a red box with the letters SPD inscribed
3.5.9 Radio Altitude Test will appear at the left center of the scale and flash
for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing
When the TST button on the DSP is pushed, the can be eliminated by pushing the master warn reset.
system supplies a test initiate to the radio altime-
ter. Radio altitude test causes the radio altimeter to
output a fixed value. If the decision height happens 3.5.11 Flight Control Mode Annunciation
to be set higher than this value, the DH annuncia-
tor is also displayed during the test. The EADI shows the flight control mode annuncia-
tions for the Collins FCS-85/86, the Collins FCS-80,
3.5.10 Speed Deviation Scale and the Collins FCS-65 Flight Control Systems.
The annunciation locations on the EADI are the
Any of three sensors may be selected as the input same for each flight control system with the vertical
for speed deviation. The selection is via intercon- modes located on the first two lines to the right of
nect wiring options and is made at the time of in- the lubber line and the lateral modes located on the
stallation. The three sensors are: digital air data top line to the left of the lubber line. The active ver-
system, angle of attack, or analog air data system. tical and lateral modes are shown in green and the
armed modes and submodes in white. The vertical
The speed deviation scale is on the left side of the
mode commanded reference data are shown in
EADI display and consists of a yellow center refer-
green and the advisory reference data are shown in
ence mark with white letters F and S located above
white when available.
and below the center reference, and two intermedi-
ate dots located between the letters and the center
reference. The speed deviation pointer is green and The Collins FCS-85/86 is the only system which has
consists of two concentric squares which move in the capability of three vertical arm modes of ALTS,
relation to the scale such that if the pointer is next VNAV, and GS/MGP. The FCS-85/86 has depend-
to the upper dot, actual airspeed is 10 knots higher ent glideslope/microwave glidepath capture (ie, the
than desired. system must capture the localizer azimuth before
arming the glideslope/microwave glidepath). There-
With a digital air data system, EFIS compares ac- fore, for the FCS-85/86, the GS/MGP arm mode will
tual IAS with the reference airspeed being received be displayed in white (to the right) on line 2.
from the air data system and positions the F/S
pointer accordingly. With either the AOA or analog When a new active mode is displayed, either by
air data input, EFIS positions the pointer with ref- being selected or automatic capture, it will flash for
erence to the analog voltage received from the re- 5 seconds before becoming steady.
spective system.

3.5.12 Autopilot/Yaw Damper and Trim 3.5.12.2 Trim Annunciation

Annunciation
Trim annunciation is displayed on line 3 in the up-
3.5.12.1 Autopilot/Yaw Damper Annunciation per right corner of the EADI.
For the FCS-85/86, the trim annunciation is a

The autopilot and yaw damper annunciation is dis-
boxed message in yellow which indicates the axis
played on lines 3 (autopilot) and 4 (yaw damper) in
that is mistrimmed (A = aileron, E = elevator, and
the upper left corner of the EADI. The autopilot
R = rudder). The annunciation will flash for 5 sec-
and yaw damper engaged annunciation is AP and
onds each time a mistrim occurs and is removed
YD for a single flight control system, and AP/L or
from view immediately when the input is removed.
AP/R and YD for a dual flight control system. The
Each trim annunciation can be deleted through the
engage annunciators are green.
DSP strapping. Sync is a flight director function
that overrides the trim message on the side that
If a disengagement occurs for the FCS-85/86 (both
the sync button is activated. The following annun-
the autopilot and yaw damper), the autopilot en-
ciations can appear:
gage message turns yellow (or red if strapped on
the DCP) and flashes until acknowledged by the - E - (boxed)
crew (acknowledge logic is in the FCS). When the A - - (boxed)
acknowledge occurs, the message blanks for a sin- - - R (boxed)
gle flight control system or turns white and be- A E R (boxed)
comes steady for a dual flight control system. Yaw A - R (boxed)
damper engage message turns yellow and flashes A E - (boxed)
for 5 seconds, then is removed from the display. - E R (boxed)
SYNC (yellow)
If a disengagement occurs for the FCS-80 (for either (blank)
the autopilot or the yaw damper), the autopilot en-
gage message turns red and flashes until acknowl- For the FCS-80 system, TRIM is displayed in yel-
edged by the crew (acknowledge logic is in the low which can indicate either an elevator or aileron
FCS). When the acknowledge occurs, the autopilot mistrimmed condition (determined during installa-
message disappears for a single flight control sys- tion). As an option, both the elevator and aileron
tem or turns white and becomes steady for a dual mistrim annunciator outputs from the FCS-80 can
flight control system. The yaw damper engage mes- be wired together to give the TRIM annunciation
sage turns yellow and flashes for 5 seconds then is whenever the elevator or the aileron is mis-
removed from the display. trimmed. Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual Sup-
plement for further information. The annunciator
If a pilot-induced disengagement occurs for the will flash for 5 seconds each time it turns on and is
FCS-65 (for both the autopilot and yaw damper), removed immediately when the input is removed.
the autopilot engage message turns yellow and
flashes for 5 seconds, turns white and becomes For the FCS-65 system, TRIM is displayed in white
steady for a dual flight control system or blanks for for trim in motion, all other annunciations are the
a single flight control system. Yaw damper engage same as FCS-85/86. Note that not all statuses of
message blanks. If disengagement was automatic APS-65 have the AER trim. SYNC is displayed
(fault induced), both autopilot and yaw damper en- when the pilot actuates the SYNC button.
gage messages turn yellow and flash until acknow-
ledgement by flight crew, the autopilot engage mes- 3.5.13 Marker Beacon Display
sage turns white for a dual flight control system or
blanks for a single system. The yaw damper engage Marker beacon passage is indicated by a cyan box
message blanks. with OM (outer marker) or a yellow box with MM
The same operation occurs regardless of autopi- (middle marker) inscribed appearing on the inside
lot/yaw damper engagement dependency. of the roll scale on the right side (opposite the DH
annunciator). Airway or inner marker will appear
as a white box with no inscriptions. Marker annun-
ciator will flash as long as active.

3.5.14 Inclinometer the ARC format if WX, NORM, or MAP is se-

lected on the WXP-85 (MAP or WX on the
The inclinometer or slip indicator consists of a WXP-850).
weighted ball in a liquid-filled curved tube. It is
attached to the lower front of the unit, lighted, and
c. MAP and MAP WX Formats
is used as an aid to coordinate turns.
3.6 EHSI DISPLAY FORMATS This format also uses the expanded compass
segment but places VOR and/or waypoint sym-
The EHSI can display five formats that are selected bols in proper rhotheta position with respect to
by the DSP-84 Display Select Panel. These are: the airplane symbol and selected range. DME
ident is shown next to the VOR symbols and
a. HSI Format
selected course lines are drawn through the
This format selects a display very similar to the symbols. Waypoint strings (up to five way-
conventional electromechanical HSI presenta- points) are shown with the waypoint number
tion. Information displayed includes compass next to the symbol and with the symbols con-
heading and sensor type annunciation, selected nected by desired track lines. Range is selected
heading, selected VOR, localizer, or LNAV from the DSP RNG knob when in MAP format
course and deviation (including annunciation of or from the WXP RANGE knob when weather
deviation type), navigation source annuncia- radar MAP WX format is selected. Selecting the
tion, to/ from information, distance to sta- MAP WX format causes weather radar data to
tion/waypoint, digital selected course/desired be superimposed on the MAP format if WX,
track readout, glideslope or VNAV deviation, NORM, or MAP is selected on the WXP-85
ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time, or wind (MAP or WX on the WXP-850).
(if available), course information and sensor
annunciation from the second course source, 3.6.1 HSI Format
weather radar target alert, waypoint alert, DR
and MSG (if available) when LNAV is the navi- The HSI format is selected by positioning the DSP-
gation source, excessive ILS deviation (when 84 format switch to HSI. Refer to Figure 3-5.
CAT II configured), ILS and heading compara-
tor warnings (ILS only if CAT II configured), 3.6.1.1 Compass Display
back course annunciation, DME hold annuncia-
The compass display is a full 360-degree rose with
tion, and a bearing pointer that can be driven
letters at the cardinal points and numbers at the 30-
by VOR, FMS, TCN, or ADF sources as selected
degree marks. Airplane heading is read against the
on the display select panel.
lubber line. Markings are also provided every 45 de-
b. ARC and ARC WX Formats grees around the periphery of the card to aid in pro-
cedure turns. The compass card, reference marks,
In these formats, an expanded compass segment lubber line, and reference airplane symbol are white.
(approximately 70 degrees) is located across the
top of the display with the airplane symbol located 3.6.1.2 Heading Sensor Annunciation
at the bottom center of the display. These formats
give the pilot information similar to that pre- The heading sensor is annunciated above the lub-
sented in the full compass rose mode, in an en- ber line. Refer to Table 3-3. The annunciation is
larged, easy-to-read display. In addition, a preset TRU, MAG, DG, or HDG for true heading, magnetic
second navigation sensor may be displayed if se- heading, directional gyro mode, and heading failure
lected by the COURSE knob on the DSP-84. The respectively. The heading sensor is annunciated by
second sensor is shown by the VOR or waypoint displaying 1, 2, 3, or 4 behind the TRU/MAG/
symbol and identifier placed in rho-theta position DG/HDG annunciation. The on-side MAG annun-
with respect to the airplane symbol and selected ciator is not displayed unless both sides have that
range. Range is selected from the DSP RNG sensor selected. Any time the left and right heading
knob when in ARC format or from the WXP displays are from the same sensor, annunciators
RANGE knob when weather radar ARC WX are displayed in yellow on both EHSI’s. Secondary
format is selected. Selecting the ARC WX format sensor annunciation is in white if not the same on
causes weather radar data to be superimposed on both sides.

Figure 3-5. HSI Format
An external installer supplied switch may be used to displayed above the aircraft symbol to indicate the
place the compass system in directional gyro mode AHS-85E driving the heading is in the test mode.
which is annunciated by placing the letters DG over
the lubber line. If a failure of the compass system 3.6.1.3 Active Selected Course Display
occurs, a red box with HDG inscribed will appear to
the left of the lubber line. The letters will flash for 10 The data shown by the active (solid) selected course
seconds, then become steady. The flashing can be arrow is information that is being supplied to the
eliminated by pushing the master warn reset. If the flight control system. Primary selected course is
heading synchro monitor detects a failure, the HDG shown by the relationship of the solid single bar
flag appears and the compass card is frozen in posi- course arrow with respect to the compass card and
tion. is repeated digitally in the lower right of the dis-
play with the letters CRS superscribed.
For a Collins AHS-85 Attitude Heading System
with CSDB output to EFIS, a red STIM is displayed The active course is selected by positioning the
above the aircraft symbol to indicate the AHS-85 COURSE switch to the ACT position and pushing
driving the heading is in STIM mode. The following the CRS SEL button to select the active course
annunciations are used: navigation sensor. The navigation sensor is an-
nunciated boxed in white at the left center of the
STIM 0A Sequence of all tests display. When the desired sensor is displayed,
STIM 01 Roll tests push and hold the CRS SEL button in for more
STIM 02 Pitch tests than 1 second. The white box is removed and the
STIM 03 Heading tests sensor becomes the active course navigation sen-
sor. The course arrow is then controlled with the
For a Collins AHS-85E Attitude Heading System CRS knob on the DSP when in VOR/LOC, TCN,
with ARINC 429 output to EFIS, a red HDG TEST is MLS, or is automatically set by

Table 3-3. Heading Sensor Annunciation.

Caution
SELECTED EHSI ANNUNCIATION When conducting a VOR approach, APPR
HEADING SENSOR
mode should be selected only within normal
PILOT’S COPILOT’S PILOT’S COPILOT’S
approach distances and not until after VOR
capture occurs. During a VOR approach,
#1 #2 Note 1 Note 2 the pilot is cautioned to remember that the
#1 #1 MAG1 (yellow) MAG1 (yellow)
flight control system automatically goes to
#3 #2 MAG3 (white) Note 2 dead reckoning (DR) mode when a VOR sta-
#3 #3 MAG3 (yellow) MAG3 (yellow) tion is crossed, and DR is not a recom-
#1 #3 Note 1 MAG3 (white) mended approach mode. If the VOR ap-
#1 #4 Note 1 MAG4 (white) proach being flown is one that crosses the
#3 #4 MAG3 (white) MAG4 (white)
VOR on the way to the airport, then HDG
mode should be selected at station passage
Note 1: Blank if magnetic heading selected, TRU1, DG1, or rather than continuing with NAV or APPR
HDG1 for the other selections. mode (ensure that the heading cursor on
Note 2: Blank if magnetic heading selected, TRU2, DG2, or the EHSI is under the lubber line before
HDG2 for the other selections.
Note 3: The first five lines are applicable to both three and selecting HDG mode). The reason for this is
four sensor installations. if the distance between the VOR and the
Note 4: The legend MAG was used as an example, it can be airport is short, the system may not have
replaced with TRU, DG, or HDG. time to come out of DR mode after passing
the station.
an appropriate LNAV (lateral navigation system) The ‘to-from’ indication is a triangle that appears
such as LNV, INS, VLF, or RNV. on the head side of the lateral deviation bar point-
ing toward the head of the course arrow to indicate
If the navigation sensor is incompatible with the type ‘to’ and toward the tail of the course arrow to indi-
of heading (true or magnetic), the sensor annuncia- cate ‘from’. This ‘to-from’ display indicates that the
tion flashes until a compatible selection is made. selected VOR course is either ‘to’ or ‘from’ the se-
LNAV data is corrected if MAGVAR is available. If a lected VOR station. The ‘to-from’ display can also
localizer frequency has been tuned, VOR/LOC has indicate the course to the next waypoint or the
been selected, and the selected course is more than course from an over-flown waypoint when an LNAV
105 degrees from the lubber line, B/C (back course) is such as an INS, LRN, VLF, or other navigation sys-
annunciated. tem is the navigation data source. If a compatible
LNAV is installed and LNAV is selected, the ‘to’
The center portion of the course arrow is the lateral arrow flashes to indicate waypoint alert. The ‘to-
deviation bar and moves laterally with respect to from’ display disappears when a localizer frequency
the course arrow and the white deviation dots to is selected or if a failure is detected by the VOR
indicate deviation from the selected course. If CAT bearing, LNAV bearing, or LNAV track synchro
II configured and localizer or MLS azimuth devia- monitors.
tion is excessive, the lateral deviation bar changes
to yellow and flashes. The lateral deviation bar is The identification of the first waypoint or selected
removed if a synchro input failure is detected. DME is placed below the distance readout on the
upper left side of the display on the rose compass
When displaying VOR, TCN, or RNV, the data is only.
always angular. The angular deviation scale is 5
degrees/dot. FMS data is always linear with the If the navigation sensor is an on-side VOR/LOC or
LIN annunciation appearing to the right of the lub- TACAN, the course arrow, deviation bar, ‘to/from’
ber line. The FMS deviation scale is 3.75 nmi/dot indicator (in VOR and TCN), digital course readout,
unless in approach mode where the scaling is 0.625 navigation sensor annunciator, distance display, and
nmi/dot. data display are green. If the navigation sensor is an
FMS or RNV and is selected from the on-side DSP,

these displays are white. If control has been trans- controlled with the CRS knob on the DSP when in
ferred to the cross-side, these displays are yellow for VOR/LOC, TCN, MLS, or is automatically set by an
all navigation sensors. appropriate LNAV (lateral navigation system) such
as LNV, INS, VLF, or RNV. A digital PRE course
If a selected navigation sensor valid is lost, the readout is displayed when the COURSE switch is
navigation sensor annunciation turns red, becomes in the PRE position.
boxed and flashes for 10 seconds before becoming
steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pushing When the preset second course is a VOR and its
the master warn reset. If one of the FMS’s is the associated DME is in hold, the navigation source
failed sensor, the to-from display also disappears. annunciator displays VOR1 H or VOR2 H with
VOR1 or VOR2 in cyan and a yellow H located to
If FMS approach mode is selected and a NAV sen- the right of the numeral in the sensor annuncia-
sor failure is detected, the sensor annunciator turns tion. If a failure of the DME associated with the
red, becomes boxed and flashes for 10 seconds be- displayed VOR occurs, the navigation sensor an-
fore becoming steady. The flashing can be elimi- nunciator remains cyan followed by a yellow D lo-
nated by resetting the master warn. For NAV sen- cated to the right of the numeral in the sensor an-
sor failure that allows the FMS to remain in ap- nunciation (ie, VOR1 D). If a localizer frequency
proach, FMS flags also appear beside the vertical has been tuned, the sensor annunciator displays
and lateral scales with the symbol determined by LOC1 or LOC2.
FMS strapping (INS, VLF, LRN, LNV, RNV, FMS).
Approach annunciation remains displayed. For If the preset course navigation sensor is incompati-
NAV sensor failure that drops the approach mode, ble with the heading sensor (true or magnetic), the
the vertical and lateral scales are removed and no navigation sensor annunciator flashes until a com-
flags are shown. The navaid symbols and connect- patible selection is made.
ing lines are removed for both cases.
If a navigation sensor failure is detected while it is
If a failure is detected by the VOR or TCN bearing, selected for second course, the second course navi-
or synchro or the bus parameter monitors, the cor- gation sensor annunciator becomes red and boxed
responding flag appears and the deviation bar cen- and flashes for 10 seconds before becoming steady.
ters and the to-from arrow is removed from the dis- The second course arrow deviation bar is removed
play. from view if the failure was from the internal VOR
synchro monitor or from the LNAV bus parameter
3.6.1.4 Preset Course Display monitor. The flashing can be eliminated by pushing
the master warn reset.
When the preset course arrow has been selected for
display, it will appear in cyan as a dual dashed line 3.6.1.5 Selected Heading
course arrow with a solid arrowhead. The dual
dashed center portion of the course arrow is the Selected heading is shown by the location of two
lateral deviation bar. The deviation displayed is adjacent magenta rectangles with respect to the
always angular and is never linearized. Also, no compass card. The DSP HDG knob is used to set the
deviation scale or to/from indicator is provided for heading cursor or it can be made to rotate to the
the preset second course arrow. The navigation lubber line position by momentarily pushing the
sensor for the preset course is annunciated in cyan PUSH HDG SYNC button on the HDG knob. The
and appears below the navigation sensor annuncia- heading sync function can also be remotely actu-
tion for the active course arrow. ated by various mode logic from some digital
autopilots. If a compatible LNV is selected as the
DSP-84: The preset course is selected by positioning active source, it can be used to set the position of
the COURSE switch to the PRE position and the two magenta rectangles annunciating the se-
pushing the CRS SEL button to select the preset lected heading. The LNV does not inhibit DSP HDG
course navigation sensor. The navigation sensor is knob control of the heading cursor.
annunciated at the left center of the display below
the active course annunciation. The navigation sen- 3.6.1.6 Bearing Pointer Display
sor displayed automatically becomes the preset
When selected on the DSP, a cyan single shaft
course navigation sensor. The course arrow is then
bearing pointer or a magenta double shaft bearing

pointer is displayed on the EHSI along with the pointer are removed from view and a red box
sensor annunciation. The sensor annunciation is with red letters GS inscribed is displayed. This
located on the bearing pointer shaft. Sensor annun- flag will flash for 10 seconds before becoming
ciation is V1 or V2 for VOR, N1 for FMS, A1 for steady. The flashing can be eliminated by push-
ADF, and T1 for TACAN. ing the master warn reset.
If ADF has been selected with true heading being b. MLS Microwave Glidepath (MGP) Deviation
displayed, the bearing annunciation flashes for 10
seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can The microwave glidepath deviation pointer is a
be eliminated by pushing the master warn reset. If dual green triangle for the on-side sensor and a
VOR, TCN, or FMS has been selected with an in- dual yellow triangle for the cross-side sensor.
compatible heading sensor, the bearing sensor an- The glideslope pointer represents the center of
nunciator flashes until a compatible selection has the glideslope beam, and the center of the
been made. glideslope scale represents airplane position
relative to beam center. Each of the inner scale
In the event of a sensor failure, the bearing pointer dots represents a 1/4-degree displacement; each
is removed from view. If VOR has been selected and of the outer scale dots represents a 1/2-degree
a localizer frequency is tuned, the bearing pointer displacement. If a CAT II approach is being con-
and annunciation are removed. ducted, the pointer changes to yellow and flashes
when MLS glidepath deviation exceeds the CAT
3.6.1.7 Vertical Deviation Display II limits. If an MLS glidepath failure is detected,
the scale and pointer are removed from view and
Deviation from a glideslope (GS), MLS glidepath a red box with the letters MGP inscribed is dis-
(MGP), or a selected vertical navigation path (VNV) played. This flag will flash for 10 seconds before
is displayed on the right side (or left side depending becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated
on strap 39) of the EHSI. The scale consists of two by pushing the master warn reset.
white dots above and below a center index and a
pointer The pointer is green if from an on-side sensor c. Vertical Navigation (VNV) Deviation
and yellow if from a cross-side sensor. One of four
scale types may be displayed. The deviation scale Deviation from a selected vertical navigation
type is determined by the following conditions: path is displayed by a white star-shaped pointer
for the on-side sensor or a yellow star-shaped
pointer for the cross-side sensor. The VNAV
GS = VOR/LOC selected, LOC tuned and not back
pointer represents the center of the vertical
course.
navigation path, and the center of the scale rep-
MGP = MLS selected.
resents airplane position relative to the path.
VNAV = VNAV enabled and no GS or MGP display.
Each of the inner scale dots represents a 200-foot
None = none of the above.
displacement; each of the outer scale dots repre-
sents a 400-foot displacement. If a compatible
a. ILS Glideslope (GS) Deviation
LNV is selected and is in approach mode, the one
dot deviation from the selected path is ±100 feet.
The glideslope deviation pointer is a dual green
LNV approach mode is annunciated by a white
triangle for the on-side sensor and a dual yellow
APPR above the left two dots of the lateral devia-
triangle for the cross-side sensor. The glideslope
tion. During an ILS or MLS approach, the VNAV
pointer represents the center of the glideslope
display automatically switches to display GS or
beam, and the center of the glideslope scale rep-
MGP deviation at GS or MGP capture (capture
resents airplane position relative to beam center.
logic is from the flight control system). If a fail-
Each of the inner scale dots represents a 1/4-
ure of the vertical navigation system is detected,
degree displacement; each of the outer scale dots
the scale and pointer are removed from view and
represents a 1/2-degree displacement. If a CAT II
a red box with the letters VNV inscribed is dis-
approach is being conducted, the pointer changes
played. This flag will flash for 10 seconds before
to yellow and flashes when glideslope deviation
becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated
exceeds the CAT II limits. If a failure of the
by pushing the master warn reset.
glideslope receiver is detected, the scale and

3.6.1.8 Distance Display 3.6.1.11 Weather Target Alert Annunciation
The distance to the VOR, TCN, RNV, or LNV way- When target alert is enabled on the WXP-85( ) and
point selected for display on the primary course ar- the mode selection is not in standby, map, or off, a
row is shown digitally below the NAV identifier in yellow box with T inscribed appears to the right of
the upper left of the EHSI. The distance display will the lubber line. This display is steady unless a
be the same color as the primary course display. weather target is detected at which time the an-
Resolution is 0.1 nmi below 100 nmi and 1 nmi above nunciator flashes.
100 nmi. When DME hold has been selected, the let-
ter H, in yellow, appears to the right of the digits. If When target alert (TGT mode) is selected on the
invalid distance data is detected from a VOR, RNV, WXP-850( ), TGT mode is annunciated in cyan at
TCN, or LNV, the digits are replaced with dashes the left end of EHSI range mark. If a weather target is
same color as the primary course. If the digital bus detected, a flashing yellow box with TGT inscribed
monitor detects an inactive bus the data or dashes appears to the right of the lubber line. If turbulence
are removed from the display. is detected, the TGT changes to TRB and alternates
between TGT and TRB.
3.6.1.9 Data Display
3.6.2 ARC and ARC WX Formats
Elapsed time, ground speed, time-to-go, or wind is
displayed in the upper right below the letters ET, The ARC format is selected by positioning the DSP-
GSP, or TTG as applicable. The desired data dis- 84 format switch to ARC. The ARC WX format is
play is selected using the NAV DATA switch on the selected by positioning the DSP-84 format switch to
DSP-84. The last one selected is stored in nonvola- ARC WX. Refer to Figure 3-6.
tile memory and will reappear on power up.
3.6.2.1 Compass Sector Display
Ground speed and time-to-go are derived from the
The expanded compass sector displayed in the ARC
same sensor driving the primary course display and
format is similar to the full compass card displayed
will be the same color. If that source is VOR, the
calculation occurs in the EFIS system. Otherwise, in the HSI format except the EHSI displays a ±30-
the data is transmitted by the navigation system. degree compass segment at the top of the display
True airspeed is cyan if from the on-side air data and the airplane symbol is placed at the bottom
computer and yellow if cross-side. If invalid data is center of the display. The compass sector, on-side
detected from a VOR, RNV, TCN, or LNV, the dig- course arrow, heading cursor, and bearing pointer
its are replaced with dashes the same color as the rotate with respect to the intersection of the wings
selected primary course. If the digital bus monitor and fuselage of the airplane symbol.
detects an inactive bus the display is blanked. All other functions of the compass display (colors,
Elapsed time is shown in minutes and seconds up annunciation of true heading, directional gyro
to 59:59 and then in hours and minutes up to mode, on-side or cross-side heading source, heading
H9:59. Above H9:59, the display is dashed. The ET flag, and comparator warning) are the same as de-
display is green for the on-side DSP and yellow for scribed for the rose format.
the cross-side DSP. In the EFIS-84 system the re-
3.6.2.2 Active Selected Course Display
set/start/stop cycle of the timer is controlled by the
S/S (start/stop) button on the DSP-84. Active selected course is shown by a solid single bar
course arrow related to the compass segment. The ac-
3.6.1.10 Wind Annunciation tive selected course sensor is annunciated in green on
the left side of the EHSI. The single bar course arrow
Wind speed, if available from an LNV, is displayed has a deviation bar and scale near the airplane sym-
digitally in knots. Wind direction is shown by an bol. The deviation bar and scale rotate with the se-
arrow showing the direction of the wind relative to lected course throughout the full 360-degree range.
the aircraft symbol. This display is white if on-side The deviation bar and scale will be wholly or partially
data or yellow if cross-side data and is displayed out of view for some selected courses. To-from is indi-
regardless of the active course selection. If no on- cated by the letters TO or FR appearing in the lower
side or cross-side wind is available, dashes are dis- right of the display near the digital course
played for 10 seconds and then blanked.

Figure 3-6. ARC WX Format
readout. If LNV is the selected course and the LNV When the selected preset course is a VOR, a cyan
outputs a waypoint alert, the TO/FR annunciator octagonal symbol is placed in proper rho-theta posi-
flashes. All other functions and colors of the se- tion with respect to selected range and aircraft
lected course display are the same as described for heading. If available, the station ident is displayed
the HSI format. next to the VOR symbol on the side nearest the ver-
tical centerline of the display. If the preset course
3.6.2.3 Preset Course Display sensor is an RNV, the symbol is star shaped and
the sensor annunciation is RNV#; if a TCN, the
Preset selected course is shown by a dashed double symbol is a vortac symbol and the sensor annuncia-
bar course arrow related to the compass segment. A tion is TCN#.
preset course may be selected using the PRE position
of the COURSE switch on the DSP. The preset When the second (preset) course is a VOR or TCN
course arrow is displayed in cyan and its sensor is and its associated DME is in hold, the VOR or TCN
annunciated in cyan below the primary selected symbol is not displayed and the navigation sensor
course sensor on left side of the EHSI. The digital annunciator displays VOR1 H, TCN1 H, VOR2 H,
PRE course readout replaces the active course read- TCN2 H, or VOR2 H with the VOR# or TCN# in
out when the COURSE switch is in the PRE position. cyan and the H in yellow. If a failure of the DME
associated with a displayed VOR or TCN occurs,
If the preset course sensor is incompatible with the the symbol is removed from view and the sensor
heading sensor (true or magnetic), the navigation annunciator remains cyan followed by a D in yellow
sensor annunciator flashes until a compatible selec- (ie, VOR1 D).
tion is made.
If the preset course is a VOR or TCN and a localizer
frequency is tuned, no symbol is displayed and the
sensor annunciator displays LOC1 or LOC2 in cyan.

When the preset course is an LNV or RNV, the ‘to’ colors: green, yellow, red, and magenta (least re-
waypoint is displayed as a cyan star-shaped symbol flective to most reflective). The PAC Alert (Path
shown in its proper rho-theta position with respect Attenuation Compensation) feature alerts the pilot
to selected range and airplane heading. The way- when the radar encounters a target having heavy
point is identified by its waypoint number, also in rainfall rates that attenuate the beam so much that
cyan, with the number being next to the waypoint targets behind it may not be displayed. With the
symbol on the side nearest the vertical centerline of PAC Alert feature, a yellow band will occasionally
the display. If the LNV is compatible, the waypoint appear at the outer perimeter of the range being
symbol flashes for waypoint alert. displayed. Whenever this band appears, that por-
tion of the radar’s scan may be missing certain dis-
If a preset course navigation sensor failure is de- tant targets that are masked by intervening areas of
tected, the navaid symbol (VOR or waypoint) is re- rainfall. A dashed cyan range mark will appear at
moved from view and the preset course sensor an- midrange on the display with the midrange distance
nunciator becomes red and boxed and flashes for 10 (5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, and 150) shown in cyan digits at
seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can the right hand end of the range mark. Full-scale
be eliminated by pushing the master warn reset. range extends to the periphery of the compass seg-
ment. The range is selected using the RANGE con-
3.6.2.4 Range
trol on the WXP-85( ) Weather Radar Panel.
When ARC format is being displayed without
The weather radar mode selected on the WXP is
weather radar information, range is selected by the
shown in cyan at the left end of the range mark.
RNG knob on the DSP. Range is displayed as a
Various annunciations from the WXP are displayed
dashed cyan range mark located half way between
in cyan at the ends of the range arc. Weather an-
the compass sector and the airplane symbol. Half of
nunciations for WXP-85( ) are described in para-
the full-scale range is displayed in cyan digits at
graph 3.3 and WXP-850( ) annunciations are de-
the right-hand end of the range mark. Selectable
scribed in paragraph 3.4.
full-scale ranges are 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, 300,
and 600 nmi. Half-scale annunciated ranges are If the WXP is turned off or a loss of data from the
2.5, 5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, 150, and 300 nmi. WXP is detected, the range mark and weather dis-
3.6.2.5 Bearing Pointer Display plays are removed from view, and the range will
default to 300 nmi.
All functions and colors of the bearing pointer dis-
play are the same as described for the HSI format 3.6.3 MAP and MAP WX Formats
except that the pointer rotates around the relocated
The MAP format is selected by positioning the DSP-
airplane symbol.
84 format switch to MAP. The MAP WX format is
3.6.2.6 Vertical Deviation Display selected by positioning the DSP-84 format switch to
MAP WX. Refer to Figure 3-7.
All functions and colors of the vertical deviation
display are the same as described for the HSI 3.6.3.1 Compass Sector Display
format.
All functions and colors of the MAP format compass
3.6.2.7 Peripheral Displays display are the same as described for the ARC
format.
All functions and colors of the distance display,
data display, weather annunciation, and navigation 3.6.3.2 Active Selected Course Display
annunciation are the same as described for the HSI
format except that the LOC comparator warning is When the active selected course is a VOR, an octago-
relocated. nal VOR symbol is placed in proper rho-theta posi-
tion with respect to selected range and the airplane
3.6.2.8 ARC WX Format symbol. The station ident is displayed next to the
symbol on the side nearest the vertical centerline of
Weather radar display is added to the ARC format the display. A selected course line is drawn through
by positioning the DSP-84 format switch to ARC the symbol with its position controlled by the CRS
WX. Detectable weather will appear as one of four knob on the DSP. The course line is solid on the ‘to’

Figure 3-7. MAP Format
side of the symbol and dashed on the ‘from’ side. If distance readout in the upper left corner of the dis-
the VOR symbol is off scale with respect to selected play. When the primary selected course is an LNAV,
range and/or bearing, the course line is drawn with a flight plan string (up to five) of star-shaped way-
an arrow pointing toward the station, and the station point navaids and airport symbols are located in
ident is displayed on the line. The navigation sensor their proper rho-theta position with respect to the
is annunciated at the left center of the display. The selected range and airplane symbol. The waypoints
VOR and TCN symbols, course line, station identi- are identified by waypoint numbers or identifiers
fier, and navigation sensor annunciation are green if next to the waypoint symbol on the side nearest the
from on-side or yellow if from cross-side. If the pri- vertical centerline of the display. Waypoint symbols
mary selected course is RNV, the operation is the are connected by track lines as output by the LNAV
same as just described but the symbol is star shaped, system. An arrow is drawn on the track line pointing
and for TCN a vortac symbol is used. at the to waypoint. If the ‘to’ waypoint is off scale, an
arrow is drawn on the track line pointing at the ‘to’
If a localizer frequency is tuned, the VOR, TCN, or waypoint, and WPT # is displayed on the line. The
RNV symbol, station identifier, and course line are ‘to’ waypoint symbol flashes to indicate waypoint
removed from view. The navigation sensor annun- alert. The navigation sensor annunciation is dis-
ciator displays LOC1 or LOC2 in the same color as played at the left center of the display. The waypoint
the active course annunciator. string and navigation sensor annunciator are white
if from on-side or yellow if from cross-side.
If DME hold is selected, the VOR, TCN or RNV sym-
bol, station identifier, and course line are removed If the navigation sensor is incompatible with the
from view. In this condition, the navigation sensor type of heading (true or magnetic), the navigation
annunciator still displays the selected VOR and
DME hold is indicated by a yellow H next to the

sensor annunciator flashes until a compatible selec- line are removed from view and a yellow H is placed
tion is made. LNAV data is corrected if magnetic to the right of the numeral in the sensor annuncia-
variation is available. tion. If a failure of the DME associated with a dis-
played VOR, TCN, or RNV occurs, the symbol and
If a navigation sensor failure is detected while it is course line are removed from view and a red D is
selected for primary selected course, the navaid placed to the right of the numeral in the sensor an-
symbols (VOR or waypoint) and connecting lines are nunciation.
removed from view and the navigation sensor an-
nunciator becomes red and boxed and flashes for 10 When the selected preset course is an LNAV, a
seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be flight plan string (up to five) of star-shaped way-
eliminated by pushing the master warn reset. If a points, navaids, or airport symbols are located in
heading source fails, all NAV information is removed their proper rho-theta position with respect to the
from the display. selected range and airplane symbol. The waypoints
are identified by waypoint numbers next to the
3.6.3.3 Preset Course Display
waypoint symbol on the side nearest the vertical
A preset course may be selected in the same man- centerline of the display. Waypoint symbols are
ner as described for the HSI format. The preset se- connected by track lines as output by the LNAV
lected course is displayed in cyan and its sensor is system. An arrow is drawn on the track line point-
annunciated in cyan below the active selected ing at the ‘to’ waypoint. If the ‘to’ waypoint is off
course sensor on the left side of the EHSI. scale, the track line is still drawn at the proper an-
gle with WPT # displayed on the line. The ‘to’ way-
When the preset selected course is a VOR, a cyan point symbol flashes to indicate waypoint alert. The
octagon symbol is placed in proper rho-theta posi- navigation sensor annunciation is displayed at the
tion with respect to selected range and station left side of the display. The waypoint string and
bearing. The station ident is displayed next to the navigation sensor annunciator are cyan for the se-
symbol on the side nearest the vertical centerline of lected preset course.
the display. A selected course line is drawn through
the symbol with its position controlled by the CRS If the preset course navigation sensor is incompati-
knob on the associated DSP. The course line is solid ble with the heading sensor (true or magnetic), the
on the to side of the symbol and dashed on the from navigation sensor annunciator flashes until a com-
side. If the VOR symbol is off scale with respect to patible selection is made.
selected range and/or bearing, the course line is
drawn with an arrow pointing toward the station, If a navigation sensor failure is detected while it is
and the station ident is displayed on the line. If the selected for preset course, the navaid symbols (VOR
selected second course is an RNV, the operation is or waypoint) and connecting lines are removed from
as just described but the symbol is star shaped, and view and the preset course navigation sensor an-
for a TCN, a vortac symbol is used. The selected nunciator becomes red and boxed and flashes for 10
course angle for VOR, TCN, or RNV is controlled by seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can
the corresponding DSP’s CRS knob. If a localizer be eliminated by pushing the master warn reset.
frequency is tuned, no symbol, ident, or course line
is displayed and the NAV sensor annunciator dis- 3.6.3.4 Selected Heading
plays LOC1 or LOC2 in cyan. If MLS is selected, no
symbol or course line is displayed and the NAV All functions and colors of the selected heading dis-
sensor annunciator displays MLS1 or MLS2 in play are the same as described for the ARC
cyan. format.
3.6.3.5 Range
If DSP control is transferred and the cross-side
VOR, TCN, or RNV preset course (relative to the in All functions and colors of the range display are the
use DSP) is selected, the symbol remains in view same as described for the ARC format.
but no course line is drawn.
3.6.3.6 Bearing Display
When the preset course is a VOR, TCN, or RNV and
All functions and colors of bearing display are the
its associated DME is in hold, the symbol and course
same as described for ARC format.

3.6.3.7 Other MAP Format Displays Flight Management System or equivalent (here-
after referred to as LNAV). Additional functions
All functions and colors of the vertical deviation available include waypoint definition, display of
display, distance display, data display, navigation multiple waypoints, and remote data.
annunciation, and comparator warnings are the
same as described for the HSI format. 3.7.1 MFD-85B Front Panel Controls
3.6.3.8 MAP WX Format Following is a brief description of the MFD and its
controls. Refer to Figure 3-8.
Weather radar display is added to the MAP format
by positioning the DSP-84 format switch to MAP PWR (power) Used to turn the MFD on or off.
WX. Detectable weather will appear as one of four The mode that was selected
colors: green, yellow, red, and magenta (least re- when power is turned off will be
flective to most reflective). The PAC Alert (Path automatically reselected when
Attenuation Compensation) feature alerts the pilot power is reapplied.
when the radar encounters a target having heavy
rainfall rates that attenuate the beam so much that
Caution
targets behind it may not be displayed. With the
PAC Alert feature, a yellow band will occasionally If the MFD PWR button is off or if the RDR
appear at the outer perimeter of the range being dis- button is off, the radar receiver/transmitter
played. Whenever this band appears, that portion of may still be transmitting. This occurs if the
the radar’s scan may be missing certain distant tar- MODE switch on the WXP-85( ) is in WX,
gets that are masked by intervening areas of rainfall. NORM, or MAP position, or WXP-850( ) is
A dashed cyan range mark will appear at midrange in TGT, MAP, WX, WX+T, or TURB posi-
on the display with the midrange distance (5, 12.5, tion, and could possibly result in injury to
25, 50, 100, and 150) shown in cyan digits at the ground personnel.
right hand end of the range mark. Full-scale range
extends to the periphery of the compass segment. RDR (radar) Allows detectable weather to be
displayed (can be used with
The range is selected using the RANGE control on the
NAV button).
WXP-85( ) Weather Radar Panel. The weather radar
mode selected on the WXP is shown in cyan at the left
NAV (navigation) Enables navigation format to
end of the range mark. Various annunciations from the
appear showing the navaids last
WXP are displayed in cyan at the ends of the range arc.
selected (can be used with RDR
Weather annunciations for WXP-85( ) are described in
button).
paragraph 3.3 and WXP-850( ) annunciations are de-
scribed in paragraph 3.4.
RMT (remote) Enables up to three remote
sources of page data or ex-
If the WXP is turned off or a loss of data from the
tended data pages to be selected
WXP is detected, the range mark and weather dis-
and displayed one at a time.
plays are removed from view, and the range will
default to 300 nmi.
PGE (page) or Allows user selection, control,
EMG (emergency) and entry of alphanumeric in-
3.7 MFD-85B MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY,
formation. Up to 100 pages of in-
DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS
formation is selectable for com-
DESCRIPTION
bined page and emergency use.
The multifunction display is a multicolor crt display
DATA jack Allows for remote programming,
unit that mounts in the instrument panel in the
indexing, and revision of page
space normally occupied by the weather radar indi-
and emergency data. The Col-
cator. Standard display functions include weather
lins RDP-300 Remote
radar, pictorial navigation map, and page data. Ad-
ditional functions are available when the multi-
function display is used with the Collins FMS-90

Figure 3-8. MFD-85B Multifunction Display, Operating Controls
Data Programmer or the CEU- operations. In NAV mode, the

85( ) Checklist Entry Unit is joystick locates an MFD enter-
plugged into the DATA jack. able waypoint that can be trans-
ferred to the lateral navigation
INT (intensity) Provides an adjustable intensity system, if capable of receiving
control for MFD-85( ) display data. In RMT mode, the joystick
brightness. can be used to slew through
pages or chapters of data if the
Line Select Keys The four unlabeled pushbuttons remote system has the proper
on the right provide additional interface. In PGE or EMG
display control for the naviga- mode, the joystick is used to
tion menu, extended data, page, view different chapter titles and
emergency, and remote modes to move to new chapters.
of operation. Appropriate labels
are displayed to the left of these Line reverse Moves the cursor back (up the
line keys when procedures dic- (delta, ∆) list) in the PGE or EMG modes
tate menu functions such as in- and
dex or sensor selection.
Line advance Moves the cursor ahead (down
Joystick The joystick is a multiple posi- (inverted delta, ∇) the list) in the PGE or EMG
tion switch (lower right corner) modes and decreases NAV map
which is used in NAV, RMT, range when RDR is not selected.
PGE, and EMG mode

Note Detectable weather appears as one of four colors:

green, yellow, red, and magenta (least reflective to
The line advance and reverse buttons most reflective). PAC alert is displayed using yellow
change the navigation map range when the arcs along the outer edges of the display. If map
radar display is not active. A 5- and 600- mode is selected on the WXP-85( )/850( ), red is re-
nmi range is also available with midrange placed by magenta and green is replaced by cyan.
mark annunciations of 2.5 and 300 nmi, re- The range mark is changed from cyan to green. If a
spectively, when RDR is not selected. When WXP-850( ) is used and WX+T or TURB is selected,
RDR is selected and the WXP-85( ) mode turbulence is displayed in magenta. If MAP mode is
switch is in TEST, WX, NORM, or MAP, or selected on the WXP, red is replaced by magenta,
WXP-850( ) mode switch is in TGT, MAP, and green is replaced by cyan. The range mark also
WX, or WX+T, the radar range control has changes from cyan to green.
priority over the navigation map range.
A single cyan range mark displayed at midrange
Recall (RCL) Allows viewing of previously with the midrange distance (5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100,
skipped lines when in the PGE and 150) shown in cyan digits at the right-hand end
or EMG mode. If in PGE or of the range mark, 2.5- and 300-nmi midrange dis-
EMG mode and NAV or RMT is tances (5- and 600-nmi full-scale ranges) are avail-
selected, then pushing RCL able in NAV only mode, weather radar mode,
immediately returns the display heading cursor (if on scale), and heading line if se-
to the line in the PGE or EMG lected along with the weather radar display. If in
chapter that was being dis- RDR only or in a combined RDR-NAV mode, the
played prior to selecting NAV or range mark is dashed and weather range is selected
RMT. on the WXP, as is the radar mode. If in NAV only,
the range mark is dashed and the range is selected
Skip (SKP) Moves the cursor past a line in using the ∆ or ∇ keys along the bottom edge of the
the PGE or EMG mode without MFD.
changing its color. This line is
recallable at any time prior to PAC Alert (Path Attenuation Correction) shows the
chapter exit. pilot when the radar encounters a target having
rainfall rates heavy enough to attenuate the beam
Clear (CLR) Resets all lines of a selected so much that targets behind it may not be dis-
chapter to yellow when in the played. With the PAC Alert feature, a yellow band
PGE or EMG mode. may occasionally appear at the outer perimeter of
the range being displayed. Whenever this band ap-
3.7.2 MFD-85B Weather Radar (RDR) Display pears, that portion of the radar’s scan may be
missing certain distant targets that are masked by
The weather radar format on the MFD-85B has the intervening areas of rainfall.
aircraft symbol centered at the bottom of the dis-
play and a digital heading readout centered at the If the WXP is turned off, or invalid data or loss of
top of the display. No compass arc is displayed. Re- signal from the WXP is detected, and radar mode is
fer to Figure 3-9. The full range mark is a dashed selected, the dashed half range ring is removed, the
arc and the half-range mark is a solid arc. The range defaults to 300 nmi, and the radar mode an-
range is selected on the WXP. Weather raster ex- nunciation is OFF. If a fault is detected in the
tends from the aircraft symbol to the full range weather radar system, FAULT alternates with the
mark. radar mode annunciation.
Pushing the RDR button allows weather to be dis- WXP-85( ): Weather information from the Collins
played on the MFD in the form selected on the WXT-250B Radar Receiver-Transmitter is processed
WXP. A second push of the RDR button deletes the by the WXP-85C or -85D Weather Radar Panel and is
weather display and returns the display to the map available for display on the MFD. The WXP-85C and -
mode that was previously selected on the NAV 85D are identical in appearance to earlier WXP-85A
mode menu. and -85B versions, but are different in function. The

Figure 3-9. Radar (RDR) Format, MFD-85B
WXP-85C and -85D both provide a four color Attenuation Correction), target alert, and GCS
(green, yellow, red, magenta) weather radar display (Ground Clutter Suppression).
with PAC Alert (Path Attenuation Correction) and
target alert. Turbulence mode removes all weather radar targets
from the display except for areas of turbulence
If RDR has been selected on the MFD with target which appear in magenta. When TGT mode is se-
alert enabled on the WXP and not in OFF, STBY, or lected on the WXP-850( ), TGT in cyan is annunci-
MAP mode, a yellow box with the yellow letter T ated in the upper left of the MFD. If a weather tar-
inscribed appears nonflashing to the right of the get is detected, a flashing yellow box with TGT in-
lubber line The T annunciation flashes when a tar- scribed appears to the right of the heading readout.
get is detected. The target alert function is auto- If turbulence is detected, the TGT changes to TRB
matically enabled on the MFD (but not the EHSIs) and alternates between TGT and TRB. Ground
for all other MFD formats (NAV, RMT, PGE, and clutter suppression (GCS) reduces the intensity of
EMG) regardless of the position of the WXP TGT ground returns so that most of them disappear
pushbutton. If the TGT switch is on and MAP mode from the display allowing better definition of pre-
is selected, the target alert circuits are disabled (T cipitation targets. G±3 (Gain), is displayed to the
is not displayed) but become functional when WX or right of the RDR annunciation. The tilt or autotilt
NORM mode is reselected on the WXP. The annunciation +15 or A+15 is displayed at the right
weather radar mode is displayed in cyan in the up- end of the range mark as is the USTB (un-
per left corner in all MFD formats. stabilized) annunciation. All the weather radar an-
nunciation is cyan unless SLV has been selected. If
WXP-850( ): Weather information from the Collins slaved has been selected, all the annunciations
TWR-850 Radar Receiver-Transmitter is processed change to yellow except the range rings, and a yel-
by the WXP-850A or -850B Weather Radar Panel low X is displayed in front of the weather radar
and is available for display on the MFD. The WXP- mode annunciation.
850A and -850B both provide a four color (green,
yellow, red, magenta) weather radar display with 3.7.3 MFD-85B Navigation (NAV) Display
moisture-based turbulence display, PAC Alert (Path
When the NAV button is pushed, the last selected
navigation mode appears showing the navaids last

Figure 3-10. Typical NAV Display, MFD-85B Heading Up Mode
selected along with the airplane symbol, heading the displays by their designated waypoint number.
cursor, and range marks. Refer to Figure 3-10. If Waypoints are transmitted by the LNAV in either
selected heading is off scale, a digital readout ascending or descending order dependent on the
(magenta) appears at the appropriate end of the route selected.
compass sector closest to the selected heading value
Refer to Figure 3-11. The upper line select key (the
and a magenta line appears from the center of the
key on the right hand side of the display with the
airplane symbol to the edge of the display at the
green boxed arrow pointing toward it) allows the pi-
selected heading angle. The selected heading func-
lot to change the source of the navaids. When this
tion is controlled by the HDG knob on the left side
key is pushed, the MFD goes into the NAV menu
DSP unless control has been transferred to the
mode and the NAV display is replaced by key labels
right side DSP. In NAV only, the range mark is
as follows (from top to bottom): VOR1/VOR2,
dashed and the range displayed at the right end of
LRN1/LRN2, NAVAIDS, AIRPORTS, and HDG. To
the cyan range mark is selected by the ∆ or ∇ keys
select sensors for the NAV display, the desired line
along the bottom edge of the MFD. A second push
select buttons opposite the sensor are pushed with
of the NAV button removes the navigation display.
sensor selection indicated by a color change to green
Four map modes are available on the MFD-85B if selected, and white if not selected. For the
when the NAV mode has been selected. The VOR1/VOR2, and LRN1/LRN2 keys, successive
heading up, north up-A/C center, and north up- pushes alternate between both off (LRN1/LRN2 both
max view are selectable from the MFD NAV white), LRN1 selected (LRN1 is green), LRN2 se-
menu, and the Plan mode is available from com- lected (LRN2 is green), both on (LRN1/LRN2 both
patible LNVs. NAV in green is annunciated in the green), and back to both off. Pushing the joystick left
upper left corner of the display. When radar is not or right changes the number of navaids to be dis-
selected, the range is selected on the line advance played. Pushing the joystick up or down changes the
keys of the MFD, and the range arc is dashed. number of airports to be displayed. Up to seven
navaids and seven airports can be selected. Heading
The EFIS EHSIs and the MFD can display multiple bug is selected by pushing the CLR button on the
(up to five) waypoints dependent on selected range. bottom of the MFD. Pushing the CLR button again
Waypoints are interconnected and are identified on

Figure 3-11. Typical NAV Display, MFD-85B NAV Menu Mode
deletes the heading bug from the MFD display. HDG Magenta, includes heading bug
Following selection of the desired sensor(s), select a symbol.
NAV format from the left side of the display.
Pushing the NAV button (labeled heading up), RMT Note
button (labeled north up-A/C center), or the PGE
button (labeled north up-max view) returns the If dual area navigation systems are in-
display to the NAV format display selected with the stalled and operating, the two key labels at
selected sensor(s) shown. Color coding for the se- the upper right of the above figure would
lected NAV sources are as follows: change from VOR 1 to RNV 1 and from
VOR 2 to RNV 2 respectively.
VOR1 Green, includes map symbol,
course line (if selected), digital When digital course is displayed, it is shown to a
course and bearing, station whole number of degrees only. If VOR is the se-
ident, and to/from. lected sensor, then the position of the correspond-
ing course line is controlled by the CRS knob on the
VOR2 Yellow, same data as VOR1 applicable DSP. The course line may be rotated
LRN1 White, includes waypoint sym- with the DSP selected CRS knob even if the pri-
bol(s) and connecting lines, mary course is LNAV or OFF. When displaying the
digital course, and waypoint NAV format, weather radar information may be
numbers. added/deleted by pushing the RDR button.
LRN2 Cyan, same data as LRN1. 3.7.3.1 Compatibility Between Navigation
NAVAIDS Green, includes vortac symbol, Display and Heading Source
and station ident. Depending on selected navigation sources and the
AIRPORTS Green, includes airport symbol, selection of magnetic or true heading sources, com-
and airport ident. patibility problems can occur. Table 3-4 defines the
conditions which are incompatible and the MFD

Table 3-4. MFD Map. heading readout. Two dashed range marks are dis-
played. One is at full range and one is at half range.
SELECTED MAP HEADING SENSOR The range is selected by the line advance keys of the
COURSE
MFD. The selected range readout is displayed at the
right end of the range mark and half the selected
#1 MAG MAG TRUE TRUE
#2 MAG TRUE MAG TRUE range is displayed to the right of the half range mark.
Display parameters are selected from the NAV menu.
VOR 1/2 OK OK A A
ADF 1/2 N/A N/A N/A N/A Pushing the RDR button allows weather to be dis-
LRN 1 MAG OK OK B B played in the form selected on the WXP. A second
LRN 1 TRUE B B OK OK push of the RDR button deletes the weather display.
LRN 2 MAG OK C A B
LRN 2 TRUE B A C OK VOR stations as selected by the MFD NAV menu are
shown by octagon-shaped symbols placed in proper
A — Flash until sensors are compatible. ho-theta position with respect to airplane heading
B — Flash only if MAGVAR associated with LRN sensor is
invalid.
and selected range. A selected course line is drawn
C — Flash unless MAGVAR associated with LRN sensor is through the station symbol with its position con-
invalid. trolled by the CRS knob on the corresponding DSP
(or CHP). The selected course line may be rotated
with the DSP’s (or CHP’s) selected CRS knob even if
the primary course is not VOR. If DSP (or DCP) con-
annunciations that are provided to alert the pilot of
trol is transferred, the corresponding course line is
those conditions.
removed. The course line is solid on the to side of the
VOR and dashed on the from side. If the VOR sym-
3.7.3.2 Joystick Operation bol is off scale with respect to selected range and/or
bearing, the course line is drawn with an arrow
In NAV mode, the joystick can be used to locate an pointing toward the station and an IDENT is dis-
MFD defined waypoint for entry in a compatible played on the line. The digital course and station
LNAV system if installed. As soon as the joystick is identifier are shown in the lower left corner for
moved in any direction, the label ENTER appears VOR1 or lower right forVOR2. Left side (pilot’s)
next to the third line select key (from the top). As VOR’s are green and right side (copilot’s) are yellow.
the green waypoint symbol is being positioned on If the paired DME is placed in hold or fails, the VOR
the display, its position (course and distance) from symbol and DME ident are removed and the sensor
the airplane symbol is shown in green digits in the annunciator displays bearing. If a VOR is selected
lower left center of the display. A green dashed line for display and a localizer frequency is tuned, no
interconnects the waypoint symbol and the center symbol is displayed and the sensor annunciator dis-
of the airplane symbol to aid in orientation. Once plays LOC1 or LOC2. If the paired DME is placed in
the waypoint has been positioned, it can be inserted hold or fails, the VOR symbol and station identifier
in the selected LNAV waypoint string by pushing are removed and the sensor annunciator displays
the line select key labeled ENTER. Only one LNAV bearing. The colors for these annunciators are the
waypoint string may be selected at one time same as the primary course annunciators.
(selecting one deselects the other) and joystick in-
formation is transmitted to the selected LNAV only. TCN and RNV are displayed similarly to VOR ex-
cept they have no identifiers, RNV uses a star-
shaped symbol, and TCN uses a vortac symbol. The
3.7.3.3 Heading Up Navigation Format RNV and TCN are selected from the LNV1/LNV2
line of the MFD NAV menu when available.
Refer to Figure 3-12. The heading up display has the
aircraft symbol centered at the bottom of the display, A selected LNAV flight plan string (up to five way-
and a digital heading readout centered at the top of points, navaids, or airports) is displayed as star-
the display. No compass arc is displayed. The type of shaped, navaid, and airport symbols with track lines
heading is annunciated to the right of the placed in the proper rho-theta position. The WPT #
or waypoint identifier are annunciated adjacent to
each symbol. The airport symbol has no correlation

Figure 3-12. Heading Up Mode, MFD-85B
with actual runway heading or available runways. If the MPU detects a heading comparator mis-
The course to the next LNV1 waypoint and its way- match, a yellow box with the letters HDG inscribed
point number is annunciated in the lower left corner appears to the left of the heading readout.
below the VOR1 course annunciation. The sensor for
the next LNV2 waypoint and its waypoint number is If a failure of a selected navigation sensor is de-
annunciated in the lower right corner below the tected, the annunciation in the lower left or lower
VOR2 course annunciation. LNV1 displays are white right changes to VOR, LNV, or any other selected
and LNV2 are cyan. If the next waypoint is off scale, source and turns red. The navaid symbols and con-
the course line is still displayed with an arrow necting lines are removed.
pointing toward the to waypoint. If the distance be-
tween the first and second or second and third way- If any selected navigation sensor is incompatible
points is greater than 511 nm (the maximum value), with the type of heading being displayed (magnetic
a line is drawn as if the waypoint was off scale. The or true) the appropriate NAV annunciator flashes
to waypoint flashes to indicate waypoint alert from a until a compatible selection has been made.
compatible LNAV.
3.7.3.4 North Up-A/C Center Navigation
With LNAV data being displayed, the joystick can be Format
used to position a new waypoint in a compatible
LNAV system. As soon as the joystick is moved, the Refer to Figure 3-13. The north up-A/C center dis-
third line select key (from the top) is labeled ENTER play always has true north at the top of the display.
and is used to insert the new waypoint in the way- North up is annunciated with an N and a Ç. The
point string of the selected LNAV as the to waypoint. white aircraft symbol is located in the center of the
If the ENTER button is not pushed and the joystick display and rotates as the heading of the aircraft
is not moved for 30 seconds, the joystick data and changes.
ENTER are removed from the display.
The heading readout and heading source annuncia-
If a failure of the heading sensor is detected, a red
tion is displayed to the right of the N. Two dashed
box with the letters HDG inscribed appears to the
range rings, concentric about the aircraft symbol, are
right of the heading source annunciation.
displayed. One is at full range and one is at half
range. The range is selected on the line advance keys

Figure 3-13. North Up-A/C Center Mode, MFD-85B
of the MFD. Each range ring has a range readout. The white aircraft symbol is positioned on an imagi-
Display parameters are selected from the NAV nary circle near the edge of the display so the greatest
menu. amount of area is shown in front of the aircraft. The
aircraft symbol is positioned on the current aircraft
Pushing the RDR button returns the display to the track with the nose of the aircraft always pointing to-
heading up mode with weather displayed in the ward the center of the display. The heading readout
form selected on the WXP-85( )/850( ). A second and heading source annunciation is displayed to the
push of the RDR button returns the display to the right of the N. Two dashed range marks, with their
previously selected north up-A/C center mode. center of curvature at the aircraft symbol, are dis-
played. One is at full range and one is at half range.
Pushing the NAV button deletes the navigation in-
The range is selected on the line advance keys of the
formation and changes the display to a north up
MFD. Each range ring has a range readout. Display
sector mode with the digital heading placed to the
parameters are selected from the NAV menu.
right of the heading annunciator. No dashed range
ring at half the selected range is displayed. Pushing Pushing the RDR button returns the display to the
the NAV button again causes the navigation infor- heading up mode with weather displayed in the
mation to appear and returns the format to north form selected on the WXP. A second push of the
up-A/C center display. RDR button returns the display to the previously
selected north up-max view mode.
All other north up-A/C center displays and annun-
ciations are the same as described in paragraph All other north up-max view displays and annun-
3.7.3.3 Heading Up display. ciations are the same as described in paragraph
3.7.3.3.
3.7.3.5 North Up-Max View
3.7.3.6 Plan Mode
Refer to Figure 3-14. The north up-max view dis- Refer to Figure 3-15. The plan mode is similar to the
play always has true north at the top center of the north up-A/C center display but the aircraft symbol
display. North up is annunciated with an N and a N . is not normally displayed. The plan mode always has

Figure 3-14. North Up-Max View Mode, MFD-85B
true north at the top of the display. North up is an- If the MPU detects a heading comparator mis-
nunciated with an N and a N . No heading readout match, the letters HDG in yellow inscribed in a
or heading source annunciation is displayed. The yellow box appear to the left of the north up annun-
plan mode is centered on a waypoint that is received ciation.
from a compatible LNV. The plan mode is initiated
from the LNV and only parameters from the LNV VOR, TCN, or RNV stations are not displayed in
can be displayed. Plan mode displays available pa- this mode unless they are part of the LNV data.
rameters as selected on the MFD NAV menu. Two Selection of VOR/TCN/RNV via the MFD NAV
dashed range rings, concentric about the center menu is not possible.
waypoint symbol, are displayed. One is at full range
and one is at half range. The range is selected on the When in plan mode the joystick is not active unless
line advance keys of the MFD. Each range ring has a the aircraft is on screen. If the aircraft is on screen,
range readout. If the aircraft is in the area being dis- the operation is normal.
played or comes into the area being displayed, it is
displayed and moves across the fixed map pointed in 3.7.4 Remote Data (RMT)
the direction of track.
The LNAV transmits pages of navigation informa-
Pushing the RDR button returns the display to the tion which can be displayed on the MFD when the
heading up mode with weather displayed in the proper remote port is selected. The different pages of
form selected on the WXP-85( )/850( ). A second data (and associated colors) are controlled by select-
push of the RDR button returns the display to the ing different modes on the LNAV’s CDU. With some
previously selected plan mode. LNAV’s, the joystick and select keys can be used to
select other pages of information. With three remote
If failure of the heading sensor is detected, the let- ports available, alphanumeric data from two FMS-90
ters HDG in red and inscribed in a red box appear systems plus one (or two if only one FMS-90 is in-
in place of the digital heading readout. stalled) additional data sources can be displayed one
at a time if available in the system configurations.

Figure 3-15. Plan Mode, MFD-85B
Refer to figures 3-16 and 3-17. Pushing the RMT pushing the joystick up or down. Pushing the line
button causes the remote menu labels (RMT 1, select key next to the desired page title causes the
RMT 2, RMT 3, and EXTENDED DATA) to ap- first page of data associated with that title to be
pear next to the line select keys. Pushing the ap- displayed. If there is more data associated with
propriate line select key causes data from the se- that title, an arrow is displayed in the lower right
lected remote input to be displayed on the MFD. corner showing which way to push the joystick to
The displayed data depends upon the position of display it. Fixed display legends are white and
the controls on the selected remote system. If no variable data is green. Pushing the joystick left or
remote device is connected or if the selected sys- right causes the first page of the previous or next
tem does not output remote data for the line select title to be displayed. Pushing any selected right
key pushed, a message NO DATA FROM RE- side key returns to the menu. Any other MFD
MOTE DEVICE #X displays after approximately 5 mode may be entered directly by pushing the as-
seconds. Weather radar mode and target alert sociated button. Weather radar mode and target
status remain on the display in this format. alert status remain on the display during this
mode.
3.7.4.1 Extended Data Display
3.7.5 Page (PGE) and Emergency (EMG)
Refer to figures 3-18 and 3-19 and Table 3-5. Procedures
Several pages of data useful to the flight crew or
maintenance personnel may be displayed on the 100 pages of user information may be stored in
MFD. These are: VOR/DME, CRUISE, AP- nonvolatile memory in the MFD. This data may be
PROACH, CAT II, and DIAGNOSTICS. Pushing arranged in chapters and can be designated as ei-
the RMT button followed by the line select key ther normal page (PGE) or emergency (EMG) data.
next to EXTENDED DATA causes a menu with All 100 pages can be input and modified by the user
the first four page titles to be displayed. Other using either the hand-held RDP-300 Remote Data
page titles may be selected by programmer or the CEU-85( ) Checklist Entry Unit.

Figure 3-16. Typical RMT Format, RMT Menu
Figure 3-17. Typical RMT Format, RMT Display

Figure 3-18. Typical RMT Format, EXTENDED DATA Menu
Figure 3-19. Typical RMT Format, EXTENDED DATA Display

Table 3-5. Extended Data Display Formats.
AVAILABLE PAGE SENSOR
VOR/DME Formats
Active Page
WX T
PAGE 1 OF 3 VOR/DME
VOR1 DME1
CID DME #1
FREQ 117.60 117.60 HOLD VOR #1/DME #1
BRG TO 123.0° DIST 235.5 NM VOR #1/DME #1
GSP 250 KTS DME #1
VOR2 DME2
IOW DME #2
FREQ 116.20 116.20 HOLD VOR #2/DME #2
BRG TO 110.5° DIST 230.7 NM VOR #2/DME #2
GSP 252 KTS È DME #2 (Arrow means move joystick down to view next VOR/DME
page.)
DME Channel 1 Page
STBY T
PAGE 2 OF 3 VOR/DME
ACTIVE 1 IDENT CID DME #1
DIST 120.0 NM
FREQ 117.60 MHZ HOLD
REMOTE IDENT ALO
(MLS) DIST 175.5 NM
FREQ 112.20 MHZ
REMOTE IDENT DSM
DIST 25.7 NM
FREQ 114.10 MHZ ↕ (Arrows mean move joystick up to view previous VOR/DME page, or
down to view next VOR/DME page.)
DME Channel 2 Page
TEST T
PAGE 3 OF 3 VOR/DME
ACTIVE 2 IDENT ALO DME #2
DIST 175.5 NM
FREQ 112.20 MHZ
REMOTE IDENT DSM
(MLS) DIST 25.7 NM
FREQ 114.10 MHZ
REMOTE IDENT CID
DIST 120.0 NM
FREQ 117.60 MHZ HOLD Ç (Arrow means move joystick up to view previous VOR/DME page.)

CRUISE Formats
Page 1
WX T
PAGE 1 OF 5 CRUISE
TAS 450 GSP 430 ADC #1
WIND 44°/ 10 KTS (MAG) LNAV #1
SAT –15 °C ADC #1
TAT –29 °C ADC #1
ISA –5 °C CALCULATED
TIME TO WPT 00:32 ETE 12:34 ETA LNAV #1/CALCULATED
CRUISE Formats (Cont)
TIME TO DEST 01:13 ETE 13:13 ETA LNAV #1/CALCULATED

TO WPT ID CIDARPT LNAV #1
BRG/DIST 79 °/147 NM LNAV #1
CROSS TRACK 12.5 NM L OF A/C È LNAV #1 (Arrow means move joystick down to view next CRUISE
page.)
Page 2
STBY T
PAGE 2 OF 5 CRUISE
MAG HDG 123° LNAV #1
TRUE HDG 120° LNAV #1
MAG VAR 3° WEST LNAV #1
DESIRED TRACK 123° (TRUE) LNAV #1
ACTUAL TRACK 125.5° (TRUE) LNAV #1
DRIFT ANGLE 2.5° LEFT LNAV #1
CROSS TRACK 12.5 NM R OF A/C ↕ LNAV #1 (Arrows mean move joystick up to view previous CRUISE
page, or down to view next CRUISE page.)
Page 3
NORM T
PAGE 3 OF 5 CRUISE
TIME TO WPT 01:32 ETE 13:32 ETA LNAV #1/CALCULATED
TIME TO DEST 05:43 ETE 17:43 ETA LNAV #1/CALCULATED
BRG/DIST 79°/147 NM LNAV #1
MESSAGE WPT ALRT DR LNAV #1
APPROACH XTRK WARN LNAV #1
NEXT WPT ID ALOVOR ↕ LNAV #1 Arrows mean move joystick up to view previous CRUISE
Page 4
WX T
PAGE 4 OF 5 CRUISE
PRES POS N 42° 17.4′ LNAV #1
W117° 33.1′ LNAV #1
CID N 42° 12.2′ LNAV #1
W118° 15.1′ LNAV #1
SUX N 38° 29.1′ LNAV #1
W132° 29.5′ LNAV #1
FSD N 27° 49.0′ LNAV #1
W133° 36.3′ ↕ LNAV #1 (Arrows mean move joystick up to view previous CRUISE


Page 5
OFF T
PAGE 5 OF 5 CRUISE
AIR DATA
ALTITUDES: 12500 FT BARO ADC #1
12300 FT PRESSURE ADC #1
10000 FT PRESELECT ADC #1
SPEEDS: 250 KTS IAS ADC #1
450 KTS TAS ADC #1
390 KTS GSP LNAV #1
CRUISE Formats (Cont)
0.783 MACH ADC #1

–650 FPM VS Ç ADC #1 (Arrows mean move joystick up to view previous CRUISE
page.)
APPROACH Formats
Setup Page
NORM T
PAGE 1 OF 2 APPROACH
LOC FREQ 111.30 VOR #1
DME DIST 134.6 NM HOLD DME #1
ADF FREQ 1023.5 BRG 123° ADF #1
WIND 144°/20 KTS (MAG) LNAV #1
DRIFT 4.3° LEFT LNAV #1
GSP 250 LNAV #1
RAD ALT 1026 FT RA #1
DH SET TO 200 FT È EFIS #1 (Arrow means move joystick down to view next
APPROACH page.)
Progress Page
NORM T
PAGE 2 OF 2 APPROACH
LOC FREQ 113.30 OM VOR #1
DME DIST 134.6 NM HOLD DME #1
ADF BRG 115° ADF #1
BRG/DIST 144°/252 NM LNAV #1
MAG HDG 160° LNAV #1
DRIFT 4.3° LEFT LNAV #1
RAD ALT 750 FT DH 200 FT RA 1/EFIS #1
TAS 140 GSP 160 ADC #1/LNAV #1
WIND 144°/20 KTS (MAG) Ç LNAV #1 (Arrow means move joystick up to view previous
APPROACH page.)

CAT II Formats
Page 1
NORM T
PAGE 1 OF 2 CAT II
PILOT MODE A,A COPLT
OK CAT II SELECTED OK
OK LOC/MAZ SELECTED OK
OK NOT HSI MAP FORMAT OK
OK COMMAND BARS IN VIEW OK
OK FCS NOT IN GO AROUND OK
OK NOT BACK COURSE OK
OK ONSIDE ATTITUDE OK
-- ONSIDE HEADING --
-- ONSIDE DCP --
OK NOT DUAL TRANSFER OK
È (Arrow means move joystick down to view next CAT II page.)
Page 2
NORM T
PAGE 2 OF 2 CAT II
PILOT MODE A,A COPLT
OK XSIDE VALID OK
OK GS/MGP VALID OK
OK LOC/MAZ VALID OK
OK RADIO ALT VALID OK
OK ATTITUDE VALID OK
OK HEADING VALID OK
OK DSP VALID OK
-- MAG HEADING SELECTED --
OK ABOVE DECISION HEIGHT OK
Ç (Arrow means move joystick up to view previous CAT II page.)
DIAGNOSTICS Formats
PILOT/COPILOT SIDE SENSOR

Page 1 Configuration Strapping
PAGE 1 OF 11 DIAGNOSTICS
CONFIGURATION
PILOT COPILOT
HEADING: A429 P1 CSDB 3 X STRAPS
ATTITUDE: A429 P1 CSDB 3
RAD ALT: ALT-55 ALT-55
FCS TYPE: APS-85 P APS-85 P
ADF TYPE: A429 NONE
LNAV ANN: RNV 1 FMS 3
LNAV BUS: A429 A429
TCN BUS: LS429 ALL 561
DME BUS: CSDB A429 È (Arrow means move joystick down to view next DIAGNOSTIC
page.)

DIAGNOSTICS Formats (Cont)
Page 2 Configuration Strapping

CONFIGURATION
PILOT COPILOT
SIDE STRP: LEFT RIGHT
SKY SEL: FULL SKY RACETRACK
SPD SCALE: FAST/SLOW AOA
VNAV SEL: ON OFF
XSD FLAG: ENABLED ENABLED
RSNG RNWY: ENABLED ENABLED
HDG PANEL: SEPARATE COMMON
CTL PANEL: XDSP-84 DSP-84 ↕ (Arrows mean move joystick up to view previous DIAGNOSTIC
page, or down to view next DIAGNOSTIC page.)
Page 3 Pilot’s Side CSDB Diagnostics
PILOT’S SIDE CSDB
AHRS F3 F1 C1 D2 7A 6B 00 AB AHC-85 #1
ADC F3 D2 3F 08 98 92 ADC-82 #1
DME CH1 F3 57 D0 63 BB A3 DME-42 #1
DME CH2 F3 4A CA 5C 4A 22 DME-42 #1
DME CH3 F3 60 23 41 30 00 DME-42 #1
VIR F3 16 D1 6D 3A 13 ↕ VIR-32 #1 (Arrows mean move joystick up to view previous
DIAGNOSTIC page, or down to view next DIAGNOSTIC page.)
Page 4 Copilot’s Side CSDB Diagnostics

COPILOT’S SIDE CSDB
AHRS F3 23 45 21 AD 56 CD 34 AHC-85 #2
ADC F3 DE 34 12 00 5A ADC-82 #2
DME CH1 F3 1A D2 6C 1A 0A DME-42 #2
DME CH2 F3 97 14 5C 00 A3 DME-42 #2
DME CH3 F3 45 CA 4C A3 61 DME-42 #2
VIR F3 23 FF 6D 3A A3 ↕ VIR-32 #2 (Arrows mean move joystick up to view previous
Page 5 ARINC 429 Maintenance Words
429 MAINTENANCE WORDS
AHS: 60 12 01 17 AHC-85D
DME: 60 39 01 17 DME-442
VIR: 60 67 01 17 VIR-432
ADF: 60 45 01 17 ADF-462
TCN: 60 00 00 17 TCN-500
EFIS: 68 10 01 17 DPU/MPU
DSP: 23 1A ↕ DSP-84 (Arrows mean move joystick up to view previous

Page 6 Digital Bus Activity

BUS ACTIVITY
LF RT LF RT
429 LRN: OK -- 561 LRN: -- OK
429 ADF: -- -- CSDB ADC: OK OK
429 MLS: OK OK CSDB FCS: OK OK
429 VIR: -- -- CSDB DSP: OK OK
429 DME: -- -- CSDB VIR: OK OK
429 AHRS: -- -- CSDB DME: OK OK
DIG WXP: OK OK CSDB AHRS: -- --
↕ (Arrows mean move joystick up to view previous DIAGNOSTIC
Page 7 Analog Validity
ANALOG
SYNCHRO VALIDS
HDG: OK HDG: OK
PITCH: OK PITCH: OK
ROLL: -- ROLL: --
ADF: OK ADF: OK
NAV: -- NAV: OK
FD: --
IN VIEW: --
RAD ALT: OK
FAST/SLOW: OK ↕ (Arrows mean move joystick up to view previous DIAGNOSTIC
Page 8 Analog Inputs

ANALOG INPUTS
PITCH: 100.6° DOWN
ROLL: 102.5° RIGHT
HDG: 330.6°
ADF BRG: 323.5°
NAV BRG: 90.1°
Page 9 Input Voltages
VOLTAGES
+28 VDC: +28.1
+15 VDC: +14.7
–15 VDC: –15.0
+5 VDC: +4.9

Page 10 EFIS Transmit Data to FCS

DIGITAL OUTPUTS TO FCS
A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 C 6 6 2 6 5 4 3 9 8 F 2
C 0 1 2 3 D E 4 5 C 0 9 C 7 0 0 1 2 2 3 E1 1 9
C 1 8 9 8 9 3 8 7 A B D C 8 9 2 9 A 3 4 DE 8 8
C 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 9 1 F 5 4 2 A B9 9 C
C 3 4 A 3 2 B C 8 7 F E C A 5 1 5 5 5 4 2 2 8 9
C 4 6 7 5 5 8 4 9 3 3 3 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 5 6 5 6 5 6 7 4 8 3 9 F 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Page 11 EFIS Transmit Data to DSP
DIGITAL OUTPUTS TO DSP
DSP: FMS:
A 5 A 5 A5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5
8 1 7 7 6 6 4 A C B8 0 0 0 4 5 0 0 0 0
8 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 C B8 0 0 0 4 5 0 0 0 0
8 3 1 2 4 9 0 D C C8 0 4 0 0 0 8 0 0 0
8 4 4 5 6 7 2 F C DE 1 8 7 F 4 0 0 0 0
8 5 2 A DF E 0 C DE 2 9 D3 4 1 0 0 0
8 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A 7 8 0 F 6 5 1 0 0 0 0
Ç (Arrows mean move joystick up to view previous DIAGNOSTIC
Note page at a time starting with page 1 whenever the

PGE or EMG buttons are pushed. The following
Procedures for programming data (PGE, procedure for using the PGE and EMG functions
EMG, chapter titles) into the MFD-85( ) assumes the data has been chapterized. Refer to
using the RDP-300 Remote Data Pro- Figure 3-20, Figure 3-21, Figure 3-22,
grammer are located in the back of this and Figure 3-23.
section. Procedures for programming data
(PGE, EMG, chapter titles) into the MFD- a. When page (PGE) is selected and the joystick is
85( ) using the CEU-85 Checklist Entry moved downward or upward, up to four chapter
Unit are located in its instruction book. titles appear next to the line select keys on the
right side of the MFD. Movement of the joystick
One hundred pages of combined page and emer- upward causes the next set of up to four chap-
gency procedures are available. Each page has a ter titles to be displayed. Movement of the joy-
13-line-per-page, 20-character-per-line format. stick downward causes the previous four chap-
The top line on each page is reserved for weather ter titles to be displayed.
radar mode and target alert, leaving 12 lines b. If one of these four chapter titles is needed,
available for programming data. The data can be pushing the appropriate line select key causes
chapterized as required by the user to organize the first page of the selected chapter to be dis-
the data. If the data is not chapterized, then the played. If other chapter titles are required,
100 pages can be accessed one movement of

Figure 3-20. Typical PGE Data Chapter Titles
Figure 3-21. Typical PGE Checklist Example

Figure 3-22. Typical EMG Chapter Titles
Figure 3-23. Typical EMG Checklist Example

the joystick downward causes the next four chapter 2. Line reverse (delta, ∆) — Push this button to
titles to be displayed. Movement of the joystick up- back the cursor up one line of data without
ward causes the previous four chapter titles to be acknowledgment. The cyan line becomes
displayed. yellow and the next line above (excluding
c. When the desired chapter title is found and the blanks) becomes cyan. If the cursor is on the
first page has been called up by pushing the first line and the ∆ button is pushed, the dis-
appropriate line select key, the keys along the play backs up to the bottom line of the pre-
bottom of the MFD are used to control the page ceding page within the selected chapter.
data. These keys are used as follows: 3. Skip (SKP) — Push this button to select the
next lower line of data without acknowledging
Note the current line of data. The cyan line (current
line being considered) remains as it was be-
When the first page of a chapter is called fore becoming cyan (if yellow it remains yel-
up, the first line is cyan and the rest yellow. low, if green it remains green) and the next
line below becomes cyan. When a line is
1. Line advance (inverted delta, ∇) — Push this skipped, it is identified in the MFD as an un-
button to acknowledge a line of data and move completed line and is subject to later recall as
down one line (does not have to be pushed for long as you do not change chapters. All skips
any blank lines). The old line becomes green are lost if the chapter is changed prior to com-
and the next line below becomes cyan. If the pleting the checklist (using the recall button).
last line is cyan and the b button is pushed, the For this reason, some operators may prefer to
display advances to the next page. If the line put the entire checklist in one chapter rather
being considered is the result of pushing the than breaking the checklist out into different
RCL button (to reconsider skipped lines), chapters. After skipping a line, follow normal
pushing the b button acknowledges that line procedures to complete the checklist.
and automatically advances the cyan line to the
next line that was skipped, regardless of which If the line being considered is the result of
page within the selected chapter that line falls pushing the RCL (recall) button, then pushing
on. Should all data checks be acknowledged, SKP will skip over that line without acknowl-
pushing the b button causes all of the lines edging it and automatically go to the next
within the selected chapter to be scanned and skipped line or the top line on the first page of
returns to page 1 of the selected chapter. the selected chapter, whichever occurs first.
4. Recall (RCL) — When in the PGE or EMG
Note
mode, push this button at any time to recall
previously skipped lines (lines not yet ac-
Each page may contain as many as 12 lines
knowledged) as long as you do not change
of data with each line having up to 20 char-
chapters (see skip paragraphs above). The
acters. Each line may be individually consid-
recall function immediately displays the first
ered, acknowledged, or skipped if that page
page in the selected chapter which has a
is to be used as a checklist. Lines already
skipped (yellow) line. That line becomes
considered or acknowledged are green. Lines
cyan. If the line is to be acknowledged, push
not yet considered are yellow. The line cur-
the b button as before. The line is acknowl-
rently being considered is cyan, a blue-green
edged and the system resumes searching
color. If the line being considered (cyan) is to
for the next skipped line. If a skipped line
be acknowledged, then push the b button.
is not yet to be acknowledged, push the
The line that was being considered becomes
SKP button as before. The system still
green and the next line becomes cyan. If the
identifies that line as uncompleted and re-
line being considered is not yet to be ac-
sumes searching for the next skipped line.
knowledged but is to be reconsidered at a
If all of the skipped lines are acknowl-
later time, then push the SKP button. The
edged (b), the display returns to the first
line that was being considered remains the
page within the selected chapter. Note
color it was prior to being considered, and
that any time the PGE or EMG mode is
the next line becomes cyan.
selected and the RCL button is pushed, the
system returns to the top line of the first page

within the selected chapter and begins 3.8.1 Master Warn

searching for skipped lines. Going to an-
A master warn output is provided from each DPU
other chapter cancels all skipped lines and
when in drive transfer. These outputs serve as
checklist in the previous chapter. If in PGE
overall compare function outputs, and are used to
or EMG mode and NAV or RMT is selected,
enable external installer supplied MASTER WARN
then pushing RCL immediately returns the
annunciators. Momentarily actuating an installer
display to the line (either being considered,
supplied MASTER WARN RESET switch extin-
acknowledged, or skipped) in the PGE or
guishes the MASTER WARN annunciator and stops
EMG chapter that was being displayed
the flashing of activated comparator or failure
prior to selecting NAV or RMT.
flags. If the MASTER WARN RESET is perma-
5. Joystick up/dn — moves to next page
nently grounded, the master warn function is in-
(down) or prior page (up) within the se-
hibited and the annunciators will not flash.
lected chapter. Automatically rolls over in
either direction within chapter. 3.8.2 Comparator Reset
6. Joystick right/left — moves display to the
first page of next chapter (right) or the first Momentarily actuating an installer supplied com-
page of prior chapter (left). parator reset switch extinguishes the EADI/EHSI
d. Emergency procedures (EMG) are handled ex- comparator warning displays and the external com-
actly as with the PGE operation. The 100 pages parator warning annunciator(s). If the condition
can be divided as needed between PGE and which caused the compare error has been removed,
EMG. Emergency procedures can also be chap- the EADI/EHSI comparator warning display and the
terized as discussed in PGE operation. external comparator warning annunciator(s) remain
e. Exiting from either PGE or EMG is accom- off when the comparator reset switch is released. If
plished by initiating any other selection. If in the warn condition is still present when the com-
PGE or EMG mode and NAV or RMT is se- parator reset switch is released, the EADI/EHSI
lected, then pushing RCL immediately returns comparator warning display and the external com-
the display to the line (either being considered, parator warning annunciator(s) illuminate again,
acknowledged, or skipped) in the PGE or EMG but the master warn annunciator does not.
chapter that was being displayed prior to se- In addition to the comparator warnings displayed
lecting NAV or RMT. Going from PGE to EMG, on the EADI and EHSI, the EFIS provides external
and vice versa, is direct with key selections. comparator warning outputs for attitude, heading,
f. Data entry is made using the hand-held RDP- and Category II (the Category II comparator an-
300 Remote Data Programmer as described in nunciator illuminates when Category II is enabled
paragraph 3.13. Data entry may also be made and if the two localizer or glideslope deviations or
using the CEU-85( ) Checklist Entry Unit, as the two radio altitudes differ by a predetermined
described in its instruction book. amount) from each DPU and from the MPU when
in drive transfer. These external comparator
3.8 EFIS COMPARATORS AND MASTER warning outputs are used to enable external in-
WARN staller supplied annunciators.
3.8.3 EADI Comparator Warnings
Comparator monitoring is performed in each DPU
in the EFIS system. On-side data is read, converted If a pitch or roll comparator warning is detected, the
to digital form, and stored by each DPU. Depending words PIT and/or ROL, boxed and in yellow, will ap-
on installation, each DPU sends its information to pear flashing in the lower left portion of the display.
the cross-side DPU so that each of the processors
has the information required to perform the com- If a glideslope or MLS glidepath comparator warn-
parison function. A failed DPU could still be out- ing is detected and CAT II is enabled, a yellow box
putting comparator messages unless its breaker is with the letters GS or MGP inscribed appears
pulled or the DPU/MPU outputs are externally flashing near the vertical deviation scale.
switched. If cross-side data is not available, all If a localizer or MLS azimuth comparator warning
comparator monitoring is invalid. is detected and CAT II is enabled, a yellow box with
the letters LOC or MAZ inscribed appears flashing
near the lateral deviation scale.

If a radio altitude comparator warning is detected b. Comparator Limits

and CAT II is enabled, a yellow box with the letters
A comparator warning is annunciated when:
RA inscribed appears flashing to the left of radio
altitude readout. HDG
GS SENSOR DIFFERENCE
These comparator messages will flash until the CAPTURED DIFFERENCE GREATER THAN
master warn has been reset at which time they be-
come steady. The messages will disappear when the Yes Differ Off
external comparator reset switch is actuated, if the Yes OK 6° +
comparator error is no longer present. [1/2 roll angle]
No Differ Off
3.8.4 EHSI Comparator Warnings No OK 6° +
[1/2 roll angle]
If a heading comparator warning message is re- [ ] is the absolute value of the roll angle.
ceived, the letters HDG, boxed and yellow, will ap- Differ = different sensor strapping, one side com-
pear flashing to the left of the lubber line. pared to the other.
c. Annunciation
If a glideslope or MLS glidepath comparator warn-
ing is detected and CAT II is enabled, a yellow box When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow
with the letters GS or MGP inscribed appears box with HDG inscribed is displayed to the left of
flashing at the lower right of the vertical deviation the lubber line on the EHSI. The letters and the
scale. box flash until the pilot pushes the acknowledge
button before becoming steady. The master warn
If a localizer or MLS azimuth comparator warning and heading compare discretes are energized.
is detected and CAT II is enabled, a yellow box with d. Comparator Activation Delay
the letters LOC or MAZ inscribed appears flashing
at the right of the airplane symbol. Activation of the heading comparator is delayed
0.75 second (5 seconds for source change).
These messages will flash until the master warn 3.8.6 Roll Comparator
has been reset, at which time they become steady.
The messages will disappear when the condition is a. Enable Logic
corrected and the comparator reset input is re- The roll comparator is enabled full time unless:
ceived.
• Either side has a flag condition
3.8.5 Heading Comparator • Cross-side data failure is detected
b. Comparator Limits
a. Enable logic
A comparator warning is annunciated when:
The heading comparator is enabled full time ROLL
unless: GS SENSOR DIFFERENCE
CAPTURED DIFFERENCE GREATER THAN
Yes Differ 5°
• One side is using true heading and the other
Yes OK 3°
side is using magnetic heading
No Differ 6°
• A cross-side data failure is detected
No OK 4°
• Attitude is valid and the roll angle is greater
than 20 degrees c. Annunciation
When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow
Note box with ROL inscribed is displayed in the lower
left portion of the EADI. The letters and the box
DG (directional gyro) mode does not inhibit flash until the pilot pushes the acknowledge but-
the heading compare function if both ton before becoming steady. The master warn
headings are magnetic. and roll compare discretes are energized.

d. Comparator Activation Delay • Cross-side DSP is not selected on either side

Activation of the roll comparator is delayed 0.75 • Back course is not selected on either side
second. b. Comparator Limits
3.8.7 Pitch Comparator A localizer comparator warning is annunciated
when the enable logic is satisfied and the two
a. Enable Logic
localizer or MLS azimuth deviations differ by
The pitch comparator is enabled full time un- more than 30 µA + 1/8 [DEV 1 + DEV 2]. ([ ] is
less: the absolute value of the localizer deviations.)
c. Annunciation
• Cross-side data failure is detected
When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow
b. Comparator Limits box with LOC or MAZ inscribed appear flashing
A comparator warning is annunciated when: by the vertical deviation pointer on the EADI
and by the airplane symbol on the EHSI. The let-
PITCH
ters and the box flash until the pilot pushes the
GS SENSOR DIFFERENCE
acknowledge button before becoming steady. The
CAPTURED DIFFERENCE GREATER THAN
master warn and Category II compare discretes
Yes Differ 5°
are energized.
Yes OK 3°
No Differ 6° d. Comparator Activation Delay
No OK 4° Activation of the localizer comparator is de-
c. Annunciation layed 0.75 second.
When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow 3.8.8.2 Glideslope or MLS Glidepath

box with PIT inscribed is displayed in the lower Comparator
left portion of the EADI. The letters and the box a. Enable logic
flash until the pilot pushes the acknowledge but- A comparison of the two glideslope or MLS
ton before becoming steady. The master warn glidepath deviation signals is performed when
and pitch compare discretes are energized. all of the following conditions are met:
d. Comparator Activation Delay • On-side CAT II request discrete received
Activation of the pitch comparator is delayed • On-side RA is valid and less than 1000 feet
0.75 second. • On-side DSP is valid and its active course is
VOR/LOC or MLS
3.8.8 Category II Comparators
• Cross-side data is valid
Comparisons of localizer, glideslope, MLS azimuth, • Both glideslope signals are valid and both lo-
MLS glidepath, and radio altitude are performed calizer signals tuned and valid or both MGP
when appropriate enable logic is satisfied. and MAZ signals tuned and valid
3.8.8.1 Localizer or MLS Azimuth Comparator • Go-around is not selected on either side
a. Enable logic • Cross-side DSP is not selected on either side
• Back course is not detected on either side
A comparison of the two localizer deviation sig-
nals is performed when all of the following con- b. Comparator Limits
ditions are met: A comparator warning is annunciated when the
• On-side CAT II request discrete received enable logic is satisfied and the two glideslope
• On-side DSP is valid and its active course is or MLS glidepath deviations differ by more
VOR/LOC or MLS than 40 µA + 1/8 [DEV 1 + DEV 2]. ([ ] is the
• On-side RA is valid and less than 1000 feet absolute value of the glideslope deviations.)
• Both localizer signals tuned and valid or both c. Annunciation
MLS signals tuned and valid (data must be
tuned and valid on both When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow
box with GS or MGP inscribed appear flashing
• VORs or both MLSs)
by the lower two dots of the GS scale on both the
• Go-around is not selected on either side

EADI and the EHSI. The letters and the box 3.8.9.1 Excessive Localizer or MLS Azimuth
flash until the pilot pushes the acknowledge but- Deviation
ton before becoming steady. The master warn
a. Enable Logic
and CAT II compare discretes are energized.
d. Comparator Activation Delay The on-side localizer or MLS azimuth deviation
is compared to the limit when all of the follow-
Activation of the glideslope comparator is de- ing conditions are met:
layed 0.75 second.
• On-side Category II request discrete received
3.8.8.3 Radio Altitude Comparator
• On-side VOR/LOC or MLS is the active
a. Enable Logic course on both sides
The radio altitude comparator is enabled when: • On-side radio altitude is between 100 and
600 feet
• On-side CAT II request discrete received
• On-side localizer is tuned and valid or MLS
azimuth is valid
• On-side DSP is valid and its active course is
• On-side back course is not detected
VOR/LOC or MLS
• Go around is not selected on either side
• Both radio altimeters are valid
• On-side DSP is valid and cross-side DSP is
• Go-around is not selected on either side
not selected
• Cross-side DSP is not selected on either side
b. Monitor Limits
b. Comparator Limits
A comparator warning is annunciated when the An excessive deviation warning is annunciated
enable logic is satisfied, both radio altimeters when the enable logic is satisfied and the devia-
are on scale or the on-side radio altimeter is tion exceeds 25 µA if CAT II A request or 20 µA
less than 1000 feet and the difference between if CAT II B request. The on-side excessive de-
the two radio altitudes is 30 feet plus a prede- viation warning is also displayed when the
termined de-sense value. If the radio altimeter cross-side system has detected an excessive de-
is off scale, its value is set to the maximum for viation condition, cross-side data is valid, and a
comparison purposes. localizer or MLS azimuth scale is in view.
c. Annunciation c. Annunciation
When a comparator warning is detected, a yel- When an excessive localizer deviation is de-
low box with RA inscribed appears flashing to tected, the deviation pointer on the EADI and
the left of the radio altitude display on the the deviation bar on the EHSI change to yellow
EADI. The letters and the box flash until the and flash. The flashing continues until the de-
pilot pushes the acknowledge button before be- viation signal is below the limit and then it
coming steady. The master warn discrete is automatically reverts to a normal display. The
energized. excessive localizer deviation output is turned on
d. Comparator Activation Delay for this condition.
Activation of the radio altitude comparator is 3.8.9.2 Excessive Glideslope or MLS Glidepath
delayed 0.75 second. Deviation
a. Enable Logic
3.8.9 Category II Excessive Deviation
Warnings The on-side glideslope or MLS glidepath devia-
tion is compared to the limit when all of the
When the appropriate Category II logic enables are following conditions are met:
present, localizer, MLS azimuth, glideslope, or MLS
• On-side Category II request discrete received
glidepath deviations are compared to prescribed
• On-side VOR/LOC or MLS is the active
limits and appropriate warnings are displayed on
course on both sides
the EADI and EHSI when these limits are
• On-side radio altitude is between 100 and
exceeded.
600 feet

• On-side glideslope or MLS glidepath is valid When either the pilot or copilot Cat II select switch
• On-side localizer is tuned or MLS is selected is first actuated, an annunciator test is initiated.
• On-side back course is not detected The amber lights on the respective sides will flash
• VNAV is not selected on-side for approximately two seconds after either switch is
• Go around is not selected on either side actuated to verify annunciator operation. The green
• On-side DSP is valid and cross-side DSP is lights will then illuminate if a warning is not pres-
not selected ent. The green lights indicate that there are no avi-
onics problems that would prevent the Category II
b. Monitor Limits approach from being conducted. The amber lights
An excessive deviation warning is annunciated indicate a warning condition. (It is the pilot’s re-
when the enable logic is satisfied and the devia- sponsibility to determine if the approach is to be
tion exceeds 75 µA if CAT II A request or 65 µA made.)
if CAT II B request. The on-side excessive de- All of the following conditions must be satisfied be-
viation warning is also displayed when the fore a green Category II annunciator output can be
cross-side system has detected an excessive de- obtained:
viation condition, cross-side data is valid, and a
glideslope or MLS glidepath scale is in view. • Cross-side data valid for both sides
• Localizer tuned and valid or MLS selected and
c. Annunciation MLS azimuth valid
• Glideslope valid or MLS glidepath valid
When the enable logic conditions are satisfied
• Back course not detected for either side
and excessive glideslope deviation is detected,
• Radio altimeter valid and on scale for both sides
the vertical deviation pointers on the EADI and
• Attitude valid for both sides
EHSI change to yellow and flash. The flashing
• Heading valid for both sides
continues until the deviation signal is below the
• Alternate attitude source not selected on either side
limit and then it automatically reverts to a
• Alternate heading source not selected on either
normal display. The excessive deviation output
side
is turned on for this condition.
• VNAV not enabled on either side
3.8.10 Category II Outputs • On-side VOR/LOC or MLS selected as DSP active
course on both sides
The EFIS provides two Category II outputs that are • DSP valid and cross-side DSP is not selected for
used to aid the pilot in determining if Category II ap- both sides
proach monitoring requirements are met. These out- • Map format not selected on either DSP
puts are referred to as the green output and the amber • Command bars in view on either EADI
output, with each output driving the appropriately • True heading not selected on either side
colored external annunciator. A green Category II an- • On-side dual drive transfer not selected
nunciator indicates that all of the conditions listed • FCS not in go-around on both sides
below have been satisfied. An amber Category II an-
nunciator indicates that one or more of the conditions If the above conditions are satisfied and radio alti-
listed below have not been satisfied, and the approach tude is less than 600 feet, the green annunciator will
should not be continued to Category II limits. illuminate. If a problem occurs after the green an-
nunciator is illuminated, the green annunciator
Category II function and annunciator logic is per- turns off and the amber annunciator illuminates.
formed simultaneously and independently by the This should indicate to the pilot that the approach
two display processor units. These functions will should not be continued to Category II limits. If 400-
also be performed by the multifunction processor foot radio altitude is reached and the green annun-
unit during reversionary modes when the MPU-84 ciator has not yet illuminated, it will not do so at a
is driving either, but not both, the pilot’s and copi- lower altitude. This should also indicate that the ap-
lot’s displays. The pilot’s and copilot’s Cat II select proach should not be continued to Category II limits.
switches (usually panel mounted or mounted on the
control wheel), switching relays, and annunciator 3.9 EFIS SELF-TEST
lights (usually an amber and a green light on both
sides) are installer supplied items and are not fur- The self-test sequence is initiated by actuating an
nished as part of the EFIS-84 system. external installer-supplied switch or switches (EFIS

TEST or similar). When self-test is first initiated, form the same composite format. Another intercon-
an increment of 10 degrees is added to the current nect wiring option allows the EADI and EHSI to be
values of pitch and roll, and 20 degrees is added to transferred unchanged to the cross-side EADI and
heading. A positive increment is added to the pilot’s EHSI.
side and a negative increment is added to the copi-
lot’s side. The word TEST, in red, will appear on 3.10.2 DPU-84 Display Processor Unit (DPU)
the EADIs and MFD while the test is in process. Failure
The addition of the differential 10- and 20-degree Detected DPU failures are annunciated by the red
increments causes the comparator logic in the words DPU FAIL centered laterally and immedi-
DPU-84 Display Processor Unit to give flashing PIT ately above the vertical center of both the EADI
(pitch), ROL (roll), and HDG (heading) comparator and the EHSI. If a DPU failure occurs, an external
warning messages. switch can be actuated that allows the cross-side
The Category II comparator and excessive devia- Display Processor Unit (DPU) to provide inputs to
tion warnings may also be tested. If the Category II the affected EADI and EHSI. The cross-side DSP-
select switch is actuated and the on-side localizer is 84 Display Select Panel controls the EADI and
tuned, MLS is tuned, or LNV approach selected, the EHSI displays.
Category II warning annunciators are displayed.
These include GS or MGP compare, LOC or MAZ Should there be no cross-side DPU, an external
compare, RA compare, glideslope excessive devia- switch can be actuated that allows the MPU-84
tion, and localizer excessive deviation. Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU) to provide the
control to the affected EADI and EHSI. Since the
If the self-test switch is held for longer than 4 sec- MPU has access to the DSP-84 Display Select Panel
onds, the pitch, roll, and heading increments are re- controlling the failed DPU, no degradation in EADI
moved from view and all flags associated with the or EHSI performance occurs. When the MPU re-
EADI and EHSI displays will be brought into view. places a DPU, the MFD-85( ) displays either an
When the self-test switch is released, the displays EHSI or a composite format. Except for the PWR
will return to normal operation. An external in- pushbutton and the INT control, none of the con-
staller-supplied comparator reset button or switch trols on the MFD are operational in this mode.
must be actuated to reset the PIT, ROL, and HDG
comparator warning messages. Actuating master 3.10.3 DSP-84 Display Select Panel (DSP)
reset once stops the PIT, ROL or HDG indications Failure
from flashing. Actuating comparator reset will elimi-
For detected DSP failures, the letters DSP, red and
nate the comparator messages if the condition caus-
boxed, replace the decision height readout on the
ing the comparator warning has been eliminated.
EADI and the digital course readout on the EHSI.
3.10 REVERSIONARY MODES OF Also, the FCS mode data received through the DSP
OPERATION is removed from the EADI. If a DSP failure occurs,
The Electronic Flight Instrument System provides an external switch can be actuated that will cause
system operational capability in the event of the the DPU on the side with the failed DSP to be con-
failure of a system element. The following para- trolled by the opposite side DSP. This transfer condi-
graphs describe this capability with reference to tion is annunciated by the letters XDSP in yellow,
any operational differences which may be required. located in the lower right corner of the EADI next to
All external switches for reversionary switching are the decision height readout.
supplied as part of the installation by the installer. Under the transfer condition, all display parame-
Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement ters (except FCS mode annunciation) are controlled
for additional information, switch labels, etc. by the opposite side DSP. Parameters controlled by
3.10.1 EFD-84 Electronic Flight Display (EFD) the cross-side DSP are displayed in yellow on the
Failure side with the failed DSP.
If the DSP is transferred and the on-side DSP does

Refer to Figure 3-24. In the event of an EFD failure, not have a detected failure, the on-side FCS modes
an external switch can be actuated to cause either are displayed. If the on-side DSP has a detected
the EADI display to transfer to the EHSI in compos- failure, the FCS mode annunciation is removed.
ite format or the EHSI to transfer to the EADI to

Figure 3-24. Typical Composite Format
3.10.4 MPU-84 Multifunction Processor Unit 3.10.6 Attitude Switching

(MPU) Failure
Attitude sensor annunciation is displayed in the

A detected MPU failure results in the words MPU lower right of the EADI. It is yellow if cross-side, or
FAIL being displayed in red on the MFD-85( ) and if both pilot and copilot select the same sensor. The
on the EFD’s if they are being driven by the MPU. on-side sensor is not annunciated unless the cross-
If the single MPU fails, external switching of the side sensor is the same as the on-side sensor. ATT3
digital bus lines is required to maintain cross-side and ATT4 are annunciated in white unless they are
data and comparator functions on either side EADI selected cross-side or both sides have selected the
or EHSI. If the fault causing the MPU FAIL is pre- same sensor. Refer to paragraph 3.5.2 Attitude
sent for longer than 10 seconds, the displays being Sensor Annunciation.
driven are blanked except for the words MPU
FAIL. Backup drive for the EFDs is lost as well as
the MFD display. The weather radar modes are still 3.10.7 Compass Switching
available on the EHSIs.
Heading sensor annunciation is displayed as a 1, 2,
3.10.5 MFD-85B Multifunction Display
3, or 4 behind the heading type annunciation (ie,
Failure
TRU1, MAG2, DG3, TRU4, etc.). The heading type
and sensor annunciation are yellow if cross-side or
In the event of an MFD-85B failure, there is no
if both pilot and copilot select the same sensor and
complete backup capability for this display. Naviga-
cross-side data is valid. Refer to paragraph 3.6.1.2
tion and weather radar information is available for
Heading Sensor Annunciation.
display on the EHSIs. Checklist and remote data
functions are lost.

3.11 SUMMARY OF EFIS SYMBOLOGY
The following illustrations (figures 3-25 through 3-

29) show the location and color of the EADI and
EHSI annunciators, special displays, and flags.

Figure 3-25. EADI Symbology, Annunciators and Special Displays
1 TRIM ANNUNCIATOR — AER (yellow) see paragraph 3.5.12.2 for FCS-65, FCS-80, and FCS-85/86
outer middle airport

2 MARKER BEACON — OM (cyan), MM (yellow), (white)
3 VERTICAL DEVIATION SOURCE — Glideslope/Microwave Glidepath (green), if CAT II, flashing yellow while deviation is
excessive, VNAV (white).
4 ATTITUDE SOURCE ANNUNCIATOR — ATT1, ATT2, ATT3, ATT4. Blank for on-side primary, white for on-side secondary,
and yellow for cross-side.
5 GLIDESLOPE COMPARATOR WARNING — GS (yellow) flashes until reset by the pilot then remains steady.
6 CROSS-SIDE DSP — XDSP (yellow) control transferred to cross-side DSP.
7 RADIO ALTITUDE — (green) 2500 feet is maximum.
8 DECISION HEIGHT SET — (cyan) 999 feet is maximum. Flashes between DH +50 feet and DH.
9 RADIO ALTITUDE COMPARATOR WARNING — RA (yellow) flashes until reset by the pilot then remains steady.
10 LOCALIZER COMPARATOR WARNING — LOC (yellow) flashes until reset by the pilot then remains steady.
11 LATERAL DEVIATION SOURCE — Localizer/Microwave Azimuth (green), if CAT II, flashing yellow while deviation is
excessive, VOR (green), FMS (white), TACAN (white).
12 APPROACH MODE ANNUNCIATOR — APPR (white) displayed when a compatible FMS is in approach mode.

13 PITCH AND ROLL ATTITUDE COMPARATOR WARNING — PIT and ROL (yellow) flashes until reset by the pilot then re-
mains steady.
14 SPEED DEVIATION SENSOR — SPD (cyan) analog speed deviation, AOA (cyan) angle of attack.
15 OVERTEMPERATURE ANNUNCIATOR — DPU TEMP (yellow) indicates the DPU is overheating.
16 FAST/SLOW DEVIATION POINTER AND SCALE — (green) speed deviation pointer is based on angle of attack sensor or ana-
log air data system. Scale is ±5 knots per dot.
17 DECISION HEIGHT ANNUNCIATOR — DH (yellow) annunciator appears at decision height.
18 EFIS TEST ANNUNCIATOR — TEST (red) indicates EFIS system is in test mode.
19 YAW DAMPER ANNUNCIATOR — YD (green) See paragraph 3.5.12.1.
20 AUTOPILOT ENGAGE — AP/L or AP/R (green) See paragraph 3.5.12.1.
21 FCS LATERAL MODES — Armed (white) lateral modes and active (green) lateral modes are annunciated to the left of the lub-
ber line. See paragraph 3.5.11.
22 ATTITUDE TEST — STIM OA (red) is displayed below the roll pointer to indicate the AHS-85 (CSDB output) driving the atti-
tude is in STIM mode. ATT TEST (red) is displayed below the roll pointer to indicate the AHS-85D (ARINC 429 output) driving
the attitude is in STIM mode or a non-Collins AHRS is in test mode.
23 FCS ACTIVE VERTICAL MODE — (green) Active vertical modes are annunciated to the right of the lubber line. See paragraph
3.5.11.
24 FCS ARMED VERTICAL MODE — (white) Armed vertical modes are annunciated to the right of the lubber line. See paragraph
3.5.11.

Figure 3-26. EADI Symbology, Flags
1 VERTICAL DEVIATION FLAG — GS (red) removes scale and pointer.
2 LATERAL DEVIATION FLAG — LOC (red) removes scale and pointer.
3 RADIO ALTITUDE FLAG — RA (red) removes radio altitude display, DH, and DH SET.
4 DISPLAY SELECT PANEL FLAG — DSP (red) removes DH set display and FCS mode annunciators.
5 CROSS-SIDE DATA FLAG — XDTA (red) removes all cross-side data and flags it.
6 SPEED DEVIATION FLAG — AOA (red) removes pointer and scale. SPD (red) removes pointer and scale.
7 FLIGHT DIRECTOR FLAG — FD (red) removes command bars.
8 DISPLAY PROCESSOR UNIT FLAG — DPU FAIL (red) blanks rest of display after 5 seconds.
9 ATTITUDE FLAG — ATT (red) removes sky/ground raster, roll pointer, pitch scale, and command bars.
Note
All flags except DPU FAIL flash for 10 seconds then become steady (DPU FAIL is on steady). May stop flashing with MAS-
TER RESET.

Figure 3-27. EHSI Symbology, Annunciators and Special Displays (HSI Format Shown)
1 DEAD RECKONING — DR (yellow) indicates aircraft is over the VOR cone of confusion and is in dead reckoning mode.
2 NAV DATA — The legends and readouts are the same color as the primary course arrow annunciation. TTG = time-to-go, GSP =
ground speed, ### = wind speed and direction, and ET = elapsed time (green for on-side, yellow for cross-side DSP).
3 LOCALIZER COMPARATOR — LOC (yellow) flashes until reset by pilot then remains steady.
4 VERTICAL DEVIATION SOURCE — Glideslope (green), if CAT II, flashing yellow while deviation is excessive, VNAV
(white).
5 GLIDESLOPE COMPARATOR WARN — GS (yellow) flashes until reset by pilot then remains steady.
6 ACTIVE COURSE DIGITAL READOUT — CRS ### green for on-side VOR/LOC and TCN, white for on-side FMS, yellow for
cross-side data.
7 CROSS-SIDE DSP — XDSP (yellow) control transferred to cross-side DSP.
8 LATERAL DEVIATION BAR — Indicates lateral deviation from desired course. If CAT II, flashing yellow while deviation is
excessive.
9 HEADING CURSOR — (magenta)
10 BEARING POINTER SENSOR ANNUNCIATOR — Single bar or double bar sensor annunciator in view for 10 seconds after
bearing sensor change.
11 DME HOLD — H (yellow) indicates the DME associated with the VOR is in hold. If VOR is selected and the DME fails, VOR1 D
or VOR2 D is displayed with VOR1 or VOR2 in cyan and D in red.
12 PRESET COURSE ARROW SOURCE — (cyan) Possible preset course sensor selections are VOR, FMS, MLS, and TCN onside
sensors first, then cross-side sensors.

13 ACTIVE COURSE ARROW SOURCE — Possible active course sensor selections are VOR, FMS, MLS, and TCN on-side sensors
first, then cross-side sensors. Green for on-side VOR/LOC, TCN, and MLS, white for on-side FMS and RNV, and yellow for all
cross-side sources.
14 COURSE CONTROL INDICATOR — Indicates which course arrow is being controlled by the COURSE knob. and TCN, white for
on-side FMS, yellow for cross-side sources.
15 DISTANCE TO NAVAID — Green for on-side VOR/LOC and TCN, white for on-side FMS, yellow for cross-side sources.
16 TO WAYPOINT/NAVAID IDENTIFIER — Green for on-side VOR/LOC
17 FMS MESSAGE — MSG (yellow) flashes until acknowledged. Displayed when a compatible FMS has a message to be read on its
CDU.
18 HEADING COMPARATOR WARN — (yellow) Flashes until reset by the pilot then remains steady.
19 BEARING POINTER SOURCE (magenta) — Single bar or double bar bearing sensor V1 = VOR1, N1 = FMS1, A1 = ADF1, T1 =
TCN1, V2 = VOR2, N2 = FMS2, A2 = ADF2, T2 = TCN2.
20 HEADING SENSOR TYPE AND NUMBER — TRU# = true sensor, MAG# = magnetic sensor, DG# = directional gyro, HDG# =
sensor failure.
21 DEVIATION TYPE — LIN = linear deviation (FMS only), XTK = cross-track deviation or B/C = localizer in back course.
22 WEATHER RADAR TARGET ALERT — (yellow) Steady when enabled, flashes when target is detected. T = WXP-85( ), TGT or
TRB = WXP-850( ).
Note
The following legends/readouts follow the same color coding as the primary course arrow source: Distance, time-to-go, ground
speed, wind speed and direction, digital course, primary course arrow, to/from, deviation source annunciator, and B/C. ET
(elapsed time) is green for on-side and yellow for cross-side.

Figure 3-28. EHSI Symbology, Annunciators (ARC WX Format Shown)
1 NAV DATA — The legends and readouts are the same color as the primary course arrow annunciation. TTG = time-to-go, GSP
= ground speed, ### = wind speed and direction, and ET = elapsed time (green for on-side, yellow for cross-side DSP).
2 VERTICAL DEVIATION SOURCE — Glideslope (green), if CAT II, flashing yellow while deviation is excessive, VNAV
(white).
3 WEATHER RADAR OR NAV RANGE DIGITAL READOUT — 2.5, 5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, 150, or 300 indicates 1/2 of range se-
lected with RNG knob on the DSP when NAV mode is selected or range is selected with RANGE knob on the WXP when
weather radar is selected.
4 GLIDESLOPE COMPARATOR WARN — GS (yellow) flashes until reset by pilot then remains steady.
5 RADAR ANTENNA TILT (WXP-850) — Normal: ±15.0, autotilt: A±15.0. Cyan if unslaved, yellow if slaved.
6 ACTIVE COURSE DIGITAL READOUT — CRS ### green for on-side VOR/LOC and TCN, white for on-side FMS, yellow for
cross-side data.
7 TO/FROM ANNUNCIATOR — The to/from pointer visible on the HSI format is replaced by the letters TO or FR when the
EHSI is displaying the ARC or ARC WX format. The letters are green for an on-side VOR source and yellow for a cross-side
source, or white for FMS. If an FMS is the active selected course, the TO annunciation flashes to indicate waypoint alert. If an
FMS is the preset selected course, the star-shaped to waypoint symbol (cyan) flashes to indicate waypoint alert.
8 LOCALIZER COMPARATOR — LOC (yellow) flashes until reset by pilot then remains steady.
9 WEATHER RADAR OR NAV RANGE MARK — Green for MAP mode, cyan for all other modes. Range mark is solid line when
radar is selected (ARC WX or MAP WX). Range mark is a dashed line when NAV mode is selected (ARC or MAP).
10 LATERAL DEVIATION BAR — Indicates lateral deviation from desired course. If CAT II, flashing yellow while deviation is
excessive.

11 WEATHER RADAR GAIN (WXP-850) — Cyan if unslaved, yellow if slaved. G+3, G+2, G+1, G-1, G-2, G-3.
12 WEATHER RADAR MODE (WXP-850( )) — (cyan) OFF, STBY, TEST, TGT, MAP, WX, WX+T, or TURB. Indicates weather
radar mode selected on WXP when radar is selected on the DSP. If slaved, mode annunciation turns yellow and an X is placed
before the mode annunciation. All modes will alternate with FAULT if a fault is detected. All modes except TGT will alternate
to HOLD if the HOLD feature is selected. WEATHER RADAR MODE (WXP-85( )) — (cyan) OFF, STBY, TEST, NORM, WX, or
MAP. Indicates weather radar mode selected on WXP when radar is selected on the DSP or DCP. The following annunciations
will alternate at a 1-Hz rate with the radar mode: GAIN, HOLD, FAULT.
13 GROUND CLUTTER SUPPRESSION (WXP-850) — GCS (cyan) removes ground clutter from weather radar display. GCS
(yellow) if slaved to the cross-side WXP-850( ).
14 PRESET COURSE ARROW SOURCE — (cyan) Possible preset course sensor selections are VOR, FMS, MLS, and TCN on-side
sensors first, then cross-side sensors.
15 ACTIVE COURSE ARROW SOURCE — Possible active course sensor selections are VOR, FMS, MLS, and TCN on-side sen-
sors first, then cross-side sensors. Green for on-side VOR/LOC, TCN, and MLS, white for on-side FMS and RNV, and yellow for
all cross-side sources.
16 COURSE CONTROL INDICATOR — Indicates which course arrow is being controlled by the COURSE knob.
17 DISTANCE TO NAVAID — Green for on-side VOR/LOC and TCN, white for on-side FMS, yellow for cross-side sources.
18 HEADING COMPARATOR — (yellow) flashes reset by the pilot then remains steady.
19 BEARING POINTER SOURCE (magenta) — Single bar or double bar bearing sensor V1 = VOR1, N1 = FMS1, A1 = ADF1, T1
= TCN1, V2 = VOR2, N2 = FMS2, A2 = ADF2, T2 = TCN2.
20 RADAR STABILIZATION (WXP-850) — Stabilized: blank, unstabilized: USTB cyan if unslaved, yellow if slaved.
Note
WAYPOINT ALERT AND TO/FROM DISPLAY (APPLIES TO MAP FORMAT ONLY) If an FMS is the active selected
course, the star-shaped to waypoint symbol flashes to indicate waypoint alert. The waypoint symbols and track lines are
white if selected from the on-side sensor or yellow if selected from the cross-side sensor. If an FMS is the preset selected
course, an arrow is drawn on the track line pointing to the to waypoint. The star-shaped to waypoint symbol flashes to indi-
cate waypoint alert. The waypoint symbols, track lines, and arrows are cyan for the preset selected course. Also unique to the
MAP format (but not shown on the illustration) is the to/from display when a VOR is the active or preset selected course. The
VOR is shown by an octagon-shaped symbol with the station identifier displayed next to the VOR symbol on the side nearest
the vertical center line of the display. A selected course line is drawn through the VOR symbol with its position controlled by
the CRS knob on the DSP (or CHP). The course line is solid on the to side of the symbol and dashed on the from side. If the
VOR symbol is off scale with respect to selected range and/or bearing, the course line is drawn with an arrow pointing toward
the station. For the active selected course, the VOR symbol, station identifier, course line, and navigation source annunciator
are green for the on-side source or yellow for the cross-side source. For the preset selected course, the VOR symbol, station
identifier, course line and navigation source annunciator are cyan.

Figure 3-29. EHSI Symbology, Flags, HSI Format
1 NAV DATA FLAG — (red) Replaces data with dashes if invalid. Dashes are green for on-side VOR/LOC or TCN, white for on-side
FMS, and yellow for cross-side. Blanks data if bus monitor indicates loss of the label. If wind is invalid, the dashes remain i n
view for 10 seconds then are blanked.
2 VERTICAL DEVIATION FLAG — GS (red) Removes scale and pointer, VNV (red) removes scale and pointer,
3 DISPLAY SELECT PANEL FLAG — DSP (red) Removes selected course display.
4 CROSS-SIDE DATA FLAG — XDTA (red) Removes all cross-side data and flags it.
5 BEARING POINTER SENSOR FLAG — (red) Removes bearing pointer.
6 PRESET COURSE ARROW FLAG — (red) Removes preset course deviation bar.
7 ACTIVE COURSE ARROW FLAG — (red) Removes to/from and active course deviation bar/scale.
8 DISTANCE FLAG — (red) Replaces data with dashes if invalid. Dashes are green for on-side VOR/LOC or TCN, white for on-
side FMS, and yellow for cross-side. Blanks data if bus monitor indicates loss of the label.
9 DISPLAY PROCESSOR UNIT FLAG — DPU FAIL (red) blanks rest of display after 5 seconds.
10 HEADING FLAG — HDG (red).
Note
All flags except DPU FAIL flash for 10 seconds then become steady (DPU FAIL is on steady). May stop flashing by pushing
MASTER RESET.

3.12 SUMMARY OF MFD-85B ANNUNCIATORS AND FLAGS
Refer to Table 3-6 and Table 3-7 for a summary of MFD-85B annunciators and flags.
Table 3-6. MFD-85B Annunciators.
ANNUNCIATOR DISPLAY LOCATION OPERATION
Weather radar WXP-85( ) (cyan): STBY, Upper left Indicates weather radar mode in all MFD formats.
mode TEST, NORM, WX, MAP,
GAIN, HOLD, FAULT
WXP-850( ) — (cyan): OFF,
STBY, TEST, TGT, MAP,
WX, WX+T, TURB
Weather radar WXP-85( ) T Upper right On steady when selected (not in OFF, STBY, or MAP)in all
target alert WXP-850( ) TGT(yellow) MFD formats. Flashes when target is detected.
Radar format RDR (green) Upper left Indicates radar format has been selected for display al-
though no weather may be indicated.
NAV format NAV (green) Upper left Indicates NAV format has been selected for display al-
though no sensors may have been selected.
NAV menu ident Æ (green) Opposite top Indicates line select key used to call up NAV menu.
line select key
Identification IDENT (green) Opposite second Removes NAVAID and AIRPORT identifiers to declutter
declutter line select key the display. Pushing again restores the identification an-
display nunciation.
Test TEST (red) Centered Indicates MPU-84 is in test mode.
Range 5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, 150 Right end of Indicates 1/2 of selected range. Selected from WXP-850( )
(cyan) cyan range arc when in RDR or RDR/NAV formats or from MFD ∆ or ∇
keys in NAV only mode.(2.5 and 300 nmi midrange dis-
tances are also available in NAV only mode.)
BRG/DIST to 000/999 (white) Lower left Indicates bearing/distance to joystick defined insertable
insertable waypoint waypoint.
Waypoint enter key ENTER (white) Opposite third Indicates line select key used to insert the MFD defined
line select key waypoint(joystick) into a compatible long range navigation
from top system.
Table 3-7. MFD-85B Flags.
MALFUNCTION FLAG LOCATION OPERATION
VOR1 or LOC1 if VOR1 Lower left Replaces course (bearing) readout. Removes VOR or way-point symbol and
tuned, or RNV1 or (red) course line.
RNV1
VOR2 or LOC2 if VOR2 Lower right Replaces course (bearing) readout. Removes VOR or way-point symbol and
tuned, or RNV2 or (red) course line.
RNV2
LNV1 LNV1 (red) Lower left Replaces course readout. Removes waypoint symbol and course line.
LNV2 LNV2 (red) Lower right Replaces course readout. Removes waypoint symbol and course line.
MPU-84 MPU Centered Nothing removed.
FAIL (red)

3.13 PROGRAMMING MFD-85( ) PAGE (PGE) “NO EMERGENCY

AND EMERGENCY (EMG) DATA USING CHAPTERS FOUND. PLUG
THE RDP-300 REMOTE DATA IN RDP-300 TO EDIT.”
PROGRAMMER
In either case, simply plug in the RDP-300 to enter
into the edit mode. If the above messages don’t ap-
Before beginning any programming operation,
pear after pushing the respective PGE or EMG but-
write down and layout exactly what the chapter
ton, then the MFD-85( ) has been programmed (or at
titles are to be, and exactly what will be placed on
least a chapter has been defined) during an earlier
each page within that chapter.
procedure and the following should be used to get
into edit mode. If there are chapter titles shown next
Note to the line select keys on the MFD-85( ) and a change
to one of these chapters is desired, then push the line
Refer to Figure 3-30 for a sample program- select key next to the desired chapter title, plug in
ming grid that can be duplicated on any of- the RDP-300 and make the changes. If the desired
fice copier and used to write out each page chapter title is not displayed, then move the joystick
of data. The grid aids in keeping track of up or down until the chapter title is found for the
characters and lines available/used per chapter that needs to be changed. Then push the line
page. select key next to the desired chapter title, plug in
the RDP-300 and make the changes. If you do not
Keep in mind that there are 100 available pages know the chapter title of what you want to change
and each page has 12 lines of 20 characters each. and the NO PAGE CHAPTERS FOUND or the NO
Also indicate which chapters, if any, are emergency EMERGENCY CHAPTERS FOUND message does
chapters. Chapter length depends on user require- not appear, then push the top line select key, plug in
ments. You may have 1 chapter of 100 pages or 100 the RDP-300 and find the page(s) you want to
chapters of 1 page or any combination in between. change (you are now in edit mode).
It is recommended that pages be numbered con-
secutively within a chapter. It is also suggested Whether you are in PGE edit mode (pushed the PGE
that one or two blank pages be left between chap- button to enter) or in EMG edit mode (pushed the
ters to accommodate additional information in the EMG button to enter), all 100 pages of the checklist
future. Note also that with multiple chapters, all memory can be changed. The only time you need to
skips are lost if another chapter is selected prior to know which edit mode you are in is when you want
completing the checklist (using the recall button) in to make a title page. If you want to make a PGE
the existing chapter. For this reason, some opera- chapter title page, then the PGE edit mode must be
tors may prefer to put the entire checklist in one entered. If you want to make an EMG chapter title
chapter rather than breaking the checklist out into page, then the EMG edit mode must be entered. De-
different chapters. The information programmed leting chapter title pages from PGE or EMG can be
into the MFD-85( ) is not erased by power removal. done in either PGE or EMG edit modes.
Anything programmed during an earlier procedure A title page can be created at any time. To make a
remains until reprogrammed. PGE title page, enter the PGE edit mode, find the
page you wish to make into a title page, then posi-
Before any data can be programmed into the MFD- tion the cursor over the first character on the first
85( ), the unit must be put into the edit mode. of the 12 lines on the page (upper left most charac-
There are two ways to enter into the edit mode deter on the page). With this done, push the top line
pending on the data currently in the MFD-85( ). If select key at the upper right of the MFD. The cur-
the MFD-85( ) is new (never programmed before), sor moves one character position to the right. This
pushing the PGE button causes the display to read: signifies that a PGE title page has been created. To
make an EMG title page, enter the EMG edit mode
“NO PAGE and repeat the above procedure.
CHAPTERS FOUND. PLUG
IN RDP-300 TO EDIT.” A title page can also be removed at any time. To
delete any title page, enter either PGE or EMG edit
or pushing the EMG button causes the display to mode (either one will work for deleting a PGE or
read: EMG title page). Find the title page by moving the

Figure 3-30. Programming Grids for PGE and EMG Data

joystick to the left or right, position the cursor over periods (.) to the right of the line. This will help you
the first character of the first line of the displayed select the correct title page.
page, and retype the character that is under the
cursor using the RDP-300. The cursor moves one Figure 3-31 shows how a typical written layout of
character to the right and the page is no longer a chapters and pages might appear.
title page.
Note
The joystick can be used in edit mode to help find
pages or chapter titles more easily. If chapters have The page numbers for all pages (1 through
already been entered into the MFD-85( ), then 100) have been visually and internally
pushing the PGE or EMG buttons may give up to numbered at the factory for convenience.
four titles, one next to each of the line select keys. The visual page numbers appear at the up-
Note that only PGE chapters appear when the PGE per right of each page. These page numbers
button is pushed and only EMG chapters appear can be relocated on the page, eliminated, or
when the EMG button is pushed. If the next set of changed (not recommended) to a different
four titles is desired, then pushing the joystick down number as desired.
displays the next set of up to four titles. Continue
pushing the joystick down as needed to view succes- Note
sive sets of titles. If the previous set of four titles was
desired, then push the joystick up to display the pre- Those who choose to use the MFD-85( ) for
vious set of up to four titles. Continue pushing the checklist purposes must consider it an aid
joystick up as needed to view previous sets of titles. only and realize that it contains only the
data that someone has programmed into it.
Once in edit mode (a line select key is pushed and The Airplane Flight Manual contains the
the RDP-300 is plugged in), the joystick can be used approved checklists.
again. Moving the joystick down causes the next
page to be displayed even if the next page is a title Warning
page for the next PGE or EMG chapter. The cursor is
in the upper left of the display. Pushing the joystick The MFD-85( ) EMG function displays only
up causes the previous page to be displayed. The what has been programmed into memory as
cursor is in the lower right of the display. Pushing emergency data. The user must realize that
the joystick to the right causes the next title page to this data may or may not be applicable to
appear regardless of whether it is a PGE title page or an actual emergency. The airplane flight
an EMG title page. The cursor is in the upper left of manual emergency checklist must be re-
the display. Pushing the joystick to the left causes ferred to for proper corrective actions to be
the previous title page to appear regardless of taken in various emergency situations.
whether it is a PGE title page or an EMG title page.
The cursor is in the upper left of the display. Caution
Because there are only 100 available pages in the To prevent the loss of data, it is essential
MFD-85( ), a title page should be part of the check- that the programming procedure is followed
list page (ie, the entire page should be used for part carefully and in the order given. Make cer-
of the checklist). How to create a title page has al- tain that the RDP-300 is connected to or
ready been described. It should be noted that the disconnected from the MFD-85( ) only while
very top line of the title page is what appears next continuous power is applied to the system.
to the line select keys when either the PGE or EMG
buttons are pushed. The line appears exactly like
what is entered (via the RDP-300) into the particu- 3.14 RDP-300 REMOTE DATA PROGRAMMER
lar checklist (only PGE titles appear for PGE, and
EMG titles for EMG mode). Therefore, the top line of The RDP-300 (Figure 3-32) is a portable, handheld
the page should contain enough information to de- unit, similar to a calculator, that is used to input
scribe the chapter check-list contents. It is suggested data into the memory of the MFD-85( ). The RDP-
that the top line be right justified so as to appear next 300 should be stored in a location that is accessible
to the appropriate line select key or else fill in with to the flight crew if on-airplane programming is

Figure 3-31. Typical Chapter and Page Layout
desired. The various RDP-300 keys and their func- Line advance (inverted delta, ∇) — Similar to the SH
tions are described in Figure 3-33. and then LF keys on the RDP-300. Pushing the ∇
key advances the cursor one line down the display.
Note
Line reverse (delta, ∆) — Similar to the SH and
There are eight keys on the RDP-300 that then LR keys on the RDP-300. Pushing the key
can be held down causing the function as- causes the cursor to move one line up the display.
signed to that key to be continuously re-
Joystick up — Similar to the SH and the PR keys
peated. The eight keys are PF, PR, LF, LR,
on the RDP-300. Causes the MFD-85( ) to go back
— (dash, located above 1), BLK (blank), SP
to the previous page. The cursor is at the lower
(space), and . (dot). The SH key does not
right-hand corner.
have to be held down when holding one of
the upper case function keys down. Joystick down — Similar to the SH and the PF keys
on the RDP-300. Causes the MFD-85( ) to go for-
Note
ward to the next page. The cursor is at the upper
If the SH key is pushed and then it is decided left-hand corner.
not to use the upper case function, push the Joystick right — Causes the MFD-85( ) to search
SH key a second time to cancel the shift. forward and display the next chapter title page (be
3.14.1 Programming the MFD-85( ) it a PGE chapter title page or an EMG chapter title
Multifunction Display page). The cursor is in the upper left-hand corner of
the display.
The MFD-85( ) provides various keys to aid the user Joystick left — Causes the MFD-85( ) to search back-
when in the edit mode. The following paragraphs wards and display the previous chapter title page. The
describe the functions of these keys. cursor is in the upper left hand corner of the display.

Figure 3-32. RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer
Figure 3-33. RDP-300 Key Descriptions

Top line select key — If the cursor is positioned at the WXP-85( )/850( ) MODE switch to OFF (the
the upper left corner of the display, pushing this WXP-85( )/850( ) is not required during pro-
key makes the page shown a chapter title page. If gramming of the MFD-85( )). Allow 15 seconds
in PGE edit mode, it is a PGE chapter title page. If for the MFD-85( ) to warm up. Adjust the INT
in EMG edit mode, it is an EMG chapter title page. control at the upper right of the MFD-85( ) as
desired.
3.14.2 Programming a New MFD-85( ) b. Push the PGE button on the MFD-85( ). The
Multifunction Display display shows:
Note NO PAGE
CHAPTERS FOUND. PLUG
The following procedures assume that the IN RDP-300 TO EDIT.
MFD-85( ) is new and this is the first time it
has been programmed. Procedures for c. Plug the RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer
changing an already programmed MFD- into the MFD-85( ) DATA jack. Note that the
85( ) follow this section. first line of page 1 is displayed adjacent to the
top line select key. The characters on this first
a. Turn on airplane power. Ensure that the MFD- line should be: a red cursor in the upper left,
85( ) circuit breakers are in. Push the PWR but- followed by yellow dots with PAGE 1 in the up-
ton at the upper left of the MFD-85( ). Position per right.

d. If steps a through c were followed, the top line on the MFD-85( ) should look like the following illustration:
The cursor (red at (@) symbol) should be in the upper left corner. If not, push the SH (shift) key then the PR
(page reverse) key on the RDP-300 until the cursor is displayed in the lower right corner of the display.
Note the current page number and push SH then PF (page forward) until the cursor is at the upper left
corner of page 1. After pushing the SH key, the PF or PR key can be held down for repeated function.
e. Assume the first PGE chapter title is to be called PREFLIGHT. (You MUST have a chapter title at the
top of the first page to be used even if the title is PAGE 1 as shown after performing following steps 1
and 2.) To enter PREFLIGHT as a chapter title, perform the following:
Note
Whatever is on the top line of the title page (in this example it is PREFLIGHT) is what gets shown
beside the line select keys when chapter titles are called up.
1. Push the RDP-300 BLK (blank) key once then push the BS (back space) key once. The cursor appears
in the upper left corner but the dot (period) that was in the upper left has now been erased.
2. Push the top line select key at the right side of the MFD-85( ). Note that the cursor moves one character
position to the right and that the space to the left of the cursor is blank. This page is now designated as
a PGE chapter title page. The top line of the display should now look like the following illustration.
3. The following illustration is a repeat of the illustration in step 2 except the example chapter title
(PREF-LIGHT) is now shown justified to the far right-hand side of the display.
The purpose of the above illustration is to show what now must be done in order to enter PREFLIGHT as
a chapter title. Note that PREFLIGHT has nine letters and fully occupies the area now taken up by

PAGE 1 and the associated spaces. The only thing that must be done is to erase the yellow dots in
spaces 2 (there is a dot beneath the cursor) through 11 of the first line and move the cursor to posi-
tion 12. This is done by pushing the RDP-300 BLK key ten times and then pushing the SP (space)
key once. The top line should now look like the following illustration.
4. Complete the chapter title entry procedure by using the RDP-300 keyboard to key in the word PREF-
LIGHT. The letters write over the data (PAGE 1) currently occupying spaces 13 through 20 and the
cursor automatically advances to the first space in line 2. The display should now look like the fol-
lowing illustration.
5. Continue using the RDP-300 to type in the desired PREFLIGHT checklist beginning on line 2 of the
chapter title page (the chapter title page should be used as part of the checklist). Use as many pages
as is needed to complete the PREFLIGHT checklist. It should be noted that all 12 lines can be used
for checklist data on nontitle pages.

Note a. Turn on airplane power. Ensure that the MFD-

85( ) circuit breakers are in. Push the PWR but-
A blank (BLK) is considered as a character. ton at the upper left of the MFD-85( ). Position
The space (SP) key is not considered as a the WXP-85( )/850( ) MODE switch to OFF (the
character and should be used instead of WXP-85( )/850( ) is not required during pro-
blanks to separate words, symbols, num- gramming of the MFD-85( )). Allow 15 seconds
bers, etc. A BLK should only be used to for the MFD-85( ) to warm up. Adjust the INT
erase a character as was done in step 1. control at the upper right of the MFD-85( ) as
desired.
f. It is suggested that a couple of unprogrammed b. Push the PGE or EMG button (depending on
pages be left at the end of each chapter. This what is to be changed) on the MFD-85( ).
allows for expansion at a later date. To do this, c. When PGE or EMG is selected, up to four chap-
push the joystick down twice or use the SH and ter titles appear next to the line select keys on
PF keys on the RDP-300. the right side of the MFD-85( ). If data in one of
g. Repeat steps e and f to create a new PGE chap- these four chapters is to be changed, pushing
ter title. Continue repeating steps e and f until the appropriate line select key causes the first
all PGE chapters have been programmed. page of the selected chapter to be displayed. If
h. To program EMG chapters, push the EMG but- other chapter titles are required, movement of
ton on the MFD-85( ). The display should show the joystick upward causes the next set of up to
the PREFLIGHT checklist title page that was four chapter titles to be displayed. Movement of
previously programmed into MFD-85( ) as a PGE the joystick downward causes the previous four
chapter title page. Use the joystick down or the chapter titles to be displayed.
RDP-300 SH and PF keys to find a page where d. When the desired chapter is found and the first
you want to put the first EMG title page. Re- page has been called up, plug the RDP-300 Re-
member to skip all of the pages previously pro- mote Data Programmer into the MFD-85( )
grammed during the PGE checklist program- DATA jack and make the necessary changes. If
ming procedure. Then repeat steps e through g you don’t know the title name and/or nothing is
above for the EMG chapter checklists. displayed on the MFD-85( ), push the top line
i. This completes the programming of new check- select key, plug in the DP-300, and make the
lists procedure. Disconnect the RDP-300 from necessary changes. If all of the 100 available
the MFD-85( ). Verify that data just pro- pages have not been used, new PGE or EMG
grammed is accessible and correct by first chapters can be created by searching for a
pushing the PGE or EMG button on the MFD, group of unprogrammed pages and then mak-
then push the appropriate line select key to ing a title page and entering checklist data as
display the first page of the selected chapter. required.
Use the joystick as described in paragraph e. When the desired data has been entered, dis-
3.14.1 to view the various pages and/or select connect the RDP-300 from the MFD-85( ). Ver-
new chapter title pages. ify that data just programmed is accessible and
correct by first pushing the PGE or EMG button
Note on the MFD, then push the appropriate line
select key to display the first page of the se-
The information programmed into the lected chapter. Use the joystick as described in
MFD-85( ) is not erased by power removal. paragraph 3.14.1 to view the various pages
and/or select new chapter title pages.
3.14.3 Changing an Already Programmed
MFD-85( ) Multifunction Display
Note
Note
The information programmed into the
The following procedures assume that the MFD-85( ) is not erased by power removal.
MFD-85( ) has already been programmed Anything programmed during an earlier
and it is desired to change some of the text. procedure remains until reprogrammed.

3.15 CEU-85( ) CHECKLIST ENTRY UNIT plug into the MFD-85( ) DATA jack. If this
is not done, the MFD-85( ) will not be able
The handheld CEU-85( ) is used to enter 100 pages to receive data from the CEU-85( ).
of combined checklist page and emergency page
data into the MFD instead of entering it manually The checklist data transfer begins 15 seconds after
using the RDP-300. The CEU-85( ) is shown below the CEU-85( ) receives power from the MFD-85( )
in Figure 3-34. and operates without interaction. Normal checklist
transfer time is approximately 11 minutes; then the
radar mode screen reappears after data transfer is
completed.
Caution
To prevent loss of data, it is essential that

the CEU-85( ) is connected to or discon-
nected from the MFD-85( ) only while power
is applied to the system.
Note
Those who choose to use the MFD-85( ) for

checklist purposes must consider it an aid
only and realize that it contains only the
Figure 3-34. CEU-85( ) Checklist Entry Unit data that someone has programmed into it.
The airplane flight manual contains the ap-
proved checklists.
The CEU-85( ) normally is used before preflight,
rarely during flight. The checklist is loaded into the 3.16 ADA-85 AIR DATA ADAPTER
CEU-85 from an Apple* II Plus/IIe/IIe enhanced
computer that contains a Collins Pro Line II Inter- The ADA-85 Air Data Adapter is used with an
face Card and checklist processing disk software. ADC-80( ) Air Data Computer to provide air data in
The checklist is loaded into the CEU-85A from an Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB) serial
IBM-PC or compatible computer. Once loaded, the data format to the EFIS system and other equip-
CEU-85( ) is carried to the aircraft and plugged into ments. The data received from the ADC-80( ) is in
the MFD-85( ) front panel DATA jack. Manchester-coded serial data format and is con-
verted into CSDB format air data. The ADA-85 is
shown in Figure 3-35.
The process of transferring a checklist into the MFD-
85( ) is initiated by inserting the CEU-85 data plug
into the MFD-85( ) front panel DATA jack. This con-
nection causes application of +5 V dc to the CEU-
85( ) from the MFD-85( ) which enables the CEU-
85( ) microcomputer to transfer checklist data to the
MFD-85( ).
Note
The MFD-85( ) top select, bottom select, and

line reverse keys must be pushed simulta- Figure 3-35. ADA-85 Air Data Adapter
neously after inserting the CEU-85 data
* Apple is a registered trademark.

3.17 FMM-85 FAN MONITOR MODULE
The FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module mounts directly

onto any one of the four fan frame sides and is used
to monitor fan motor speed. If fan motor speed falls
below a preset level, the FMM-85 will sense this
change and provide a ground to energize an in-
staller furnished, instrument panel mounted, LOW
FAN SPEED annunciator. The FMM-85 is shown in
Figure 3-36.
Figure 3-36. FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module

z523-0775967-003118
9ebb_di
EFIS-84
Theory of Operation
Table of Contents
4.1 GENERAL ............................................................ 4-1 4.3.2.4 Phosphor Protection Monitor............................4-20

4.3.2.5 High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) ................4-20
4.2 OVERVIEW .......................................................... 4-1 4.3.2.6 Input/Output Description .................................4-20
4.2.1 Introduction............................................................4-1 4.3.3 MPU-84 Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU) ...4-23
4.2.1.1 DPU-84 Display Processor Unit (DPU)..............4-1 4.3.3.1 Input/Output (I/O) Interface A7, A8,
4.2.1.2 EFD-84 Electronic Flight Display (EFD)...........4-1 A-9, and A-10.....................................................4-23
4.2.1.3 MPU-84 Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU) ..4-1 4.3.3.2 Display Processor A4.........................................4-26
4.2.1.4 MFD-85( ) Multifunction Display (MFD)...........4-2 4.3.3.3 Symbol Generator A5........................................4-26
4.2.1.5 DSP-84 Display Select Panel..............................4-2 4.3.3.4 Sky/Ground Raster Generator and
4.2.1.6 RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer..................4-2 Multiplexer A6...................................................4-27
4.2.1.7 CEU-85( ) Checklist Entry Unit .........................4-2 4.3.3.5 Power Supply Card A3 ......................................4-28
4.2.1.8 FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module............................4-2 4.3.3.6 MPU Monitor Operation ...................................4-28
4.2.1.9 ADA-85 Air Data Adapter ..................................4-2 4.3.4 MFD-85B Multifunction Display (MFD).............4-33
4.2.2 Installation Configurations ...................................4-2 4.3.4.1 Video Amplifiers................................................4-33
4.3.4.2 Phosphor Protection Monitor............................4-33
4.3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY .................................... 4-3
4.3.4.3 High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) A12.........4-33
4.3.1 DPU-84 Display Processor Unit (DPU).................4-3 4.3.4.4 Low-Voltage Power Supply Card A4 ................4-33
4.3.1.1Input/Output (I/O) Interface Cards A-7 and A-8 4-3 4.3.5 DSP-84 Display Select Panel (DSP) ....................4-34
4.3.1.2 Display Processor Card A4 ...............................4-14 4.3.5.1 General Description ..........................................4-34
4.3.1.3 Symbol Generator Card A5 ..............................4-16 4.3.5.2 Circuit Card Descriptions .................................4-34
4.3.1.4 Sky/Ground Raster Generator and Multiplexer 4.3.6 RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer ...................4-36
Card A6 ..................................................................4-17 4.3.7 CEU-85/85A Checklist Entry Unit ......................4-36
4.3.1.5Power Supplies Cards A3 and A9 .....................4-18 4.3.8 ADA-85 Air Data Adapter....................................4-38
4.3.1.6 Relay Card A10 .................................................4-18 4.3.8.1 Input Circuit......................................................4-38
4.3.1.7 DPU Monitor Operation ...................................4-18 4.3.8.2 Control Circuits .................................................4-38
4.3.2 EFD-84 Electronic Flight Display (EFD)............4-20 4.3.8.3 Data Output Circuit ..........................................4-39
4.3.2.1 CRT Assembly...................................................4-20 4.3.9 FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module (FMM).................4-39
4.3.2.2 Deflection Amplifiers ........................................4-20
4.3.2.3 Video Amplifiers ...............................................4-20
* Title ......................................... 30 Mar 95 4-9 thru 4-17 ............................20 May 92 * 4-33 thru 4-34.......................... 30 Mar 95
* List of Effective Pages............. 30 Mar 95 * 4-18........................................... 30 Mar 95 4-35 .......................................... 20 May 92
4-1 ............................................ 20 May 92 4-19...........................................20 May 92 * 4-36 thru 4-39.......................... 30 Mar 95
* 4-2 thru 4-3.............................. 30 Mar 95 * 4-20........................................... 30 Mar 95 4-40 Blank ............................... 20 May 92
4-3 thru 4-5.............................. 20 May 92 4-21...........................................20 May 92 4-41 thru 4-42.......................... 20 May 92
4-6 Blank ................................... 11 Jul 90 4-22 Blank................................20 May 92
4-7 ............................................ 20 May 92 * 4-23 thru 4-26 .......................... 30 Mar 95
4-8 Blank ................................. 20 May 92 4-27 thru 4-32 ..........................20 May 92



section IV
theory of operation
4.1 GENERAL external switching. Some external switching may

be required by other functions in the aircraft for
This section provides overall system theory and these sensors. These interfaces are described in
functional block diagram theory for each unit in the more detail in paragraph 4.3. Each DPU also pro-
EFIS-84 Electronic Flight Instrument System. vides comparator/warning outputs and display ca-
The overall system theory is presented in para- pability for attitude, heading, localizer, glideslope,
graph 4.2, Overview. This provides a brief introduc- and radio altitude. For this function, cross-side I/O
tion to the general principles involved in the EFIS- data from another DPU is required.
84 system. Functional block diagram theory briefly 4.2.1.2 EFD-84 Electronic Flight Display
describes all inputs and outputs of each unit, along (EFD)
with signal flow information.
Each EFD contains a crt, deflection yoke, video and
4.2 OVERVIEW deflection amplifiers, and high-voltage power sup-
ply. The crt is a Collins specified custom high-
4.2.1 Introduction resolution color tube. The tube has an in-line gun
This paragraph presents a brief introduction to the with shadow mask, using a black matrix sur-
general principles involved in the EFIS-84. It is rounding pigmented phosphor dot trios, providing
intended for those who have little or no previous high resolution and contrast ratio. A custom design
contact with this type of airborne equipment. The multibandpass optical filter is used to enhance con-
treatment here is by no means exhaustive and the trast. Both stroke and raster scanning techniques
reader is invited to consult other sources for addi- are multiplexed to provide large area color back-
tional information. ground and sharp alphanumerics and symbols with
greater than normal illumination. Two units
4.2.1.1 DPU-84 Display Processor Unit (DPU) stacked use the same panel space as the FIS-84
electromechanical units. Air behind the cockpit
The DPU-84 is the drive box for the EFD-84. Each panel must be circulated to ensure optimal per-
DPU contains the I/O section, memory, display formance. Recommendations regarding forced air
processor, symbol generator, sky/ground raster cooling are detailed in the installation section of
generator, WX raster generator, multiplexers, and this instruction book. All EFDs are identical inter-
power supply. The processor is a 12-bit TTL ma- nally and may be used for either the EADI or EHSI
chine designed specifically for fast real-time proc- function.
essing for crt applications. The DPU is capable of
driving two EFDs with different displays. Each of The inclinometer is a separate element which is
these outputs has positive switching on the video to mounted to the proper EFD. An inclinometer may
provide a data path for the backup drive signal in be mounted to either EFD to provide that function.
the event of a failure. The DPU also provides an Refer to the general information section, Table 1-1,
isolated backup drive output which allows each for a list of available inclinometers.
DPU to drive four crt’s with identical EADI and 4.2.1.3 MPU-84 Multifunction Processor Unit
EHSI displays. (MPU)
The DPU’s I/O section can interface with a desig- The MPU contains all the functions of a DPU (refer
nated set of sensors including VOR, glideslope, lo- to previous DPU-84 description) plus isolated inputs
calizer, long-range navigation, heading, attitude, for a second set of sensors. The MPU not only pro-
air data, ADF, and flight director/autopilot without vides the drive for the MFD but can provide the drive
to an EADI and EHSI in the event either DPU fails.

theory of operation 523-0775967
This allows the MPU to completely replace one DPU 4.2.1.7 CEU-85( ) Checklist Entry Unit
without any loss in I/O capability but with some re-
The handheld CEU-85( ) is used to enter 100 pages
duction in EHSI display function. This unit can also
of combined checklist page and emergency page
provide the drive for all four EFD’s in a 5-crt con-
data into the MFD instead of entering it manually
figuration in the unlikely event that both DPU’s fail.
using the RDP-300. The CEU-85( ) plugs into a port
For 3- and 5-crt configurations it also provides the
on the front face of the MFD-85( ) Multifunction
data to the DPU to allow the selection and display of
Display, where it receives power and is normally
cross-side data.
used before preflight, rarely during flight. The
4.2.1.4 MFD-85( ) Multifunction Display checklist is loaded into the CEU-85 from an Ap-
(MFD) ple®* II Plus/IIe/IIe enhanced computer that con-
tains a Collins Pro Line II interface card and
The MFD contains a crt, a deflection yoke, video
checklist processing disk software. Similarly, the
and deflection amplifiers, and a high-voltage power
CEU-85A checklist is loaded from an IBM-PC or
supply. The crt is a Collins specified, custom-
compatible computer.
designed, high-resolution color tube. The crt has an
in-line gun with shadow mask that uses a black 4.2.1.8 FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module
matrix surrounding pigmented phosphor dot trios
The fan monitor module mounts directly onto any
to provide high contrast along with high resolution.
one of the four fan frame sides and is used to moni-
A custom-designed multibandpass optical filter is
tor fan motor speed. If fan motor speed falls below a
used to provide enhanced contrast. Both stroke and
preset level, the FMM-85 will sense this change and
raster scanning techniques are used to provide
provide a ground to energize an installer supplied,
large area color background for weather and dis-
instrument panel mounted, low fan speed annun-
tinct alphanumerics and symbols with high bright-
ciator.
ness. Mode select and display control functions are
located on the display bezel. The memory and asso- 4.2.1.9 ADA-85 Air Data Adapter
ciated logic for up to 100 pages of checklist data are
The air data adapter is used with an ADC-80( ) Air
also contained in the MFD.
Data Computer to provide air data in commercial
4.2.1.5 DSP-84 Display Select Panel standard digital bus (CSDB) serial data format to
the EFIS system. The ADA-85 receives Manchester
The DSP-84 provides navigation sensor selection,
coded serial data format from the ADC-80( ) and
bearing pointer selection, format selection, naviga-
converts the data to CSDB format and outputs
tion data selection, and the selection of weather
CSDB air data to the EFIS system.
radar information on the EHSI. DH set display on
the EADI is provided. Additional course, heading, 4.2.2 Installation Configurations
direct to, and heading sync are selected from the
Refer to figures 4-1through 4-4. The number of dis-
DSP-84. One DSP-84 is required for 2- and 3-crt
play tubes determines the basic installation con-
systems; two DSP-84s are required for 4- and 5-crt
figuration of the EFIS-84 system. The typical 2-
systems.
tube EFIS-84 system consists of one DPU-84 Dis-
4.2.1.6 RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer play Processor Unit providing the drive signals for
two EFD-84 Electronic Flight Displays. One EFD-
The RDP-300 is a handheld keyboard that plugs
84 provides the EADI Electronic Attitude Director
into a port on the front face of the MFD-85( ) Multi-
Indicator function and the other EFD-84 provides
function Display, where it receives power and is
the EHSI Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator
used to enter or change checklist page and emer-
function. A DSP-84 Display Select Panel provides
gency data in the MFD. The RDP-300 is normally
the control inputs for the electronic flight displays.
used before and during preflight, rarely during
A 4-tube EFIS-84 system is a dual installation with
flight. The unit should be stored (not mounted) in a
two EFDs installed on each side. The 4-tube system
location accessible to the flight crew.
also has backup drive for each EADI and EHSI and
* Apple® is the registered trademark of Apple

Computer, Inc.

provides the cross-side inputs required for com- multiplexer circuit, and power supplies. Refer to
parator warnings. The 3- and 5-tube installations Figure 4-5.
add the MFD-85B Multifunction Display and MPU-
84 Multifunction Processor Unit. 4.3.1.1 Input/Output (I/O) Interface Cards A-7
and A-8
Installation configurations may also vary depend-
ing on the input format of the associated equip-
The I/O interface section of the DPU consists of ana-
ment. Attitude and heading (AHS) input may be 3-
log I/O card A7 and digital I/O card A8. These circuit
wire analog, digital ARINC 429, or CSDB. Auto-
cards receive analog and digital data from aircraft
matic direction finder (ADF) input may be 3-wire
systems and other EFIS units, format the data, and
analog or ARINC 429. Long-range navigation
provide that data to the display processor. In addi-
(LRN) input may be 6-wire digital or ARINC 429.
tion to collecting data for display, the I/O section also
calculates new data based upon previously received
4.3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY
data and outputs this information in an appropriate
form to other equipments. There are also a number
4.3.1 DPU-84 Display Processor Unit (DPU)
of digital EFIS communication channels which are
supervised by the DPU I/O system.
The DPU generates the necessary deflection and
video signals to draw the desired display on the a. Inputs
electronic flight displays (EFDs). The DPU contains
The I/O section is capable of receiving data from
an I/O interface to an aircraft system, a display proc-
several different aircraft sources and from sev-
essor, a symbol generator to provide stroke-writing,
eral intra-EFIS data sources. Four general data
an ADI/sky raster generator and
formats are received, digitized, filtered, and
formatted by the I/O section as follows.
Figure 4-1. EFIS-84 2-Tube System, Block Diagram


Revised 20 May 1992 4-4/(4-6 blank)

1. AC Analog Inputs 2. DC Analog

• Roll angle • Lateral deviation
• Pitch angle • Vertical deviation
• Heading 3. DC Discrete
• ADF bearing (3-wire synchro) • Attitude warn (comparator output)
• VOR or TACAN bearing (synchro) • Heading warn (comparator output)
2. DC Analog Inputs • CAT II warn (LOC, GS, RA warn)
• Radio altitude • Master warn (comparator output)
• Roll steering command • CAT II amber
• Pitch steering command • CAT II green
• ADF bearing (sin/cos) • Back course
• Fast/slow or angle of attack deviation • NAV modes (VOR/LOC, LNV, TCN,
• Localizer deviation MLS, ADF, sensor side)
• Glideslope deviation • Lateral/vertical NAV valids
• VOR or TACAN bearing (SIN/COS) • Linear deviation
3. DC Discrete Inputs • FCS mode clear
• Instrument flags • Localizer tuned
• Instrument modes • Decision height
• EFIS and I/O straps • To/from (2-wire)
• Analog FCS modes • Radio altitude test
• Master warn reset • Excessive ILS deviation
• Comparator warn reset • Excessive attitude
• LOC tuned 4. Serial Digital
• Category II request
• DSP data
• Flight director command bars in view
• Cross-side data
• Marker beacons
4. Serial Digital Inputs • EFIS to FCC data bus
• DME distance/ident/TTG/GSPD/fre- c. Functional Blocks
quency The I/O section is divided into four func-
• VOR bearing/ILS deviation/marker bea- tional blocks. These consist of a 2048-x-16-
cons bit multiport RAM (MPRAM), high-speed
• VLF/INS/RNV/FMS/LRN information input and output ports, an array of three
• TACAN bearing/distance/channel num- microprocessor based I/O processors (IOPs),
ber/TTG/GSPD and a digital high-speed serial digital
• FCS modes and data transmitter/receiver to transmit DPU cross-
• AHRS roll/pitch/heading/accelerations side data and to receive cross-side DPU
• ADF bearing/frequency data. These combine with the MPRAM to
• ADC data provide high-speed multiaccessing features.
• MLS deviations 1. Multiport RAM (MPRAM)
• IRS roll/pitch/heading At the center of the DPU I/O section is a
• Cross-side data 2048-x-16-bit high-speed RAM and mul-
• DSP data tiaccess controller. This RAM and controller
• WXP data are referred to as the multiport RAM or
b. Outputs MPRAM. The MPRAM controller can sup-
Along with receiving data, the DPU also pro- port up to eleven ports. If fewer than eleven
vides several outputs to other EFIS units and are actually used, the controller can be
to other aircraft systems. The I/O section pro- strapped to ignore the unused port posi-
vides these outputs in various formats. These tions and there will be no loss of polling ef-
formats and data are listed as follows: ficiency due to empty port slots.
1. AC Analog The 2048-x-16-bit RAM consists of two 2048
x 8-bit RAMs. When data is transferred
• Heading error from the port to the RAM, the ISR signal is
• Course datum low. The controller reads an 11-bit address

Figure 4-5. DPU-84 Display Processor Unit, Block Diagram

and 16-bit data from the input port and per- passes through the port’s buffers and ac-
forms a write sequence to the RAM. When cesses data in the MPRAM. This data is
data is transferred from the RAM to the then latched at the output port and the
port, the OSR is low. In this case, the con- display processor is released. The read cy-
troller reads the 11-bit address from the cle is now completed by the processor.
port, reads data from the RAM, and latches
To write data to the MPRAM, the display
the 16-bit data in the output port. In either
processor performs a write to external
case, after the operation is complete, the
memory sequence. Processor control line
polling pulse is removed from the port,
decoding provides a signal to the MPRAM,
which in turn resets the service request
this time to the input port. The processor is
signal and the port polling sequence con-
signaled to hang up and the MPRAM is no-
tinues. All transfers between the MPRAM
tified of the pending input transfer. When
and the ports take place on a 27-bit bus
the port is polled, the processor’s 11-bit ad-
with 11 address bits and 16 data bits.
dress is passed to the MPRAM along with
2. MPRAM I/O Ports 12 bits of data. The MPRAM controller per-
Interfacing the MPRAM to the other blocks forms the required RAM write sequence
of the I/O section is accomplished through a and then releases the processor, completing
set of I/O ports. There are two input/output the transfer. Due to a decoding ambiguity
ports and one input port. From this point at the display processor, a superfluous out-
on, all references to MPRAM I/O ports will put request is also generated but the data is
be made with respect to the MPRAM. That ignored by the display processor.
is, an input port is used to transfer data to In the cross-side data receiver and its input
the MPRAM while an output port is used to port, serial data is received by a series of shift
transfer data from the MPRAM. registers in a form directly compatible with
Coordination of the data transfers to and from the MPRAM input port. When a valid word is
the MPRAM is controlled by a simple polling received, a data strobe is generated which
sequence. This polling sequence views each transfers the address and data fields to the
I/O port at two ports, one for input and one for input port latches. The same signal notifies
output; thus, where two I/O ports and one in- the MPRAM port of a pending input data
put port are shown, the controller actually transfer. When the MPRAM polls the port, the
treats these as five separate ports. RAM unite sequence is performed, which
There are two types of I/O ports. The high- transfers the data from the port to the RAM.
speed I/O port is connected to the display The multiplexed I/O port interfaces the I/O
processor and the multiplexed I/O port is processors (IOPs) to the MPRAM. As viewed
connected to the I/O processors. From the by the MPRAM, this input/output port pair
point of view of the MPRAM, these two I/O appears to be two separate ports, one for in-
ports are identical; in actual operation they put and one for output. The multiplexed I/O
differ, since each interfaces to different port provides for bidirectional data flow be-
processor bus schemes. tween the MPRAM and the I/O processors.
The high-speed I/O port interfaces the 12- This multiplexed I/O port is actually a poll-
bit display processor on circuit card A4 to ing controller very similar in operation to the
the 11-bit address and 16-bit data bus MPRAM controller described previously.
used by the high-speed I/O port and the
The polling logic issues an active low mux
MPRAM. To read data from the MPRAM,
service query (MSQ) polling pulse to each
the display processor performs a read from
IOP in turn. If a data transfer is to take
external memory sequence. Decoding of
place, the IOP will place a low level on
the processor control signals provides a
the active low mux service request (MSR)
signal to the MPRAM output port that
line. During the time that the MSQ line
causes the processor to hang up and signals
to that IOP is low, the multiplexed I/O
the MPRAM of a pending output request.
port polling logic recognizes the IOP’s
When the port is polled, the 12-bit address
request, and control of the multiplexed
present at the processor’s address bus
I/O port latches and 11-bit data bus is

given to the IOP. By using these control (a) AC Analog/DC Analog/DC Discrete
signals in the proper sequence, the IOP
Analog I/O Processor
can quickly perform data transfers to and
from the MPRAM. • Synchro/digital
• Resolver/digital
When the appropriate data transfer is com-
plete, the IOP removes the multiplexed • Digital/synchro
service request signal and the service query • Analog/digital
polling sequence continues. • Digital/analog
• Modes
3. I/O Processors
• Flags
The I/O processors, or IOPs, are the main • Straps
data collectors for the I/O section. They pro-
vide primarily for the acquisition of data in a (b) Serial Digital
variety of forms from the aircraft systems. Digital I/O Processor 1
This input data is digitized, filtered, format-
• High-speed CSDB
ted and written into the MPRAM to be used
• Low-speed CSDB
by the display processor. In addition to in-
putting data, new information must be cal- Digital I/O Processor 2
culated based upon previously input data.
• High-speed ARINC 429
These mathematical calculations are also
• Low-speed ARINC 429
performed by the IOPs. Along with inputting
• ARINC 6-wire (561, 419)
information and performing calculations,
some data must be generated and then out- 4. Cross-Side Data Receiver
put to other aircraft units such as the
Another source of input data to the
autopilot system. The output data may be
MPRAM is provided by a high-speed, syn-
required in a number of forms ranging from
chronous, serial digital receiver. The DPU
serial digital to ac analog. Supervision of this
receives cross-side data from the other DPU
function is part of the IOP’s responsibility.
on a 6-wire serial digital bus. This data is
Since many I/O operations are to be per- referred to as cross-side data because it
formed every second with data being han- originates at the aircraft sensors on the op-
dled in many forms, the data is partitioned posite side of the aircraft from the side of
by data type and assigned an individual mi- the DPU that receives the serial data.
croprocessor to handle each data partition.
The result is a series of IOPs all working in The serial digital data is received as a
parallel to provide data to the MPRAM. Two string of 24-bit words each separated by a
things should be noted. First, since there is a 24-bit time gap. Each 24-bit word is made
series of slower parallel IOPs rather than a up of 1 start bit, and 16 data bits.
single high-speed IOP, the data gathering
This data is provided to the DPU primarily
process is less susceptible to a single proces-
for use in data comparison and monitoring,
sor failure. For example, if a single IOP were
and to provide display data to the DPU
to fail, only the data partition associated
when the DSP-84 is in control transfer
with that IOP would be lost and at least par-
mode.
tial data flow to and from the MPRAM would
continue. Second, since all the IOPs and the This high-speed receiver and its MPRAM
display processor can communicate with the interface run totally without intervention
same MPRAM, there exists a channel of bidi- on the part of the display processor or any
rectional communication between each of the of the I/O processors.
IOPs and any other IOP, as well as with the
display processor. 4.3.1.1.1 AC Analog Input/Output Description
The following data format partitions are The DPU receives and processes analog attitude
used by the I/O section with a single IOP for and heading inputs on the analog I/O card A7.
each partition:

a. Pitch data input is 3-wire synchro format from d. ADF bearing input is 3-wire dc resolver
a 332D-11 Vertical Gyro. Pitch analog voltage X (sin/cos) signal from an ADF-60A/B. Analog
to Y = (11.8 V rms)(sine of the pitch angle). The signal voltage: 8 V dc maximum.
X to Y voltage is out of phase with the 400-Hz e. Fast/slow deviation input is 2-wire dc, polarity
power when in a noseup condition. reversing signal from an MSI-80C/D/E or ASI-
b. Roll data input is 3-wire synchro format from a 80D/F. Analog signal voltage: 1.1 volts/dot or
332D-11 Vertical Gyro. Roll analog voltage X to 1.1 volts/10 knots too fast.
Y = (11.8 V rms)(sine of the bank angle). The X f. Angle of attack deviation input is 2-wire dc,
to Y voltage is out of phase with the 400-Hz polarity reversing signal from the aircraft AOA
power when in a right bank condition. system. Analog signal voltage: 1.1 volts/dot or
c. Heading data input is 3-wire synchro format 1.1 volts/10 knots too fast.
from an MC-103/MCS-65 Magnetic Compass. g. Lateral deviation output is 2-wire dc, polarity
Heading analog voltage is +11.8 V rms reversing signal to an FCS-80( ) or FCS-65( ).
maximum. The X to Y voltage is out of phase Analog signal voltage: ±0.5 V dc, 75 mV/degree.
with the 400-Hz power when in a right heading. Angular (ANG) lateral deviation is proportional
d. ADF bearing (ac) input is 3-wire reference to to the angular displacement of the aircraft from
ground signal from an ADF-60A/B. Bearing selected VOR (5 degrees/dot) or localizer course
analog voltage X to Y = (11.8 V rms)(sine of the (0.0775 DDM/dot). Linear (LIN) lateral devia-
bearing angle). tion is proportional to the lateral displacement
e. Heading error output is a reversible phase 400- of the aircraft from selected VOR course (5
Hz analog signal which is proportional to the nmi/dot, 1 nmi/dot if in FCS approach mode) or
difference between the aircraft heading and the localizer course (0.0775 DDM/dot). For long-
selected heading. Heading error voltage is 11.8- range navigation systems, this signal is cross-
V ac maximum (500 mV p-p/degree). The signal track deviation and is proportional to the
voltage is in phase with the reference when the lateral displacement of the aircraft from the
heading bug is left of the lubber line. desired track.
f. Course datum error output is a reversible phase h. Vertical deviation output is 2-wire dc, polarity
400-Hz analog signal which is proportional to reversing signal to an FCS-80( ) or FCS-65( ).
the difference between the aircraft heading and Analog signal voltage: ±0.5 V dc, 75 mV/degree.
the selected course. Course datum voltage is Vertical deviation is proportional to the active
11.8-V ac maximum. Analog signal is 30SINθ, vertical deviation (ILS glideslope, MLS glide-
where θ is the angle between lubber line and path, or VNAV).
course. Course datum error is in phase with the
reference when the course line is left of the 4.3.1.1.3 Discrete Input/Output Description
lubber line.
a. Strap data is read by the I/O microprocessor from
4.3.1.1.2 DC Analog Input/Output Description a latch circuit. Rear connector pins are strapped to
ground according to which sensors are connected
a. Radio altitude input is 2-wire single polarity dc to EFIS. This tells the microprocessor which
analog signal from an ALT-50/55 or AL-101 navigation data labels should be present.
Radio Altimeter. Analog voltage: –20 to 500 ft: b. Radio altitude valid input is a 1-wire discrete
V = 0.02h + 0.4; at 500 ft and greater: V = from the ALT-50/55 or AL-101. Valid = +28 V
0.003(h - 500) + 10.4. dc, invalid = ground.
b. Pitch command input is 2-wire dc, polarity c. Fast/slow valid input is a 1-wire discrete from
reversing signal from an FCS-80( ) or FCS-65( ). the MSI-80C/D/E or ASI-80D/F. Valid = +28 V
Analog signal voltage: FCS-80( ) 150 mV/ dc, invalid = ground.
degree; FCS-65( ) 150 mV/degree; FCS-A 120 d. ILS mode ground input is a 1-wire discrete from
mV/degree; FCS-B 50 mV/degree. the VIR-32/432. LOC mode ground = ground,
c. Roll command input is 2-wire dc, polarity not LOC mode = open.
reversing signal from an FCS-80( ) or FCS-65( ). e. ADF valid input is a 1-wire discrete from the
Analog signal voltage: FCS-80( ) 150 mV/ ADF-60A/B. Valid = +28 V dc, invalid = ground.
degree; FCS-65( ) 150 mV/degree; FCS-A 66 f. Attitude valid input is a 1-wire discrete from
mV/degree; FCS-B 50 mV/degree. the 332D-11 Vertical Gyro. Valid = +28 V dc,
invalid = ground.

g. Heading valid input is a 1-wire discrete from LRN has been selected as the active NAV sensor
the MC-103 Magnetic Compass. Valid = +28 V or when any VOR/TCN has been selected as the
dc, invalid = ground. active NAV sensor and the applicable DME is
h. DG mode input is a 1-wire discrete from the valid, and LIN deviation is enabled by strapping.
MC-103/MCS-65 Magnetic Compass. DG mode Open at all other times.
= +28 V dc, slaved = ground. t. FCS clear output is a 1-wire discrete to an
i. FD valid input is a 1-wire discrete from the analog flight control system. +28-V dc pulse for
FCS-80( ) Flight Control System. Valid = +28 V 250 ±20 milliseconds when active. Open at all
dc, invalid = open. other times. The clear pulse shall not be
j. FD in view bias input is a 1-wire discrete from generated if LRN is the active source and
the FCS-80( ) Flight Control System. IN VIEW magnetic variation is absent from the bus.
= +28 V dc, OUT OF VIEW = open. u. TO/FROM output is a 2-wire discrete to an
k. VOR/LOC output is a 1-wire discrete to an analog flight control system. Signal voltage is
analog flight control system. +28 V dc when any ±0.36 V dc ±0.06 V dc. TO indicated when DPU
VOR or LOC has been selected as the active P2-126 is positive with respect to P2-130.
NAV sensor. Open at all other times. FROM indicated when DPU P2-130 is positive
l. LRN mode output is a 1-wire discrete to an with respect to P2-126.
analog flight control system. +28 V dc when any
LRN has been selected as the active NAV 4.3.1.1.4 Serial Digital Input/Output
sensor. Open at all other times. Description
m. TCN mode output is a 1-wire discrete to an
analog flight control system. +28 V dc when any a. ARINC 429 Digital Bus
TCN has been selected as the active NAV
The ARINC 429 digital bus is a serial, 3-state
sensor. Open at all other times.
multimessage bit stream using a 32-bit data
n. MLS 1 and 2 mode outputs are 1-wire discretes
word. The ARINC 429 3-level waveform format
to an analog flight control system. Ground
is shown in Figure 4-6. The first 8 bits are used
when any MLS has been selected as the active
for address and the remaining 24 bits are used
NAV sensor. Open at all other times.
for data. Data is updated approximately 19, 9.5,
o. Lateral NAV valid output is a 1-wire discrete to
or 2.4 times per second and each word is fol-
an analog flight control system. +28 V dc when
lowed by a 4-bit silence.
the flag being received from the active NAV
sensor is valid. Open at all other times, in- A twisted shielded pair, one wire labeled A and
cluding no course selected. the other B, is used for the bus. The driving
p. Vertical NAV valid output is a 1-wire discrete source applies a signal between A and B to pro-
to an analog flight control system. +28 V dc duce the following three states:
when the flag being received from the sensor
associated with the active EHSI vertical de- BUS LEVEL HI NULL LO
viation is valid. Open at all other times, A to B +10 V dc 0 V dc –10 V dc
including no vertical deviation. A to gnd +5 V dc 0 V dc –5 V dc
q. LOC tuned output is a 1-wire discrete to an B to gnd –5 V dc 0 V dc +5 V dc
analog flight control system. Ground when
either VOR has been selected as the active NAV The ARINC 429 receivers measure differen-
sensor and a LOC frequency tuned input from tially between wires A and B to discriminate
the applicable NAV receiver has been received. against common-mode noise. Maximum shunt
Open at all other times. capacity should not exceed 30 000 pF. The digi-
r. Back course output is a 1-wire discrete to an tal I/O card A8 receives four low-speed ARINC
analog flight control system. +28 V dc when either 429 digital inputs and two high-speed ARINC
VOR has been selected as the active NAV sensor 429 digital inputs. The ARINC receiver data is
and a LOC frequency tuned input from the multiplexed to the digital I/O processor 2.
applicable NAV receiver has been received and
the selected course is greater than 105 degrees 1. ADF ARINC 429 input is a 2-wire serial digital
from the aircraft heading. Open at all other times. bus from an ADF-62/462 Automatic Direction
s. Linear deviation output is a 1-wire discrete to an Finder. Data transfer rate is 12.5 kBd/s.
analog flight control system. +28 V dc when any

Figure 4-6. Digital Signal Format (ARINC Digital Bus)
2. AHS ARINC 429 bus-1 and bus-2 inputs are Logic 0 state = line A positive with respect to
2-wire serial digital buses from an AHC- line B.
85E Attitude/Heading Computer. Data Logic 1 state = line B positive with respect to
transfer rate is 100 kBd/s. line A.
3. MLS ARINC 429 input is a 2-wire serial
digital bus from a microwave landing sys- A receiver measures differentially between
tem receiver. Data transfer rate is 12.5 wires A and B to discriminate against common-
kBd/s. mode noise. The total load on the CSDB bus
4. LRN ARINC 429 input is a 2-wire serial output shall be 500 ohms or greater. Maximum
digital bus from a long-range navigation shunt capacity should not exceed 12 000 pF.
ARINC 429 source. Data transfer rate is The driving source applies a signal between A
100 kBd/s or 12.5 kBd/s. The DPU auto- and B to produce the following states:
matically matches the received high- or low-
speed data rate.
BUS LEVEL HI LO
b. Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)
A to B +5 V dc –5 V dc
Refer to Figure 4-7 for a description of this bus.
A to gnd +5 V dc 0 V dc
CSDB is a binary, 2-level waveform. The bus
B to gnd 0 V dc +5 V dc
consists of a 2-wire twisted shielded pair, one
wire labeled A and the other B, with both lines
driven per Electronic Industries Association 1. ADS CSDB input is a 2-wire serial digital
(EIA) RS-422A standard logic definition. The bus from an ADC-82/85 Air Data Computer.
driving source applies a signal between A and B Data transfer rate is 12.5 kBd/s.
to produce the following two states:

Figure 4-7. Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB) Structure
2. VOR CSDB input is a 2-wire serial digital synchronization, and the clock signal. The serial
bus from a VIR-32/432 Navigation Receiver. data transmission is encoded as binary coded data
Data transfer rate is 12.5 kBd/s. (BCD) and binary data. The first 8 bits are used
3. DME CSDB input is a 2-wire serial digital for address and the remaining 24 bits are used for
bus from a DME-42/442 Distance Measuring data. The word synchronization signal provides a
Equipment. Data transfer rate is 12.5 kBd/s. continuous binary one logic state simultaneously
4. AHS CSDB input is a 2-wire serial digital with the first bit of the data word. The sync signal
bus from an AHC-85 Attitude/Heading is interrupted for a period of 1/2 bit during the last
Computer. Data transfer rate is 50 kBd/s. 1/2 of the eighth bit period to mark the end of ad-
5. FCS CSDB primary and secondary inputs dress/label field in order to provide a data gate
are 2-wire serial digital buses from an analog signal. The word synchronization signal returns to
FCS-65 or digital APS-85( ) Flight Control a binary zero logic state simultaneously with the
System. Data transfer rate is 12.5 kBd/s. last data field bit. The clock signal consists of an
6. EFIS to FCC CSDB output is a 2-wire serial 11 ±3.5 kHz/s square wave signal having a rise
digital bus to the APS-85( ) Autopilot Sys- and decay time within the range of 2 to 6 micro-
tem. Data transfer rate is 12.5 kBd/s. seconds. The driving source applies a signal to
produce the following logic states: logic one equals
c. ARINC 6-Wire Bus (561, 568, 582) +11 to +14 V dc and logic zero equals 0 ±0.5 V dc.
ARINC 6-wire bus is a binary, 32-bit, 2-level

4.3.1.2 Display Processor Card A4
waveform. The ARINC 6-wire waveform format is
shown in Figure 4-8. The bus consists of three 2-
Display processor card A4 receives input data from
wire twisted shielded pairs. The functions of the
the aircraft system from the I/O cards through the
three circuits are serial data transmission, word

Figure 4-8. Typical ARINC 6-Wire Serial Word Waveform

MPRAM. It controls the operation of the symbol characters and other symbols on the EFD dis-
generator and ADI/MUX cards in the DPU. The plays. The character generator draws characters
processor is a discrete 12-bit TTL machine. It is de- a stroke at a time, much like one would draw on
signed to be a fast real-time processor for crt dis- paper (as opposed to a raster format). The char-
play applications. acter generator can draw variable sized and
italic alphanumeric characters, and can string
Instructions are first loaded from a program ROM into letters together for printing words and labels.
the instruction register which addresses a control
ROM. The control ROM in turn generates the neces- The display processor card controls the character
sary control signals to sequence the processor through generator by loading data from its F bus into the
the execution of the instruction. Logical and arithme- character generator stroke counter. This sets the
tic operations are performed on A and B registers by starting address of the data in the character
an ALU. Shift and rotates are done by a shift register. ROM. Each location in the ROM provides 1 video
The multiplexers perform two functions. They can se- bit, 4 bits indicating the direction of each stroke,
lect either the program counter output (PC bus) or the and 3 bits defining the length of the stroke. The
shift register output (S bus) to be loaded into an A or B X-Y counter controller provides the necessary
register, or they can output data on the I/O bus (A bus) clock pulses to increment or decrement the X and
for use by peripheral devices. Y position counters to form the characters. Each
time a new piece of data is output from the char-
The PC bus can directly access 20K of program acter ROM (corresponding to a new character
ROM. The S bus is used to address a sine lookup stroke) the stroke length is loaded into the stroke
table and scratch-pad RAM. length counter. As the stroke is drawn, the
stroke length counter increments until the end-
Output of data to peripherals is accomplished by put- of-stroke decoder detects that the present stroke
ting the data on the A bus and strobing the desired is done. It then outputs an end-of-stroke signal
output line from the I/O decoder. This enables the (EOS) which increments the stroke counter to
peripherals onto the A bus and the data is loaded address the next location in ROM, and the new
into an A or B register. Status flags can also be read stroke data is loaded into the stroke length
directly into the processor from the status multi- counter. The end of the character is detected by a
plexer. In the case of input, output, and status lines, dummy stroke of length zero. This stops the op-
all device decoding is done within the processor. eration of the character generator. Depending on
which character load input was used to draw the
A reset control circuit provides a power-on reset as character, the position counter will either reset
well as an automatic processor reset, which resets to the starting position or hold the present state
the processor if improper operation is detected. to allow stringing several characters together.
Two discretes lines, DPU TEST and STRAP 11 X and Y outputs are formed by d/a converters that
(SIDE) are input to the display processor card A4. produce analog voltages corresponding to the out-
The processor card also outputs the WXR STRT puts of the X and Y position counters. The charac-
signal to start the WXP sweep. ter generator also outputs a character generator
busy signal (CGB) which tells the display proces-
4.3.1.3 Symbol Generator Card A5 sor when the character generator is active.
Symbol generator card A5 creates the signals required Character sizes are varied by changing the
to draw characters and lines on the EFDs. The symbol voltage reference to the d/a converter.
generator contains a character generator to draw let-
ters and symbols, a vector generator to draw lines, a b. Vector Generator
coordinate converter to rotate characters and lines,
and a video circuit to turn the crt beam on and off. The vector generator serves two purposes: first,
it positions the deflection so that characters can
a. Character Generator be drawn anywhere on the screen; second, it
controls the video so that it can draw solid or
The character generator provides X and Y deflec- dashed lines as it moves along.
tion and video outputs to draw alphanumeric

When a new X or Y position is loaded into the refresh cycle. An analog integrator deflects the
vector generator from the display processor, the beam along a raster line from left to right. A
comparator compares the new position with the blanking pulse is generated to return the beam
present position. Depending on whether the new to the left with video off.
position is greater or less than the old position,
the position counter counts up or down at a fixed To produce the angular rotation of the sky/
rate until the present position equals the new ground horizon line, the X and Y raster voltages
position. At this point, the vector is complete and are passed through a coordinate converter
the vector generator stops. The digital output which controls the video signals to generate a
from the X and Y position counters is converted horizon line with the proper angle. The display
to an analog voltage at the output. The vector processor controls the amount of rotation based
generator sends a busy signal to the processor to on the aircraft roll angle.
indicate when it is vectoring. Solid or dashed
lines can also be selected by software. The display processor provides control and data
for the sky/raster generator. Data is output to
c. Coordinate Converter the raster generator in two parts: roll angle and
pitch angle. The pitch angle is output last since
To be able to draw characters and symbols on the strobe signal used to load the raster latches
the crt, the output of the character and vector also signals the raster logic to produce one
generators could be added together and sent di- raster cycle. A raster busy signal is output to
rectly to the displays. In the EFIS, however, the display processor card for the duration of
there is also a need for rotating lines and sym- the raster cycle. A single raster cycle takes 8
bols about an origin, such as in the case of the milliseconds to complete.
tick marks on the compass rose. The coordinate
b. Multiplexer
converter performs this function.
The multiplexer, part of ADI/MUX card A6, al-
Given an initial coordinate (X,Y) the position of lows the DPU to drive two EFDs with different
this point after rotation through an angle θ is: deflection and video signals. The DPU can put
an ADI on one display while drawing an HSI on
X’ = Xcosθ – Ysinθ + X org another. This is done by switching the symbol
Y’ = Ycosθ + Xsinθ + Y org generator, sky raster, and WXR raster signals
to the proper display at the proper time with
4.3.1.4 Sky/Ground Raster Generator and the multiplexer circuit.
Multiplexer Card A6
An ADI deflection multiplexer switches be-
a. Sky/Ground Raster Generator tween symbol generator and sky raster signals.
The HSI multiplexer switches between symbol
The sky/ground raster generator, part of generator, WXR, and sky raster (sky raster is
ADI/MUX card A6, produces the deflection and needed to produce a composite display on the
video blanking signals needed for the sky/ EFD unit normally having an HSI). The video
ground portion of the EADI display. The raster multiplexer performs a similar function with
generator receives control signals and angular the digital video signals.
data from display processor card A4. From this
digital data, analog deflection and digital blank- A multiplexer controller selects the proper mul-
ing signals are generated to produce a full-screen tiplexer inputs depending on the selected dis-
cyan-colored sky and brown ground presentation. play modes, the state of the symbol generator,
The vertical position of the horizon line is deter- and whether or not the weather and sky rasters
mined by the aircraft pitch angle. In addition, are busy. Deflection and video signal drivers
the entire sky/ground raster is rotated by an are used on the multiplexer outputs to provide
amount equal to the aircraft roll angle. a low-impedance source for driving the EFDs.
The raster is produced by deflecting the crt beam c. Input/Output Signal Descriptions
along parallel lines perpendicular to the horizon
line. A total of 288 raster lines composed of two The A6 circuit card receives inputs from the
sets of 144 lines are interleaved on every other weather radar system. These consist of WX busy,

WX red, blue, and green video, WX retrace, and 4.3.1.6 Relay Card A10
WX shadow. The A6 circuit card supplies the
EADI/EHSI deflection and video signals to relay Relay card A10 provides the relay switching for
card A10 and also outputs the backup isolated backup drive output which allows each
EADI/EHSI deflection and video signals to the DPU to drive four crt’s with identical EADI and
cross-side DPU. EHSI displays. Relay card A10 receives deflection
and video signal from the DPU and the cross-side
4.3.1.5 Power Supplies Cards A3 and A9 DPU. The relays switch each signal to select the
normal or cross-side DPU outputs for the EADI and
There are three power supplies in the DPU, one on EHSI. Relay card A10 consists of 16 relays; eight
power supply card A3 and two on power supply are used to select the EADI drive source and eight
card A9. Power supply card A9 supplies power are used to select the EHSI drive source.
to the EFD-84 EADI display and EFD-84 EHSI
4.3.1.7 DPU Monitor Operation
display.
a. Comparator and Master Warn
a. Power Supply Card A3
Comparator monitoring may be done in the
Aircraft +28 V dc is input to power supply card DPU. Data compared includes pitch, roll, and
A3. Power supply card A3 provides +5, +15, and heading. On-side data is read, converted to digi-
–15 V dc to circuits within the DPU. The circuit tal form, and is sent to the cross-side DPU. Test
consists of a +28 to +15 V dc series switching words are transmitted to ensure data path ac-
regulator that supplies constant voltage to a curacy. Each of the processors compares the
push-pull inverter. The push-pull inverter then data, and a comparator warn message will be
outputs regulated and filtered +5, +15 and –15 displayed on the EFDs. Additional outputs are
V dc to cards A4 through A8 in the DPU. An- supplied for use by external annunciators. A
other version of the A3 card consists of +28- to master warn discrete is also provided, as an
+5-V dc series switching regulator, a +28- to output from each side of the DPU, which serves
+15-V dc series switching regulator, and a +15- as an overall compare function annunciation.
to –15-V dc push-pull inverter. The master warn discrete can be reset inde-
pendent of the individual comparator outputs
b. EFD Power Supply Card A9 by momentarily grounding strap 22. The com-
parator outputs are resettable using a separate
Aircraft +28 V dc is input to power supply card input pin (strap 12). The comparator warn out-
A9. Power supply card A9 contains two inde- puts are latching and have built-in hysteresis to
pendent and identical power supplies on one avoid troublesome intermittent warnings. The
card. It provides ±30, ±25, and ±11 V dc to the comparator function may be inhibited by
EHSI and EADI. The circuit consists of a +28- grounding strap 22 and 12 on the DPU.
to +15-V dc series switching regulator that sup-
b. On-Line Monitoring
plies constant voltage to a push-pull inverter.
The push-pull inverter uses a transformer with
On-line monitoring of the EFIS system is ac-
multiple windings on its secondary to output
complished in the following ways:
regulated and filtered ±30, ±25, and ±11 V dc.
• Keep Alive Monitor — circuits are included
The EFIS system will provide normal operation with each of the system processors to monitor
down to +18 V dc. When the voltage drops be- a periodic signal generated by the processor.
low +18 V dc, the crt’s will blank. Normal op- If the signal is not generated, the circuit will
eration is resumed automatically when the cause a flag condition and attempt to restart
voltage rises above +18 V dc. the processor.
When there are short power interruptions (a • Test Words — a series of test words is transmitted
few seconds), there is no warmup time; the crt’s between EFIS subsystem components to verify in-
show a blank state and turn on as soon as tegrity of the data paths. Detection of a bad data
power is restored. transmission will cause a flag condition.

• Activity Monitors — the digital buses being processor to give roll, pitch, and heading
received by the I/O sections are monitored for comparator messages.
activity. If no activity is detected for the ap-
propriate period for that bus, a no data condi- CAT II comparator and excessive deviation
tion or a flag is set depending on the bus. warnings may also be tested. If the CAT II
request line is held low and the on-side lo-
• Synchro Monitor — all synchros are monitored calizer or MLS is tuned the CAT II warning
for valid voltage levels. If an invalid condition annunciators are displayed. These include
is detected, the appropriate flag is set. GS or MGP compare, LOC or MAZ compare,
• Checksum Monitor — the I/O and display proces- RA compare, vertical excessive deviation
sors periodically verify their program checksums. and lateral excessive deviation.
If an incorrect checksum is calculated, the test
words as described above are not generated re- If the DPU test line is held at ground for
sulting in a DPU/MPU fail condition. longer than 4 seconds, the 10-degree incre-
ments are removed and all EADI and EHSI
• RAM Monitor — during each power up se- flags will be brought into view. This flag
quence, the I/O and display processors test condition will remain until either the
their private RAM storage and generate test ground is removed from the test line, or the
words. If the test words are not generated, a RA TST button on the DCP is pressed to en-
DPU/MPU fail condition results. ter a sequence of diagnostic/maintenance
routines (DMRS).
• Multiport RAM Test — during each power up
sequence, the digital I/O #1 processor tests the If the RA TST button is not depressed and
multiport RAM. Different sequences of data the ground is removed from the test line,
are written to the RAM and read to verify its the test sequence is aborted and normal op-
integrity. A failure of any bit will cause the eration is resumed.
processor to reset and perform the test again.
At the conclusion of a successful test, the 2. Diagnostics/Maintenance Routines (DMRS)
RAM is cleared to all zeroes. To enter the diagnostics/maintenance rou-
tines for each DPU, push and hold the in-
c. Self-Test Mode
staller supplied EFIS TEST switch and
In addition to the on-line monitors, it is possible push the radio altimeter test switch on the
to place the EFIS system in a self-test mode by on-side DSP. Once the first page of the rou-
the use of an airframe supplied test switch or tine is displayed, the EFIS TEST switch
test switches. When the test mode has been ac- may be released. Page sequencing is done
tivated, the button and knobs on the DCP select by repeatedly pushing the radio altimeter
various submodes. Test functions available test switch on the on-side DSP.
include:
(a) Multiport RAM — presents the data
1. Confidence Test being received from and transmitted to
aircraft systems. Data is in digital form
When the DPU test is grounded, an incre- and will aid in new installation check-
ment of +10 degrees is added to pitch and outs as well as LRU fault isolation.
roll on the left side and –10 degrees is (b) RAM — displays the contents of the
added to pitch and roll on the right side. A display processor RAM.
+20-degree increment is added to heading (c) Alignment Tests — displays fixed data
on the left side and a –20-degree increment patterns in fixed colors to provide veri-
is added to the heading on the right side. fication of symbol generator functions
The word TEST in red characters is written and to allow for adjustment of display
across the EADI above the aircraft symbol size, position, and color. Program revi-
while the test is in process. The addi- sion status is also displayed.
tion/subtraction of the 10-degree increment (d) Diagnostic Data — displays a set of data
is done in the DPU I/O section and will identical to that which can be selected by
cause the comparator logic in the display the MFD extended data menu. The radar

status on line 1 of these formats is not 4.3.2.2 Deflection Amplifiers

displayed.
(e) FCS Diagnostics — displays APS-85( ) The horizontal and vertical deflection amplifiers
diagnostics text if available. are identical circuits designed entirely with discrete
(f) ADS Diagnostics — displays CSDB ADS components.
diagnostics text if available.
4.3.2.3 Video Amplifiers
(g) AHRS Diagnostics — displays CSDB
AHRS diagnostics if available. There are three separate video amplifiers in each
(h) VIR Diagnostics — displays CSDB VIR EFD. These amplifiers are used to turn the electron
diagnostics if available. beams on and off at speeds up to 2 MHz by output-
(i) DME Diagnostics — displays CSDB ting either of two discrete voltage levels. The volt-
DME diagnostics if available. age levels that turn the video guns on and off are
dependent on the voltage applied to grid 2. In our
4.3.2 EFD-84 Electronic Flight Display (EFD) particular case, grid 2 is biased at 400 V dc giving
us video on (Von) R60 V dc and video off (Voff) S150
The EFIS system uses identical EFD-84 units for V dc. The intensities of each beam can be adjusted
the EADI and EHSI functions. Refer to Figure 4-9. separately by lowering Von.
4.3.2.1 CRT Assembly 4.3.2.4 Phosphor Protection Monitor
The integrated crt assembly consists of the follow- It is necessary to protect the crt phosphor from be-
ing components: ing damaged due to either deflection or video am-
plifier failure. This is done by continuously moni-
• High-resolution multicolor crt toring the deflection yoke return lines and video
• Self-converging deflection yoke drive signals. If a failure is detected in these lines,
• Static convergence and purity magnets the phosphor protection monitor will signal the
• Multibandpass optical filter high-voltage power supply to shut down.
The crt is an in-line gun, shadow mask type which 4.3.2.5 High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)
uses a black matrix surrounding pigmented phos-
phors to achieve maximum contrast ratio. The mul- The HVPS provides two output voltages: 15 kV for
tibandpass optical filter, which is not bonded to the the anode and +2.5 to +4.5 kV dc for focus and 400
crt face, is matched to the phosphors in the tube to V dc for grid 2. The anode and focus voltage regula-
achieve a high contrast ratio and improve sunlight tors are independent of each other in order to en-
readability. An antireflection coating is included in sure output regulation. The oscillator section of the
the filter. HVPS is contained in the anode section. This oscil-
lator is also used to drive the focus transformer
Horizontal and vertical deflection amplifiers pro- primary. Having the anode and focus oscillations
vide the drive currents to the deflection yoke synchronized reduces emi.
windings to magnetically position the electron
beam on the active phosphor area. The deflection 4.3.2.6 Input/Output Description
yoke is designed to be self-converging so that no
The DPU supplies the following inputs to each EADI
additional deflection signal processing is required
and EHSI: red, green, and blue video signals, green
to correct for misconvergence. Beam positioning on
intensity, retrace, shadow (EHSI only), X and Y de-
the screen is done in either of two techniques:
flection, ±25-V dc and ±11-V dc deflection power, and
stroke (or random positioning) and raster scanning.
+26.5-V dc high voltage power input. Inclinometer
Raster scanning is used for illuminating large por-
lighting is supplied from the 5-V or +28-V dc lighting
tions of the screen, such as that required for
bus. The integral cooling fan is powered by the DPU
weather radar and sky background. Stroke writing
–25-V dc deflection power. Power monitor input is
is used to produce sharp straight lines, alphanu-
26.5 V dc from the EFD circuit breaker. The EFD
merics, and symbols.
monitors the input power and shuts down the high
No in-house adjustment of the crt assembly is nec- voltage power supply if the input voltage falls below
essary because the unit arrives fully converged and +18 V dc. If an over-temperature condition is de-
adjusted for maximum purity. tected, the EFD thermal switch provides a ground

Figure 4-9. EFD-84 Electronic Flight Display, Block Diagram

for an external high-temperature warning annuncia- 3. DC Discrete Inputs

tor.
• Instrument flags
4.3.3 MPU-84 Multifunction Processor Unit • Instrument modes
(MPU) • EFIS and I/O straps
• Analog FCS modes
The MPU generates the necessary deflection and
• Comparator warn reset
video signals to draw the desired display on the
• Master warn reset
multifunction display unit (MFD). The MPU con-
• Category II request
tains an aircraft system I/O interface for two sets of
• Marker beacons
sensors, a display processor, a symbol generator to
provide stroke writing, an ADI/sky raster generator • Flight director command bars in view/off
and multiplexer circuit, and power supplies. Refer • LOC tuned
to Figure 4-10. 4. Serial Digital Inputs
4.3.3.1 Input/Output (I/O) Interface A7, A8, • DME distance/ident/TTG/GSPD/frequency
A-9, and A-10 • VOR bearing/ILS deviation/marker bea-
The I/O interface section of the MPU comprises ana- cons
log I/O cards A7 and A9 and digital I/O cards A8 and • VLF/INS/RNV/FMS/LNV/LRN informa-
A10. These cards receive analog and digital data tion
from aircraft systems and other EFIS units, format • TACAN bearing/distance/channel number/
the data, and provide that data to the display proces- TTG/GSPD
sor. In addition to collecting data for display, the I/O • FCS modes and data
section also calculates new data based upon previ- • AHRS roll/pitch/heading and acceleration
ously received data and outputs this information in • ADF bearing/frequency
an appropriate form to other equipments. There are • ADC data
also a number of digital EFIS communication chan- • MLS deviations
nels which are supervised by the MPU I/O system. • IRS roll/pitch/heading
• Cross-side data
a. Inputs
• DCP/DSP data
The I/O section is capable of receiving data from • WXP data
several different aircraft sources. In addition,
there are several intra-EFIS data sources which b. Outputs
must be accommodated. Altogether, four general Along with receiving data, the MPU also pro-
data formats are received, digitized, filtered, and vides several outputs to other EFIS units and to
formatted by the I/O section as follows: other aircraft systems. The I/O section provides
1. AC Analog Inputs these outputs in various formats. These formats
and data are listed as follows:
• Roll angle
• Pitch angle 1. AC Analog
• Heading
• ADF bearing (3-wire synchro) • Heading error
• VOR or TACAN bearing (synchro) • Course datum
2. DC Analog Inputs
2. DC Analog
• Radio altitude
• Crosstrack deviation • Lateral deviation
• Roll steering command • Vertical deviation
• Pitch steering command
• ADF bearing (sin/cos) 3. DC Discrete
• Fast/slow or angle of attack deviation
• Localizer deviation • Attitude warn (comparator output)
• Glideslope deviation • Heading warn (comparator output)
• VOR or TACAN bearing (sin/cos) • Category II warn (LOC, GS, RA warn)

• Master warn (comparator output) transfers between the MPRAM and the ports
• Category II amber take place on a 27-bit bus with 11 address bits
• Category II green and 16 data bits.
• Back course
• NAV modes (VOR/LOC1, VOR/LOC2, The MPRAM controller can support up to 11
LRN1/LRN2, MLS1/MLS2) ports. If fewer than 11 are actually used, the
• Lat NAV valid/vert NAV valid controller can be strapped to ignore the un-
• Linear deviation used port positions and there will be no loss
• FCS mode clear of polling efficiency due to empty port slots.
• Localizer tuned
• Decision height 2. MPRAM I/O Ports
• To/from (2-wire)
• Radio altitude test Interfacing the MPRAM to the other blocks
• Category II excessive deviation of the I/O section is accomplished through a
• Unusual attitude set of I/O ports. There are two input/output
ports and one input port. From this point
4. Serial Digital on, all references to MPRAM I/O ports will
be made with respect to the MPRAM. That
• DCP/DSP data is, an input port is used to transfer data to
• MFD joystick and switch data (MPU only) the MPRAM while an output port is used to
• EFIS transmit bus/FCS data transfer data from the MPRAM. Coordina-
• Cross-side data tion of the data transfers to and from the
MPRAM is controlled by a simple polling
c. Functional Blocks
sequence. This polling sequence views each
The I/O section is divided into four functional I/O port at two ports, one for input and one
blocks. These consist of a 2048- by 16-bit mul- for output; thus, where two I/O ports and
tiport RAM (MPRAM), a high-speed serial digi- one input port are shown, the controller ac-
tal transmitter/receiver to transmit MPU cross- tually treats these as five separate ports.
side data and to receive DPU/MPU cross-side
data, an array of microprocessor based I/O There are two types of I/O ports. The I/O port
processors (IOPs), and high-speed input and is connected to the display processor and the
output ports. These combine with the MPRAM multiplexed I/O port is connected to the I/O
to provide high-speed multiaccessing features. processors. From the point of view of the
MPRAM, these two I/O ports are identical; in
1. Multiport RAM (MPRAM) actual operation they differ, since each inter-
faces to different processor bus schemes.
At the center of the MPU I/O section is a 2048-
by 16-bit high-speed RAM and multiaccess con-
troller. This RAM and controller are referred to The 12-bit display processor interfaces to the
as the multiport RAM or MPRAM. The 2048- 11-bit address and 16-bit data bus used by
by 16-bit RAM comprises two 2048- by 8-bit the I/O port and the MPRAM. To read data
RAMs. When data is transferred from the port from RAM, the display processor performs a
to the RAM, the ISR signal is low. The con- read from external memory sequence. De-
troller reads an 11-bit address and 16-bit data coding of the processor control signals pro-
from the input port and performs a write se- vides a signal to the MPRAM output port
quence to the RAM. When data is transferred that causes the processor to hang up and
to the port from the RAM, the OSR is low. In signals the MPRAM of a pending output re-
this case, the controller reads the 11-bit ad- quest. When the port is polled, the 12-bit ad-
dress from the port, reads data from the RAM, dress present at the processor’s address bus
and latches the 16-bit data in the output port. passes through the port’s buffers and ac-
In either case, after the operation is complete, cesses data in the MPRAM. This data is then
the polling pulse is removed from the port, latched at the output port and the display
which in turn resets the service request signal processor is released. The read cycle is now
and the polling sequence continues. All completed by the processor.

To write data to the MPRAM, the display request signal and the service query polling se-
processor performs a write to external mem- quence continues.
ory sequence. Processor control line decoding
3. I/O Processors
provides a signal to the MPRAM, this time to
the input port. The processor is signaled to The I/O processors, or IOPs, are the main data
hang up and the MPRAM is notified of the collectors for the I/O section. They provide
pending input transfer. When the port is primarily for the acquisition of data in a vari-
polled, the processor’s 11-bit address is ety of forms from the aircraft systems and
passed to the MPRAM along with 12 bits of other EFD units. This data is digitized, fil-
data. The MPRAM controller performs the tered, formatted, and written into the
required RAM write sequence and then re- MPRAM to be used by the display processor.
leases the processor, completing the transfer. In addition to inputting data, new information
Due to a decoding ambiguity at the display must be calculated based upon previously in-
processor, a superfluous output request is put data. These mathematical calculations are
also generated but the data is ignored by the also performed by the IOPs. Along with input-
display processor. In the cross-side data re- ting information and performing calculations,
ceiver and its input port, serial data is re- some data must be generated and then output
ceived by a series of shift registers in a form to other aircraft units, such as the autopilot
directly compatible with the input port. system. The output data may be required in a
When a valid word is received, a data strobe number of forms ranging from serial digital to
is generated which transfers the address and ac analog. Supervision of this function is part
data fields to the input port latches. The of the IOPs responsibility.
same signal notifies the MPRAM port of a
pending input data transfer. When the Since many I/O operations are to be per-
MPRAM polls the port, the RAM unite se- formed every second with data being han-
quence is performed, which transfers the dled in many forms, the data is partitioned
data from the port to the RAM. by data type and assigned an individual mi-
croprocessor to handle each data partition.
There is also an I/O port which interfaces the The result is a series of IOPs all working in
I/O processors to the MPRAM. Again, this parallel to provide data to the MPRAM. Two
input/output port pair appears to be two things should be noted. First, since there is a
separate ports, one for input and one for out- series of slower parallel IOPs rather than a
put, as viewed by the MPRAM. This I/O port single high-speed IOP, the data gathering
provides for bidirectional data flow between process is less susceptible to a single proces-
the MPRAM and the I/O processors. This sor failure. For example, if a single IOP were
multiplexed I/O port is actually a polling con- to fail, only the data partition associated
troller very similar in operation to the with that IOP would be lost and at least par-
MPRAM controller described previously. tial data flow to and from the MPRAM would
continue. Second, since all the IOPs and the
The polling logic issues an active low mux display processor can communicate with the
service query (MSQ) polling pulse to each IOP same MPRAM, there exists a channel of bidi-
in turn. If a data transfer is to take place, the rectional communication between each of the
IOP will place a low level on the active low mux IOPs and any other IOP, as well as with the
service request (MSR) line. During the time display processor.
that the MSQ line to that IOP is low, the mul-
tiplexed I/O port polling logic recognizes the The following three data format partitions
IOPs request, and control of the multiplexed are used by the I/O section with a single
I/O port latches and 11-bit data bus is given to IOP for each partition:
the IOP. By using these control signals in the (a) AC Analog/DC Analog/DC Discrete
proper sequence, the IOP can quickly perform
data transfers to and from the MPRAM. • Synchro/digital
• Resolver/digital
When the appropriate data transfer is com- • Digital/synchro
plete, the IOP removes the multiplexed service • Analog/digital

• Digital/analog 4.3.3.1.2 Serial Digital Input/Output

• Modes Description
• Flags
• Straps The MPU receives and processes serial digital in-
puts and outputs from number 1 side on digital I/O
card A8. The MPU receives and processes serial
(b) Serial Digital
digital inputs and outputs from number 2 side on
digital I/O card A10. Refer to paragraph 4.3.1.1.4
• UART based
for descriptions of the commercial standard digital
• Low-speed Pro Line II
bus (CSDB), Manchester bus, ARINC 429, and 6-
• ARINC 6-wire
wire buses.
(c) Cross-Side Data Receiver 4.3.3.2 Display Processor A4
Another source of input data to the Display processor card A4 receives input data from
MPRAM is provided by a high-speed, the aircraft system from the I/O cards through the
synchronous, serial digital receiver. The MPRAM. It controls the operation of the symbol
information received here originates in generator and ADI/MUX cards in the MPU. The
the MPU and is transmitted to the DPU processor is a discrete 12-bit TTL machine. It is de-
on a single 6-wire serial bus. The infor- signed to be a fast real-time processor for crt dis-
mation on this bus consists of cross-side play applications. Instructions are first loaded from
data which is received in its natural a program ROM into the instruction register, which
form by the MPU IOPs and is then addresses a control ROM. The control ROM in turn
passed to the DPU in serial digital generates the necessary control signals to sequence
form. This data is referred to as cross- the processor through the execution of the instruc-
side data because it originates at the tion. Logical and arithmetic operations are per-
aircraft sensors on the opposite side of formed on A and B registers by an ALU. Shift and
the aircraft from the side of the DPU rotates are done by a shift register. The multiplex-
which receives the serial data. The se- ers perform two functions. They can select either
rial digital data is received as a string the program counter output (PC bus) or the shift
of 24-bit words each separated by a 24- register output (S bus) to be loaded into an A or B
bit time gap. Each 24-bit word is made register, and they can output data on the I/O bus (A
up of 1 start bit and 16 data bits. bus) for use by peripheral devices.
The PC bus can directly access 20K of program

This data is provided to the DPU pri-
ROM. The S bus is used to address a sine lookup
marily for use in data comparison and
table and scratch-pad RAM.
monitoring, and to provide display data
to the DPU when the DSP-84 is in con- Output of data to peripherals is accomplished by put-
trol transfer mode. This high-speed re- ting the data on the A bus and strobing the desired
ceiver and its MPRAM interface run to- output line from the I/O decoder. This enables the
tally without intervention on the part of peripherals onto the A bus and the data is loaded
the display processor or any of the I/O into an A or B register. Status flags can also be read
processors. directly into the processor from the status multi-
plexer. In the case of input, output, and status lines,
4.3.3.1.1 Analog Input/Output Description all device decoding is done within the processor.
The MPU receives and processes analog inputs and A reset control circuit provides a power-on reset as
outputs from number 1 side on analog I/O card A7. well as an automatic processor reset, which resets
The MPU receives and processes analog inputs and the processor if improper operation is detected.
outputs from number 2 side on analog I/O card A9.
4.3.3.3 Symbol Generator A5
Refer to paragraph 4.3.1.1.1 for ac analog in-
put/output descriptions, paragraph 4.3.1.1.2 for dc
Symbol generator card A5 creates the signals re-
analog input/output descriptions, and paragraph
quired to draw characters and lines on the EFDs.
4.3.1.1.3 for discrete input/output descriptions.
The symbol generator contains a character generator

to draw letters and symbols, a vector generator to b. Vector Generator

draw lines, a coordinate converter to rotate charac-
ters and lines, and a video circuit to turn the crt The vector generator serves two purposes; first,
beam on and off. it positions the deflection so that characters can
be drawn anywhere on the screen; second, it
a. Character Generator controls the video so that it can draw solid or
dashed lines as it moves along.
The character generator provides X and Y deflec-
tion and video outputs to draw alphanumeric When a new X or Y position is loaded into the
characters and other symbols on the EFD dis- vector generator from the display processor, the
plays. The character generator draws characters comparator compares the new position with the
a stroke at a time, much like one would draw on present position. Depending on whether the new
paper (as opposed to a raster format). The char- position is greater or less than the old position,
acter generator can draw variable sized and the position counter counts up or down at a fixed
italic alphanumeric characters, and can string rate until the present position equals the new
letters together for printing words and labels. position. At this point, the vector is complete and
the vector generator stops. The digital outputs
The display processor card controls the character from the X and Y position counters are converted
generator by loading data from its F bus into the to analog voltages at the output. The vector gen-
character generator stroke counter. This sets the erator sends a busy signal to the processor to in-
starting address of the data in the character ROM. dicate when it is vectoring. Solid or dashed lines
Each location in the ROM provides 1 video bit, 4 can also be selected by software.
bits indicating the direction of each stroke, and 3
bits defining the length of the stroke. The X-Y c. Coordinate Converter
counter controller provides the necessary clock
pulses to increment or decrement the X and Y po- To be able to draw characters and symbols on
sition counters to form the characters. Each time a the crt, the outputs of the character and vector
new piece of data is output from the character generators could be added together and sent di-
ROM (corresponding to a new character stroke), rectly to the displays. In the EFIS, however,
the stroke length is loaded into the stroke length there is also a need for rotating lines and sym-
counter. As the stroke is drawn, the stroke length bols about an origin, such as in the case of the
counter increments until the end-of-stroke decoder tick marks on the compass rose. The coordinate
detects that the present stroke is done. It then converter performs this function.
outputs an end-of-stroke signal (EOS) which in-
Given an initial coordinate (X,Y) the position of
crements the stroke counter to address the next
this point after rotation through an angle θ is:
location in ROM, and the new stroke data is
loaded into the stroke length counter. The end of X’=Xcosθ – Ysinθ + X org
the character is detected by a dummy stroke of
length zero. This stops the operation of the charac- Y’=Ycosθ + Xsinθ + Y org
ter generator. Depending on which character load
input was used to draw the character, the position 4.3.3.4 Sky/Ground Raster Generator and
counter will either reset to the starting position or Multiplexer A6
hold the present state to allow stringing several
a. Sky/Ground Raster Generator
characters together.
The sky/ground raster generator, part of ADI/
X and Y outputs are formed by d/a converters
MUX card A6, produces the deflection and video
that produce analog voltages corresponding to
blanking signals needed for the sky/
the outputs of the X and Y position counters.
ground portion of the EADI display. The raster
The character generator also outputs a charac-
generator receives control signals and angular data
ter generator busy signal (CGB) which tells the
from display processor card A4. From this digital
display processor when the character generator
data, analog deflection and digital blanking signals
is active.
are generated to produce a full-screen cyan-colored
Character sizes are varied by changing the sky and brown ground presentation. The vertical
voltage reference to the d/a converter. position of the horizon line is determined by the

aircraft pitch angle. In addition, the entire whether or not the weather and sky rasters are
sky/ground raster is rotated by an amount equal to busy. Deflection and video signal drivers are used
the aircraft roll angle. on the multiplexer outputs to provide a low-
impedance source for driving the display units.
The raster is produced by deflecting the crt
beam along parallel lines perpendicular to the 4.3.3.5 Power Supply Card A3
horizon line. A total of 288 raster lines com-
posed of two sets of 144 lines are interleaved on Aircraft +28 V dc is input to power supply card A3.
every other refresh cycle. An analog integrator Card A3 provides +5, +15, and –15 V dc to circuits
deflects the beam along a raster line from left to within the MPU. The circuit consists of a +28-to
right. A blanking pulse is generated to return +15-V dc series switching regulator that supplies
the beam to the left with video off. constant voltage to a push-pull inverter. The push-
pull inverter then outputs regulated and filtered
To produce the angular rotation of the sky/ +5, +15, and –15 V dc to cards A4 through A11 in
ground horizon line, the X and Y raster voltages the MPU. Another version of card A3 consists of a
are passed through a coordinate converter +28- to +15-V dc series regulator, a +28- to +5-V dc
which controls the video signals to generate a series regulator, and a +15- to –15-V dc push-pull
horizon line with the proper angle. The display inverter.
processor controls the amount of rotation based
on the aircraft roll angle. The EFIS system will provide normal operation
down to +18 V dc. When the voltage drops below
The display processor provides control and data +18 V dc, the crt’s will blank. Normal operation is
for the sky/raster generator. Data is output to resumed automatically when the voltage rises
the raster generator in two parts: roll angle and above +18 V dc.
pitch angle. The pitch angle is output last, since
the strobe signal used to load the raster latches When there are short power interruptions (a few
also signals the raster logic to produce one seconds), there is no warmup time; the crt’s show
raster cycle. A raster busy signal is output to a blank state and turn on as soon as power is
the display processor card for the duration of restored.
the raster cycle. A single raster cycle takes 8 ms 4.3.3.6 MPU Monitor Operation
to complete.
a. Comparator and Master Warn
b. Multiplexer
Comparator monitoring may be done in the MPU
The multiplexer, part of ADI/MUX card A6, al- as well as DPU. Data compared includes pitch,
lows the MPU to drive two EFDs and an MFD roll, and heading. On-side data is read, converted
with different deflection and video signals. The to digital form, and may be sent to each DPU. In
MPU can put an ADI on one EFD, draw an HSI 5-tube configurations, the MPU may send cross-
on another EFD, and at the same time drive the side data to the DPU’s. Test words are transmit-
MFD. This is done by switching the symbol ted to ensure data path accuracy. Each of the
generator, sky raster, and WXR raster signals processors compares the data, and a comparator
to the proper display at the proper time with warn message is displayed on the EFDs. Addi-
the multiplexer circuit. tional outputs are supplied for use by external
An ADI deflection multiplexer switches be- annunciators. A master warn discrete is also
tween symbol generator and sky raster signals. provided, as an output from each side of the
The HSI multiplexer switches between symbol MPU, which serves as an overall compare func-
generator, WXR, and sky raster (sky raster is tion annunciation. The master warn discrete can
needed to produce a composite display on the be reset independent of the individual compara-
EFD unit normally having an HSI). The video tor outputs by momentarily grounding strap 22.
multiplexer performs a similar function with The comparator outputs are resettable using a
the digital video signals. separate input pin (strap 12). The comparator
warn outputs are latching and have built-in hys-
A multiplexer controller selects the proper multi- teresis to avoid troublesome intermittent warn-
plexer inputs, depending on the selected display ings. The comparator function may be inhibited
modes, the state of the symbol generator, and by grounding straps 22 and 12 on the MPU.

b. On-Line Monitoring perform the test again. At the conclusion of a

successful test, the RAM is cleared to all zeros.
On-line monitoring of the EFIS system is ac-
complished in the following ways: c. Self-Test Mode
1. Keep-Alive Monitor In addition to the on-line monitors, it is possible

to place the EFIS system in a self-test mode by
Circuits are included with each of the sys- the use of an airframe supplied test switch or
tem processors to monitor a periodic signal test switches. When the test mode has been ac-
generated by the processor. If the signal is tivated, the button and knobs on the DCP select
not generated, the circuit will cause a flag various submodes. Test functions available
condition and attempt to restart the proces- include:
sor.
1. Confidence Test
2. Test Words
When the MPU test is grounded, an incre-
A series of test words is transmitted be- ment of +10 degrees is added to pitch and
tween EFIS subsystem components to ver- roll on the left side and -10 degrees is added
ify integrity of the data paths. Detection of to pitch and roll on the right side. A +20-
a bad data transmission will cause a flag degree increment is added to heading on the
condition. left side and a –20-degree increment is added
to the heading on the right side. The word
3. Activity Monitors
TEST in red characters is written across the
The digital buses being received by the I/O EADI above the aircraft symbol while the
sections are monitored for activity. If no ac- test is in process. The addition of the 10-
tivity is detected for the appropriate period degree increment is done in the MPU I/O
for that bus, a no data condition or a flag is section and will cause the comparator logic
set, depending on the bus. in the display processor to give roll, pitch,
and heading comparator messages.
4. Synchro Monitor
If the MPU test line is held at ground for
All synchros are monitored for valid voltage longer than 4 seconds, the 10-degree incre-
levels. If an invalid condition is detected, ments are removed and all EADI and EHSI
the appropriate flag is set. flags are brought into view. This flag condi-
5. Checksum Monitor tion will remain until either the ground is
removed from the test line or the RA TST
The I/O and display processors periodically button on the DSP is pushed to enter a se-
verify their program checksums. If an in- quence of diagnostic/maintenance routines
correct checksum is calculated, the test (DMRS).
words as described above are not generated,
resulting in a DPU/MPU fail condition. If the RA TST button is not pushed and the
ground is removed from the test line, the
6. Ram Monitor test sequence is aborted and normal opera-
tion is resumed.
During each power-up sequence, the I/O
and display processors test their private 2. Diagnostics/Maintenance Routines (DMRS)
RAM storage and generate test words. If
To enter the diagnostic/maintenance rou-
the test words are not generated, a DPU/
tines for the MPU in a 5-tube system, push
MPU fail condition results.
and hold the EFIS TEST switch on the pi-
7. Multiport RAM Test lot’s side and push the radio altimeter test
switch on the copilot’s DSP. Page sequenc-
During each power-up sequence, the digital ing is done by repeatedly pushing the radio
I/O #1 processor tests the multiport RAM. Dif- altimeter test switch on the copilot’s DSP.
ferent sequences of data are written to the
(a) Multiport RAM — presents the data being
RAM and read to verify its integrity. A failure
received from and transmitted to the air-
of any bit will cause the processor to reset and
craft systems. Data is in digital form and

will aid in new installation checkouts as The display is limited to the VOR/DME,
well as LRU fault isolation. CAT II, and DIAGNOSTICS pages. The
(b) RAM — displays the contents of the radar status on line 1 of these formats
display processor RAM. is not displayed. Turn the DSP DH
(c) MFD — displays the contents of the knob to select the different pages of di-
RAM that holds the MFD page data, agnostic data.
joystick data, and status. This mode is (f) FCS Diagnostics — displays APS-85/86
not entered by a DPU. diagnostics text if available.
(d) Alignment Tests — displays fixed data (g) ADC Diagnostics — displays ADC diag-
patterns in fixed colors to provide veri- nostics text if available.
fication of symbol generator functions (h) AHRS Diagnostics — displays AHRS
and to allow for adjustment of display diagnostics text if available.
size, position, and color. Program revi- (i) VIR Diagnostics — displays VIR diag-
sion status is also displayed. nostics text if available.
(e) Diagnostic Data — displays a set of (j) DME Diagnostics — displays DME di-
data identical to that which can be se- agnostics text if available.
lected by the MFD extended data menu.

Figure 4-10. MPU-84 Multifunction Processor Unit, Block Diagram

Figure 4-11. MFD-85B Multifunction Display, Block Diagram

4.3.4 MFD-85B Multifunction Display (MFD) The MPU receives the data on the falling edge of
each clock. The address is used to define a location
within a RAM. Each byte of data must have an 8-
Refer to Figure 4-11. The multifunction processing
bit address associated with it to define a spot
unit (MPU) receives serial data from the MFD and
within the RAM. One page worth of data requires
then transmits the necessary deflection and video
240 bytes to fill the memory. The remaining 16
signals to define a picture on the MFD. The serial
bytes of RAM are used for MFD switch storage.
data received by the MPU is a single page of data to
be displayed on the screen and the control mode
The crt assembly and deflection amplifiers are the
switch information. The control mode switch infor-
same as the EFD.
mation will be used by the MPU to determine the
mode and thus transmit the necessary signals.
4.3.4.1 Video Amplifiers
The MFD has control mode switches (pushbuttons) There are three separate video amplifiers in each
on the left-hand side of the screen. The pushbuttons MFD. These amplifiers are used to turn the elec-
are interlocking, and only one button may be tron beams on and off at speeds up to 2 MHz by
pushed at a time. The exceptions to this are the outputting either of two discrete voltage levels. The
RDR and NAV mode buttons. These may be pushed voltage levels that turn the video guns on and off
for any combination of the two buttons. are dependent on the voltage applied to grid 2. Grid
2 is biased at +400 V dc, giving us video on (Von)
The data is stored in RAM if the selected mode is ≤60 V dc and video off (Voff) ≥150 V dc.
RMT. The RAM temporarily stores a page of data.
If power is turned off, the page information is lost. 4.3.4.2 Phosphor Protection Monitor
The data received from the external source has a
starting address followed by a stream of data. The Refer to the description of this circuit in the EFD
processor decodes the address and loads the data paragraph 4.3.2.4.
into the RAM.
4.3.4.3 High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)
A12
Page data is stored in the EEPROM if the selected
mode is PGE or EMG. The EEPROM retains the The HVPS provides two output voltages, 15 kV for
data even if the power is turned off. One byte of the anode, +2.5 to +4.5 kV dc for focus, and +400 V
serial data is received each time a key is pushed on dc for grid 2. The anode and focus voltage regula-
the RDP-300. The processor stores the byte of data tors are independent of each other in order to en-
at the appropriate address in the EEPROM. The sure output regulation. The oscillator section of the
EEPROM requires extensive control signals to in- HVPS is contained in the anode section. This oscil-
put data. Logic is used external to the processor to lator is also used to drive the focus transformer
control the EEPROM. primary. Having the anode and focus oscillations
synchronized reduces EMI.
Independent of the two storage methods mentioned
above, if the selected mode is RMT, PGE, or EMG, 4.3.4.4 Low-Voltage Power Supply Card A4
one page of data must be transmitted to the MPU.
The data is transmitted serially, 1 byte at a time. Aircraft +28 V dc is input to low-voltage power sup-
The switch information will be transmitted in the ply card A4. A4 provides +5, ±11, ±25, and +26.5 V
same manner. dc to circuits within the MFD.
Revise 30 March 1995 4-33

4.3.5 DSP-84 Display Select Panel (DSP) warns the computer of possible loss of power. Shift
registers on the A2 card are not used.
4.3.5.1 General Description
Interconnect card A3 contains rear connectors J1
The primary function of the DSP-84 is to provide and J2. Card A3 also provides interface between
pilot control of the EFIS system. To accomplish this the other cards and the rear connectors.
task, the DSP-84 processor scans DSP front panel
switches for pilot inputs and monitors autopilot an-
nunciator signals. After processing by the DSP, in- Pushbutton switch card A4 contains the front panel
put data is then transferred to the DPU/MPU pushbutton switches along with pushbutton lighting.
display processor via a serial data link. Refer to
Figure 4-12. Auxiliary card A5 inputs consist of: parallel switch
position data from the DSP-85 front panel, data
4.3.5.2 Circuit Card Descriptions from the course and heading optical encoders, par-
allel autopilot annunciator data, and a mux select
Processor card A1 inputs consist of: parallel rear line from the computer. The optical decoder con-
connector strapping data, course and heading data, verts the digital pulses from the optical encoder
serial switch position data from auxiliary card A5, into two signals: one indicates the direction of rota-
and serial autopilot annunciator data from auxil- tion while the other shows the amount of rotation.
iary card A5. Shift registers on card A1 convert the The auxiliary card also contains shift registers that
parallel rear connector strapping data into serial convert the parallel autopilot annunciator data and
information supplied to the computer. The com- front switch position information into serial data
puter monitors the serial switch position data along for the computer. The parallel autopilot annuncia-
with the course and heading data. When a switch tor data uses 12-V logic and the shift registers and
changes status, the computer executes a routine to multiplexer are powered by +12 V dc. The serial
process the new data before transmitting it. The switch data uses 5-V logic and therefore is con-
computer also monitors the autopilot annunciator verted to 12-V logic before being applied to the mul-
data but sends it out without preprocessing. tiplexer. The mux select line from the computer is
also converted into 12-V logic before being applied
Power supply card A2 converts an input of 28 V dc to the multiplexer. The mux select line from the
into –28 V dc, +15 V dc, +5 V dc, a power-up signal, computer selects to read either the autopilot an-
and a power-down signal. The power-up signal noti- nunciator data or switch position data. The selected
fies the computer when the power supply is in its data is converted from 12-V levels to 5-V logic be-
normal operating range. The power-down signal fore being applied to the computer.
Revise 30 March 1995 4-34

Figure 4-12. DSP-84 Display Select Panel, Block Diagram

4.3.6 RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer The transmitter clock for the UART comes from a
monostable multivibrator, triggered by the 8748
Refer to Figure 4-13. Integrated circuit U1, an 8748 computer address latch enable (ALE) line. The
computer, scans the keyboard switch matrix to find monostable multivibrator is used to generate the
a pushed key. When a pushed key is found, the necessary square-wave output to operate the UART
computer determines the code to be sent and places properly.
it on the data bus. The computer also determines if
the select key is one of the keys with automatic re-
4.3.7 CEU-85/85A Checklist Entry Unit
peat. This allows certain keys (PR, PF, LR, LF, BS,
SP, BLK, period, and dash) to repeat by holding the
key down instead of repeated pushings. Refer to Figure 4-14 for a detailed block diagram
of the CEU-85/85A. CEU-85/85A Checklist Entry
Integrated circuit U2 is a universal asynchronous Unit operation is controlled by an 8748 microcom-
receiver-transmitter or UART. Information on the puter, U2. U2 contains the central processing unit
data bus is transferred to the UART when the com- and 1K by 8 words of ROM program memory and
puter switches the data strobe line low. The data is 64 words of RAM data memory required to have a
then converted from parallel to serial and sent out functional microcomputer. The CEU-85/85A mode
through the serial out line. The serial output is buff- of operation is determined by the logic status of
ered by two cascaded inverts of U3. The transmission the U2 T1 input. Application of power to the CEU-
rate is controlled by the transmitter clock (TCP) line. 85/85A from the MFD-85( ) (via the data jack) en-
This line operates at 16 times the serial data rate. ables U1A to apply a logic 0 reset signal to the U2
The transmitter clock line operates at 360 kHz, internal master reset (MR) input. The reset signal
causing serial data to be sent at 22.5 kHz. causes the U2 internal operation program to ex-
amine the logic status of the
Figure 4-13. RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer, Block Diagram

Figure 4-14. CEU-85/85A Checklist Entry Unit, Detailed Block Diagram

T1 input. Connecting Pro Line II Interface Card con- 4.3.8.1 Input Circuit
nector J2 to CEU-85/85A J1 generates a logic 0
(ground) at the T1 input. With T1 grounded, U2’s
internal operating software enables it to receive se- The input circuit consists of a data receiver,
rial data at the T0 input and transmit serial data data/clock recovery circuit, three 8-bit shift regis-
from the P27 port output. The serial data is received ters, the end-of-word detector, and the receiver
and transmitted at a 12.5-kilobaud rate. Connecting status register. The function of the input circuit is
CEU-85/85A remote data plug to the MFD-85( ) to receive serial Manchester coded data and convert
leaves CEU-85/85A J1 open. Thus, the U2 T1 input the data into parallel data for the microprocessor.
is pulled to +5 V dc. With T1 at +5 V dc, the U2’s in- The data received from the ADC-80( ) consists of 16
ternal software enables a 22.5-kilobaud data rate. different 24-bit data words. Each data word is up-
Also, transistor Q1 is forward biased by the logic 0 dated approximately 17 times a second and each
reset signal. The resulting current flow through Q1 24-bit data word is followed by a 12-bit silence. The
applies a logic 1 to the EEPROM’s WR inputs, pre- Manchester bus uses a shielded, twisted pair of
venting erroneous data write signals that could acci- wires, one wire high and the other a signal return.
dentally change the EEPROM data. The driving source applies a signal to the high side
wire while the signal return wire remains at
Microcomputer U2 stores checklist data in three 8K ground. The data receiver measures differentially
by 8 EEPROM’s: U4, U5, and U6. The checklist ad- between them to convert the 2-wire Manchester
dress location data received from the computer is data into a single-ended signal that is clocked into
16 bits long. Bits 1 through 13 provide the physical the shift registers.
memory address locations of each EEPROM. Bits
14 and 15 are used as logic control signals by 3-line 4.3.8.2 Control Circuits
to 8-line decoder U3. The signals are decoded by U3
to enable a specific EEPROM during the data read
or write cycle. The control circuits consist of the microprocessor,
address latch and ROM, heartbeat monitor, and
4.3.8 ADA-85 Air Data Adapter power-on-clear circuits. The microprocessor, ad-
dress latch, and ROM provide the function of con-
The optional ADA-85 Air Data Adapter converts verting the air data from the shift registers into
Manchester digital bus with discrete valid to CSDB commercial standard digital bus (CSDB) format air
format. One ADA-85 is required for each ADC-80( ) data. The microprocessor reads the data in the shift
Air Data Computer connected to EFIS. The opera- registers and tests the data pad and label bits to
tion of the ADA-85 can be viewed in terms of three determine what type of air data was received. If the
major functions: input circuit, control circuit, and data passes the test, it is converted into CSDB for-
output circuit. Refer to Figure 4-15. mat data. The microprocessor transfers converted
data to the UART.
Figure 4-15. ADA-85 Air Data Adapter, Block Diagram

The power-on-clear circuit resets the microproces- operates with a Rotron tube-axial fan pn 032105 that
sor after initial application of power or after a has a nominal fan speed of 3150 rpm; this translates
power interruption. The power-on-clear circuit also to a fan sensor output of approximately 55 Hz. The
applies a reset signal if the microcomputer gets FMM-85 (-002) operates with a Rotron, pn 504558
stuck in a continuous software loop. The microproc- tube-axial fan that has a nominal speed of 19300
essor periodically outputs a pulse to the heartbeat rpm, which translates to a fan sensor output of ap-
monitor indicating normal operation. proximately 780 Hz.
4.3.8.3 Data Output Circuit

The FMM-85 (-001) indicates a fan underspeed
The data output circuit consists of a UART and dif- condition when the fan motor rpm drops under ap-
ferential line driver. The data output circuit con- proximately 1818 rpm, which is a fan speed sensor
verts parallel CSDB data from the microprocessor signal of 30 Hz. The FMM-85 (-002) indicates a fan
into CSDB serial data. CSDB data is transmitted underspeed condition when the fan motor rpm
by the ADA-85 in a 6-byte per data frame format. drops under approximately 3075 rpm, which is a
The data frames are transmitted in byte sequence fan speed sensor signal of 134 Hz.
order with byte 0 being the address byte (data iden-
tification label), byte 1 being the status byte, and
bytes 2 through 5 being the data bytes. Each differ-
ent data frame has a specific address label. The The fan speed sensor signal is sensed at FMM J1-3
UART is programmed by the microprocessor to and applied to a retriggerable monostable multivi-
transmit serial data at a 12.5-kilobaud rate. brator. The trip level is set by the RC circuit of R4
and C5 tied to the trigger input of monostable mul-
4.3.9 FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module (FMM) tivibrator U2A. The RC time constant of this
monostable multivibrator is not retriggered before
The purpose of the FMM is to control an external its timeout period and its Q output switches to logic
annunciator which indicates if the fan cooling the 0. Thus NAND gate U1B is not able to retrigger
EFIS equipment is operating properly. The FMM- multivibrator U2B. The timeout period of U2B is
85 (-001) mounts on the side of the cooling fan approximately 5 seconds. This wait period ensures
(CPN 009-1965-030). The FMM-85 (-002) is at- that fan motor speed is staying below 1818 rpm and
tached to the UMT-14B/15B Universal Mount that an aircraft power surge did not cause fan mo-
blower plenum with an adapter bracket. Refer tor speed to be reduced. After the 5-second wait,
to Figure 4-16 for the FMM-85 (-001) and to relay K1 is de-energized and applies a ground to
Figure 4-17 for the FMM-85 (-002) schematic light a fan failure annunciator. FMM-85 (-002) op-
diagrams. eration is identical to FMM-85 (-001) operation ex-
cept U2A is set to detect fan motor rpm of less than
3075 rpm which is a fan sensor signal of approxi-
Note
mately 134 Hz. U2A timeout wait is set to 3.74 ms,
one-half of 134 Hz period.
The FMM-85 (-001) is compatible with the
following tube-axial fan: Rotron pn 032105
(CPN 009-1965-030). The FMM-85 (-002) is
compatible with the following tube-axial A self-test signal (ground) is applied to J1-4 to
fan: Rotron pn 504558 (CPN 009-0271-010). simulate the loss of a fan motor. This ground ener-
gizes relay K2 which opens the fan sensor circuit.
The fan motor provides a fan sensor signal to FMM- In approximately five seconds the RC circuit of R5
85 J1-3. The fan sensor signal is a positive going sig- and C6 times out and turns off Q2. This causes re-
nal with frequency and amplitude being directly pro- lay K1 to deenergize which lights an external an-
portional to the fan motor rpm. The FMM-85 (-001) nunciator to indicate a fan motor failure.


Simplified Schematic

Figure 4-17. FMM-85 (-002) Fan Monitor Module, Simplified Schematic

z523-0775968-003118
9ebb_di
EFIS-84
Maintenance
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
5.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-1

5.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2.1 Brightness Measurements..............................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2.2 Routine CRT Cleaning....................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.3 TEST EQUIPMENT AND POWER REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 5-2
5.3.1 Test Equipment...............................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.3.2 Power Requirements.......................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.4 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.4.1 Final Performance (Acceptance) Test..............................................................................................................................5-3
5.5 DIAGNOSTIC PAGE MODE ................................................................................................................................ 5-14
5.5.1 Enter Diagnostic Page Mode ........................................................................................................................................5-14
5.5.2 Exit Diagnostic Page Mode...........................................................................................................................................5-14
5.5.3 Diagnostic Page Description.........................................................................................................................................5-14
5.6BITS MODE SELF-TEST GUIDE ......................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.6.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................................5-28
5.6.2 BITS Mode.....................................................................................................................................................................5-28
5.6.2.1 Enter BITS Mode .......................................................................................................................................................5-28
5.6.2.2 Exit BITS Mode..........................................................................................................................................................5-29
* Title ......................................... 30 Mar 95 5-4 thru 5-5 ..............................20 May 92 5-13 .......................................... 20 May 92
* List of Effective Pages............. 30 Mar 95 * 5-6 thru 5-7 .............................. 30 Mar 95 * 5-14 .......................................... 30 Mar 95
5-1 thru 5-2............................... 28 Apr 93 5-8 thru 5-11 ............................20 May 92 5-15 thru 5-193........................ 20 May 92
* 5-3 ............................................ 30 Mar 95 * 5-12........................................... 30 Mar 95 5-194 Blank ............................. 20 May 92



section V
maintenance
5.1 GENERAL in direct sunlight, cover the cockpit win-

dows with an opaque cloth to lower the
This section provides procedures for testing and
cockpit ambient light level.
troubleshooting the EFIS-84 Electronic Flight In-
strument Systems. The test procedures provide Perform this procedure with the meter
fault isolation down to a unit while the system is perpendicular to the EFIS display surface
installed in the aircraft. Faulty units can then be ±15 degrees. If this angle is increased, the
tested and repaired by using the bench procedures luminance measurements will not be
given in the associated unit repair manual. accurate.
5.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE a. Apply power to the EFIS system. Wait 15
minutes for the EFIS displays to stabilize.
On condition. No periodic maintenance is required b. Push and hold the pilot or copilot EFIS TEST
on EFIS-84 units. EFIS units should not be re- button. On the appropriate DSP, push the TST
moved from the aircraft unless repair is required. switch (three times) to select the numbered
A brightness test should be performed on any EFIS calibration pages. Release the EFIS TEST
crt (EFD) if it has accumulated approximately 5000 button. On the DSP, turn the DH SET knob
hours of aircraft operation since the last brightness until an all-red or all-brown raster (page 15)
test, or anytime the brightness seems questionable. appears on the EFDs and/or MFD.
All exchange and repaired units have this test c. Adjust the (panel) EADI and EHSI display dim
routinely performed. controls for maximum crt brightness.
Note
5.2.1 Brightness Measurements
Do not remove EFIS units from the aircraft unless Perform step d if using the Minolta LS-100
repair is required. Perform a brightness check on Luminance meter. Otherwise skip to step e.
each EFD-84 (EADI and EHSI) after it has ac- d. Set up the Minolta LS-100 Luminance meter as
cumulated approximately 5000 hours of aircraft follows:
operation since the last brightness check, or any- 1. Verify that the following parameters are set
time the display brightness seems questionable. All before applying power to the meter:
exchange and repaired units have a brightness test
PARAMETER VALUE
routinely performed at the service center.
RESPONSE SLOW
Measure the brightness of each EFIS display using CALIBRATION VARI
the Minolta LS-100 Luminance Meter 1° equipped MEASURING MODE ABS
with the Minolta 1804-741 close-up lens, or the
Minolta Luminance Meter 1° equipped with the 2. Apply power to the meter.
Minolta 6031-530 close-up lens. The (new) Minolta 3. The meter display should show C.C.F. on the
LS-100 Luminance Meter 1° is available for pur- left side and fL on the right side. If cd/m
chase at Minolta camera dealers. displays on the right side, remove the battery
cover from top of meter and push the switch to
Note fL (footlambert). Replace the battery cover.
4. If PEAK appears on the display, remove
The aircraft cockpit must be in low ambient this display as follows: push and hold the F
light (such as inside a hangar) to perform button and push the PEAK/CONT button.
the EFIS brightness check. If the aircraft is CAL displays while the meter is changing.

maintenance 523-0775968
5. If LUMI mode appears on the display, re- antireflective coating that may be damaged
move this display as follows: push the F using solvents.
button and the C.C.F./LUMI button at the
same time. Repeat until (only) C.C.F. is on Caution
the left side of the display.
Use care at all times when cleaning the crt to
6. A color-correction factor must now be en-
prevent damage to the antireflective coating.
tered into the luminance meter. If the dis-
Make sure that the cleaning tissue is flat and
play has an all-red screen, the factor is 1.052.
not creased when used. Doing this reduces
If the display has an all-brown screen, the
pressure points that could cause streaking or
factor is 1.246. Enter this factor as follows:
damage to the crt filter coating.
push the C.C.F./LUMI button to display the
stored color-correction factor. To change this Make sure that the cleaning cloth (if used) is
value, push the C.C.F./LUMI button until soft and practically lint free. Some cloth
the arrow points at the digit to be changed. materials could damage the crt filter coating.
Push and hold the F button, then push the a. Clean dust and light fingerprints from the crt
UP arrow to change this digit. Repeat until face as follows. Wipe the crt face with a non-
each digit is set to the correct value. This abrasive, lint-free lens tissue that is available
factor can be saved into memory by pushing in most photographic stores.
and holding the F button, and switching the b. Remove oily fingerprints or any residue from
CALIBRATION button from VARI to the crt face as follows. Apply glass cleaner to
PRESET and then back to VARI. Once this the lens tissue (or to the soft cloth); do not
has been done, the display will show CAL apply the liquid directly to the crt. This pre-
and then C.C.F. and fL. vents the liquid from running between the filter
e. Direct the luminance meter lens toward the and bezel. Use several layers of the tissue as
center and 1.5 to 2 feet from the face of the necessary for strength. Rub the wet tissue
EFIS display to be checked. Adjust the lumi- around the display face to remove any residue
nance meter focus or the measurement distance or fingerprints. After the display face is clean,
for a clear image of the all-brown or all-red use a clean, dry tissue to remove excess liquid
screen. Push and hold trigger for luminance and any streaks.
reading. The luminance reading must be at
least 5.0 footlambert for the all-red screen, or at 5.3 TEST EQUIPMENT AND POWER
least 9.0 footlambert for the all-brown screen. If REQUIREMENTS
the reading is below this minimum brightness
value, replace the EFD or MFD. 5.3.1 Test Equipment
f. On the DSP, push the TST switch (two times) to
exit test mode and restore normal operation. Table 5-1 lists the test equipment used to perform
Readjust EFIS dimming for normal brightness. the EFIS-84 test procedures. Equivalent test equip-
g. Record the results of the brightness test in the ment can be substituted for that listed.
aircraft logbook or other permanent aircraft
maintenance record. 5.3.2 Power Requirements
5.2.2 Routine CRT Cleaning
All power required to perform the system tests and
The EFIS-84 contains several panel-mounted units
troubleshooting is provided by the aircraft in which
which have glass (crt) displays. These displays
the system is installed.
should be routinely cleaned. Use the cleaning
materials (or equivalent substitutes) as follows:
5.4 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Window-glass cleaner
Lens tissue or a soft, low-lint cloth Aircraft downtime may be reduced if an inoperative
unit is quickly identified. An EFIS quick-check
Caution
troubleshooting chart is provided in Figure 5-1. Use
this chart before performing the test procedures in
Do not use solvent to clean the optic filter
Table 5-2.
(face) of the crt. The glass is coated with an

Table 5-1. Troubleshooting Test Equipment.
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS DESIRED
Collins 972Q-4 VOR/ILS/MB Must have provisions for testing the localizer signal to 0.155 DDM and the glideslope signal to
Ramp Test Set (CPN 622-2211- 0.175 DDM. These modulation levels produce 2-dot indications on localizer and glideslope
002) or equivalent deviation displays.
Collins CTS-9 Breakout Box Test The CTS-9 is compatible with Thinline II full-height 160-pin connectors. Recommended for
Set (CPN 622-6720-001) any EFIS system troubleshooting that requires the use of a breakout box.
Multimeter Fluke 8010A, 3½-digit accuracy. Measure ac and dc voltages.
Oscilloscope Tektronix 455, 2235, 2236, dc to 10 MHz. Measure serial logic levels.
5.4.1 Final Performance (Acceptance) Test The EFIS system is very symmetrical. The pilot
and copilot side contain two identical units (ie,
The final performance test (or acceptance test) DSP-84 Display Select Panels). Faults in symme-
procedures in Table 5-2 are used to help isolate a trical systems can be effectively isolated by swap-
defective unit in the EFIS-84 system. The tests are ping identical LRUs and seeing if the problem
written around a 5-tube system. The final per- recurs.
formance test (or acceptance test) for any EFIS-84
unit consists of operating the unit and verifying that A failed data bus may be caused by the trans-
it works before installing it in an aircraft. The best mitting LRU, the receiving LRU, or by a loose wire
way to check an EFIS-84 unit is to connect it to a in a mating connector contact. Check a suspect bus
system rig that is wired like the customer’s aircraft, for continuity, 2-wire activity, and isolation from
then to operate the unit in the way it should function ground potential. Typical bus levels (in V dc) are
for that installation. If an entire shipset of provided below.
equipment is available, test the unit according to
Table 5-2. ARINC 429
Note BUS LEVEL HI NULL LO
The following test procedures assume that A to B +10 0 -10

the aircraft interconnect wiring has been A to gnd +5 0 -5
verified and is correct. B to gnd -5 0 +5
When more than one EADI and EHSI are connected

to the system, they can be used to cross-check the RS-422 OR CSDB
outputs of the DPU-84 Display Processor Unit
BUS LEVEL HI LO
(DPU). If both EADIs or EHSIs connected to the
system give the same erroneous indication, the DPU A to B +5 -5
is probably at fault. However, if only one indicator A to gnd +5 0
gives an erroneous indication, that particular B to gnd 0 +5
indicator is probably defective. Each aircraft has
reversionary switching wired into the interconnect. Refer to the operation section of this manual to
Refer to the flight manual supplement for the verify proper control action and display response.
aircraft in question. Use the reversionary and cross- This section is not intended for the pilot, but is
switching information found there to help isolate a meant to be used during flight-line troubleshooting.
fault to either the display (EFD/MFD) or to the
driving source (DPU/MPU). Use the block diagrams
(figures 5-3 through 5-6) found at the end of this
section to aid in understanding system operation.

Figure 5-1. EFIS Quick-Check Troubleshooting Chart

Table 5-2. EFIS-84 Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING
1.0 POWER UP
1.1 Connect aircraft battery, apply power to EFIS-84 system, Check that EADI and EHSI displays are normal. Replace
and turn on cooling air blowers. Apply power to any other any blown fuses and reset any circuit breakers that tripped.
systems that supply data to the EFIS-84 system (such as
FCS, NAV, DME, AHRS, air data, radio altitude, and
weather radar). Provide valid input signals to these
sensors as required to eliminate all warning flags.
Note
The EFIS displays in this system flag certain sensor failures by removing the affected display elements. To be able to
test these elements, it is necessary to supply valid sensor inputs.
1.2 Turn external DIM controls. Verify that EADI and EHSI brightness is controlled.
Note
Beginning here, unless otherwise specified, the following steps refer to the no 1 side units but should be repeated for
the no 2 side, reading all references to no 1 as no 2.
2.0 DSP-84 OPERATION
2.1 Set DSP FORMAT switch to HSI. Verify that pictures appear on EADI and EHSI. EADI
attitude and EHSI heading displays will be random but
should be steady.
2.2 Decision Height
a. Turn DSP DH SET knob. Verify that it controls DH display (lower right corner) on
EADI.
b. Verify that DSP DH SET range is 0 to 999 feet. DH flashes at 0 foot.
c. Push TST pushbutton (part of DH SET knob). Verify that both radio altitude and DH set values are
displayed on EADI.
d. Release TST pushbutton.
2.3 EHSI Formats
a. Set DSP FORMAT switch to ARC and MAP positions. Verify that EHSI picture changes to an expanded compass
sector.
b. Turn DSP RNG (range) knob. Verify that EHSI range is controlled by RNG knob.
(Cont) c. Set DSP FORMAT switch to WX ARC and WX MAP Verify that EHSI picture changes to an expanded compass
positions. sector with WX mode annunciated at end of half-scale range
arc.

2.3 d. Turn WXP-85( )/850( ) RANGE knob. Verify that EHSI range is controlled by WXP RANGE knob.
(Cont)
Warning
The area within the scan arc and within 5 meters (15 feet) of an operating weather radar system constitutes a
hazardous area. Do not operate the system in any mode other than standby (STBY) or test (TST) when the antenna
might scan over personnel within that range. Never turn the transmitter on while in a hangar. FAA Advisory Circular
20-68B provides additional details regarding the radiation hazards associated with ground operation of airborne
weather radar.
e. Turn WXP-85( )/850( ) MODE switch to TEST. Weather radar test pattern is displayed on EHSI. EHSI will
display mode selected on WXP panel (see below).
WXP-85( ):
WXP-850( ):
f. Return DSP FORMAT switch to HSI position. Weather radar display will be deleted.
2.4 Active Course Menu
a. Set DSP COURSE switch to ACT (active) course.
b. Push CRS SEL button repeatedly to cycle through Active course annunciator changes to white inside a white
active course sensor menu. box. Verify that different navigation sources are displayed
on left side of EHSI. Possible sensor selections are
VOR/LOC1, FMS1, MLS1, TCN1, VOR/LOC2, FMS2, MLS2,
and TCN2.
c. When desired sensor is displayed, push and hold in for White active course annunciator changes to same color as
greater than 1 second to select an active course active course arrow and white box is removed.
sensor. Not pushing CRS SEL button for 5 seconds
causes active course to return to previously selected
sensor.
Note
Only those navigation sources enabled by interconnect strapping will be shown as possible selections.
(Cont) d. Rotate CRS knob on DSP. Verify that active course arrow on EHSI rotates.

2.4 e. Push PUSH CRS DIRECT button. Verify that active course arrow automatically rotates
directly toward station or waypoint until navigation source
(Cont) selected provides zero crosstrack deviation.
2.5 Preset Course Menu
a. Set DSP COURSE switch to PRE (preset) course.
b. Push CRS SEL button repeatedly to cycle through Note that different navigation sources are displayed on left
preset course sensor menu. Last sensor displayed side of EHSI below active course annunciation. Possible
remains in view. sensor selections are VOR/LOC1, FMS1, MLS1, TCN1,
VOR/LOC2, FMS2, MLS2, and TCN2.
c. Push and hold in for greater than 1 second to remove

a preset course sensor if displayed or return it for
display if previously blanked.
d. Rotate CRS knob on DSP. Verify that preset course arrow on EHSI rotates.
2.6 Course Transfer
Set DSP COURSE switch to XFR (transfer) course. Preset course is transferred to active course and previous
Transfer position is a spring-loaded momentary switch. active course is transferred to preset course but is not
displayed.
2.7 Bearing Pointer and Heading Select
a. Push DSP single-bar button repeatedly to cycle Single-bar bearing pointer appears on EHSI. Possible sensor
through bearing pointer menu. Last sensor displayed selections are VOR1, VOR2, ADF1, ADF2, TCN1, TCN2,
remains in view. FMS1, FMS2, and off for pilot’s side and VOR2, VOR1,
ADF2, ADF1, TCN2, TCN1, FMS2, FMS1, and off for
copilot’s side.
b. Push DSP double-bar button repeatedly to cycle Double-bar bearing pointer appears on EHSI. Possible
through bearing pointer menu. Last sensor displayed sensor selections are VOR1, VOR2, ADF1, ADF2, TCN1,
remains in view. TCN2, FMS1, FMS2, and off for pilot’s side and VOR2,
VOR1, ADF2, ADF1, TCN2, TCN1, FMS2, FMS1, and off for
copilot’s side.
c. Rotate DSP HDG knob. Verify that heading cursor moves along edge of compass
card.
d. Push DSP PUSH HDG SYNC button. Verify that heading cursor rotates to match airplane
heading under lubber line on EHSI.
2.8 NAV DATA Select
a. Rotate DSP NAV DATA switch to WIND, GSP, and Verify that dashes appear or 00.00 appears in upper right
TTG. corner of EHSI, and label changes from ---> (for wind
direction), GSP, and TTG.
b. Rotate DSP NAV DATA switch to ET. Verify that 00.00 appears in upper right corner of EHSI.
(Cont) c. Repeatedly push S/S (start/stop) button. Verify that sequential pushing of S/S button starts, stops,
and resets elapsed timer display.

2.8 d. Rotate TIMER SET knob to set a time for countdown Verify that a time appears in upper right corner of EHSI.
mode. Push S/S (start/stop) button. Verify that sequential pushing of S/S button starts, stops,
(Cont) and resets timer display.
3.0 REVERSIONARY MODES OF OPERATION (IF APPLICABLE)
3.1 EADI/EHSI Composite Display
Note
The following reversionary modes are selected at the pilot/copilot switch panel. Verify that all switches are in the
normal (NORM) position before the following steps are taken. These switches may be labeled differently for various
airplanes.
3.1.1 Pilot’s Switch Panel
a. Set CMPST switch to ADI. EHSI display is blanked and a composite display is
presented on EADI.
b. Set CMPST switch to HSI. EADI will now blank while EHSI shows a composite display.
c. Set CMPST switch to center position. Normal EADI and EHSI presentations return.
3.1.2 Copilot’s Switch Panel
a. Set CMPST switch to ADI. EHSI display is blanked and a composite display is
presented on EADI.
b. Set CMPST switch to HSI. EADI will now blank while EHSI shows a composite display.
c. Set CMPST switch to center position. Normal EADI and EHSI presentations return.
3.2 DSP XFER (Pedestal)
a. Set DSP XFER switch to no 1. Open DSP 2 circuit Pilot and copilot displays are controlled by no 1 DSP.
breaker. Display brightness for copilot’s side remains under control of
no 2 DSP. FCS mode annunciation is lost for no 2 side.
XDSP will annunciate on EADI.
b. Reset DSP 2 circuit breaker. Set DSP XFER switch to Normal presentations return. XDSP annunciation
NORM. disappears.
c. Set DSP XFER switch to no 2. Open DSP 1 circuit Pilot and copilot displays are controlled by no 2 DSP.
breaker. Display brightness for pilot’s side remains under control of
no 1 DSP. FCS mode annunciation is lost for no 1 side.
XDSP will annunciate on EADI.
3.3 DPU Drive Transfer (Pedestal)
a. Open DPU 1 circuit breaker. Pilot’s EADI and EHSI go blank.
(Cont) b. Set DPU DRV XFER switch to no 1. Pilot’s EADI and EHSI displays are restored and are the
same as copilot’s EADI and EHSI displays.

3.3 c. Reset DPU 1 circuit breaker. Set DPU DRV XFER Normal EADI and EHSI presentations return.
switch to NORM.
(Cont)
d. Open DPU 2 circuit breaker. Copilot’s EADI and EHSI go blank.
e. Set DPU DRV XFER switch to no 2. Copilot’s EADI and EHSI displays are restored and are the
same as pilot’s EADI and EHSI displays.
f. Reset DPU 2 circuit breaker. Return DPU DRV XFER Normal EADI and EHSI presentations return.
switch to NORM.
4.0 DATA TRANSFER SWITCHING
4.1 Verify correct switching and annunciation of data sources

as selected on pilot’s switch panel:
a. Set HDG switch to NORM. If pilot’s display heading is supplied by primary sensor no 1
AHRS, then annunciation is blank (if MAG), TRU1, or DG1
on EHSI. If pilot’s display heading is supplied by secondary
sensor no 3 AHRS, then annunciation is white MAG3,
TRU3, or DG3 on EHSI.
b. Set HDG switch to XSIDE. If pilot’s display heading is supplied by copilot’s primary
sensor no 2 AHRS, then annunciation is yellow MAG2,
TRU2, or DG2 on EHSI. If pilot’s display heading is supplied
by copilot’s secondary sensor no 4 AHRS, then annunciation
is yellow MAG4, TRU4, or DG4 on EHSI.
c. Set ATT switch to NORM. If pilot’s display attitude is supplied by primary sensor no 1
AHRS, then annunciation is blank on EADI. If pilot’s display
attitude is supplied by secondary sensor no 3 AHRS, then
annunciation is white ATT3 on EADI.
d. Set ATT switch to XSIDE. If pilot’s display attitude is supplied by copilot’s primary
sensor no 2 AHRS, then annunciation is yellow ATT2 on
EADI. If pilot’s display attitude is supplied by copilot’s
secondary sensor no 4 AHRS, then annunciation is yellow
ATT4 on EADI.
e. Set ANG DEV/LIN DEV switch to ANG DEV. ANG is annunciated green on pilot’s EFIS display. VOR
deviation is displayed as angular. Switch is functional only if
VOR is navigational data source selected by pilot.
f. Set ANG DEV/LIN DEV switch to LIN DEV. With VOR selected as navigation data source, deviation will
be linear if a valid DME is present and not in hold. LIN is
annunciated green on pilot’s EHSI display. If DME is lost or
DME HOLD is selected, LIN annunciation on EFIS display
is replaced by ANG, which will flash for approximately 10
seconds, then remain steady.

4.2 Verify correct switching and annunciation of data sources

as selected on copilot’s switch panel:
a. Set HDG switch to NORM. If copilot’s display heading is supplied by primary sensor no
2 AHRS, then annunciation is blank (if MAG), TRU2, or
DG2 on EHSI. If copilot’s display heading is supplied by
secondary sensor no 4 AHRS, then annunciation is white
MAG4, TRU4, or DG4 on EHSI.
b. Set HDG switch to XSIDE. If copilot’s display heading is supplied by pilot’s primary
sensor no 1 AHRS, then annunciation is yellow MAG1,
TRU1, or DG1 on EHSI. If copilot’s display heading is
supplied by pilot’s secondary sensor no 3 AHRS, then
annunciation is yellow MAG3, TRU3, or DG3 on EHSI.
c. Set ATT switch to NORM. If copilot’s display attitude is supplied by primary sensor no
2 AHRS, then annunciation is blank on EADI. If copilot’s
display attitude is supplied by secondary sensor no 4 AHRS,
then annunciation is white ATT4 on EADI.
d. Set ATT switch to XSIDE. If copilot’s display attitude is supplied by pilot’s primary
sensor no 1 AHRS, then annunciation is yellow ATT1 on
EADI. If copilot’s display attitude is supplied by pilot’s
secondary sensor no 3 AHRS, then annunciation is yellow
ATT3 on EADI.
e. Set ANG DEV/LIN DEV switch to ANG DEV. ANG is annunciated green on copilot’s EFIS display. VOR
deviation is displayed as angular. Switch is functional only if
VOR is navigational data source selected by copilot.
f. Set ANG DEV/LIN DEV switch to LIN DEV. With VOR selected as navigation data source, deviation will
be linear if a valid DME is present and not in hold. LIN is
annunciated green on copilot’s EHSI display. If DME is lost
or DME HOLD is selected, LIN annunciation on EFIS
display is replaced by ANG, which will flash for
approximately 10 seconds, then remain steady.
5.0 EFIS TEST SWITCH
5.1 Pilot’s TEST Switch
Note
Pilot’s EFIS TEST switch is inhibited in flight.
(Cont) a. Push pilot’s EFIS TEST switch. Pilot’s EFIS TEST switch normally places pilot’s displays
and MFD in test mode. In test mode, EADI pitch and roll
attitudes are altered by 10° noseup and 10° roll right, and
20° are added to displayed heading. A red TEST will appear
in center of EADI and EHSI.

5.1 Yellow comparator flags PIT, ROL, and HDG will appear on
both pilot’s and copilot’s EADI and EHSI.
(Cont)
If EFIS TEST switch is held for 4 seconds or longer, all flags

associated with displays will be displayed.
b. Release switch. Displays revert to standard operation.
c. Push comparator reset button (COMPTR WARN) Comparator indications should reset.
which is located on pilot’s annunciator panel.
5.2 Copilot’s TEST Switch
Note
Copilot’s EFIS TEST switch is inhibited in flight.
a. Push copilot’s EFIS TEST switch. Copilot’s EADI pitch and roll attitudes are altered by 10°
nosedown and 10° roll left, and 20° are subtracted from
displayed heading.
Yellow comparator flags PIT, ROL, and HDG will appear on

copilot’s EADI and EHSI displays.
If EFIS TEST switch is held for 4 seconds or longer, all flags

associated with displays will be displayed.
b. Release switch. Displays revert to standard operation.
c. Push comparator reset button (COMPTR WARN). Comparator indications should reset.
6.0 INTERFACE TESTS
6.1 VOR
a. Apply ac and dc power to VOR radio.
b. Turn on VOR signal generator and select 0°.
c. Select VOR 1 as active course and bearing pointer on Verify that NAV flag is removed from display and that
EHSI. bearing pointer points to 0°.
d. Rotate course arrow. Verify that deviation bar centers at 180° with a FROM
indication and at 0° with a TO indication.
e. Select additional radials using signal generator. Verify that bearing pointer points to radial selected and that
deviation bar centers with a TO indication at radial selected.
6.2 Localizer
a. Apply power to VOR/LOC receiver.
b. Select localizer mode on VOR/LOC signal generator.
(Cont) c. Select an appropriate LOC frequency.

6.2 d. Select LOC 1 as active course on EHSI. Verify that NAV flag is removed from display. Verify that
runway symbol and deviation scale appear at bottom of
(Cont) EADI and that VOR changes to LOC.
e. Select zero deviation on LOC signal generator. Verify that runway symbol on EADI and course deviation
bar on EHSI are centered.
f. Select left deviation on signal generator. Verify that runway and deviation bar deflect to left.
g. Select right deviation on signal generator. Verify that runway and deviation bar deflect to right.
6.3 Glideslope
a. Apply power to glideslope receiver.
b. Select glideslope mode on signal generator.
c. Select glideslope deviations available on signal Verify that glideslope pointer on EADI and EHSI track
generator. selected deviation.
6.4 Radio Altitude
a. Apply power to radio altimeter.
b. Select a localizer frequency. Verify that runway symbol appears at bottom of EADI.
c. Set DH counter in lower right corner of EADI (with Verify that DH annunciator in center of EADI is on when
DH knob on DSP) to 200 feet. radio altitude is below 200 feet and off above 200 feet.
Verify that runway symbol begins to expand when radio

altitude goes below 200 feet and that it touches bottom of
airplane symbol when the radio altitude is 0 foot.
6.5 DME
a. Apply power to DME radio.
b. Turn on DME signal generator.
c. Select an appropriate frequency.
d. Select various distances on signal generator. Verify that DME distance readout appears in upper left
corner of EHSI.
6.6 ADF
a. Select ADF 1 as bearing pointer on EHSI.
b. Select various radio stations. Verify that ADF pointer on EHSI points to proper bearings.

7.0 EFIS FAN MONITORS
7.1 EFIS Fan Fail
a. Push and hold annunciator test switch in master After 5 seconds, pilot’s and copilot’s DPU FAN annunciators
warning panel. illuminate amber.
b. Release annunciator test switch. Annunciators extinguish.
8.0 LRN APPR MODE INHIBIT CHECK
8.1 Setup Procedure
a. Set LRN-85 into SIMULATE FLIGHT mode. Set up a

waypoint 50 to 100 miles directly in front of airplane.
b. Select LRN for display on pilot’s and copilot’s EFIS.
c. Select NAV mode on both mode select panels.
d. Engage autopilot.
8.2 On LRN CDU, set up a parallel track 7.5 nmi left of Course deviation bar should move left 2 dots. V-bars
DTRK. command a 20° left bank. Autopilot moves control wheel for
a left bank.
8.3 On LRN CDU, set up a parallel track 7.5 nmi right of Course deviation bar should deflect right 2 dots. V-bars
DTRK. command a 20° right bank. Autopilot moves control wheel
for a right bank.
8.4 Deselect LRN from copilot’s EFIS.
8.5 Select APPR mode on pilot’s mode select panel. LRN data is flagged on EHSI. V-bars indicate zero roll
command. Autopilot returns control wheel to neutral.
8.6 Deselect APPR mode on pilot’s mode select panel.

Deselect LRN from pilot’s EFIS.
8.7 Select LRN on copilot’s EFIS and push AP XFER on Copilot’s course deviation bar should be 2 dots to right. V-
autopilot panel. bars are commanding a 20° right bank. Autopilot moves
control wheel for a right bank.
8.8 Select APPR mode on copilot’s mode select panel. LRN data is flagged on EHSI. V-bars indicate zero roll
command. Autopilot returns control wheel to neutral.
8.9 Deselect APPR mode. Deselect LRN from EFIS. Push AP

XFER on autopilot panel. Disengage autopilot.

5.5 DIAGNOSTIC PAGE MODE problem is suspected, the multiport ram (MPR) bits
page shows the strapping discrete inputs at decimal
The diagnostic pages provide a simplified presen- locations 031/1055 through 034/1058. Refer to
tation of the following parameters: rear connector Table 5-10.
strapping, pilot side CSDB diagnostic inputs, co-
pilot side CSDB diagnostic inputs, ARINC 429 PAGE 1 OF 11 DIAGNOSTICS
maintenance word inputs, left and right side bus CONFIGURATION
activity, analog input validity, analog inputs, power PILOT COPILOT
supply output voltages, and EFIS transmit words. HEADING: A429 P1 CSDB 3 X
The diagnostic page format is the same as the MFD ATTITUDE: A429 P1 CSDB 3
EXTENDED DATA page diagnostics. The diag- RAD ALT: ALT-55 ALT-55
nostic page information may be used as a trouble- FCS TYPE: APS-85 P APS-85 P
shooting aid to help identify a faulty unit in the ADF TYPE: A429 NONE
system. The diagnostic page mode is used by main- LNAV ANN: RNV 1 FMS 3
tenance personnel for flight-line maintenance. LNAV BUS: A429 A429
Table 5-6 contains the CSDB diagnostic word de- TCN BUS: LS429 ALL 561
scriptions. Table 5-7 contains descriptions of the DME BUS: CSDB A429 È
ARINC 429 maintenance word descriptions.
5.5.1 Enter Diagnostic Page Mode CONFIGURATION
PILOT COPILOT
a. Locate the EFIS system TEST switch. To enter SIDE STRP: LEFT RIGHT
the diagnostics/maintenance routines for each SKY SEL: FULL SKY
DPU, push and hold the EFIS TEST switch and RACETRACK
push and release the onside DSP-84 RA TST SPD SCALE: FAST/SLOW AOA
button. To enter the diagnostics/maintenance VNAV SEL: ON OFF
routines for the MPU, push and hold the pilot XSD FLAG: ENABLED DISABLED
side EFIS TEST switch and push and release RSNG RNWY: ENABLED ENABLED
the copilot side DSP-84 RA TST button. Ground HDG PANEL: SEPARATE COMMON
test entry has been achieved when the MPR CTL PANEL: XDSP-84 DSP-84 ↕
bits page is observed on the EADI, EHSI, and
MFD. Release the EFIS TEST button. The Diagnostics pages 3 and 4 show the received pilot
number 1 DPU test output appears on the pilot and copilot side CSDB diagnostic words. Refer to
side EADI and EHSI, the number 2 DPU test Table 5-6 for a description of the CSDB label F3
output appears on the copilot side EADI and diagnostic words.
EHSI, and the MPU test output appears on the
MFD.
b. Repeatedly push and release the RA TST
PILOT’S SIDE CSDB
button until PAGE 1 OF 11 DIAGNOSTICS
AHRS F3 F1 C1 D2 7A 6B 00 AB
appears at the top of the page. Turn the DH
ADC F3 D2 3F 08 98 92
SET knob to select the desired diagnostic page.
DME CH1 F3 57 D0 63 BB A3
DME CH2 F3 4A CA 5C 4A 22
5.5.2 Exit Diagnostic Page Mode
DME CH3 F3 60 23 41 30 00
Push and hold the RA TST switch for two seconds. VIR F3 16 D1 6D 3A 13 ↕
The DPU/MPU will exit the test mode and the
normal EADI, EHSI, and MFD displays return. PAGE 4 OF 11 DIAGNOSTICS
COPILOT’S SIDE CSDB
5.5.3 Diagnostic Page Description AHRS F3 23 45 21 AD 56 CD 34
ADC F3 DE 34 12 00 5A
Diagnostics pages 1 and 2 show the MPU/DPU rear DME CH1 F3 1A D2 6C 1A 0A
connector strapping for the pilot and copilot sides. DME CH2 F3 97 14 5C 00 A3
Verify the strapping shown matches the actual DME CH3 F3 45 CA 4C A3 61
avionics installation for the aircraft. If a strapping VIR F3 61 12 6D 3A 26 ↕

Example diagnostic word: F3 61 12 00 00 26 Byte 3: diagnostic message byte. Hex 00 =

00000000 in binary code (bits 7 through 0).
Byte 0: address byte label F3 indicates this is a
diagnostic word. Hex F3 = 11110011 in binary code
(bits 7 through 0).
Byte 4: diagnostic message byte. Hex 00 =
00000000 in binary code (bits 7 through 0).
Byte 1: status byte. Hex 61 = 01100001 in binary
code (bits 7 through 0).
Byte 2: diagnostic message byte. Hex 12 = Byte 5: 2-digit fault code byte. Hex 26 = 00100110
00010010 in binary code (bits 7 through 0). in binary code (bits 7 through 0).

Table 5-6. CSDB Diagnostic Word Explanations.
HEX LABEL F3 DESCRIPTION

BYTE BIT
AHC-85( ) ATTITUDE HEADING COMPUTER Diagnostic Word
0 Label F3
1 0 *SDI code BITS: 1 0 SDI CODE
1 *SDI code
2 1 = Interface test (STIM) on 0 0 Invalid
3 Undefined 0 1 Number 1 (left)
4 1 = In reversion mode 1 (no valid air data) 1 0 Number 2 (right)
5 Undefined 1 1 Number 3 (center)
6 1 = Heading valid
7 1 = Attitude valid
2 0 1 = Sensor rate invalid

1 1 = Sensor acceleration invalid
2 1 = ROM checksum invalid
3 1 = 25 second power-up wheel not aligned
4 1 = Flux detector invalid
5 1 = Analog I/O data invalid
6 1 = Hardware invalid
7 1 = High motor voltage
3 0 1 = Wheel 1 failure
1 1 = Wheel 2 failure
2 1 = Either wheel has failed
3 0 = Weight on wheels
4 1 = Fast slaving
5 1 = Analog air data discrete input invalid
6 1 = Digital air data invalid
7 1 = Analog air data invalid
4 0 1 = Slow path initialization incomplete

1 1 = DG mode (free gyro)
2 1 = Flux detector serviced/test mode
3 1 = High rate invalid
4 1 = I/O valid monitor disabled
5 1 = RAM backup invalid
6 1 = Box orientation invalid
7 1 = Bias table calibrate/undefined
5 0 1 = Cosine voltage, 0 = sine voltage from mux selector

1 1 = Heading gain switch 1 on
2 1 = Heading gain switch 2 on
3 1 = Compensation mode, 0 = setup mode BITS: 7 6 5 4 MOUNTING CONFIGURATION
4 1 = Mounting configuration 0 0 0 1 Box facing right
5 1 = Mounting configuration 0 0 1 0 Box facing left
6 1 = Mounting configuration 0 0 1 1 Box facing front
7 1 = Mounting configuration 0 1 0 0 Box facing aft
6 0 STIM mode BITS: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 STIM MODE

1 STIM mode 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Off
2 STIM mode 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 All mode
3 STIM mode 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Roll mode/orientation
4 STIM mode 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Pitch mode
5 STIM mode 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Heading mode
6 STIM mode
7 STIM mode


BYTE BIT
AHC-85( ) ATTITUDE HEADING COMPUTER Diagnostic Word
7 0 1 = Miserection invalid (not used)

1 1 = Misslave invalid
2 1 = D-checksum invalid
3 Undefined
4 Undefined
5 Undefined
6 Undefined
7 Undefined
EXAMPLE: Diagnostic word = F3 C1 00 00 00 00 00 00
F3 Byte 0, bits 7-0 Bits 7,6,5,4,1,0 are set; HEX label F3

C1 Byte 1, bits 7-0 Bits 7,6,0 are set; Heading, attitude valid, number 1 AHC
00 Byte 2, bits 7-0 No bits are set.


BYTE BIT
ADC-85/86 AIR DATA COMPUTER Diagnostic Word
0 Label F3
1 0 *SDI code BITS: 1 0 Source Ident CODE
1 *SDI code
2 1 = Self test on 0 0 Not used
3 SDI code (not used) 0 1 Number 1 (left)
4 1 = Fault detection 1 0 Number 2 (right)
5 Pad = 0 1 1 Not used
6 Condition code
7 Condition code
FAULT GROUPS 1 AND 2 FAULT GROUPS 3 AND 4
2 0 1 = ALT 1 = Ps counters
1 1 = V/S 1 = Qc counters
2 1 = SAT/TAT 0
3 1 = TAS 0
4 1 = IAS 1 = Ps equal
5 1 = Mach 1 = Qc equal
6 1 = Vmo/Mmo 0
7 0 0
3 0 1 = SSEC 0
1 0 0
2 1 = Baroset 0
3 0 0
4 0 1 = ADC config
5 1 = FIFO 1 = Ps ADM
6 1 = Pro Line APS 1 = Ps PROM
7 0 1 = Qc ADM
4 0 1 = RS-232 1 = Qc PROM
1 1 = Analog 0
2 1 = Preselect altitude 0
3 1 = Manchester bus 0
4 1 = IAS bug 0
5 1 = V/S bug 0
6 0 0
7 0 0
5 0 1 (1) (BCD 1
1 0 (2) fault code 1
2 0 (4) units 0
3 0 (8) digit) 0
4 0 (1) (BCD 0
5 1 (2) fault code 0
6 0 (4) tens 1
7 0 (8) digit) 0
EXAMPLE: Diagnostic word = F3 11 21 00 00 21

11 Byte 1, bits 7-0 Bits 4 and 0 are set; Fault detected, number 1 ADC
21 Byte 2, bits 7-0 Bits 5 and 0 are set; Mach and ALT failure
00 Byte 3, bits 7-0 No bits are set
21 Byte 5, bits 7-0 Bits 5 and 1 are set; Fault groups 2 and 1 displayed
Note: Fault groups 1/2 and 3/4 are alternately sent for 10 seconds each.


BYTE BIT
DME-42 DISTANCE MEASURING EQUIPMENT Diagnostic Word
0 Label F3
1 0 *SDI code BITS: 1 0 SDI CODE
1 *SDI code
2 1 = Test 0 0 Onside - present (or remote)
3 Pad 0 1 Onside - active
4 1 = Fault 1 0 Offside - active
5 Pad 1 1 (Remote only)
6 Pad
7 Pad
2 0 1 = Power supply
1 1 = SMO
2 1 = Transmitter
3 1 = Video processor
4 1 = Receiver
5 1 = Distance Processor
6 1 = Microprocessor ROM
7 1 = Microprocessor RAM
3 Reserved BCD FAULT CODE (BITS 0-3)

00 No faults
4 Reserved 01 Power supply
5 0 1 (BCD 02 Synthesizer
1 2 fault code 03 Transmitter
2 4 unit 04 Video processor
3 8 digit) 05 Receiver
4 0 06 Distance processor
5 0 07 Microprocessor ROM
6 0 08 Microprocessor RAM
7 0 09 Input control

11 Byte 1, bits 7-0 Bits 4 and 0 are set; Fault detected, onside active DME
20 Byte 2, bits 7-0 Bit 5 is set; Distance processor failure
60 Byte 5, bits 7-0 Bits 2 and 1 are set; Distance processor failure


BYTE BIT
VIR-32 NAV RECEIVER Diagnostic Word
0 Label F3
1 0 *SDI code BITS: 1 0 Source Ident CODE
1 *SDI code 0 0 Not used
2 1 = Self test on 0 1 Number 1 (left)
3 Pad 1 0 Number 2 (right)
4 1 = Fault 1 1 Not used
5 Mode, 0 = VOR, 1 = ILS BITS: 7 6 Condition Code
6 Condition code 0 0 Faults 1-24
7 Condition code 0 1 Faults 25-32
2 0 (1) Not used (25) LOC SMO not locked

1 (2) RAM failure (26) LOC signal level too low
2 (3) No received serial sync (27) LOC dev failed test
3 (4) No received serial freq (28) GS SMO not locked
4 (5) Invalid NAV freq (29) GS signal level too low
5 (6) ILS mode not = to delayed ILS (30) GS dev failed test
6 (7) Not used (31) Not used
7 (8) Not used (32) MB failure
3 0 (9) Port 1 I/O bus failure

1 (10) Port 2 I/O bus failure
2 (11) A/D busy
3 (12) A/D failed ref test
4 (13) +13 V dc failed test
5 (14) -13 V dc failed test
6 (15) D/A channel 1 failed test
7 (16) D/A channel 2 failed test
4 0 (17) VOR SMO not locked

1 (18) AFC not locked
2 (19) Low 30 Hz ref signal
3 (20) Low 30 Hz var signal
4 (21) 400 Hz supply unusable
5 (22) OBI sine failed test
6 (23) OBI cosine failed test
7 (24) OBS failed test
5 0 1 (BCD priority
1 2 fault code
2 4 units
3 8 digit)
4 10 (BCD priority
5 20 fault code
6 40 tens
7 80 digit)

11 Byte 1, bits 7-0 Bits 4 and 0 are set; Fault detected, number 1 VIR
12 Byte 2, bits 7-0 Bits 4 and 1 are set; invalid NAV freq, RAM failure
80 Byte 4, bits 7-0 Bit 7 is set; OSB failed test
02 Byte 5, bits 7-0 Bit 1 is set; priority fault 02 RAM failure

Diagnostics page 5 show the received ARINC 429 shown on the copilot side displays (from number 2
maintenance words. Refer to Table 5-7 for a de- DPU). The MFD shows pilot side sensor inputs to the
scription of the ARINC 429 hex label 17 (octal label MPU.
350) diagnostic words.
PAGE 5 OF 11 DIAGNOSTICS ANALOG INPUTS
429 MAINTENANCE WORDS PITCH: 100.6° DOWN
AHS: 60 12 01 17 ROLL: 102.5° RIGHT
DME: 60 39 01 17 HDG: 330.6°
VIR: 60 67 01 17 ADF BRG: 323.5°
ADF: 60 45 01 17 NAV BRG: 90.1°
TCN: 60 00 00 17 ↕
EFIS: 68 10 01 17
DSP: 23 1A ↕ Diagnostics page 9 show the power supply voltage
outputs. The normal output is listed first, followed
Diagnostics page 6 show the left and right side bus by the measured voltage level.
activity. Active buses annunciate OK and inactive
buses are dashed. PAGE 9 OF 11 DIAGNOSTICS
VOLTAGES
PAGE 6 OF 11 DIAGNOSTICS +28 VDC: +28.1
BUS ACTIVITY +15 VDC: +14.7
LF RT LF RT -15 VDC: -15.0
429 LRN: OK -- 561 LRN: -- OK +5 VDC: +4.9
429 ADF: -- -- CSDB ADC: OK OK ↕
429 MLS: OK OK CSDB FCS: OK OK
429 VIR: -- -- CSDB DSP: OK OK Diagnostics pages 10 and 11 show RS-422 (CSDB)
429 DME: -- -- CSDB VIR: OK OK digital bus outputs from EFIS. These pages show
429 AHRS: -- -- CSDB DME: OK OK the activity on the transmit buses.
DIG WXP: OK OK CSDB AHRS: -- --
↕ PAGE 10 OF 11 DIAGNOSTICS
DIGITAL OUTPUTS TO FCS
A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 C 6 6 2 6 5 4 3 9 8 F 2
Diagnostics page 7 show the analog valid inputs for C 0 1 2 3 D E 4 5 C 0 9 C 7 0 0 1 2 2 3 E 1 1 9
the DPU onside inputs or the MPU pilot side C 1 8 9 8 9 3 8 7 A B D C 8 9 2 9 A 3 4 D E 8 8
inputs. Valid inputs annunciate OK and invalid or C 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 9 1 F 5 4 2 A B 9 9 C
C 3 4 A 3 2 B C 8 7 F E C A 5 1 5 5 5 4 2 2 8 9
not used inputs are dashed. C 4 6 7 5 5 8 4 9 3 3 3 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 5 6 5 6 5 6 7 4 8 3 9 F 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PAGE 7 OF 11 DIAGNOSTICS ↕
ANALOG
SYNCHRO VALIDS
HDG: OK HDG: OK
PITCH: OK PITCH: OK Page 11 EFIS Transmit Data to DSP
ROLL: -- ROLL: --
ADF: OK ADF: OK PAGE 11 OF 11 DIAGNOSTICS
NAV: -- NAV: OK DIGITAL OUTPUTS TO
FD: -- DSP: FMS:
A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5
IN VIEW: -- 8 1 7 7 6 6 4 A C B 8 0 0 0 4 5 0 0 0 0
RAD ALT: OK 8 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 C B 8 0 0 0 4 5 0 0 0 0
FAST/SLOW: OK ↕ 8 3 1 2 4 9 0 D C C 8 0 4 0 0 0 8 0 0 0
8 4 4 5 6 7 2 F C D E 1 8 7 F 4 0 0 0 0
8 5 2 A D F E 0 C D E 2 9 D 3 4 1 0 0 0
Diagnostics page 8 show the analog inputs for pitch, 8 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A 7 8 0 F 6 5 1 0 0 0 0
roll, heading, ADF bearing, and NAV bearing. The Ç
pilot side sensors are shown on the pilot side displays
(from number 1 DPU). The copilot side sensors are

Table 5-7. ARINC 429 Diagnostic Word Explanations.
DIAGNOSTIC WORD INTERPRETATION
Note
These words display on the LRU DIAGNOSTIC DATA and LRU FAULT HISTORY pages.
SAMPLE 6-DIGIT HEXADECIMAL DISPLAY 2 0 5 7 A E
BINARY VALUE BIT NUMBER
(1) 9 0
(2) 10 1
(4) 11 E 1
(8) 12 1
(1) 13 0
(2) 14 1
(4) 15 A 0
(8) 16 1
(1) 17 1
(2) 18 1
(4) 19 7 1
(8) 20 0
(1) 21 1
(2) 22 0
(4) 23 5 1
(8) 24 0
(1) 25 0
(2) 26 0
(4) 27 0 0
(8) 28 0
(1) 29 0
(2) 30 1 These bits are
(4) 31 2 0 set: 10-12, 14,
(8) 32 0 16-19, 21, 23, 30.
HEXADECIMAL TO BINARY CONVERSION TABLE
HEXADECIMAL DIGIT
BINARY A B C D E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VALUE: (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
(1) 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
(2) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
(4) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
(8) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1. Turn to sheet of Table 5-5 that shows the LRU diagnostic word to be decoded.
2. Convert each of the 6 hexadecimal digits displayed on MFD to a binary value.
3. Mark a “1” or a “0” by each bit number in the left column of the table.
4. The description of each line marked with a “1” is true.

OCTAL 350
DESCRIPTION
BIT NUMBER
ADF-462 AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER Diagnostic Word
9 (1) *SDI code BCD FAULT CODE (Bits 17-24)

10 (2) *SDI code
11 (4) 0 00 No faults found
12 (8) 0 11 Failed input bus at port A
12 No ADF frequency at port A
13 (1) 0 13 Invalid frequency at port A
14 (2) 0 14 Failed input bus at port B
15 (4) 0 15 No ADF frequency at port B
16 (8) 0 16 Invalid frequency at port B
17 Not used
17 (1) 1 (BCD 18 Not used
18 (2) 2 fault code 19 Not used
19 (4) 4 units 20 No bearing update
20 (8) 8 digit) 21 Not used
22 B+ failure
21 (1) 10 (BCD 23 B- failure
22 (2) 20 fault code 24 RAM failure, I/O processory
23 (4) 40 tens 25 A/D failure
24 (8) 80 digit) 26 Sin modulation failure
27 Cos modulation failure
25 (1) 0 28 SMO lock failure
26 (2) 0 29 Antenna power failure
27 (4) 0 30 Low signal level, or no rcv station
28 (8) 0 31 Detector out-of-lock, or no rcv station
32 AGC out-of-range, or no rcv station
29 (1) 0 33 Hf key line low, or no rcv station
30 (2) **SSM code 34 Dc sin failure, or no rcv station
31 (4) **SSM code 35 Dc cos failure, or no rcv station
32 (8) Parity (odd)
*SDI code: Bit 10 Bit 9 LRU Number ***SSM code: Bit 31 Bit 30 LRU Status
0 0 Not used 0 0 Failed
0 1 1 (left) 0 1 No computed data
1 0 2 (right) 1 0 Functional test
1 1 Not used 1 1 Normal
EXAMPLE: Diagnostic word = 20 31 01 17
1 Bits 9-12 Bit 9 is set; SDI = ADF number 1

0 Bits 13-16 No bits are set
1 Bits 17-20 Bit 17 is set; fault code units digit is 1 (code is 31)
3 Bits 21-24 Bits 21 and 22 are set; fault code tens digit is 3
2 Bits 29-32 Bit 30 is set; SSM = No computed data

OCTAL 350
DESCRIPTION
BIT NUMBER
AHRS COMPUTER Diagnostic Word
9 (1) *SDI code

10 (2) *SDI code
11 (4) Heading invalid
12 (8) Attitude invalid
13 (1) Rate compare invalid

14 (2) Accel compare invalid
15 (4) Checksum invalid
16 (8) Alignment invalid
17 (1) Flux detector invalid

18 (2) I/O invalid
19 (4) Hardware invalid
20 (8) Wheel 1 failed
21 (1) Wheel 2 failed

22 (2) Initialization mode
23 (4) High rate invalid
24 (8) Box orientation invalid
25 (1) RAM backup invalid (low battery)

26 (2) Wraparound disabled
27 (4) Compensation mode
28 (8) DG mode (not slaved)
29 (1) Failed ADC input bus

30 (2) **SSM code
31 (4) **SSM code
32 (8) Parity (odd)
0 1 1 (left) 0 1 Not used
1 0 2 (right) 1 0 STIM (test) mode
1 1 3 1 1 Normal
EXAMPLE: Diagnostic word = 02 20 0A 17
A Bits 9-12 Bits 12 and 10 are set; attitude is invalid and SDI = AHC number 2
2 Bits 21-24 Bit 22 is set; initialization mode is in process
2 Bits 25-28 Bit 26 is set; wraparound is disabled
0 Bits 29-32 No bits are set; SSM = Failed

OCTAL 350
DESCRIPTION
BIT NUMBER
DME-442 DISTANCE MEASURING EQUIPMENT Diagnostic Word

10 (2) *SDI code
11 (4) 0 00 No faults found
12 (8) Video processor fault 01 Power supply failed
02 Synthesizer out-of-lock
13 (1) Receiver fault 03 Transmitter failed
14 (2) Distance processor fault 04 Video processor failed (test)
15 (4) Microprocessor ROM fault 05 Receiver processor failed (test)
16 (8) Microprocessor RAM fault 06 Distance processor failed (test)
07 ROM failed
17 (1) 1 (BCD 08 RAM failed
18 (2) 2 fault code 09 Failed input bus at port B
19 (4) 4 units 10 Failed input bus at port A
20 (8) 8 digit)
21 (1) 10 (BCD
22 (2) 20 fault code
23 (4) 40 tens
24 (8) 80 digit)
25 (1) Power supply fault

26 (2) Synthesizer fault
27 (4) Transmitter fault
28 (8) Failed input bus at port B
29 (1) Failed input but at port A

30 (2) **SSM code
31 (4) **SSM code
32 (8) Parity (odd)
1 Bits 9-12 Bit 9 is set; SDI = DME number 1

2 Bits 13-16 Bit 14 is set; a distance processor fault is detected
6 Bits 17-20 Bits 18 and 19 are set; fault code units digit is 6 (code is 6)
0 Bits 21-24 No bits are set; fault code tens digit is 0
4 Bits 29-32 Bit 31 is set; SSM = Functional test

OCTAL 350
DESCRIPTION
BIT NUMBER
VIR-432 VHF NAV RECEIVER Diagnostic Word

10 (2) *SDI code
11 (4) Pad 00 No faults found
12 (8) Pad 01 Not used
02 RAM fail
13 (1) Pad 03 No received CSDB sync
14 (2) Pad 04 No received CSDB frequency
15 (4) Pad 05 Invalid NAV frequency
16 (8) Pad 06 ILS mode not same as delayed ILS line
07 Not used
17 (1) 1 (BCD 08 Not used
18 (2) 2 fault code 09 Processor port 1 I/O bus fail
19 (4) 4 units 10 Processor port 2 I/O bus fail
20 (8) 8 digit) 11 A/D busy
12 A/D failed reference test
21 (1) 10 (BCD 13 +13-V dc level failed test
22 (2) 20 fault code 14 -13 V dc level failed test
23 (4) 40 tens 15 Not used
24 (8) 80 digit) 16 Not used
17 VOR synthesizer out-of-lock
25 (1) VOR fault 18 AFC not locked, or no rcv station
26 (2) LOC fault 19 No 30-Hz ref signal, or no rcv station
27 (4) GS fault 20 No 30-Hz var signal, or no rcv station
28 (8) Frequency fault 25 LOC synthesizer out-of-lock
26 LOC signal level low, or no rcv station
29 (1) Radio fault 28 GS synthesizer out-of-lock
30 (2) **SSM code 29 GS signal level low, or no rcv station
31 (4) **SSM code 30 Marker beacon receiver failed
32 (8) Parity (odd) 40 No data at input port A
41 No frequency at input port A
42 No data at input port B
43 No frequency at input port B
44 No internal frequency at processor
2 Bits 9-12 Bit 10 is set; SDI = VIR number 2

8 Bits 17-20 Bit 20 is set; fault code units digit is 8 (code is 18)
1 Bits 21-24 Bit 21 is set; fault code tens digit is 1
2 Bits 29-32 Bit 30 is set; SSM = No computed data

OCTAL 350
DESCRIPTION
BIT NUMBER
TCN-500 TRANSCEIVER Diagnostic Word
9 (1) AGC (1) (LSB) (1/256 x full-scale)

10 (2) AGC (2)
11 (4) AGC (4)
12 (8) AGC (8)
13 (1) AGC (16)

14 (2) AGC (32)
15 (4) AGC (64)
16 (8) AGC (128) (MSB)
17 (1) CPU fault

18 (2) RAM fault
19 (4) ROM fault
20 (8) 2-port RAM fault
21 (1) 2-port data fault

22 (2) NV RAM fault
23 (4) Synthesizer fault
24 (8) Receiver fault
25 (1) Power supply fault

26 (2) Transmit power fault
27 (4) Audio fault
28 (8) Power-up fault
29 (1) Suppression present

30 (2) D/A fault
31 (4) TACAN failed
32 (8) Parity (odd)
EXAMPLE: Diagnostic word = 00 00 BE 17
E Bits 9-12 Bits 10-12 are set; AGC level is 190/256 of full-scale
B Bits 13-16 Bits 13, 14, and 16 are set

5.6 BITS MODE SELF-TEST GUIDE MPR bits display. The left column displays a 3-digit
HEX location and the second column displays a 4-
5.6.1 Introduction
digit decimal (DEC) location. The third through
This BITS mode self-test guide is an operator ref- sixth columns display the 16-bit MPR binary data
erence to information stored in RAM memory in the word 1’s and 0’s contained in each memory address.
DPU-84 Display Processor Unit (DPU), MPU-84 The most significant bit is on the left and the least
Multifunction Processor Unit, and MFD-85B Multi- significant bit is on the right. The seventh column
function Display. The stored information may be displays decoded MPR data and the last column
used as a troubleshooting aid to help identify a defines the decoded data parameter (ie, DEG, FT,
faulty unit in the system. Refer to the block dia- DOT, KTS, TTG). The DH SET knob is used to scan
grams found at the end of this section. the MPR data locations (one click for each location).
There are 2048 locations (000 through 2047).
The EFIS crt’s (the EADI, EHSI, and MFD) are used Locations 000 through 1023 are for the no 1 side
to display the parameters of this stored information. (left side) and 1024 through 2047 are for the no 2
Some of these parameters are translated from side (right side). Table 5-10 contains descriptions of
external inputs; others are passed across from the the data stored in each MPR location.
cross-side DPU/MPU or result from internal c. Push and release the DSP TST button twice.
operations. These parameters are stored in what is The word MFD should be displayed over the
called Multiport RAM (MPR) locations in the DPU fourth column from the left. The first column
and MPU, and RAM locations in the MFD. To view (DEC) displays a 3-digit decimal address loca-
this MPR data, the BITS mode must be entered. tion and the second column (HEX) displays the
5.6.2 BITS Mode hex address location. The third through fifth
columns (MFD) display binary 1’s and 0’s of the
The BITS mode is a ground test usually performed data contained in each memory address. The
by flight-line maintenance personnel. In general, the sixth column displays address information.
data displayed in the BITS mode is not self-reading Table 5-12 contains descriptions of the data
and requires instructions to interpret. Refer to Table stored in each RAM location for the MFD.
5-8 for a numerical listing of the displayed MPR data
or to Table 5-9 for an alphabetical listing. Table 5-10
contains descriptions of the data stored in each MPR
location. Table 5-12 contains descriptions of the data
stored in each MFD RAM location.
5.6.2.1 Enter BITS Mode
a. Locate the EFIS system TEST switch. To enter
the diagnostics/maintenance routines for each
DPU, push and hold the installer supplied EFIS
TEST switch and push the radio altimeter test
switch on the on-side DSP. To enter the diag-
nostics/maintenance routines for the MPU in a
5-tube system, push and hold the pilot’s EFIS
TEST switch and push the radio altimeter test
switch on the copilot’s DSP. Ground test entry
has been achieved when MPR is observed on
the EADI, EHSI, and MFD. Once the first page
of the routine is displayed, the EFIS TEST
switch may be released. Page sequencing is
done by repeatedly pushing the radio altimeter
test switch on the on-side DSP.
b. Release the system EFIS TEST and RA TST Figure 5-2. Diagnostic/Maintenance Routines (DMRS),
buttons. The EADI, EHSI, and MFD should display Multiport RAM (MPR) Format
eight columns of data. Refer to Figure 5-2 for the

d. Repeatedly push and release the RA TST but- the test mode and the normal EADI and EHSI
ton. A calibration screen should be displayed. displays will return.
Rotate the DH SET knob clockwise and various
calibration screens appear. (The same screen Note
should appear on both the EADI and EHSI.)
These screens are used mainly for calibration Cycling power to the box will also exit the
procedures in the lab. ground test sequence.
5.6.2.2 Exit BITS Mode
Repeatedly push and release the RA TST switch.

After the last test in the sequence, the DPU will exit
Table 5-8. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.
DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 1 SIDE/ NO 1 SIDE/
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
000/1024 00/400 SYSTEM TYPE AND VERSION

001/1025 01/401 DP STATUS
002/1026 02/402 DP STATUS
003/1027 03/403 DP STATUS
004/1028 04/404 DP STATUS
005/1029 05/405 TVG ACCELERATION VECTOR, CROSS-SIDE
006/1030 06/406 ANALOG LRN XTRACK DEVIATION
007/1031 07/407 AIOP STATUS
008/1032 08/408 AIOP STATUS
009/1033 09/409 ANALOG LRN BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT
010/1034 0A/40A ACTIVE DCP MODE SELECTION (ACTIVE/PRESELECT)
011/1035 0B/40B TVG ACTIVE PITCH ANGLE, UNSCALED
012/1036 0C/40C ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING ERROR
013/1037 0D/40D DIOP1 STATUS
014/1038 0E/40E DIOP1 STATUS
015/1039 0F/40F DIOP1 STATUS
016/1040 10/410 DIOP1 STATUS
017/1041 11/411 TVG MSI REFERENCE AIRSPEED, CROSS-SIDE
018/1042 12/412 DIOP1 STATUS
019/1043 13/413 DIOP2 STATUS
020/1044 14/414 DIOP2 STATUS
021/1045 15/415 DIOP2 STATUS
022/1046 16/416 DIOP2 STATUS (6-WIRE BUS STATUS)
023/1047 17/417 DIOP2 STATUS (429 LRN STATUS)
024/1048 18/418 TVG REFERENCE AIRSPEED
025/1049 19/419 TREND VECTOR STATUS
026/1050 1A/41A TREND VECTOR STATUS
027/1051 1B/41B LRN DESIRED TRACK (DEGREES)
028/1052 1C/41C LRN BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT (DEGREES)
029/1053 1D/41D LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION (DOTS)
030/1054 1E/41E TREND VECTOR STATUS, CROSS-SIDE
031/1055 1F/41F DISCRETES, STRAPS (1-12)
032/1056 20/420 DISCRETES, STRAPS (13-24)
033/1057 21/421 DISCRETES, STRAPS (25-36)
034/1058 22/422 DISCRETE, STRAPS (37-42)
035/1059 23/423 RADIO ALTITUDE (FILTERED)
036/1060 24/424 ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DEVIATION
037/1061 25/425 MFD JOYSTICK WAYPOINT CURSOR BEARING
038/1062 26/426 MFD JOYSTICK WAYPOINT CURSOR DISTANCE (MILES)

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
039/1063 27/427 MFD JOYSTICK AND SELECT KEY STATUS

040/1064 28/428 WXP DATA, PROCESSED
041/1065 29/429 SYNCHRO VALID BITS
042/1066 2A/42A DME GROUND SPEED (BINARY)
043/1067 2B/42B DME TTG (TIME-TO-GO) (BINARY)
044/1068 2C/42C DISCRETE INPUTS
045/1069 2D/42D DISCRETE INPUTS
046/1070 2E/42E DISCRETES, CALCULATED
047/1071 2F/42F DISCRETES, CALCULATED
048/1072 30/430 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
050/1074 32/432 ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE TTG (BINARY)
051/1075 33/433 CASE RELATED ACT LATL BRG ANGLE (DEGREES)
052/1076 34/434 DISCRETES, STRAPS (25, 26, 28, 29)/ACTIVE DCP
053/1077 35/435 ACTIVE LATL SOURCE GROUND SPEED (BINARY)
054/1078 36/436 PRESET LATL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK
055/1079 37/437 ACTIVE LATL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK
056/1080 38/438 ACTIVE HEADING ERROR (FILTERED)
057/1081 39/439 ADC INDICATED AIRSPEED (FILTERED, KNOTS)
058/1082 3A/43A DISCRETES, CALCULATED
059/1083 3B/43B ADI ACTIVE VERTICAL DEV (VGU’S)
060/1084 3C/43C ADI MODE DISCRETES
061/1085 3D/43D HSI MODE DISCRETES
062/1086 3E/43E ACT LATL SOURCE DIST (BINARY)
063/1087 3F/43F SPEED DEV OR AOA DEV (VGU’S)
064/1088 40/440 ACTIVE LATL SOURCE BRG-TO-WPT
065/1089 41/441 PRESET LATL SOURCE BRG-TO-WPT
066/1090 42/442 PRESET LATL SOURCE DEV (VGU’S)
071/1095 47/447 ACTIVE BINARY DISTANCE FOR EFIS XMIT BUS
072/1096 48/448 PITCH STEERING COMMAND, SCALED (VGU’S)
073/1097 49/449 ROLL STEERING CMD, SCALED (VGU’S)
074/1098 4A/44A ACCELERATION VECTOR (VGU’S)
075/1099 4B/44B RADIO ALT (UNFILTERED) FOR CAT II
076/1100 4C/44C HEADING ERROR (RAW) (DEGREES)
077/1101 4D/44D TVG REF AIRSPEED (RAS)
078/1102 4E/44E ACTIVE/PRESEL DCP SELECT MASKS
079/1103 4F/44F FCS ANNUNCIATORS
080/1104 50/450 ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING DISPLAY DATA
081/1105 51/451 CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS
082/1106 52/452 CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS
084/1108 54/454 HEADING ANGLE (ACTIVE), (DEGREES)
085/1109 55/455 ROLL ANGLE (ACTIVE), (DEGREES)
086/1110 56/456 PITCH ANGLE (ACTIVE), (VGU’S)
087/1111 57/457 HEADING ERROR (ACT) FOR DPU CSDB XMIT BUS
088/1112 58/458 FD ANNUNCIATORS
089/1113 59/459 SEL COURSE ERROR (ACT) FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
090/1114 5A/45A LATERAL DEV (ACTIVE) FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
091/1115 5B/45B TVG (ACCELERATION 10 SECONDS)
092/1116 5C/45C ACTIVE VERT DEV FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
093/1117 5D/45D IAS DISPLAY BASE OFFSET (VGU’S)

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
094/1118 5E/45E FULL-TIME LOC DEV FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
095/1119 5F/45F FULL-TIME GLIDESLOPE DEV FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
096/1120 60/460 EFIS XMIT BUS DISCRETES
097/1121 61/461 SCALED HSI VNAV DEV (VGU’S)
098/1122 62/462 FD ANNUNCIATORS
099/1123 63/463 ACT/PRESET SOURCE TYPE
100/1124 64/464 BRG/MENU SOURCE TYPE
101/1125 65/465 LRN DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT (BCD MILES )
102/1126 66/466 LRN DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT (BCD MILES)
103/1127 67/467 LRN DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT
104/1128 68/468 LRN DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT
105/1129 69/469 LRN BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT
106/1130 6A/46A LRN DESIRED TRACK TO WAYPOINT
107/1131 6B/46B LRN WAYPOINT NUMBER (BINARY)
108/1132 6C/46C LRN DISTANCE TO--TO+1 WAYPOINT
109/1133 6D/46D LRN DESIRED TRACK TO--TO+1 WAYPOINT
110/1134 6E/46E LRN TO+1 BINARY WAYPOINT NUMBER
111/1135 6F/46F LRN DIST TO+1--TO+2
112/1136 70/470 LRN DESIRED TRACK TO+1--TO+2
113/1137 71/471 LRN BINARY WAYPOINT NUMBER TO+2
114/1138 72/472 LRN TIME-TO-GO (BCD MINUTES)
115/1139 73/473 LRN GROUND SPEED (BCD KNOTS)
116/1140 74/474 LRN BANK COMMAND
117/1141 75/475 LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION
118/1142 76/476 LRN DESIRED TRACK
119/1143 77/477 LRN 6-WIRE STATUS
120/1144 78/478 LRN WIND VELOCITY
121/1145 79/479 LRN WIND DIRECTION
122/1146 7A/47A LRN MAGNETIC VARIATION (MAG VAR)
123/1147 7B/47B LRN DATA FLAG
124/1148 7C/47C DCP MODE
125/1149 7D/47D DCP MODE (ACTIVE)
126/1150 7E/47E DCP ELAPSED TIME (MINUTES/SECONDS) AND STATUS
127/1151 7F/47F ACTIVE DCP ET (MINUTES/SECONDS) AND STATUS
128/1152 80/480 DCP ET (HOURS/MINUTES)
129/1153 81/481 ACTIVE DCP ET - HOURS/MINUTES
130/1154 82/482 DCP BEARING SENSOR SELECT
131/1155 83/483 DCP PRESELECT COURSE SENSOR SELECT
132/1156 84/484 DCP ACTIVE COURSE SENSOR SELECT
133/1157 85/485 DCP MENU CURSOR MASK
134/1158 86/486 DCP BCD MONTH AND DAY DATE
135/1159 87/487 FCS ANNUNCIATORS
136/1160 88/488 FCS ANNUNCIATORS
137/1161 89/489 ACTIVE COURSE DATA
138/1162 8A/48A DCP BCD YEAR FOR THE DATE
139/1163 8B/48B DCP PRESELECTED COURSE DATA
140/1164 8C/48C DCP BCD CPCI
141/1165 8D/48D SELECTED HEADING
142/1166 8E/48E DCP BCD CPCI
143/1167 8F/48F DCP DECISION HEIGHT (BINARY 0 TO 999 FEET)
144/1168 90/490 ACTIVE DCP DECISION HEIGHT (BINARY 0 TO 999 FEET)
145/1169 91/491 DCP SPARE
146/1170 92/492 DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1
147/1171 93/493 DME FREQUENCY - CHANNEL 1 (BCD)
148/1172 94/494 DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
149/1173 95/495 DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 1 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES)

150/1174 96/496 DME STATUS - CHANNEL 2
151/1175 97/497 DME FREQUENCY - CHANNEL 2 (BCD)
152/1176 98/498 DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 2 (NAUTICAL MILES)
153/1177 99/499 DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 2 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES)
154/1178 9A/49A DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 (TTG AND VELOCITY)
155/1179 9B/49B DME TIME-TO-GO - CHANNEL 1 (BCD)
156/1180 9C/49C DME GROUND SPEED - CHANNEL 1 (BCD)
157/1181 9D/49D DME STATUS - CHANNEL 2 (TTG AND VELOCITY)
158/1182 9E/49E DME TIME-TO-GO - CHANNEL 2 (BCD MINUTES)
159/1183 9F/49F DME GROUND SPEED - CHANNEL 2 (BCD KNOTS)
160/1184 A0/4A0 DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 IDENT
161/1185 A1/4A1 DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 1
165/1189 A5/4A5 DME IDENT STATUS - CHANNEL 2
170/1194 AA/4AA DME 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
171/1195 AB/4AB DME 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
172/1196 AC/4AC VOR 429 DATA
173/1197 AD/4AD VOR 429 BEARING FROM A/C TO STATION
174/1198 AE/4AE VOR 429 FREQUENCY MHZ (BCD)
175/1199 AF/4AF VOR 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION
176/1200 B0/4B0 VOR 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (PROCESSED)
177/1201 B1/4B1 VOR 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION
178/1202 B2/4B2 VOR 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (PROCESSED)
179/1203 B3/4B3 SPARE
180/1204 B4/4B4 SPARE
181/1205 B5/4B5 SPARE
182/1206 B6/4B6 LRN VERTICAL DEVIATION
183/1207 B7/4B7 LRN 429 PITCH COMMAND (DEGREES)
184/1208 B8/4B8 RESERVED
185/1209 B9/4B9 VOR DATA STATUS
186/1210 BA/4BA MARKER BEARING (DEGREES)
187/1211 BB/4BB VOR BEARING (DEGREES)
188/1212 BC/4BC VOR FREQUENCY (BCD)
189/1213 BD/4BD ILS STATUS
190/1214 BE/4BE VOR GLIDESLOPE DEV (DDM)
191/1215 BF/4BF GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DOTS)
192/1216 C0/4C0 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DDM)
193/1217 C1/4C1 VOR LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DOTS)
194/1218 C2/4C2 AHRS RATES (BODY AXIS) STATUS
195/1219 C3/4C3 AHRS PITCH RATE (DEGREES/SECOND)
196/1220 C4/4C4 AHRS ROLL RATE (DEGREES/SECOND)
197/1221 C5/4C5 AHRS YAW RATE (DEGREES/SECOND)
198/1222 C6/4C6 AHRS ACCELERATIONS (BODY AXIS)
199/1223 C7/4C7 AHRS LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION
200/1224 C8/4C8 AHRS LATERAL ACCELERATION
201/1225 C9/4C9 AHRS NORMAL ACCELERATION
202/1226 CA/4CA AHRS ACCELERATIONS STATUS
203/1227 CB/4CB AHRS ALONG HEADING ACCELERATION

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
204/1228 CC/4CC AHRS CROSSHEADING ACCELERATION

205/1229 CD/4CD AHRS VERTICAL ACCELERATION
206/1230 CE/4CE AHRS ATTITUDE STATUS
207/1231 CF/4CF AHRS PITCH ATTITUDE
208/1232 D0/4D0 AHRS ROLL ATTITUDE
209/1233 D1/4D1 AHRS MAGNETIC HEADING
210/1234 D2/4D2 AHRS CONTROL STATUS
211/1235 D3/4D3 AHRS MAGNETIC HEADING
212/1236 D4/4D4 AHRS LATITUDE
213/1237 D5/4D5 AHRS STIM MODE
214/1238 D6/4D6 ADI STIM DISPLAY
215/1239 D7/4D7 HSI STIM DISPLAY
216/1240 D8/4D8 ADF BEARING ANGLE (DEGREES)
217/1241 D9/4D9 RESERVED
218/1242 DA/4DA FCS ANNUNCIATIONS
219/1243 DB/4DB FCS ANNUNCIATIONS
220/1244 DC/4DC FCS ANNUNCIATIONS
221/1245 DD/4DD FCS ANNUNCIATIONS
222/1246 DE/4DE FCS MODE STATUS
223/1247 DF/4DF FCS SPARE
224/1248 E0/4E0 FCS SPARE
225/1249 E1/4E1 FCS MODE STATUS
226/1250 E2/4E2 FCS STEERING STATUS
227/1251 E3/4E3 FCS ALTITUDE REFERENCE
228/1252 E4/4E4 FCS PITCH STEER
229/1253 E5/4E5 FCS ROLL STEER
230/1254 E6/4E6 FCS VS/IAS/MACH REFERENCE STATUS
231/1255 E7/4E7 FCS VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE
232/1256 E8/4E8 FCS REFERENCE IAS
233/1257 E9/4E9 FCS REFERENCE MACH NUMBER
234/1258 EA/4EA TO WAYPOINT SYMBOL
235/1259 EB/4EB LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION DATA
236/1260 EC/4EC MAGNETIC VARIATION (FROM 429 OR 6-WIRE)
237/1261 ED/4ED MFD JOYSTICK X VALUE
238/1262 EE/4EE MFD JOYSTICK Y VALUE
239/1263 EF/4EF MFD JOYSTICK RANGE
240/1264 F0/4F0 MFD JOYSTICK ANGLE
241/1265 F1/4F1 FLAGS, NONFLASHING
242/1266 F2/4F2 LRN SELECTED DATA (429/6-WIRE)
243/1267 F3/4F3 CAT II STATUS
249/1273 F9/4F9 CAT II GS CAPTURE
250/1274 FA/4FA CROSSTRACK DEVIATION
251/1275 FB/4FB DIOP 1 EPROM CHECKSUM
252/1276 FC/4FC DIOP 2 EPROM CHECKSUM
253/1277 FD/4FD AIOP 1 EPROM NO 1 CHECKSUM
254/1278 FE/4FE AIOP 1 EPROM NO 2 CHECKSUM
255/1279 FF/4FF TREND VECTOR EPROM CHECKSUM
256/1280 100/500 VNAV CONFIGURATION STRAPS AND SOURCE SELECTION
257/1281 101/501 MLS SPEED
258/1282 102/502 MLS TIME-TO-GO

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
259/1283 103/503 LRN 429 ILS APPROACH MODE VALID BITS

260/1284 104/504 LRN GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DDM)
261/1285 105/505 LRN GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DOTS)
262/1286 106/506 LRN LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DDM)
263/1287 107/507 LRN LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DOTS)
264/1288 108/508 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS
265/1289 109/509 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS
266/1290 10A/50A FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS
267/1291 10B/50B FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS
268/1292 10C/50C MFD MAP STATUS
269/1293 10D/50D MFD VOR COURSE
270/1294 10E/50E MFD TACAN COURSE
271/1295 10F/50F LRN HEADING BUG
272/1296 110/510 DCP HEADING SYNC
274/1298 112/512 SPARE
276/1300 114/514 LNV CONFIGURATION
277/1301 115/515 LNAV
278/1302 116/516 ACTIVE COURSE SENSOR
279/1303 117/517 PRESET COURSE SENSOR
280/1304 118/518 BEARING SENSOR
281/1305 119/519 MENU MASK
282/1306 11A/51A LNV FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODE
283/1307 11B/51B DISCRETES, CALCULATED
284/1308 11C/51C DISCRETES, CALCULATED
285/1309 11D/51D ADI VERTICAL NAV (VGU’S)
286/1310 11E/51E DIAGNOSTIC MODE
287/1311 11F/51F DIAGNOSTIC VALID
288/1312 120/520 SPARE
289/1313 121/521 COMPARATOR FLASH
290/1314 122/522 DOUBLE BEARING POINTER SELECTION
292/1316 124/524 DIRECT TO BEARING
293/1317 125/525 GREENWICH MEAN TIME FOR EXTENDED DATA
294/1318 126/526 ILS FINAL COURSE
295/1319 127/527 PSEUDO ILS FINAL COURSE
296/1320 128/528 DIOP 2 STATUS
297/1321 129/529 FMS MANUFACTURER’S IDENT CODE
298/1322 12A/52A IAS REFERENCE MARKERS STATUS WORD
299/1323 12B/52B IAS REFERENCE MARKERS IAS/MACH REFERENCED
300/1324 12C/52C IAS REFERENCE MARKER VR (KNOTS)
301/1325 12D/52D IAS REFERENCE MARKER VF (KNOTS)
302/1326 12E/52E IAS REFERENCE MARKER V1 (KNOTS)
303/1327 12F/52F IAS REFERENCE MARKER V2 (KNOTS)
304/1328 130/530 IAS REFERENCE MARKER A (KNOTS)
305/1329 131/531 IAS REFERENCE MARKER B (KNOTS)
306/1330 132/532 IAS REFERENCE MARKER C (KNOTS)
307/1331 133/533 IAS REFERENCE MARKER MACH REF (MACH NUMBER)
308/1332 134/534 SECONDARY IAS/MACH RANGE MARKERS, STATUS WORD
309/1333 135/535 RANGE MARKER STARTING POINT R1
310/1334 136/536 RANGE MARKER LENGTH R1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
314/1338 13A/53A RANGE MARKER LENGTH R3

315/1339 13B/53B RANGE MARKER STARTING POINT R4
316/1340 13C/53C RANGE MARKER LENGTH R4
317/1341 13D/53D RANGE MARKER STARTING POINT R5
318/1342 13E/53E RANGE MARKER LENGTH R5
319/1343 13F/53F RANGE MARKER STARTING POINT R6
325/1349 145/545 LNV PSEUDO LOC ANNUNCIATION CODES
326/1350 146/546 FMS 429 APPROACH PRESELECT VERTICAL DEV
327/1351 147/547 LATERAL AND VERTICAL DEVIATIONS STATUS
328/1352 148/548 LATERAL DEVIATION
329/1353 149/549 VERTICAL DEVIATION
330/1354 14A/54A MAP SELECT
331/1355 14B/54B IAS REFERENCE MARKERS/RANGE LABEL MONITOR VALIDS
332/1356 14C/54C TACAN 582 CHANNEL NUMBER AND STATUS BITS
333/1357 14D/54D TACAN 429 CHANNEL NUMBER AND STATUS BITS
334/1358 14E/54E DISCRETES, CALCULATED
335/1359 14F/54F SECOND COURSE ERROR
336/1360 150/550 REFERENCE SPEED NUMBER
337/1361 151/551 REFERENCE ANNUNCIATOR
338/1362 152/552 ACTIVE MARKER
339/1363 153/553 IAS REFERENCE POINTER
340/1364 154/554 FAST/SLOW REFERENCE SPEED
341/1365 155/555 FMS GS VC
344/1368 158/558 MAP DISTANCE (HIGH BITS)
345/1369 159/559 MAP DISTANCE (LOW BITS)
346/1370 15A/55A MLS LABELS IN TEST
347/1371 15B/55B FMS SELECTED HEADING
348/1372 15C/55C TREND VECTOR GEN ACCEL VECTOR
349/1373 15D/55D TREND VECTOR GEN ACCELERATION
350/1374 15E/55E TREND VECTOR GEN DIGITAL ACCELERATION
351/1375 15F/55F TREND VECTOR GEN STATUS
352/1376 160/560 SPARES
THROUGH THROUGH
358/1382 166/566
360/1384 168/568 DIGITAL ACCELERATION/MACH NUMBER
361/1385 169/569 LATITUDE LOW WORD (TO)
362/1386 16A/56A LATITUDE LOW WORD (TO+1)
363/1387 16B/56B LATITUDE LOW WORD (TO+2)
364/1388 16C/56C LATITUDE LOW WORD (PRES POSITION)
365/1389 16D/56D LONGITUDE LOW WORD (TO)
366/1390 16E/56E LONGITUDE LOW WORD (TO+1)
367/1391 16F/56F LONGITUDE LOW WORD (TO+2)
368/1392 170/570 LONGITUDE LOW WORD (PRES POSITION)
369/1393 171/571 EFIS 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
370/1394 172/572 EFIS 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
371/1395 173/573 LONG ACCELERATION (CONVERTED)
372/1396 174/574 AHRS 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
373/1397 175/575 AHRS 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS

374/1398 176/576 ADF 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
375/1399 177/577 ADF 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
376/1400 178/578 TCN 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
377/1401 179/579 TCN 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
378/1402 17A/57A AIRSPEED BUGS IN VIEW (WITHIN RANGE OF THE SCALE)
379/1403 17B/57B TCN STATUS
380/1404 17C/57C TCN DISTANCE TO STATION (NAUTICAL MILES)
381/1405 17D/57D TCN DISTANCE TO STATION (BCD NAUTICAL MILES)
382/1406 17E/57E TCN TIME TO STATION (BCD MINUTES)
383/1407 17F/57F TCN BEARING TO STATION
384/1408 180/580 TCN GROUND SPEED (BCD)
385/1409 181/581 SPARES (10 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
394/1418 18A/58A
395/1419 18B/58B TCN DESIRED TRACK
396/1420 18C/58C TCN BEARING TO WAYPOINT
397/1421 18D/58D MAP DISTANCE (HIGH BITS)
398/1422 18E/58E MAP DISTANCE (LOW BITS)
399/1423 18F/58F TCN STATUS
400/1424 190/590 TCN DISCRETE
401/1425 191/591 TCN DISCRETE
402/1426 192/592 TCN STATION
403/1427 193/593 DME 429 STATUS, CHANNEL 1
404/1428 194/594 DME 429 CHANNEL 1 CHARACTER 1
408/1432 198/598 DME 429 CHANNEL 1 TIME TO STATION
409/1433 199/599 DME 429 CHANNEL 1 GROUND SPEED (BCD)
410/1434 19A/59A DME 429 CHANNEL 1 DISTANCE
411/1435 19B/59B DME DISTANCE CHANNEL 1 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES)
412/1436 19C/59C DME FREQUENCY CHANNEL 1 (BCD MHZ)
413/1437 19D/59D DME 429 STATUS, CHANNEL 2
414/1438 19E/59E DME 429 CHANNEL 2 CHARACTER 1
415/1439 19F/59F DME 429 CHANNEL 2 CHARACTER 2
416/1440 1A0/5A0 DME 429 CHANNEL 2 CHARACTER 3
418/1442 1A2/5A2 DME 429 CHANNEL 2 TIME TO STATION
419/1443 1A3/5A3 DME 429 CHANNEL 2 GROUND SPEED (BCD)
420/1444 1A4/5A4 DME 429 CHANNEL 2 DISTANCE
421/1445 1A5/5A5 DME DISTANCE CHANNEL 2 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES)
422/1446 1A6/5A6 DME FREQUENCY CHANNEL 2 (BCD MHZ)
423/1447 1A7/5A7 DME 429 STATUS, CHANNEL 3
426/1450 1AA/5AA DME 429 CHANNEL 3 CHARACTER 3
427/1451 1AB/5AB DME 429 CHANNEL 3 CHARACTER 4
428/1452 1AC/5AC DME 429 CHANNEL 3 TIME TO STATION
429/1453 1AD/5AD DME 429 CHANNEL 3 GROUND SPEED (BCD)
430/1454 1AE/5AE DME 429 CHANNEL 3 DISTANCE
431/1455 1AF/5AF DME DISTANCE CHANNEL 3 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES)
432/1456 1B0/5B0 DME FREQUENCY CHANNEL 3 (BCD MHZ)
433/1457 1B1/5B1 VOR BEARING
434/1458 1B2/5B2 VOR DISTANCE CHANNEL 1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
435/1459 1B3/5B3 VOR MAP STATUS

436/1460 1B4/5B4 DME IDENT STATUS (CHANNEL 1)
437/1461 1B5/5B5 IDENT CHARACTER 1
441/1465 1B9/5B9 HOVER STATUS
442/1466 1BA/5BA HOVER VY (KNOTS)
443/1467 1BB/5BB HOVER VX (KNOTS)
444/1468 1BC/5BC SPARES (13 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
456/1480 1C8/5C8
457/1481 1C9/5C9 REFERENCE +5 VOLT POWER
458/1482 1CA/5CA REFERENCE +28 VOLT POWER
459/1483 1CB/5CB REFERENCE +15 VOLT POWER
460/1484 1CC/5CC REFERENCE -15 VOLT POWER
461/1485 1CD/5CD HOVER MODE X DEVIATION
462/1486 1CE/5CE HOVER MODE Y DEVIATION
463/1487 1CF/5CF ANALOG VOR BEARING ANGLE (DEGREES)
464/1488 1D0/5D0 ANALOG VOR LOCALIZER DEV (DOTS)
465/1489 1D1/5D1 ANALOG VOR GLIDESLOPE DEV (DOTS)
466/1490 1D2/5D2 BOX FAULTS
467/1491 1D3/5D3 ACTIVE DESIRED TRACK (DEGREES)
468/1492 1D4/5D4 PRESELECTED DESIRED TRACK (DEGREES)
469/1493 1D5/5D5 DSP-84 STRAP DATA
470/1494 1D6/5D6 SINGLE/DUAL ANNUN FORMAT
471/1495 1D7/5D7 ACTIVE NAV TACAN CHANNEL NUMBER
472/1496 1D8/5D8 PRESELECTED NAV TACAN CHANNEL NUMBER
473/1497 1D9/5D9 AUX ANNUNCIATOR DATA 2
474/1498 1DA/5DA CASE RELATED ACT 2ND SOURCE BRG ANGLE
475/1499 1DB/5DB DISCRETE, CALCULATED
476/1500 1DC/5DC BEARING/MENU SOURCE TYPE
477/1501 1DD/5DD AHS TRUE HEADING
478/1502 1DE/5DE DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 2
479/1503 1DF/5DF DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 2
480/1504 1E0/5E0 DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 2
484/1508 1E4/5E4 LRN 429 LATITUDE FOR “TO” WAYPOINT
485/1509 1E5/5E5 LRN 429 LATITUDE FOR “TO+1” WAYPOINT
486/1510 1E6/5E6 LRN 429 LATITUDE FOR “TO+2” WAYPOINT
487/1511 1E7/5E7 LRN 429 LONGITUDE FOR “TO” WAYPOINT
488/1512 1E8/5E8 LRN 429 LONGITUDE FOR “TO+1” WAYPOINT
489/1513 1E9/5E9 LRN 429 LONGITUDE FOR “TO+2” WAYPOINT
490/1514 1EA/5EA ADC ALTITUDE STATUS
491/1515 1EB/5EB ADC PRESSURE ALTITUDE (FEET)
492/1516 1EC/5EC ADC ALTITUDE (BCD)
493/1517 1ED/5ED ADC ALTITUDE (BCD)
494/1518 1EE/5EE ADC BARO ALTITUDE (FEET)
495/1519 1EF/5EF ADC VERTICAL SPEED/IAS STATUS
496/1520 1F0/5F0 ADC VERTICAL SPEED (FEET/MINUTE)
497/1521 1F1/5F1 ADC IAS (KNOTS)
498/1522 1F2/5F2 ADC IAS (BCD)
499/1523 1F3/5F3 ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (TAS)/ISA DIFFERENTIAL STATUS

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
500/1524 1F4/5F4 ADC TAS (KNOTS)

501/1525 1F5/5F5 ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (BCD)
502/1526 1F6/5F6 ADC ISA DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE
503/1527 1F7/5F7 ADC MACH STATUS
504/1528 1F8/5F8 ADC MACH NUMBER (DISPLAY)
505/1529 1F9/5F9 ADC MACH NUMBER (TRUE)
506/1530 1FA/5FA ADC VS/IAS BUG STATUS
507/1531 1FB/5FB ADC VERTICAL SPEED BUG
508/1532 1FC/5FC ADC IAS BUG (KNOTS)
509/1533 1FD/5FD ADC SAT/VMO/MMO STATUS
510/1534 1FE/5FE ADC STATIC AIR TEMP (SAT)
511/1535 1FF/5FF ADC MAX ALLOWABLE AIRSPEED (VMO/MMO)
512/1536 200/600 ADC TAT/PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE STATUS
513/1537 201/601 ADC TOTAL AIR TEMP (TAT)
514/1538 202/602 ADC PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE (FEET)
515/1539 203/603 GYRO PITCH ANGLE
516/1540 204/604 GYRO ROLL ANGLE
517/1541 205/605 GYRO HEADING ANGLE
518/1542 206/606 DCP BCD CPCI
519/1543 207/607 DCP TYPE
520/1544 208/608 DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1 (CSDB)
521/1545 209/609 DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1 (CSDB)
522/1546 20A/60A DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1 (CSDB)
523/1547 20B/60B ADC DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
524/1548 20C/60C ADC DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
525/1549 20D/60D ADC DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
526/1550 20E/60E NAV DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
527/1551 20F/60F NAV DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
528/1552 210/610 NAV DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
529/1553 211/611 SPARE
530/1554 212/612 SPARE
531/1555 213/613 SPARE
532/1556 214/614 FCS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
536/1560 218/618 AHRS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
537/1561 219/619 AHRS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
538/1562 21A/61A AHRS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
539/1563 21B/61B AHRS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
540/1564 21C/61C LRN BUS WIND ANGLE
541/1565 21D/61D LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION
542/1566 21E/61E LRN VERTICAL DEV (DOTS)
543/1567 21F/61F EXTENDED MAPS TEXT
544/1568 220/620 PLAN MODE
545/1569 221/621 PLAN MODE TEXT (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
556/1580 22C/62C
557/1581 22D/62D EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 0
558/1582 22E/62E DELTA X FROM AIRCRAFT (OR TUBE CENTER IN PLAN MODE)
559/1583 22F/62F DELTA Y FROM AIRCRAFT (OR TUBE CENTER IN PLAN MODE)
560/1584 230/630 IDENT FOR ITEM 0 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
571/1595 23B/63B
572/1596 23C/63C EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
573/1597 23D/63D DELTA X FOR ITEM 1

574/1598 23E/63E DELTA Y FOR ITEM 1
575/1599 23F/63F IDENT FOR ITEM 1 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
586/1610 24A/64A
587/1611 24B/64B EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 2
588/1612 24C/64C DELTA X FOR ITEM 2
589/1613 24D/64D DELTA Y FOR ITEM 2
590/1614 24E/64E IDENT FOR ITEM 2 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
601/1625 259/659
602/1626 25A/65A EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 3
603/1627 25B/65B DELTA X FOR ITEM 3
604/1628 25C/65C DELTA Y FOR ITEM 3
605/1629 25D/65D IDENT FOR ITEM 3 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
616/1640 268/668
617/1641 269/669 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 4
618/1642 26A/66A DELTA X FOR ITEM 4
619/1643 26B/66B DELTA Y FOR ITEM 4
620/1644 26C/66C IDENT FOR ITEM 4 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
631/1655 277/677
633/1657 279/679 DELTA X FOR ITEM 5
634/1658 27A/67A DELTA Y FOR ITEM 5
635/1659 27B/67B IDENT FOR ITEM 5 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
646/1670 286/686
648/1672 288/688 DELTA X FOR ITEM 6
649/1673 289/689 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 6
650/1674 28A/68A IDENT FOR ITEM 6 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
661/1685 295/695
663/1687 297/697 DELTA X FOR ITEM 7
664/1688 298/698 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 7
665/1689 299/699 IDENT FOR ITEM 7 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
676/1700 2A4/6A4
677/1701 2A5/6A5 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 8
678/1702 2A6/6A6 DELTA X FOR ITEM 8
679/1703 2A7/6A7 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 8
680/1704 2A8/6A8 IDENT FOR ITEM 8 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
691/1715 2B3/6B3
692/1716 2B4/6B4 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 9
693/1717 2B5/6B5 DELTA X FOR ITEM 9
694/1718 2B6/6B6 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 9
695/1719 2B7/6B7 IDENT FOR ITEM 9 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
706/1730 2C2/6C2
707/1731 2C3/6C3 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 10
708/1732 2C4/6C4 DELTA X FOR ITEM 10

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
709/1733 2C5/6C5 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 10

710/1734 2C6/6C6 IDENT FOR ITEM 10 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
721/1745 2D1/6D1
722/1746 2D2/6D2 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 11
723/1747 2D3/6D3 DELTA X FOR ITEM 11
724/1748 2D4/6D4 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 11
725/1749 2D5/6D5 IDENT FOR ITEM 11 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
736/1760 2E0/6E0
737/1761 2E1/6E1 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 12
738/1762 2E2/6E2 DELTA X FOR ITEM 12
739/1763 2E3/6E3 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 12
740/1764 2E4/6E4 IDENT FOR ITEM 12 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
751/1775 2EF/6EF
752/1776 2F0/6F0 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 13
753/1777 2F1/6F1 DELTA X FOR ITEM 13
754/1778 2F2/6F2 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 13
755/1779 2F3/6F3 IDENT FOR ITEM 13 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
766/1790 2FE/6FE
767/1791 2FF/6FF AIRCRAFT SYMBOL POSITION IN PLAN MODE
768/1792 300/700 DELTA X FROM TUBE CENTER TO AIRCRAFT
769/1793 301/701 DELTA Y FROM TUBE CENTER TO AIRCRAFT
770/1794 302/702 “TO” WAYPOINT IDENT (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
781/1805 30D/70D
782/1806 30E/70E EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 0
783/1807 30F/70F EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 0
784/1808 310/710 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 0
785/1809 311/711 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 0 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
796/1820 31C/71C
797/1821 31D/71D EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 1
798/1822 31E/71E EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 1
799/1823 31F/71F EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 1
THROUGH THROUGH
811/1835 32B/72B
812/1836 32C/72C EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 2
813/1837 32D/72D EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 2
814/1838 32E/72E EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 2
815/1839 32F/72F EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 2 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
826/1850 33A/73A
827/1851 33B/73B EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 3
828/1852 33C/73C EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 3
829/1853 33D/73D EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 3
830/1854 33E/73E EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 3 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
841/1865 349/749
842/1866 34A/74A EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 4
843/1867 34B/74B EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 4
844/1868 34C/74C EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 4

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
845/1869 34D/74D EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 4 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
856/1880 358/758
857/1881 359/759 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 5
858/1882 35A/75A EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 5
859/1883 35B/75B EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 5
860/1884 35C/75C EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 5 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
871/1895 367/767
873/1897 369/769 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 6
874/1898 36A/76A EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 6
875/1899 36B/76B EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 6 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
886/1910 376/776
890/1914 37A/77A EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 7 (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
901/1925 385/785
THROUGH THROUGH
916/1940 394/794
917/1941 395/795 “FROM” EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT
918/1942 396/796 “FROM” EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE
919/1943 397/797 “FROM” EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE
920/1944 398/798 “FROM” EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT (12 LOCATIONS)
THROUGH THROUGH
931/1955 3A3/7A3
932/1956 3A4/7A4 MLS BACK AZIMUTH DEVIATION (DOTS)
933/1957 3A5/7A5 MLS GLIDE PATH ANGLE (DEGREES)
934/1958 3A6/7A6 MLS GLIDE PATH ANGLE DEVIATION (DOTS)
935/1959 3A7/7A7 MLS CHANNEL SELECTION
936/1960 3A8/7A8 MLS BACK AZIMUTH ANGLE (DEGREES)
937/1961 3A9/7A9 MLS FRONT AZIMUTH COMPENSATED DEVIATION (DOTS)
938/1962 3AA/7AA MLS AZIMUTH ANGLE (DEGREES)
939/1963 3AB/7AB MLS DME FREQUENCY
940/1964 3AC/7AC MLS DME FREQUENCY
941/1965 3AD/7AD IAS SCALE SELECTION
942/1966 3AE/7AE IAS SCALE SELECTION
943/1967 3AF/7AF IAS POINTER DISPLACEMENT
944/1968 3B0/7B0 VMO POINTER DISPLACEMENT BOTTOM OF VMO LINE
945/1969 3B1/7B1 VMO POINTER DISPLACEMENT TOP OF VMO LINE
946/1970 3B2/7B2 IAS REFERENCE POINTER PLACEMENT
947/1971 3B3/7B3 LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION DATA (DIGITAL)
948/1972 3B4/7B4 CALCULATED DISCRETES, AMD STRAPS
949/1973 3B5/7B5 MLS FLAGS
950/1974 3B6/7B6 LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT
951/1975 3B7/7B7 LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT
952/1976 3B8/7B8 LRN 429 BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT
953/1977 3B9/7B9 LRN 429 MAGNETIC VARIATION

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
954/1978 3BA/7BA LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT

955/1979 3BB/7BB LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT
956/1980 3BC/7BC LRN 429 BANK COMMAND
957/1981 3BD/7BD LRN 429 CROSSTRACK DEVIATION
958/1982 3BE/7BE LRN 429 WIND DIRECTION
959/1983 3BF/7BF LRN 429 WIND VELOCITY
960/1984 3C0/7C0 LRN 429 CROSSTRACK DEVIATION
961/1985 3C1/7C1 LRN 429 VERTICAL DEVIATION
962/1986 3C2/7C2 LRN 429 TIME-TO-GO
963/1987 3C3/7C3 LRN 429 GROUND SPEED
964/1988 3C4/7C4 LRN 429 GROUND SPEED
965/1989 3C5/7C5 AHS 429 ACCELERATIONS (BODY AXIS)
966/1990 3C6/7C6 AHS 429 LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION
967/1991 3C7/7C7 AHS 429 LATERAL ACCELERATION
968/1992 3C8/7C8 AHS 429 NORMAL ACCELERATION
969/1993 3C9/7C9 AHS 429 ATTITUDE TEST MODE
970/1994 3CA/7CA AHS 429 PITCH ATTITUDE
971/1995 3CB/7CB AHS 429 ROLL ATTITUDE
972/1996 3CC/7CC LRN 429 MAGNETIC HEADING
973/1997 3CD/7CD MLS 429 ILS DATA
974/1998 3CE/7CE MLS 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DDM)
975/1999 3CF/7CF MLS 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DOTS)
976/2000 3D0/7D0 MLS 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DDM)
977/2001 3D1/7D1 MLS 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DOTS)
978/2002 3D2/7D2 ADF 429 BEARING
979/2003 3D3/7D3 ADF 429 FREQUENCY
980/2004 3D4/7D4 PRESENT POSITION LATITUDE
981/2005 3D5/7D5 PRESENT POSITION LONGITUDE
982/2006 3D6/7D6 TRUE HEADING FOR EXTENDED PAGES
983/2007 3D7/7D7 DRIFT ANGLE
984/2008 3D8/7D8 DESIRED TRACK
985/2009 3D9/7D9 TRACK
986/2010 3DA/7DA LRN FLAGS
987/2011 3DB/7DB AHS FLAGS
988/2012 3DC/7DC WIND DIRECTION
989/2013 3DD/7DD CROSS-SIDE ANNUNCIATIONS FOR ADI AND HSI
990/2014 3DE/7DE SELECTED WIND VELOCITY
991/2015 3DF/7DF SELECTED WIND DIRECTION
992/2016 3E0/7E0 AIR DATA COMPUTER IAS
993/2017 3E1/7E1 AIR DATA COMPUTER SCALED MACH
994/2018 3E2/7E2 AIR DATA COMPUTER MODE
995/2019 3E3/7E3 ATT, HDG, AND LRN STRAPS
996/2020 3E4/7E4 ATTITUDE AND HEADING SOURCE AND ANNUN
997/2021 3E5/7E5 ATTITUDE AND HEADING SOURCE AND ANNUN
998/2022 3E6/7E6 AHS MAGNETIC HEADING
999/2023 3E7/7E7 LRN STATUS
1000/2024 3E8/7E8 LRN STATUS
1001/2025 3E9/7E9 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT
1002/2026 3EA/7EA DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT
1003/2027 3EB/7EB DME IDENT STATUS CHANNEL 3
1004/2028 3EC/7EC DME FREQUENCY STATUS CHANNEL 3
1005/2029 3ED/7ED DME DISTANCE CHANNEL 3
1006/2030 3EE/7EE DME FREQUENCY CHANNEL 3
1007/2031 3EF/7EF DME CHARACTER 1 CHANNEL 3
1008/2032 3F0/7F0 DME CHARACTER 2 CHANNEL 3

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE

1011/2035 3F3/7F3 DME DISTANCE CHANNEL 3
1012/2036 3F4/7F4 DME TIME-TO-GO AND VELOCITY, CHANNEL 3
1013/2037 3F5/7F5 DME TIME-TO-GO, CHANNEL 3
1014/2038 3F6/7F6 DME VELOCITY, CHANNEL 3
1015/2039 3F7/7F7 EXTENDED PAGE DATA ADDRESS
1016/2040 3F8/7F8 EXTENDED PAGE DATA
1017/2041 3F9/7F9 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS
1018/2042 3FA/7FA MACH NUMBER
1019/2043 3FB/7FB SELECTED LRN WIND DIRECTION
1020/2044 3FC/7FC SELECTED LRN WIND VELOCITY
1021/2045 3FD/7FD WXP DATA
1022/2046 3FE/7FE ESTIMATED TIME TO DESTINATION VIA FLIGHT PLAN
1023/2047 3FF/7FF ADC TRUE AIRSPEED
Table 5-9. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.
DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
ACCELERATION VECTOR (VGU’S) 074/1098 4A/44A

ACT LATL SOURCE DIST (BINARY) 062/1086 3E/43E
ACT/PRESET SOURCE TYPE 099/1123 63/463
ACTIVE BINARY DISTANCE FOR EFIS XMIT BUS 071/1095 47/447
ACTIVE COURSE DATA 137/1161 89/489
ACTIVE COURSE SENSOR 278/1302 116/516
ACTIVE DCP DECISION HEIGHT (BINARY 0 TO 999 FEET) 144/1168 90/490
ACTIVE DCP ET (MINUTES/SECONDS) AND STATUS 127/1151 7F/47F
ACTIVE DCP ET - HOURS/MINUTES 129/1153 81/481
ACTIVE DCP MODE SELECTION (ACTIVE/PRESELECT) 010/1034 0A/40A
ACTIVE DESIRED TRACK (DEGREES) 467/1491 1D3/5D3
ACTIVE HEADING ERROR (FILTERED) 056/1080 38/438
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DEVIATION 036/1060 24/424
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE TTG (BINARY) 050/1074 32/432
ACTIVE LATL SOURCE BRG-TO-WPT 064/1088 40/440
ACTIVE LATL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK 055/1079 37/437
ACTIVE LATL SOURCE GROUND SPEED (BINARY) 053/1077 35/435
ACTIVE MARKER 338/1362 152/552
ACTIVE NAV TACAN CHANNEL NUMBER 471/1495 1D7/5D7
ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING DISPLAY DATA 080/1104 50/450
ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING ERROR 012/1036 0C/40C
ACTIVE VERT DEV FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS 092/1116 5C/45C
ACTIVE/PRESEL DCP SELECT MASKS 078/1102 4E/44E
ADC ALTITUDE (BCD) 492/1516 1EC/5EC
ADC ALTITUDE (BCD) 493/1517 1ED/5ED
ADC ALTITUDE STATUS 490/1514 1EA/5EA
ADC BARO ALTITUDE (FEET) 494/1518 1EE/5EE
ADC DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB) 523/1547 20B/60B
ADC DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB) 524/1548 20C/60C

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
ADC DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB) 525/1549 20D/60D

ADC IAS (BCD) 498/1522 1F2/5F2
ADC IAS (KNOTS) 497/1521 1F1/5F1
ADC IAS BUG (KNOTS) 508/1532 1FC/5FC
ADC INDICATED AIRSPEED (FILTERED, KNOTS) 057/1081 39/439
ADC ISA DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE 502/1526 1F6/5F6
ADC MACH NUMBER (DISPLAY) 504/1528 1F8/5F8
ADC MACH NUMBER (TRUE) 505/1529 1F9/5F9
ADC MACH STATUS 503/1527 1F7/5F7
ADC MAX ALLOWABLE AIRSPEED (VMO/MMO) 511/1535 1FF/5FF
ADC PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE (FEET) 514/1538 202/602
ADC PRESSURE ALTITUDE (FEET) 491/1515 1EB/5EB
ADC SAT/VMO/MMO STATUS 509/1533 1FD/5FD
ADC STATIC AIR TEMP (SAT) 510/1534 1FE/5FE
ADC TAS (KNOTS) 500/1524 1F4/5F4
ADC TAT/PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE STATUS 512/1536 200/600
ADC TOTAL AIR TEMP (TAT) 513/1537 201/601
ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (BCD) 501/1525 1F5/5F5
ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (TAS)/ISA DIFFERENTIAL STATUS 499/1523 1F3/5F3
ADC TRUE AIRSPEED 1023/2047 3FF/7FF
ADC VERTICAL SPEED (FEET/MINUTE) 496/1520 1F0/5F0
ADC VERTICAL SPEED BUG 507/1531 1FB/5FB
ADC VERTICAL SPEED/IAS STATUS 495/1519 1EF/5EF
ADC VS/IAS BUG STATUS 506/1530 1FA/5FA
ADF 429 BEARING 978/2002 3D2/7D2
ADF 429 FREQUENCY 979/2003 3D3/7D3
ADF 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS 374/1398 176/576
ADF 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS 375/1399 177/577
ADF BEARING ANGLE (DEGREES) 216/1240 D8/4D8
ADI ACTIVE VERTICAL DEV (VGU’S) 059/1083 3B/43B
ADI MODE DISCRETES 060/1084 3C/43C
ADI STIM DISPLAY 214/1238 D6/4D6
ADI VERTICAL NAV (VGU’S) 285/1309 11D/51D
AHRS 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS 372/1396 174/574
AHRS 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS 373/1397 175/575
AHRS ACCELERATIONS (BODY AXIS) 198/1222 C6/4C6
AHRS ACCELERATIONS STATUS 202/1226 CA/4CA
AHRS ALONG HEADING ACCELERATION 203/1227 CB/4CB
AHRS ATTITUDE STATUS 206/1230 CE/4CE
AHRS CONTROL STATUS 210/1234 D2/4D2
AHRS CROSSHEADING ACCELERATION 204/1228 CC/4CC
AHRS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB) 536/1560 218/618
AHRS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB) 537/1561 219/619
AHRS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB) 538/1562 21A/61A
AHRS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB) 539/1563 21B/61B
AHRS LATERAL ACCELERATION 200/1224 C8/4C8
AHRS LATITUDE 212/1236 D4/4D4
AHRS LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION 199/1223 C7/4C7
AHRS MAGNETIC HEADING 209/1233 D1/4D1
AHRS MAGNETIC HEADING 211/1235 D3/4D3
AHRS NORMAL ACCELERATION 201/1225 C9/4C9
AHRS PITCH ATTITUDE 207/1231 CF/4CF
AHRS PITCH RATE (DEGREES/SECOND) 195/1219 C3/4C3
AHRS RATES (BODY AXIS) STATUS 194/1218 C2/4C2
AHRS ROLL ATTITUDE 208/1232 D0/4D0

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
AHRS ROLL RATE (DEGREES/SECOND) 196/1220 C4/4C4

AHRS STIM MODE 213/1237 D5/4D5
AHRS VERTICAL ACCELERATION 205/1229 CD/4CD
AHRS YAW RATE (DEGREES/SECOND) 197/1221 C5/4C5
AHS 429 ACCELERATIONS (BODY AXIS) 965/1989 3C5/7C5
AHS 429 ATTITUDE TEST MODE 969/1993 3C9/7C9
AHS 429 LATERAL ACCELERATION 967/1991 3C7/7C7
AHS 429 LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION 966/1990 3C6/7C6
AHS 429 NORMAL ACCELERATION 968/1992 3C8/7C8
AHS 429 PITCH ATTITUDE 970/1994 3CA/7CA
AHS 429 ROLL ATTITUDE 971/1995 3CB/7CB
AHS FLAGS 987/2011 3DB/7DB
AHS MAGNETIC HEADING 998/2022 3E6/7E6
AHS TRUE HEADING 477/1501 1DD/5DD
AIOP 1 EPROM NO 1 CHECKSUM 253/1277 FD/4FD
AIOP 1 EPROM NO 2 CHECKSUM 254/1278 FE/4FE
AIOP STATUS 007/1031 07/407
AIOP STATUS 008/1032 08/408
AIR DATA COMPUTER IAS 992/2016 3E0/7E0
AIR DATA COMPUTER MODE 994/2018 3E2/7E2
AIR DATA COMPUTER SCALED MACH 993/2017 3E1/7E1
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL POSITION IN PLAN MODE 767/1791 2FF/6FF
AIRSPEED BUGS IN VIEW (WITHIN RANGE OF THE SCALE) 378/1402 17A/57A
ANALOG LRN BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT 009/1033 09/409
ANALOG LRN XTRACK DEVIATION 006/1030 06/406
ANALOG VOR BEARING ANGLE (DEGREES) 463/1487 1CF/5CF
ANALOG VOR GLIDESLOPE DEV (DOTS) 465/1489 1D1/5D1
ANALOG VOR LOCALIZER DEV (DOTS) 464/1488 1D0/5D0
ATT, HDG, AND LRN STRAPS 995/2019 3E3/7E3
ATTITUDE AND HEADING SOURCE AND ANNUN 996/2020 3E4/7E4
ATTITUDE AND HEADING SOURCE AND ANNUN 997/2021 3E5/7E5
AUX ANNUNCIATOR DATA 2 473/1497 1D9/5D9
BEARING SENSOR 280/1304 118/518
BEARING/MENU SOURCE TYPE 476/1500 1DC/5DC
BOX FAULTS 466/1490 1D2/5D2
BRG/MENU SOURCE TYPE 100/1124 64/464
CALCULATED DISCRETES, AMD STRAPS 948/1972 3B4/7B4
CASE RELATED ACT 2ND SOURCE BRG ANGLE 474/1498 1DA/5DA
CASE RELATED ACT LATL BRG ANGLE (DEGREES) 051/1075 33/433
CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS 081/1105 51/451
CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS 082/1106 52/452
CAT II GS CAPTURE 249/1273 F9/4F9
CAT II STATUS 243/1267 F3/4F3
COMPARATOR FLASH 289/1313 121/521
CROSS-SIDE ANNUNCIATIONS FOR ADI AND HSI 989/2013 3DD/7DD
CROSSTRACK DEVIATION 250/1274 FA/4FA
DCP ACTIVE COURSE SENSOR SELECT 132/1156 84/484
DCP BCD CPCI 140/1164 8C/48C
DCP BCD CPCI 142/1166 8E/48E
DCP BCD CPCI 518/1542 206/606

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
DCP BCD MONTH AND DAY DATE 134/1158 86/486

DCP BCD YEAR FOR THE DATE 138/1162 8A/48A
DCP BEARING SENSOR SELECT 130/1154 82/482
DCP DECISION HEIGHT (BINARY 0 TO 999 FEET) 143/1167 8F/48F
DCP ELAPSED TIME (MINUTES/SECONDS) AND STATUS 126/1150 7E/47E
DCP ET (HOURS/MINUTES) 128/1152 80/480
DCP HEADING SYNC 272/1296 110/510
DCP MENU CURSOR MASK 133/1157 85/485
DCP MODE (ACTIVE) 125/1149 7D/47D
DCP MODE 124/1148 7C/47C
DCP PRESELECT COURSE SENSOR SELECT 131/1155 83/483
DCP PRESELECTED COURSE DATA 139/1163 8B/48B
DCP SPARE 145/1169 91/491
DCP TYPE 519/1543 207/607
DELTA X FOR ITEM 1 573/1597 23D/63D
DELTA X FOR ITEM 10 708/1732 2C4/6C4
DELTA X FOR ITEM 11 723/1747 2D3/6D3
DELTA X FOR ITEM 12 738/1762 2E2/6E2
DELTA X FOR ITEM 13 753/1777 2F1/6F1
DELTA X FOR ITEM 2 588/1612 24C/64C
DELTA X FOR ITEM 3 603/1627 25B/65B
DELTA X FOR ITEM 4 618/1642 26A/66A
DELTA X FOR ITEM 5 633/1657 279/679
DELTA X FOR ITEM 6 648/1672 288/688
DELTA X FOR ITEM 7 663/1687 297/697
DELTA X FOR ITEM 8 678/1702 2A6/6A6
DELTA X FOR ITEM 9 693/1717 2B5/6B5
DELTA X FROM AIRCRAFT (OR TUBE CENTER IN PLAN MODE) 558/1582 22E/62E
DELTA X FROM TUBE CENTER TO AIRCRAFT 768/1792 300/700
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 1 574/1598 23E/63E
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 10 709/1733 2C5/6C5
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 11 724/1748 2D4/6D4
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 12 739/1763 2E3/6E3
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 13 754/1778 2F2/6F2
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 2 589/1613 24D/64D
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 3 604/1628 25C/65C
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 4 619/1643 26B/66B
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 5 634/1658 27A/67A
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 6 649/1673 289/689
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 7 664/1688 298/698
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 8 679/1703 2A7/6A7
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 9 694/1718 2B6/6B6
DELTA Y FROM AIRCRAFT (OR TUBE CENTER IN PLAN MODE) 559/1583 22F/62F
DELTA Y FROM TUBE CENTER TO AIRCRAFT 769/1793 301/701
DESIRED TRACK 984/2008 3D8/7D8
DIAGNOSTIC MODE 286/1310 11E/51E
DIAGNOSTIC VALID 287/1311 11F/51F
DIGITAL ACCELERATION/MACH NUMBER 360/1384 168/568
DIOP 1 EPROM CHECKSUM 251/1275 FB/4FB
DIOP 2 EPROM CHECKSUM 252/1276 FC/4FC
DIOP 2 STATUS 296/1320 128/528
DIOP1 STATUS 013/1037 0D/40D
DIOP1 STATUS 014/1038 0E/40E
DIOP1 STATUS 015/1039 0F/40F
DIOP1 STATUS 016/1040 10/410

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
DIOP1 STATUS 018/1042 12/412

DIOP2 STATUS (429 LRN STATUS) 023/1047 17/417
DIOP2 STATUS (6-WIRE BUS STATUS) 022/1046 16/416
DIOP2 STATUS 019/1043 13/413
DIOP2 STATUS 020/1044 14/414
DIOP2 STATUS 021/1045 15/415
DIRECT TO BEARING 292/1316 124/524
DISCRETE INPUTS 044/1068 2C/42C
DISCRETE INPUTS 045/1069 2D/42D
DISCRETE, STRAPS (37-42) 034/1058 22/422
DISCRETE, CALCULATED 475/1499 1DB/5DB
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 046/1070 2E/42E
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 047/1071 2F/42F
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 048/1072 30/430
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 058/1082 3A/43A
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 283/1307 11B/51B
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 284/1308 11C/51C
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 334/1358 14E/54E
DISCRETES, STRAPS (1-12) 031/1055 1F/41F
DISCRETES, STRAPS (13-24) 032/1056 20/420
DISCRETES, STRAPS (25, 26, 28, 29)/ACTIVE DCP 052/1076 34/434
DISCRETES, STRAPS (25-36) 033/1057 21/421
DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT 1001/2025 3E9/7E9
DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT 1002/2026 3EA/7EA
DME 429 CHANNEL 1 CHARACTER 1 404/1428 194/594
DME 429 CHANNEL 1 DISTANCE 410/1434 19A/59A
DME 429 CHANNEL 1 GROUND SPEED (BCD) 409/1433 199/599
DME 429 CHANNEL 1 TIME TO STATION 408/1432 198/598
DME 429 CHANNEL 2 CHARACTER 1 414/1438 19E/59E
DME 429 CHANNEL 2 CHARACTER 2 415/1439 19F/59F
DME 429 CHANNEL 2 CHARACTER 3 416/1440 1A0/5A0
DME 429 CHANNEL 2 DISTANCE 420/1444 1A4/5A4
DME 429 CHANNEL 2 GROUND SPEED (BCD) 419/1443 1A3/5A3
DME 429 CHANNEL 2 TIME TO STATION 418/1442 1A2/5A2
DME 429 CHANNEL 3 CHARACTER 3 426/1450 1AA/5AA
DME 429 CHANNEL 3 CHARACTER 4 427/1451 1AB/5AB
DME 429 CHANNEL 3 DISTANCE 430/1454 1AE/5AE

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
DME 429 CHANNEL 3 GROUND SPEED (BCD) 429/1453 1AD/5AD

DME 429 CHANNEL 3 TIME TO STATION 428/1452 1AC/5AC
DME 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS 170/1194 AA/4AA
DME 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS 171/1195 AB/4AB
DME 429 STATUS, CHANNEL 1 403/1427 193/593
DME 429 STATUS, CHANNEL 2 413/1437 19D/59D
DME 429 STATUS, CHANNEL 3 423/1447 1A7/5A7
DME CHARACTER 1 CHANNEL 3 1007/2031 3EF/7EF
DME CHARACTER 2 CHANNEL 3 1008/2032 3F0/7F0
DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1 (CSDB) 520/1544 208/608
DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1 (CSDB) 522/1546 20A/60A
DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1 (CSDB) 521/1545 209/609
DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 2 478/1502 1DE/5DE
DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 2 479/1503 1DF/5DF
DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 2 480/1504 1E0/5E0
DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 1 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES) 149/1173 95/495
DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 1 148/1172 94/494
DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 2 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES) 153/1177 99/499
DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 2 (NAUTICAL MILES) 152/1176 98/498
DME DISTANCE CHANNEL 1 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES) 411/1435 19B/59B
DME DISTANCE CHANNEL 2 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES) 421/1445 1A5/5A5
DME DISTANCE CHANNEL 3 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES) 431/1455 1AF/5AF
DME DISTANCE CHANNEL 3 1005/2029 3ED/7ED
DME DISTANCE CHANNEL 3 1011/2035 3F3/7F3
DME FREQUENCY - CHANNEL 1 (BCD) 147/1171 93/493
DME FREQUENCY - CHANNEL 2 (BCD) 151/1175 97/497
DME FREQUENCY CHANNEL 1 (BCD MHZ) 412/1436 19C/59C
DME FREQUENCY CHANNEL 2 (BCD MHZ) 422/1446 1A6/5A6
DME FREQUENCY CHANNEL 3 (BCD MHZ) 432/1456 1B0/5B0
DME FREQUENCY CHANNEL 3 1006/2030 3EE/7EE
DME FREQUENCY STATUS CHANNEL 3 1004/2028 3EC/7EC
DME GROUND SPEED (BINARY) 042/1066 2A/42A
DME GROUND SPEED - CHANNEL 1 (BCD) 156/1180 9C/49C
DME GROUND SPEED - CHANNEL 2 (BCD KNOTS) 159/1183 9F/49F
DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 1 161/1185 A1/4A1
DME IDENT STATUS (CHANNEL 1) 436/1460 1B4/5B4
DME IDENT STATUS - CHANNEL 2 165/1189 A5/4A5
DME IDENT STATUS CHANNEL 3 1003/2027 3EB/7EB
DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 (TTG AND VELOCITY) 154/1178 9A/49A
DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 IDENT 160/1184 A0/4A0
DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 146/1170 92/492
DME STATUS - CHANNEL 2 (TTG AND VELOCITY) 157/1181 9D/49D
DME STATUS - CHANNEL 2 150/1174 96/496

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
DME TIME-TO-GO - CHANNEL 1 (BCD) 155/1179 9B/49B

DME TIME-TO-GO - CHANNEL 2 (BCD MINUTES) 158/1182 9E/49E
DME TIME-TO-GO AND VELOCITY, CHANNEL 3 1012/2036 3F4/7F4
DME TIME-TO-GO, CHANNEL 3 1013/2037 3F5/7F5
DME TTG (TIME-TO-GO) (BINARY) 043/1067 2B/42B
DME VELOCITY, CHANNEL 3 1014/2038 3F6/7F6
DOUBLE BEARING POINTER SELECTION 290/1314 122/522
DP STATUS 001/1025 01/401
DP STATUS 002/1026 02/402
DP STATUS 003/1027 03/403
DP STATUS 004/1028 04/404
DRIFT ANGLE 983/2007 3D7/7D7
DSP-84 STRAP DATA 469/1493 1D5/5D5
EFIS 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS 369/1393 171/571
EFIS 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS 370/1394 172/572
EFIS XMIT BUS DISCRETES 096/1120 60/460
ESTIMATED TIME TO DESTINATION VIA FLIGHT PLAN 1022/2046 3FE/7FE
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 6 874/1898 36A/76A
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 3 829/1853 33D/73D
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 5 859/1883 35B/75B
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 0 784/1808 310/710
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 4 844/1868 34C/74C
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 2 814/1838 32E/72E
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 1 799/1823 31F/71F
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 0 782/1806 30E/70E
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 1 797/1821 31D/71D
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 2 812/1836 32C/72C
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 3 827/1851 33B/73B
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 4 842/1866 34A/74A
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 5 857/1881 359/759
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 7 (12 LOCATIONS) 890/1914 37A/77A
THROUGH THROUGH
901/1925 385/785
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 0 (12 LOCATIONS) 785/1809 311/711
THROUGH THROUGH
796/1820 31C/71C
THROUGH THROUGH
916/1940 394/794
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 5 (12 LOCATIONS) 860/1884 35C/75C
THROUGH THROUGH
871/1895 367/767
THROUGH THROUGH
811/1835 32B/72B
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 4 (12 LOCATIONS) 845/1869 34D/74D
THROUGH THROUGH
856/1880 358/758

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 6 (12 LOCATIONS) 875/1899 36B/76B
THROUGH THROUGH
886/1910 376/776
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 2 (12 LOCATIONS) 815/1839 32F/72F
THROUGH THROUGH
826/1850 33A/73A
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 3 (12 LOCATIONS) 830/1854 33E/73E
THROUGH THROUGH
841/1865 349/749
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 2 813/1837 32D/72D
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 3 828/1852 33C/73C
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 1 798/1822 31E/71E
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 7 888/1912 378/778
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 5 858/1882 35A/75A
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 4 843/1867 34B/74B
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 0 783/1807 30F/70F
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 0 557/1581 22D/62D
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 1 572/1596 23C/63C
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 10 707/1731 2C3/6C3
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 11 722/1746 2D2/6D2
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 12 737/1761 2E1/6E1
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 13 752/1776 2F0/6F0
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 2 587/1611 24B/64B
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 3 602/1626 25A/65A
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 4 617/1641 269/669
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 8 677/1701 2A5/6A5
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 9 692/1716 2B4/6B4
EXTENDED MAPS TEXT 543/1567 21F/61F
EXTENDED PAGE DATA ADDRESS 1015/2039 3F7/7F7
EXTENDED PAGE DATA 1016/2040 3F8/7F8
FAST/SLOW REFERENCE SPEED 340/1364 154/554
FCS ALTITUDE REFERENCE 227/1251 E3/4E3
FCS ANNUNCIATIONS 218/1242 DA/4DA
FCS ANNUNCIATIONS 219/1243 DB/4DB
FCS ANNUNCIATIONS 220/1244 DC/4DC
FCS ANNUNCIATIONS 221/1245 DD/4DD
FCS ANNUNCIATORS 079/1103 4F/44F
FCS ANNUNCIATORS 135/1159 87/487
FCS ANNUNCIATORS 136/1160 88/488
FCS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB) 532/1556 214/614
FCS MODE STATUS 222/1246 DE/4DE
FCS MODE STATUS 225/1249 E1/4E1
FCS PITCH STEER 228/1252 E4/4E4
FCS REFERENCE IAS 232/1256 E8/4E8
FCS REFERENCE MACH NUMBER 233/1257 E9/4E9
FCS ROLL STEER 229/1253 E5/4E5
FCS SPARE 223/1247 DF/4DF

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
FCS SPARE 224/1248 E0/4E0

FCS STEERING STATUS 226/1250 E2/4E2
FCS VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE 231/1255 E7/4E7
FCS VS/IAS/MACH REFERENCE STATUS 230/1254 E6/4E6
FD ANNUNCIATORS 088/1112 58/458
FD ANNUNCIATORS 098/1122 62/462
FLAGS, NONFLASHING 241/1265 F1/4F1
FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS 1017/2041 3F9/7F9
FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS 264/1288 108/508
FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS 265/1289 109/509
FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS 266/1290 10A/50A
FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS 267/1291 10B/50B
FMS 429 APPROACH PRESELECT VERTICAL DEV 326/1350 146/546
FMS GS VC 341/1365 155/555
FMS MANUFACTURER’S IDENT CODE 297/1321 129/529
FMS SELECTED HEADING 347/1371 15B/55B
“FROM” EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT 917/1941 395/795
“FROM” EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE 919/1943 397/797
“FROM” EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT (12 LOCATIONS) 920/1944 398/798
THROUGH THROUGH
931/1955 3A3/7A3
“FROM” EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE 918/1942 396/796
FULL-TIME GLIDESLOPE DEV FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS 095/1119 5F/45F
FULL-TIME LOC DEV FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS 094/1118 5E/45E
GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DOTS) 191/1215 BF/4BF
GREENWICH MEAN TIME FOR EXTENDED DATA 293/1317 125/525
GYRO HEADING ANGLE 517/1541 205/605
GYRO PITCH ANGLE 515/1539 203/603
GYRO ROLL ANGLE 516/1540 204/604
HEADING ANGLE (ACTIVE), (DEGREES) 084/1108 54/454
HEADING ERROR (ACT) FOR DPU CSDB XMIT BUS 087/1111 57/457
HEADING ERROR (RAW) (DEGREES) 076/1100 4C/44C
HOVER MODE X DEVIATION 461/1485 1CD/5CD
HOVER MODE Y DEVIATION 462/1486 1CE/5CE
HOVER STATUS 441/1465 1B9/5B9
HOVER VX (KNOTS) 443/1467 1BB/5BB
HOVER VY (KNOTS) 442/1466 1BA/5BA
HSI MODE DISCRETES 061/1085 3D/43D
HSI STIM DISPLAY 215/1239 D7/4D7
IAS DISPLAY BASE OFFSET (VGU’S) 093/1117 5D/45D
IAS POINTER DISPLACEMENT 943/1967 3AF/7AF
IAS REFERENCE MARKER A (KNOTS) 304/1328 130/530
IAS REFERENCE MARKER B (KNOTS) 305/1329 131/531
IAS REFERENCE MARKER C (KNOTS) 306/1330 132/532
IAS REFERENCE MARKER MACH REF (MACH NUMBER) 307/1331 133/533
IAS REFERENCE MARKER V1 (KNOTS) 302/1326 12E/52E
IAS REFERENCE MARKER V2 (KNOTS) 303/1327 12F/52F
IAS REFERENCE MARKER VF (KNOTS) 301/1325 12D/52D
IAS REFERENCE MARKER VR (KNOTS) 300/1324 12C/52C
IAS REFERENCE MARKERS IAS/MACH REFERENCED 299/1323 12B/52B
IAS REFERENCE MARKERS STATUS WORD 298/1322 12A/52A
IAS REFERENCE MARKERS/RANGE LABEL MONITOR VALIDS 331/1355 14B/54B
IAS REFERENCE POINTER PLACEMENT 946/1970 3B2/7B2
IAS REFERENCE POINTER 339/1363 153/553
IAS SCALE SELECTION 941/1965 3AD/7AD

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
IAS SCALE SELECTION 942/1966 3AE/7AE

IDENT CHARACTER 1 437/1461 1B5/5B5
IDENT FOR ITEM 0 (12 LOCATIONS) 560/1584 230/630
THROUGH THROUGH
571/1595 23B/63B
IDENT FOR ITEM 1 (12 LOCATIONS) 575/1599 23F/63F
THROUGH THROUGH
586/1610 24A/64A
IDENT FOR ITEM 10 (12 LOCATIONS) 710/1734 2C6/6C6
THROUGH THROUGH
721/1745 2D1/6D1
IDENT FOR ITEM 11 (12 LOCATIONS) 725/1749 2D5/6D5
THROUGH THROUGH
736/1760 2E0/6E0
IDENT FOR ITEM 12 (12 LOCATIONS) 740/1764 2E4/6E4
THROUGH THROUGH
751/1775 2EF/6EF
IDENT FOR ITEM 13 (12 LOCATIONS) 755/1779 2F3/6F3
THROUGH THROUGH
766/1790 2FE/6FE
IDENT FOR ITEM 2 (12 LOCATIONS) 590/1614 24E/64E
THROUGH THROUGH
601/1625 259/659
IDENT FOR ITEM 3 (12 LOCATIONS) 605/1629 25D/65D

THROUGH THROUGH
616/1640 268/668
IDENT FOR ITEM 4 (12 LOCATIONS) 620/1644 26C/66C
THROUGH THROUGH
631/1655 277/677
IDENT FOR ITEM 5 (12 LOCATIONS) 635/1659 27B/67B
THROUGH THROUGH
646/1670 286/686
IDENT FOR ITEM 6 (12 LOCATIONS) 650/1674 28A/68A
THROUGH THROUGH
661/1685 295/695
IDENT FOR ITEM 7 (12 LOCATIONS) 665/1689 299/699
THROUGH THROUGH
676/1700 2A4/6A4
IDENT FOR ITEM 8 (12 LOCATIONS) 680/1704 2A8/6A8
THROUGH THROUGH
691/1715 2B3/6B3
IDENT FOR ITEM 9 (12 LOCATIONS) 695/1719 2B7/6B7
THROUGH THROUGH
706/1730 2C2/6C2
ILS FINAL COURSE 294/1318 126/526
ILS STATUS 189/1213 BD/4BD
LATERAL AND VERTICAL DEVIATIONS STATUS 327/1351 147/547
LATERAL DEV (ACTIVE) FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS 090/1114 5A/45A
LATERAL DEVIATION 328/1352 148/548
LATITUDE LOW WORD (PRES POSITION) 364/1388 16C/56C
LATITUDE LOW WORD (TO) 361/1385 169/569
LATITUDE LOW WORD (TO+1) 362/1386 16A/56A

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
LATITUDE LOW WORD (TO+2) 363/1387 16B/56B

LNAV 277/1301 115/515
LNV CONFIGURATION 276/1300 114/514
LNV FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODE 282/1306 11A/51A
LNV PSEUDO LOC ANNUNCIATION CODES 325/1349 145/545
LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DDM) 192/1216 C0/4C0
LONG ACCELERATION (CONVERTED) 371/1395 173/573
LONGITUDE LOW WORD (PRES POSITION) 368/1392 170/570
LONGITUDE LOW WORD (TO) 365/1389 16D/56D
LONGITUDE LOW WORD (TO+1) 366/1390 16E/56E
LONGITUDE LOW WORD (TO+2) 367/1391 16F/56F
LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION DATA (DIGITAL) 947/1971 3B3/7B3
LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION DATA 235/1259 EB/4EB
LRN 429 BANK COMMAND 956/1980 3BC/7BC
LRN 429 BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT 952/1976 3B8/7B8
LRN 429 CROSSTRACK DEVIATION 957/1981 3BD/7BD
LRN 429 CROSSTRACK DEVIATION 960/1984 3C0/7C0
LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT 951/1975 3B7/7B7
LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT 950/1974 3B6/7B6
LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT 954/1978 3BA/7BA
LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT 955/1979 3BB/7BB
LRN 429 GROUND SPEED 963/1987 3C3/7C3
LRN 429 GROUND SPEED 964/1988 3C4/7C4
LRN 429 ILS APPROACH MODE VALID BITS 259/1283 103/503
LRN 429 LATITUDE FOR “TO+1” WAYPOINT 485/1509 1E5/5E5
LRN 429 LATITUDE FOR “TO+2” WAYPOINT 486/1510 1E6/5E6
LRN 429 LATITUDE FOR “TO” WAYPOINT 484/1508 1E4/5E4
LRN 429 LONGITUDE FOR “TO+1” WAYPOINT 488/1512 1E8/5E8
LRN 429 LONGITUDE FOR “TO+2” WAYPOINT 489/1513 1E9/5E9
LRN 429 LONGITUDE FOR “TO” WAYPOINT 487/1511 1E7/5E7
LRN 429 MAGNETIC HEADING 972/1996 3CC/7CC
LRN 429 MAGNETIC VARIATION 953/1977 3B9/7B9
LRN 429 PITCH COMMAND (DEGREES) 183/1207 B7/4B7
LRN 429 TIME-TO-GO 962/1986 3C2/7C2
LRN 429 VERTICAL DEVIATION 961/1985 3C1/7C1
LRN 429 WIND DIRECTION 958/1982 3BE/7BE
LRN 429 WIND VELOCITY 959/1983 3BF/7BF
LRN 6-WIRE STATUS 119/1143 77/477
LRN BANK COMMAND 116/1140 74/474
LRN BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT (DEGREES) 028/1052 1C/41C
LRN BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT 105/1129 69/469
LRN BINARY WAYPOINT NUMBER TO+2 113/1137 71/471
LRN BUS WIND ANGLE 540/1564 21C/61C
LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION 117/1141 75/475
LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION 541/1565 21D/61D
LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION (DOTS) 029/1053 1D/41D
LRN DATA FLAG 123/1147 7B/47B
LRN DESIRED TRACK (DEGREES) 027/1051 1B/41B
LRN DESIRED TRACK TO WAYPOINT 106/1130 6A/46A
LRN DESIRED TRACK TO+1--TO+2 112/1136 70/470
LRN DESIRED TRACK TO--TO+1 WAYPOINT 109/1133 6D/46D
LRN DESIRED TRACK 118/1142 76/476
LRN DIST TO+1--TO+2 111/1135 6F/46F
LRN DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT 103/1127 67/467
LRN DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT 104/1128 68/468

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
LRN DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT (BCD MILES) 102/1126 66/466

LRN DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT (BCD MILES ) 101/1125 65/465
LRN DISTANCE TO--TO+1 WAYPOINT 108/1132 6C/46C
LRN FLAGS 986/2010 3DA/7DA
LRN GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DDM) 260/1284 104/504
LRN GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DOTS) 261/1285 105/505
LRN GROUND SPEED (BCD KNOTS) 115/1139 73/473
LRN HEADING BUG 271/1295 10F/50F
LRN LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DDM) 262/1286 106/506
LRN LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DOTS) 263/1287 107/507
LRN MAGNETIC VARIATION (MAG VAR) 122/1146 7A/47A
LRN SELECTED DATA (429/6-WIRE) 242/1266 F2/4F2
LRN STATUS 1000/2024 3E8/7E8
LRN STATUS 999/2023 3E7/7E7
LRN TIME-TO-GO (BCD MINUTES) 114/1138 72/472
LRN TO+1 BINARY WAYPOINT NUMBER 110/1134 6E/46E
LRN VERTICAL DEV (DOTS) 542/1566 21E/61E
LRN VERTICAL DEVIATION 182/1206 B6/4B6
LRN WAYPOINT NUMBER (BINARY) 107/1131 6B/46B
LRN WIND DIRECTION 121/1145 79/479
LRN WIND VELOCITY 120/1144 78/478
MACH NUMBER 1018/2042 3FA/7FA
MAGNETIC VARIATION (FROM 429 OR 6-WIRE) 236/1260 EC/4EC
MAP DISTANCE (HIGH BITS) 344/1368 158/558
MAP DISTANCE (HIGH BITS) 397/1421 18D/58D
MAP DISTANCE (LOW BITS) 345/1369 159/559
MAP DISTANCE (LOW BITS) 398/1422 18E/58E
MAP SELECT 330/1354 14A/54A
MARKER BEARING (DEGREES) 186/1210 BA/4BA
MENU MASK 281/1305 119/519
MFD JOYSTICK AND SELECT KEY STATUS 039/1063 27/427
MFD JOYSTICK ANGLE 240/1264 F0/4F0
MFD JOYSTICK RANGE 239/1263 EF/4EF
MFD JOYSTICK WAYPOINT CURSOR BEARING 037/1061 25/425
MFD JOYSTICK WAYPOINT CURSOR DISTANCE (MILES) 038/1062 26/426
MFD JOYSTICK X VALUE 237/1261 ED/4ED
MFD JOYSTICK Y VALUE 238/1262 EE/4EE
MFD MAP STATUS 268/1292 10C/50C
MFD TACAN COURSE 270/1294 10E/50E
MFD VOR COURSE 269/1293 10D/50D
MLS 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DDM) 974/1998 3CE/7CE
MLS 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DOTS) 975/1999 3CF/7CF
MLS 429 ILS DATA 973/1997 3CD/7CD
MLS 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DDM) 976/2000 3D0/7D0
MLS 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DOTS) 977/2001 3D1/7D1
MLS AZIMUTH ANGLE (DEGREES) 938/1962 3AA/7AA
MLS BACK AZIMUTH ANGLE (DEGREES) 936/1960 3A8/7A8
MLS BACK AZIMUTH DEVIATION (DOTS) 932/1956 3A4/7A4
MLS CHANNEL SELECTION 935/1959 3A7/7A7
MLS DME FREQUENCY 939/1963 3AB/7AB
MLS DME FREQUENCY 940/1964 3AC/7AC
MLS FLAGS 949/1973 3B5/7B5
MLS FRONT AZIMUTH COMPENSATED DEVIATION (DOTS) 937/1961 3A9/7A9
MLS GLIDE PATH ANGLE (DEGREES) 933/1957 3A5/7A5
MLS GLIDE PATH ANGLE DEVIATION (DOTS) 934/1958 3A6/7A6

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
MLS LABELS IN TEST 346/1370 15A/55A

MLS SPEED 257/1281 101/501
MLS TIME-TO-GO 258/1282 102/502
NAV DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB) 526/1550 20E/60E
NAV DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB) 527/1551 20F/60F
NAV DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB) 528/1552 210/610
PITCH ANGLE (ACTIVE), (VGU’S) 086/1110 56/456
PITCH STEERING COMMAND, SCALED (VGU’S) 072/1096 48/448
PLAN MODE TEXT (12 LOCATIONS) 545/1569 221/621
THROUGH THROUGH
556/1580 22C/62C
PLAN MODE 544/1568 220/620
PRESELECTED DESIRED TRACK (DEGREES) 468/1492 1D4/5D4
PRESELECTED NAV TACAN CHANNEL NUMBER 472/1496 1D8/5D8
PRESENT POSITION LATITUDE 980/2004 3D4/7D4
PRESENT POSITION LONGITUDE 981/2005 3D5/7D5
PRESET COURSE SENSOR 279/1303 117/517
PRESET LATL SOURCE BRG-TO-WPT 065/1089 41/441
PRESET LATL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK 054/1078 36/436
PRESET LATL SOURCE DEV (VGU’S) 066/1090 42/442
PSEUDO ILS FINAL COURSE 295/1319 127/527
RADIO ALT (UNFILTERED) FOR CAT II 075/1099 4B/44B
RADIO ALTITUDE (FILTERED) 035/1059 23/423
RANGE MARKER LENGTH R1 310/1334 136/536
RANGE MARKER LENGTH R3 314/1338 13A/53A
RANGE MARKER LENGTH R4 316/1340 13C/53C
RANGE MARKER LENGTH R5 318/1342 13E/53E
RANGE MARKER STARTING POINT R1 309/1333 135/535
RANGE MARKER STARTING POINT R4 315/1339 13B/53B
RANGE MARKER STARTING POINT R5 317/1341 13D/53D
RANGE MARKER STARTING POINT R6 319/1343 13F/53F
REFERENCE +5 VOLT POWER 457/1481 1C9/5C9
REFERENCE +15 VOLT POWER 459/1483 1CB/5CB
REFERENCE +28 VOLT POWER 458/1482 1CA/5CA
REFERENCE -15 VOLT POWER 460/1484 1CC/5CC
REFERENCE ANNUNCIATOR 337/1361 151/551
REFERENCE SPEED NUMBER 336/1360 150/550
RESERVED 184/1208 B8/4B8
RESERVED 217/1241 D9/4D9
ROLL ANGLE (ACTIVE), (DEGREES) 085/1109 55/455
ROLL STEERING CMD, SCALED (VGU’S) 073/1097 49/449
SCALED HSI VNAV DEV (VGU’S) 097/1121 61/461
SECOND COURSE ERROR 335/1359 14F/54F
SECONDARY IAS/MACH RANGE MARKERS, STATUS WORD 308/1332 134/534
SEL COURSE ERROR (ACT) FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS 089/1113 59/459
SELECTED HEADING 141/1165 8D/48D
SELECTED LRN WIND DIRECTION 1019/2043 3FB/7FB

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
SELECTED LRN WIND VELOCITY 1020/2044 3FC/7FC

SELECTED WIND DIRECTION 991/2015 3DF/7DF
SELECTED WIND VELOCITY 990/2014 3DE/7DE
SINGLE/DUAL ANNUN FORMAT 470/1494 1D6/5D6
SPARES (10 LOCATIONS) 385/1409 181/581
THROUGH THROUGH
394/1418 18A/58A
SPARES (13 LOCATIONS) 444/1468 1BC/5BC
THROUGH THROUGH
456/1480 1C8/5C8
SPARES 352/1376 160/560
THROUGH THROUGH
358/1382 166/566
SPARE 179/1203 B3/4B3
SPARE 180/1204 B4/4B4
SPARE 181/1205 B5/4B5
SPARE 274/1298 112/512
SPARE 288/1312 120/520
SPARE 529/1553 211/611
SPARE 530/1554 212/612
SPARE 531/1555 213/613
SPEED DEV OR AOA DEV (VGU’S) 063/1087 3F/43F
SYNCHRO VALID BITS 041/1065 29/429
SYSTEM TYPE AND VERSION 000/1024 00/400
TACAN 429 CHANNEL NUMBER AND STATUS BITS 333/1357 14D/54D
TACAN 582 CHANNEL NUMBER AND STATUS BITS 332/1356 14C/54C
TCN 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS 376/1400 178/578
TCN 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS 377/1401 179/579
TCN BEARING TO STATION 383/1407 17F/57F
TCN BEARING TO WAYPOINT 396/1420 18C/58C
TCN DESIRED TRACK 395/1419 18B/58B
TCN DISCRETE 400/1424 190/590
TCN DISCRETE 401/1425 191/591
TCN DISTANCE TO STATION (BCD NAUTICAL MILES) 381/1405 17D/57D
TCN DISTANCE TO STATION (NAUTICAL MILES) 380/1404 17C/57C
TCN GROUND SPEED (BCD) 384/1408 180/580
TCN STATION 402/1426 192/592
TCN STATUS 379/1403 17B/57B
TCN STATUS 399/1423 18F/58F
TCN TIME TO STATION (BCD MINUTES) 382/1406 17E/57E
“TO” WAYPOINT IDENT (12 LOCATIONS) 770/1794 302/702
THROUGH THROUGH
781/1805 30D/70D
TO WAYPOINT SYMBOL 234/1258 EA/4EA
TRACK 985/2009 3D9/7D9
TREND VECTOR EPROM CHECKSUM 255/1279 FF/4FF
TREND VECTOR GEN ACCEL VECTOR 348/1372 15C/55C
TREND VECTOR GEN ACCELERATION 349/1373 15D/55D
TREND VECTOR GEN DIGITAL ACCELERATION 350/1374 15E/55E
TREND VECTOR GEN STATUS 351/1375 15F/55F
TREND VECTOR STATUS, CROSS-SIDE 030/1054 1E/41E
TREND VECTOR STATUS 025/1049 19/419
TREND VECTOR STATUS 026/1050 1A/41A
TRUE HEADING FOR EXTENDED PAGES 982/2006 3D6/7D6
TVG (ACCELERATION 10 SECONDS) 091/1115 5B/45B

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
TVG ACCELERATION VECTOR, CROSS-SIDE 005/1029 05/405

TVG ACTIVE PITCH ANGLE, UNSCALED 011/1035 0B/40B
TVG MSI REFERENCE AIRSPEED, CROSS-SIDE 017/1041 11/411
TVG REF AIRSPEED (RAS) 077/1101 4D/44D
TVG REFERENCE AIRSPEED 024/1048 18/418
VERTICAL DEVIATION 329/1353 149/549
VMO POINTER DISPLACEMENT BOTTOM OF VMO LINE 944/1968 3B0/7B0
VMO POINTER DISPLACEMENT TOP OF VMO LINE 945/1969 3B1/7B1
VNAV CONFIGURATION STRAPS AND SOURCE SELECTION 256/1280 100/500
VOR 429 BEARING FROM A/C TO STATION 173/1197 AD/4AD
VOR 429 DATA 172/1196 AC/4AC
VOR 429 FREQUENCY MHZ (BCD) 174/1198 AE/4AE
VOR 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION 175/1199 AF/4AF
VOR 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (PROCESSED) 176/1200 B0/4B0
VOR 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION 177/1201 B1/4B1
VOR 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (PROCESSED) 178/1202 B2/4B2
VOR BEARING 433/1457 1B1/5B1
VOR BEARING (DEGREES) 187/1211 BB/4BB
VOR DATA STATUS 185/1209 B9/4B9
VOR DISTANCE CHANNEL 1 434/1458 1B2/5B2
VOR FREQUENCY (BCD) 188/1212 BC/4BC
VOR GLIDESLOPE DEV (DDM) 190/1214 BE/4BE
VOR LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DOTS) 193/1217 C1/4C1
VOR MAP STATUS 435/1459 1B3/5B3
WIND DIRECTION 988/2012 3DC/7DC
WXP DATA 1021/2045 3FD/7FD
WXP DATA, PROCESSED 040/1064 28/428

Table 5-10. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.
DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
000/1024 00/400 DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O SYSTEM TYPE AND VERSION

PROCESSOR PROCESSORS 15-18- PAD = 0
NO 1 AND 2 7- 8 VERSION
6- 4 -001 = 1
5- 2 -002 = 2
4- 1 -003 = 3, etc
3-0- NOT DEFINED
001/1025 01/401 DISPLAY DISPLAY DP STATUS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AND 15-4- SLIDING BIT ACTIVITY
XSIDE AIOP 3-0- NOT USED
002/1026 02/402 DISPLAY GENERAL DP STATUS

PROCESSOR 15- DPU/MPU IN TEST MODE
14- DPU/MPU ROLLING MONITOR CHECK FAULT
13- IAS COMPARATOR VALID
12- DPU/MPU IN CONTROL = 0/1 (DRIVE TRANSFER)
11- BOX TYPE; DPU/MPU = 0/1
10- HDG COMPARATOR VALID
9- PITCH COMPARATOR VALID
8- ROLL COMPARATOR VALID
7- ROM’S 0 AND 1 CHECKSUM FAULT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
003/1027 03/403 DISPLAY MPU DP/MFD DP STATUS

PROCESSOR TEXT PAGE 15- SEL0 TOP SELECT KEY
14- SEL1 SECOND SELECT KEY
13- SEL2 THIRD SELECT KEY
12- SEL3 BOTTOM SELECT KEY
11- J3 JOYSTICK LEFT
10- J2 JOYSTICK DOWN
9- J1 JOYSTICK RIGHT
8- J0 JOYSTICK UP
7- TREND BAR LIMITED
6- TREND OFF EDGE OF TUBE
5- 0 = NORMAL MAP, 1 = EXTENDED MAP
4-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
004/1028 04/404 DISPLAY DP STATUS

PROCESSOR 15- 1 = IN CALIBRATION PATTERN/CHECKSUM MODE
14- 1 = IN EXTENDED DATA PAGES MODE
13- 1 = CAT II DIRECT ENTRY TO EXTENDED PAGES
MODE
12-10- NOT DEFINED
9- EXTENDED MAP MODE
BITS 9 8 7 DEFINE CURRENT MAP MODE
0 0 0 RADAR ONLY
0 0 1 NAV ONLY
0 1 0 RADAR + NAV
0 1 1 NORTH UP - A/C ON EDGE OF TUBE
1 0 0 A/C AT TUBE CENTER
1 0 1 PLAN MODE - NORTH UP
004/1028 6- CURRENT ACTIVE RANGE
5- CURRENT ACTIVE RANGE
4- CURRENT ACTIVE RANGE
3-0-NOT DEFINED
005/1029 05/405 TREND VECTOR DISPLAY ALTERNATE TVG ACCELERATION VECTOR

GENERATOR PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED
006/1030 06/406 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ANALOG LRN XTRACK DEVIATION

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 8 DOTS (MSB)
14- 4 DOTS
13- 2 DOTS
12- 1 DOT
11- 0.5 DOT
10- 0.25 DOT
9- 0.125 DOT
8- 0.0625 DOT
7- 0.03125 DOT
6- 0.015625 DOT
5- 0.0078125 DOT
4- 0.00390625 DOT
3- 0.001953125 DOT
2- 0.0009765625 DOT
1- 0.00048828125 DOT
0- 0.000244140625 DOT
007/1031 07/407 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY AIOP STATUS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SLIDING BIT ACTIVITY

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
008/1032 08/408 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY AIOP STATUS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- AIOP TEST MODE
14- AIOP FLAGS TEST
13- AIOP INCREMENTAL DATA TEST
12- AIOP IN CAT II TEST
11- NOT DEFINED
10- EPROM CHECKSUM FAULT
9- EXTERNAL RAM FAULT
8- EPROM REV NUMBER
7- EPROM REV NUMBER
6- EPROM REV NUMBER
5- EPROM REV NUMBER
4- EPROM REV NUMBER
3-0- NOT DEFINED
009/1033 09/409 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ANALOG LRN BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 180 DEGREES (MSB)
14- 90 DEGREES
13- 45 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- 0.0439453125 DEGREE
009/1033 2- 0.02197265625 DEGREE
1- 0.010986328125 DEGREE
0- 0.0054931640625 DEGREE
010/1034 0A/40A ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE DCP MODE SELECTION (ACTIVE/PRESELECT)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- LRN2 ACTIVE
14- LRN1 ACTIVE
13- ADF2 ACTIVE
12- ADF1 ACTIVE
11- VOR/LOC2 ACTIVE
10- VOR/LOC1 ACTIVE
9- LRN2 PRESELECT
8- LRN1 PRESELECT
7- ADF2 PRESELECT
6- ADF1 PRESELECT
5- VOR/LOC2 PRESELECT
3- MENU PRESELECT
2- COURSE CONTROL DOT PRESELECT
1-0- NOT DEFINED
011/1035 0B/40B ANALOG I/O TVG I/O UNSCALED ACTIVE PITCH ANGLE FOR TVG
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
012/1036 0C/40C ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING ERROR

15-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
013/1037 0D/40D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP1 STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR 15-0- SLIDING BIT ACTIVITY
014/1038 0E/40E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP1 STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR 15-14- NOT DEFINED
13- EXECUTIVE TIMING FAULT = 1
12- MPRAM FAULT = 1
11- EPROM CHECKSUM FAULT = 1
10- INTERNAL RAM FAULT = 1
9- EXTERNAL RAM FAULT = 1
8- EPROM REV NUMBER
7- EPROM REV NUMBER
6- EPROM REV NUMBER
5- EPROM REV NUMBER
4- EPROM REV NUMBER
3-0- NOT DEFINED
015/1039 0F/40F DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DIOP1 STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR 15- ADC CSDB BUS VALID
14- DCP CSDB BUS VALID
13- DME CSDB BUS VALID
12- AHRS CSDB BUS VALID
11- NAV CSDB BUS VALID (CSDB VOR)
10- WXP SERIAL BUS VALID
9- FCS CSDB BUS VALID
8- NOT DEFINED
7- AHRS BUS VALID (LABEL 43 ONLY)
6- AHRS ACCELERATIONS VALID (LABEL 41)
5-0- NOT DEFINED
016/1040 10/410 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP1 STATUS

6- SIDE BIT, 0 = PILOT, 1 = COPILOT
5- VALID = 1, (NAV CSDB VALID) AND (VOR BRG
VALID)
4- VALID = 1, (DME CSDB VALID) AND (DME DISTANCE
VALID) AND(NOT DME HOLD)
3-0- NOT DEFINED
017/1041 11/411 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ALTERNATE TVG MSI REFERENCE AIRSPEED
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
018/1042 12/412 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP1 STATUS BUS ACTIVITY STATUS FOR
PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR EXTENDED DATA PAGES ONLY
15- CSDB ADC, 1 = BUS ACTIVITY SENSED
14- CSDB VIR
13- CSDB DME
12- CSDB FCS
11- CSDB DCP
10- SPARE
9- DIG WXP
8- 429 LRN
7- 561 LRN
6- 429 ADF
5- 429 MLS
4- 429 AHRS
3- CSDB AHRS
2- 429 VIR
1- 429 DME
0- 429 TCN

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15-0- SLIDING ACTIVITY BIT
12- EXECUTIVE TIMING FAULT = 1
11- EPROM CHECKSUM FAULT = 1
10- INTERNAL RAM FAULT = 1
9- EXTERNAL RAM FAULT = 1
8- EPROM REV NUMBER
7- EPROM REV NUMBER
6- EPROM REV NUMBER
5- EPROM REV NUMBER
4- EPROM REV NUMBER
3-0- NOT DEFINED
021/1045 15/415 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O DIOP2 STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR NO 1 15-8- NOT DEFINED
7- 429 FMS BUS ACTIVITY = 1
6- 429 AHRS BUS ACTIVITY = 1
5- 6-WIRE BUS ACTIVITY = 1
4- 429 ADF BUS ACTIVITY = 1
3- 429 MLS BUS ACTIVITY = 1
2- 429 VOR BUS ACTIVITY = 1
1- 429 DM3 BUS ACTIVITY = 1
0- 429 TCN BUS ACTIVITY = 1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
022/1046 16/416 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP2 STATUS (6-WIRE BUS STATUS)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR AND 15- NOT DEFINED
DIGITAL I/O 14- WIND AVAILABLE = 1 IF LABEL MONITORS FOR
PROCESSOR NO 1 WIND DIRECTION AND WIND VELOCITY HAVE
NOT TIMED OUT
13-10- NOT DEFINED
9- LRN 6-WIRE XTRACK DEVIATION (C0H LABEL)
VALID = 1
8- NOT DEFINED
7- NOT DEFINED
6- LRN 6-WIRE BANK COMMAND (8AH LABEL) VALID =
1
5- MAG VAR VALID = 1
4- LRN STATUS VALID = 1
3- LRN 6-WIRE BRG-TO-WPT VALID = 1
2- LRN 6-WIRE DESIRED TRACK VALID = 1
1- LRN 6-WIRE DISPLAY DEVIATION VALID = 1
0- LRN 6-WIRE VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID = 1
023/1047 17/417 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DIOP2 STATUS (429 LRN STATUS)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- 429 LRN, RNV BUS VALID (DIST)
14- WIND AVAILABLE = 1 IF LABEL MONITORS FOR
WIND DIRECTION AND WINDVELOCITY HAVE NOT
TIMED OUT
13- GSPD AVAILABLE (BUS MON) LRN/RNV
12- TTG AVAILABLE (BUS MON) LRN/RNV
11- NOT DEFINED
10- NOT DEFINED
9- LRN 429 XTRACK DEVIATION VALID = 1 (LABEL 72)
8- NOT DEFINED
7- LRN 429 VNAV ENABLE = 1
6- LRN 429 VNAV CAPTURE = 1 (BENDOVER)
5- MAG VAR VALID = 1 (LABEL E6)
4- NOT DEFINED
3- LRN 429 BRG-TO-WPT VALID = 1 (LABEL B2, RNV
LABEL 49)
2- LOW-SPEED 429 OR 6-WIRE RNAV SELECTED = 1
1- LRN 429 LATERAL DEV VALID = 1 (LABEL 72)
0- LRN 429 VERTICAL DEV VALID = 1 (LABEL F2)
024/1048 18/418 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY TVG REFERENCE AIRSPEED

025/1049 19/419 TREND VECTOR DISPLAY TREND VECTOR STATUS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SLIDING ACTIVITY BIT

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
026/1050 1A/41A TREND VECTOR DISPLAY TREND VECTOR STATUS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- LONGITUDINAL ACCELEROMETER VALID
14- ACCEL VECTOR CALCULATION VALID
13- ACCEL VECTOR LIMIT, DRAW BAR
12- REFERENCE AIRSPEED VALID
11- TVG IN TEST MODE
10- EPROM CHECKSUM FAULT
9- EXTERNAL RAM FAULT
8- EPROM REV NUMBER
7- EPROM REV NUMBER
6- EPROM REV NUMBER
5- EPROM REV NUMBER
026/1050 4- EPROM REV NUMBER
3-0- NOT DEFINED
027/1051 1B/41B ANALOG I/O DISPLAY LRN DESIRED TRACK (DEGREES)

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR WILL CONTAIN ANALOG OR 6-WIRE DATA
DEPENDING ON STRAP 31
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
028/1052 1C/41C ANALOG I/O DISPLAY LRN BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT (DEGREES)

029/1053 1D/41D ANALOG I/O DISPLAY LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION (DOTS)

030/1054 1E/41E TREND VECTOR DISPLAY ALTERNATE TREND VECTOR STATUS

031/1055 1F/41F ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETES, STRAPS (1-12)

PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 1 FCS TYPE
14- STRAP 2 FCS TYPE
13- STRAP 3 FCS TYPE
12- STRAP 4 LNAV ANNUNCIATION
9- STRAP 7 RADIO ALTIMETER TYPE
8- STRAP 8 RADIO ALTIMETER TYPE
7- STRAP 9 CROSS-SIDE DATA FLAG DSPLY
6- STRAP 10 SKY DISPLAY SELECT
5- STRAP 11 DPU SIDE, 0 = LEFT DPU
4- STRAP 12 COMPARATOR WARN RESET
3-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
032/1056 20/420 ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETES, STRAPS (13-24)

PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 13 SPEED DEVIATION SOURCE SEL
14- STRAP 14 ATTITUDE/HEADING TYPE
13- STRAP 15 ADF TYPE
12- STRAP 16 LRN SOURCE
11- STRAP 17 HEADING, 1 = MAG
10- STRAP 18 VNAV inhibit
9- STRAP 19 REVERSIONARY, 1 = COMPOSITE
8- STRAP 20 COMMAND BARS, 1 = V-BAR
7- STRAP 21 spare
6- STRAP 22 MASTER WARN RESET
5- STRAP 23 SPEED DEVIATION SOURCE SEL
3-0- NOT DEFINED
033/1057 21/421 ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETES, STRAPS (25-36)
PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 25 ATTITUDE SOURCE
14- STRAP 26 HEADING SOURCE
13- STRAP 27 AIR DATA/TREND VECTOR ENABLE
12- STRAP 28 DCP SOURCE, 1 = ONSIDE
11- STRAP 29 RISING RUNWAY ENABLE
10- STRAP 30 DUAL HEADING SELECT
033/1057 9- STRAP 31 LRN SOURCE
8- STRAP 32 LRN SOURCE
7- STRAP 33 FCS TYPE, 1 = PRIMARY
6- STRAP 34 ADF TYPE SELECT
4- STRAP 36 429 LRN PORT SELECTION
3-0- NOT DEFINED
034/1058 22/422 ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETE, STRAPS (37-42)

PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 37 ANALOG NAV SELECT
14- STRAP 38 ATTITUDE/HEADING SELECT
13- STRAP 39 GS SIDE SELECT
12- STRAP 40 FCS FORMAT A/B SWITCH = 0/1
11- 3-TUBE/5-TUBE (MPU ONLY)
10- STRAP 42 SPARE (MPU ONLY)
9- NOT DEFINED
8- DELAYED ILS MODE, 0 = ILS, 1 = VOR
7-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
035/1059 23/423 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY RADIO ALTITUDE (FILTERED)

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 2048 FEET (MSB)
14- 1024 FEET
13- 512 FEET
12- 256 FEET
11- 128 FEET
10- 64 FEET
9- 32 FEET
8- 16 FEET
7- 8 FEET
6- 4 FEET
5- 2 FEET
4- 1 FOOT
3- 0.5 FOOT
2- 0.25 FOOT
1- 0.125 FOOT
0- 0.0625 FOOT
036/1060 24/424 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY LATERAL SOURCE DEVIATION (ACTIVE)

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT VGU’S
15- 2048 VGU’S (MSB)
14- 1024 VGU’S
13- 512 VGU’S
12- 256 VGU’S
11- 128 VGU’S
10- 64 VGU’S
9- 32 VGU’S
8- 16 VGU’S
7- 8 VGU’S
6- 4 VGU’S
5- 2 VGU’S
4- 1 VGU’S
3- 0.5 VGU’S
2- 0.25 VGU’S
1- 0.125 VGU’S
0- 0.0625 VGU’S
037/1061 25/425 DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O MFD JOYSTICK WAYPOINT CURSOR BEARING
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
15- 180 DEGREES (MSB)
14- 90 DEGREES
13- 45 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
038/1062 26/426 DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O MFD JOYSTICK WAYPOINT CURSOR DISTANCE
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (MILES)
15- 512 MILES (MSB)
14- 256 MILES
13- 128 MILES
12- 64 MILES
11- 32 MILES
10- 16 MILES
9- 8 MILES
8- 4 MILES
7- 2 MILES
6- 1 MILE
5- 0.5 MILE
4- 0.25 MILE
3-0- NOT DEFINED
039/1063 27/427 DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O MFD JOYSTICK AND SELECT KEY STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 1 15- SEL0 TOP SELECT KEY
14- SEL1
13- SEL2
12- SEL3 BOTTOM SELECT KEY
11- J3 JOYSTICK LEFT
10- J2 JOYSTICK DOWN
9- J1 JOYSTICK RIGHT
8- J0 JOYSTICK UP
7-0- NOT DEFINED
040/1064 28/428 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY PROCESSED WXP DATA

PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR 15- (TGT) AND (TGT SWITCH), DISPLAY = 1
14- R4 BITS R4 R2 R1 RANGES
13- R2 0 0 0 5 NMI
12- R1 0 0 1 10 NMI
0 1 0 25 NMI
0 1 1 50 NMI
1 0 0 100 NMI
1 0 1 200 NMI
1 1 0 300 NMI
11- M8 WXP-85 1 = ON, 0 = OFF
10- M4 BITS M4 M2 M1 WXP-85 MODES
9- M2 0 0 0 FAULT
8- M1 0 0 1 HOLD
0 1 0 STBY
0 1 1 TEST
1 0 0 WX
1 0 1 NORM
1 1 0 GAIN
(Cont) 1 1 1 MAP

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
040/1064 BITS M8 M4 M2 M1 WXP-850 MODES

(Cont) 0 0 0 0 OFF
0 0 0 1 STBY
0 0 1 0 TEST
0 0 1 1 TGT
0 1 0 0 MAP
0 1 0 1 WX
0 1 1 0 WX+T
0 1 1 1 FAULT
1 0 0 0 HOLD
1 0 0 1 TRIM
1 0 1 0 BLANK
1 0 1 1 TURB
1 1 0 0 ROLL OFFSET
1 1 0 1 PITCH OFFSET
1 1 1 0 STAB GAIN
1 1 1 1 FAULT NO DISPLAY
7- TGT, 1 = DISPLAY
6- SLAVE, 1 = ALL ANNUNCIATIONS YELLOW, 0 = ALL
ANNUNCIATIONS CYAN(WXP-850 ONLY, 0 FOR
WXP-85)
5- GCS = 1 (WXP-850 ONLY, 0 FOR WXP-85)
4- WXP TYPE, 0 = WXP-85, 1 = WXP-850
3- TURB ALERT, 1 = DISPLAY
2-0- PADS = 0
041/1065 29/429 ANALOG I/O GENERAL SYNCHRO VALID BITS

PROCESSOR 15- PITCH SYNCHRO/AHRS DATA VALID
14- ROLL SYNCHRO/AHRS DATA VALID
13- HEADING SYNCHRO/AHRS DATA VALID
12- RESERVED
11- ADF SYNCHRO VALID
10- BRG-TO-WPT SYNCHRO VALID
9- DESIRED TRACK SYNCHRO VALID
8- 429 HEADING TEST MODE
7- DCP SELECTED HEADING SYNC = 1
6- DP DR ANNUNCIATOR IN VIEW CONTROL BIT
5- DP MSG ANNUNCIATOR IN VIEW CONTROL BIT
4- DP XTK ANNUNCIATOR IN VIEW CONTROL BIT
3- EFIS XMIT - DIST ELEVATION CORRECTION (ACT)
2- EFIS XMIT - DIST VALID (ACTIVE)
1- DATA ORIGIN (ACTIVE)
0- FULL-TIME ILS DATA ORIGIN

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
042/1066 2A/42A ANALOG I/O GENERAL DME GROUND SPEED (BINARY)

PROCESSOR 15- 2048 KNOTS (MSB)
14- 1024 KNOTS
13- 512 KNOTS
12- 256 KNOTS
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
043/1067 2B/42B ANALOG I/O GENERAL DME TTG (TIME-TO-GO) (BINARY)

PROCESSOR 15- 204.8 MINUTES (MSB)
14- 102.4 MINUTES
13- 51.2 MINUTES
12- 25.6 MINUTES
11- 12.8 MINUTES
10- 6.4 MINUTES
9- 3.2 MINUTES
8- 1.6 MINUTES
7- 0.8 MINUTE
6- 0.4 MINUTE
5- 0.2 MINUTE
4- 0.1 MINUTE
3-0- NOT DEFINED
044/1068 2C/42C ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETE INPUTS

PROCESSOR 15- DELAYED ILS MODE, 1 = VOR, 0 = ILS
14- STRAP 37
13- STRAP 31 LRN 6-WIRE ONLY = 0
12- STRAP 38
11- DRIVE TRANSFER = 0
10- COMPOSITE/OFF
9- OFF/COMPOSITE
8- STRAP 27 AIR DATA DISPLAY DISABLE
7- FLIGHT DIRECTOR OFF = 1
6- FLIGHT DIRECTOR IN-VIEW BIAS
5- FLIGHT DIRECTOR VALID HIGH FLAG
4- LRN/INS VALID
3- DG MODE = 1
2- ADF VALID = 1
1- STRAP 30 DUAL CHP
0- DG/SLAVED = 0/1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
045/1069 2D/42D ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETE INPUTS

PROCESSOR 15- RADIO ALTIMETER VALID
14- NOT DEFINED
13- ATTITUDE VALID
12- HEADING VALID
11- AIR DATA COMPUTER VALID
10- NOT DEFINED
9- GLIDESLOPE VALID
8- SPEED/AOA VALID
7- NOT DEFINED
6- ADF VALID =1
5- STRAP 30 DUAL CHP
4- DG/SLAVED = 0/1
3-0- NOT DEFINED
046/1070 2E/42E ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP SPEED DEVIATION FLAG IN VIEW
14- DP SPEED DEVIATION SCALE IN VIEW
13- DP V-BARS IN VIEW
12- DP V-BAR AIRCRAFT IN VIEW
11- DP CROSSPOINTERS IN VIEW
10- DP CROSSPOINTERS AIRCRAFT IN VIEW
9- DP FLIGHT DIRECTOR FLAG IN VIEW
8- FD COMMANDS IN VIEW
7- DP EXTREME ATTITUDE MODE IN VIEW
6- DP XSIDE DATA FLAG IN VIEW
5- DP DCP FLAG IN VIEW
4- DP ALTERNATE DCP ANNUNCIATOR IN VIEW
3- VNAV CLEAR PULSE
2-0- NOT DEFINED
047/1071 2F/42F ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (ALS = ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE)
15- DP HSI DEV BAR/ADI DEV POINTER IN VIEW
14- DP HSI/ADI DEV SCALE IN VIEW
13- DP COURSE POINTER IN VIEW
12- DP ALS FROM POINTER IN VIEW
11- DP ALS TO POINTER IN VIEW
10- DP HSI NAV DEV FLAG IN VIEW
9- DP ACT LATL SOURCE MENU MODE
8- DP COURSE CONTROL DOT
7- NOT DEFINED
6- LRN “FROM” STATUS
5- LRN “TO” STATUS
4- ANALOG VNI ON
3- DELAYED GW/MLS/ANALOG VNI VALID = 1
2- ONSIDE HEADING ERROR VALID
1- ACTIVE HEADING ERROR VALID
0- ACTIVE LATL SOURCE CROSS-SIDE DATA BEING
USED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
048/1072 30/430 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP DEV BAR IN VIEW
14- DP PLD DME NCD IN VIEW (YELLOW D)
13- DP COURSE PNTR IN VIEW
12- DP PLD DME FLAG IN VIEW CTL BIT
11- DP PLD DME HOLD IN VIEW CTL BIT
10- DP PRESEL LATL SOURCE NAV FLAG
9- DP PRESEL LATL SOURCE MENU MODE
8- DP COURSE CONTROL DOT
7- COMMON MAG VAR FLAG, 1 = VALID
6-1- NOT DEFINED
0- PLD CROSS-SIDE DATA IN USE
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- ACT BRG SOURCE LRN MODE
14- ACT BRG SOURCE VOR MODE
13- ACT BRG SOURCE ILS MODE
12- ACT BRG SOURCE ADF MODE
11- DP ACT BRG SOURCE PNTR IN VIEW
10- DP ACT BRG SOURCE NAV FLAG
9- DP ACT BRG SOURCE MENU MODE
8- MENU BOX/MASTER FLASH CONTROL BIT
049/1073 7- NOT DEFINED
6- SELECTED BRG CONFLICT, 1 = IN VIEW
5- MFD VOR TRUE/MAG CONFLICT, 1 = IN VIEW MFD
VOR TRUE/MAG
4- MFD LNV TRUE/MAG CONFLICT, 1 = IN VIEW
3- NOT DEFINED
2- WIND CROSS-SIDE DATA IN USE
1- ADC CROSS-SIDE USED
0- BEARING CROSS-SIDE DATA USED
050/1074 32/432 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE TTG (BINARY)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (MINUTES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 043/1067
051/1075 33/433 ANALOG I/O GENERAL CASE RELATED ACT LATL BEARING ANGLE
PROCESSOR 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
052/1076 34/434 ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETES, STRAPS (25, 26, 28, 29)/ACT DCP
PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 25 ALTERNATE ATTITUDE
14- STRAP 26 ALTERNATE HEADING
13- STRAP 28 ALTERNATE DCP
12- STRAP 29 RISING RUNWAY INHIBIT
11- MULTIPROCESSOR PORT BUSY
10- A/D CONVERTER STATUS
9- INTERRUPT REQUEST
8- ANALOG LRN TO/FROM
7- ALTITUDE ALERT
6- DCP RANGE D2
5- DCP RANGE D1
4- DCP RANGE D0
3- DCP WIND SWITCH
2- DCP VNAV ENABLE SWITCH
1- DCP WXR ENABLE SWITCH
0- RESERVED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
053/1077 35/435 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACT LATL SOURCE GROUND SPEED (BINARY)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 2048 KNOTS (MSB)
14- 1024 KNOTS
13- 512 KNOTS
12- 256 KNOTS
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3- 0.5 KNOT
2- 0.25 KNOT
1- 0.125 KNOT
0- 0.0625 KNOT
054/1078 36/436 ANALOG I/O GENERAL PRESET LATL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK AND EFIS
PROCESSOR XMIT BUS (DEGREES)
055/1079 37/437 ANALOG I/O GENERAL ACTIVE LATL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK PROCESSOR
PROCESSOR AND EFIS XMIT BUS (DEGREES)
056/1080 38/438 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE HEADING ERROR (FILTERED)

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
057/1081 39/439 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ADC INDICATED AIRSPEED (FILTERED, KNOTS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 512 KNOTS (MSB)
14- 256 KNOTS
13- 128 KNOTS
12- 64 KNOTS
11- 32 KNOTS
10- 16 KNOTS
9- 8 KNOTS
8- 4 KNOTS
7- 2 KNOTS
6- 1 KNOT
5- 0.5 KNOT
4- 0.25 KNOT
3- 0.125 KNOT
2- 0.0625 KNOT
1- 0.03125 KNOT
0- 0.015625 KNOT

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
058/1082 3A/43A ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP ACT LATL SOURCE ANNUN IN VIEW
14- DP PRESEL LATL SOURCE ANNUN IN VIEW
13- DP ACT BEARING SOURCE ANNUN IN VIEW
12- DP ATT SOURCE; ATT1/ATT2 = 0/1
11- DP B/C ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
10- DP ACT LATL SOURCE DME HOLD
9- GROUND SPEED DATA VALID
8- TTG DATA VALID
7- ACTIVE ATTITUDE SOURCE VALID
6- ACTIVE HEADING SOURCE VALID
5- ACTIVE HEADING TRUE/MAG STRAP = 0/1
4- ACTIVE HEADING DG/SLAVED = 0/1
3- HEADING TRUE/MAG = 0/1
2-0- NOT DEFINED
059/1083 3B/43B ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ADI ACTIVE VERTICAL DEV (VGU’S)
060/1084 3C/43C ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ADI MODE DISCRETES
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP VMO ALERT IN VIEW CTL BIT
14- DP VMO WARN IN VIEW CTL BIT
13- DP VMO YELLOW DIGITS IN VIEW CTL BIT
12- DP HSI VERTICAL DEV SCALE IN VIEW
11- DP HSI VERTICAL DEV PNTR IN VIEW
10- DP HSI VERTICAL DEV FLAG IN VIEW
9- DP DH ANNUN IN VIEW
8- DP DH SET IN VIEW
7- DP RADIO ALT IN VIEW
6- DP RADIO ALT FLAG IN VIEW
5- DP ATTITUDE SCALE AND SKY RASTER IN VIEW
4- DP ACTIVE ATTITUDE FLAG IN VIEW
3- BACK COURSE MODE
060/1084 2- ACTIVE GS VALID
1- NOT DEFINED
0- GS CAPTURE OR ILS WITH BAD FCS BUS
061/1085 3D/43D ANALOG I/O DISPLAY HSI MODE DISCRETES

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP DIGITAL SELECTED COURSE DATA IN VIEW
14- DP TRUE LUBBER IN VIEW
13- DP MAG LUBBER IN VIEW
12- DP HEADING FLAG IN VIEW
11- DP ACT LATL SOURCE LINEAR ANNUN IN VIEW
10- NOT DEFINED
9- DP REVERSE ADI LATL DEV PNTR SENSING
8- DP ACT LATL SOURCE ANGULAR ANNUN IN VIEW
7- DP SECTOR MODE SEL HDG LINE IN VIEW CTL BIT
6- DP DG ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
5- DP ACT MAP VALID CTL BIT
4- DP PRESEL MAP VALID CTL BIT
3-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
062/1086 3E/43E ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE LATL SOURCE DISTANCE (BINARY)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (VARIABLE RESOLUTION)
15- 2048 OR 204.8 MILES (MSB)
14- 1024 OR 102.4 MILES
13- 512 OR 51.2 MILES
12- 256 OR 25.6 MILES
11- 128 OR 12.8 MILES
10- 64 OR 6.4 MILES
9- 32 OR 3.2 MILES
8- 16 OR 1.6 MILES
7- 8 OR 0.8 MILE
6- 4 OR 0.4 MILE
5- 2 OR 0.2 MILE
4- 1 OR 0.1 MILE
3- 0.5 OR 0.05 MILE
2- 0.25 OR 0.025 MILE
1- 0.125 OR 0.0125 MILE
0- 0.0625 OR 0.00625 MILE
063/1087 3F/43F ANALOG I/O DISPLAY SPEED DEV OR AOA DEV

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 036/1060
064/1088 40/440 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE LATL SOURCE BRG-TO-WPT

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
065/1089 41/441 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PRESET LATL SOURCE BRG-TO-WPT

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
066/1090 42/442 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PRESET LATL SOURCE LATERAL DEV
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- NAV PULSE INHIBIT FOR LRN ALD TRUE/MAG
CHANGE
14- LRN TRUE/MAG = 1/0
13- LRN DISTANCE VALID = 1
12- DP BRG1 XSIDE USED ANNUN IN VIEW
067/1091 11- DP ACT LATL SOURCE DIST DATA-X-1
10- DP ACT LATL SOURCE DIST DATA-X-0.1
9- DP ACT LATL SOURCE DIST NCD IN VIEW
8- DP ACT LATL SOURCE DIST FLAG IN VIEW
7- LRN VALID = 1
6- LRN BRG VALID = 1
5- LRN MAP DISPLAY VALID = 1
4- LRN AP DEVIATION VALID = 1
3- LRN AP SELECTED COURSE DATA VALID = 1
2- LRN AP NAV SOURCE VALID = 1
1- LRN GROUND SPEED VALID = 1
0- LRN TTG VALID = 1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- VMO RED IAS DIGITS IN VIEW CTL BIT
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- DP HSI VERTICAL DEV POINTER COLOR
11- DP HSI B/C ANNUN IN VIEW, 0/1 = ONSIDE/XSIDE
10- DP ADI LATL DEV FLAG IN VIEW CTL BIT
9- NOT DEFINED
8- DP XSIDE ACT LATL SOURCE ANNUN IN VIEW
7- DP ADI VERTICAL DEV SOURCE TYPE
6- DP ADI VERTICAL DEV SOURCE TYPE
5- DP HSI VERTICAL DEV SOURCE TYPE
4- DP HSI VERTICAL DEV SOURCE TYPE
3-1- NOT DEFINED
0- ALT DEVIATION MAGNITUDE ENABLE = 1

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (ALS = ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE)
15- ALS LRN PORT
14- ALS VOR PORT
13- ALS ILS PORT
12- ALS LOC MODE AND ILS PORT
11- ACT APPROACH MODE
10- ALS SOURCE TRUE/MAG: 0/1
9- ACT BRG SOURCE TRUE/MAG: 0/1
8- PRE LATERAL SOURCE TRUE/MAG: 0/1
7- DP HDG TRUE/MAG CONFLICT = 1
6- DP DSP/DCP FALSE ANNUN IDENT BIT
5- ACT NAV PULSE INHIB FOR LRN ALD TRUE/MAG
CHANGE
4-0- NOT DEFINED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP NAV DATA FLAG IN VIEW
14- DP ALS GROUND SPEED NAV DATA IN VIEW
13- DP ALS TTG NAV DATA IN VIEW
12- DP ALS GROUND SPEED NCD IN VIEW
11- DP ALS TTG NCD IN VIEW
10- DP ALS OM IN VIEW
9- DP ALS MM IN VIEW
8- DP ALS IM IN VIEW
7-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
071/1095 47/447 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O ACT BINARY DIST FOR EFIS XMIT BUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 2 15- 2048 MILES (MSB)
14- 1024 MILES
13- 512 MILES
12- 256 MILES
11- 128 MILES
10- 64 MILES
9- 32 MILES
8- 16 MILES
7- 8 MILES
6- 4 MILES
5- 2 MILES
4- 1 MILE
3- 0.5 MILE
2- 0.25 MILE
1- 0.125 MILE
0- 0.0625 MILE
072/1096 48/448 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PITCH STEERING COMMAND, SCALED

073/1097 49/449 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ROLL STEERING COMMAND, SCALED

074/1098 4A/44A ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACCELERATION VECTOR

075/1099 4B/44B ANALOG I/O ANALOG I/O RADIO ALT (UNFILTERED) FOR CAT II
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AND 15-0- (FEET) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 035/1059
DIGITAL I/O
PROCESSOR NO 2
076/1100 4C/44C ANALOG I/O GENERAL HEADING ERROR (RAW)

PROCESSOR 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
077/1101 4D/44D TREND VECTOR DISPLAY TVG REF AIRSPEED (RAS)

GENERATOR PROCESSOR AND 15- NOT DEFINED
PROCESSOR ANALOG I/O 14- NOT DEFINED
PROCESSOR 13- NOT DEFINED
12- 256 KNOTS (MSB)
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
078/1102 4E/44E ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE/PRESEL DCP SELECT MASKS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AND 15- ACTIVE LRN2 SELECTED
XSIDE AIOP 14- ACTIVE LRN1 SELECTED
13- ACTIVE ADF2 SELECTED
12- ACTIVE ADF1 SELECTED
11- ACTIVE V/L2 SELECTED
10- ACTIVE V/L1 SELECTED
9- PRESEL LRN2 SELECTED
078/1102 8- PRESEL LRN1 SELECTED
7- PRESEL ADF2 SELECTED
6- PRESEL ADF1 SELECTED
5- PRESEL V/L2 SELECTED
4- PRESEL V/L1 SELECTED
3-0- NOT DEFINED
079/1103 4F/44F ANALOG I/O DISPLAY FCS ANNUNCIATORS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0
14- = 0 (GROWTH)
13- LATERAL CAPTURE ANNUN
7- = 0 (GROWTH)
6- VERTICAL ARM NO 1
3- = 0 (GROWTH)
2- = 0 (GROWTH)
1- AUTOPILOT ENGAGE
0- AUTOPILOT ENGAGE
080/1104 50/450 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING DISPLAY DATA
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
11- 128 DEGREES
10- 64 DEGREES
9- 32 DEGREES
8- 16 DEGREES
7- 8 DEGREES
6- 4 DEGREES
5- 2 DEGREES
4- 1 DEGREE
3-0- PADS = 0

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
081/1105 51/451 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP LOCALIZER COMP IN VIEW CTL BIT
14- DP GLIDESLOPE COMP IN VIEW CTL BIT
13- DP RADIO ALT COMP IN VIEW CTL BIT
12- DP PITCH COMP IN VIEW CTL BIT
11- DP ROLL COMP IN VIEW CTL BIT
10- DP HEADING COMP IN VIEW CTL BIT
9- DP IAS COMPARATOR IN VIEW
8- DP *** SPARE COMP IN VIEW
7-2- NOT DEFINED
1- LOCALIZER EXCESSIVE DEV TRIP VALID
0- GLIDESLOPE EXCESSIVE DEV TRIP VALID
082/1106 52/452 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AND 15- DP LOC EXCESS DEV IN VIEW CTL BIT
ANALOG I/O 14- DP GS EXCESS DEV IN VIEW CTL BIT
PROCESSSOR 13- DP IAS EXCESSIVE DEV UP IN VIEW CTL BIT
12- LOC VALID FOR 15 SECONDS
082/1106 11- GS VALID FOR 15 SECONDS
10- DP IAS EXCESSIVE DEV DOWN IN VIEW CTL BIT
9- CAT II REQUEST
8- CAT II LIGHT CONDITIONS
7- RADIO ALTITUDE LESS THAN 50 FEET
6- AL101 AND GREATER THAN 480 FEET
5- CAT II GO-AROUND MODE
4- CAT II REQUEST VALID
0- RADIO ALTITUDE VALID AND ON SCALE

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP AOA FLAG IN VIEW CTL BIT
14- ADC IAS VALID
13- DP REF AIRSPEED ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
12- DP AOA ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
11- DP IAS DATA IN VIEW CTL BIT
10- DP TVG DATA IN VIEW CTL BIT
9- NOT DEFINED
8- DP ANALOG FAST/SLOW SPD ANNUN IN VIEW CTL
BIT
7- DP ANALOG FAST/SLOW SPD FLAG IN VIEW CTL
BIT
6- NOT DEFINED
5- ADC VMO VALID
4- ADC TAS (TRUE AIRSPEED) VALID
3-0- NOT DEFINED
084/1108 54/454 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY HEADING ANGLE (ACTIVE)

085/1109 55/455 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ROLL ANGLE (ACTIVE)


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
086/1110 56/456 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PITCH ANGLE (ACTIVE)

087/1111 57/457 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O HEADING ERROR (ACT) FOR DPU CSDB XMIT BUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 2 SENSE: POSITIVE = STEER LEFT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
088/1112 58/458 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY FD ANNUNCIATORS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0 (GROWTH)
14- PAD = 0 (GROWTH)
13- LATERAL ARM ANNUNCIATOR
7- PAD = 0 (GROWTH)
3- PAD = 0 (GROWTH)
2- LEFT/RIGHT
088/1112 1- LEFT/RIGHT
0- LEFT/RIGHT
089/1113 59/459 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O SEL COURSE ERROR (ACT) FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
090/1114 5A/45A ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O LATERAL DEV (ACTIVE) FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 006/1030
091/1115 5B/45B TREND VECTOR ANALOG I/O TVG (ACCELERATION 10 SECONDS)

GENERATOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (KNOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 057/1081
PROCESSOR
092/1116 5C/45C ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O ACTIVE VERT DEV FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS SENSE:
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 2 POSITIVE = STEER LEFT
093/1117 5D/45D ANALOG I/O DISPLAY IAS DISPLAY BASE OFFSET

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU’S) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 036/1060
094/1118 5E/45E ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O FULL-TIME LOC DEV FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
095/1119 5F/45F ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O FULL-TIME GLIDESLOPE DEV FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 2 BUS SENSE: POSITIVE = STEER DOWN

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
096/1120 60/460 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O EFIS XMIT BUS DISCRETES
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 2 15- NAV PULSE
14- GLIDESLOPE DISPLAY ON
13- VNAV DISPLAY ON
12- ACTIVE LIN/ANG
11- ACTIVE SELECTED COURSE VALID
10- CRS ERROR VALID
9- ACTIVE LNAV SCALE CODE
8- ACTIVE LNAV SCALE CODE
7- ACTIVE TO
6- ACTIVE FROM
5- DH TRIP
4- ACTIVE LATL DEV VALID
3- ACTIVE VERT DEV VALID
2- ACTIVE DME HOLD
1- FULL-TIME LOC DEV VALID
0- FULL-TIME GS DEV VALID
097/1121 61/461 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY SCALED HSI VNAV DEVIATION

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU’S) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 036/1060
098/1122 62/462 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY FD ANNUNCIATORS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0 (GROWTH)
12- VERTICAL CAPTURE
098/1122 9- VERTICAL CAPTURE
8- VERTICAL CAPTURE
7- PAD = 0 (GROWTH)
6- PAD = 0 (GROWTH)
3- PAD = 0 (GROWTH)
2- PAD = 0 (GROWTH)
1- YAW DAMPER (YD)
0- YAW DAMPER (YD)
099/1123 63/463 ANALOG I/O GENERAL ACTIVE/PRESET SOURCE TYPE

PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0
14-10- ACTIVE SOURCE TYPE
9- PAD = 0
8-4- PRESET SOURCE TYPE
3-0- PADS = 0
100/1124 64/464 ANALOG I/O GENERAL BEARING/MENU SOURCE TYPE

PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0
14-10- BEARING SOURCE TYPE
9- MENU COLOR, 1 = YELLOW, 0 = GREEN
8-4- MENU SOURCE TYPE
3-0- PADS = 0

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
101/1125 65/465 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT (BCD MILES)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR AND LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 80 HEX, BITS 31-20 (HIGH BYTES)
ANALOG I/O 15- STATUS (0,0 OR 1,1 = VALID)
PROCESSOR 14- STATUS
13- 2000 MILES (MSB)
12- 1000 MILES
11- 800 MILES
10- 400 MILES
9- 200 MILES
8- 100 MILES
7- 80 MILES
6- 40 MILES
5- 20 MILES
4- 10 MILES
3-0- NOT DEFINED
102/1126 66/466 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT (BCD MILES)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR AND LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 80 HEX, BITS 19-12 (LOW BYTES)
ANALOG I/O 15- 8 MILES (MSB)
PROCESSOR 14- 4 MILES
13- 2 MILES
12- 1 MILE
11- 0.8 MILE
10- 0.4 MILE
9- 0.2 MILE
8- 0.1 MILE
7-0- NOT DEFINED
103/1127 67/467 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR BINARY NAUTICAL MILES, HIGH 3 BYTES
PROCESSED LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 80 HEX
15- VALID = 0 IF 6-WIRE AND ANALOG, IF DISTANCE
ONLY IS VALID. IF 6-WIRE ONLY, IF DISTANCE,
BEARING, AND COURSE ARE VALID.
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- PAD = 0
10- PAD = 0
9- PAD = 0
7- PAD = 0
6- 2048 NMI (MSB)
5- 1024 NMI
4- 512 NMI
3-0- PADS = 0

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
104/1128 68/468 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR BINARY NAUTICAL MILES, LOW 12 BYTES
PROCESSED LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 80 HEX
15- 256 NMI (MSB)
14- 128 NMI
13- 64 NMI
12- 32 NMI
11- 16 NMI
10- 8 NMI
9- 4 NMI
8- 2 NMI
7- 1 NMI
6- 0.5 NMI
5- 0.25 NMI
4- 0.125 NMI
3- 0.0625 NMI
2- 0.03125 NMI
1- 0.015625 NMI
0- 0.0078125 NMI
105/1129 69/469 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY LRN BEARING-TO-WAYPOINT

PROCESSOR OR PROCESSOR AND LRN 6-WIRE LABEL B2 HEX, BITS 29-17
DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR MAG VAR CORRECTED IF LRN MAG REFERENCE
15- 180.0 DEGREES (MSB)
14- 90.0 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- 0.0439453125 DEGREE
2-0- NOT DEFINED
106/1130 6A/46A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DESIRED TRACK
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR AND LRN 6-WIRE LABEL F6 HEX, BITS 29-17
ANALOG I/O 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
PROCESSOR MAG VAR CORRECTED IF LRN MAG REFERENCE

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
107/1131 6B/46B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN WAYPOINT NUMBER (BINARY)

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL B2 HEX, BITS
14-8
15- VALID = 0 IF LRN WAYPOINT TO NUMBER IS VALID
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- PAD = 0
10- 64 BINARY (MSB)
9- 32
8- 16
7- 8
6- 4
5- 2
4- 1
3-0- NOT DEFINED
108/1132 6C/46C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DISTANCE TO--TO+1 WAYPOINT

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR BINARY NAUTICAL MILES
LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 76 HEX, BITS 28-17
15- 256 NMI (MSB)
14- 128 NMI
13- 64 NMI
12- 32 NMI
11- 16 NMI
10- 8 NMI
9- 4 NMI
8- 2 NMI
7- 1 NMI
6- 0.5 NMI
5- 0.25 NMI
4- 0.125 NMI
3-0- NOT USED
109/1133 6D/46D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DESIRED TRACK TO--TO+1 WAYPOINT
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL F6 HEX, BITS 29-17
2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
MAG VAR CORRECTED IF LRN MAG REFERENCE

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
110/1134 6E/46E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN TO+1 BINARY WAYPOINT NUMBER
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 76 HEX, BITS
14-8
15- VALID = 0 IF LRN WAYPOINT TO+1 NUMBER IS
VALID AND TO+1 DISTANCE IS VALID AND TO+1
COURSE IS VALID AND IF A MAG COMPASS THEN
MAG VAR VALID
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- PAD = 0
10- 64 BINARY (MSB)
110/1134 9- 32
8- 16
7- 8
6- 4
5- 2
4- 1
3-0- NOT DEFINED
111/1135 6F/46F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DIST TO+1--TO+2

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR BINARY NAUTICAL MILES
LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 76 HEX, BITS 28-17
112/1136 70/470 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DESIRED TRACK TO+1--TO+2

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL F6 HEX, BITS 29-17
MAG VAR CORRECTED IF LRN MAG REFERENCE
113/1137 71/471 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN BINARY WAYPOINT NUMBER TO+2
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 76 HEX, BITS
14-8
114/1138 72/472 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN TIME-TO-GO (BCD MINUTES)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 40 HEX, BITS 31-16
15- STATUS
14- STATUS
13- 200 MINUTES
12- 100 MINUTES
11- 80 MINUTES
10- 40 MINUTES
9- 20 MINUTES
8- 10 MINUTES
7- 8 MINUTES
6- 4 MINUTES
5- 2 MINUTES
4- 1 MINUTE
3- 0.8 MINUTE
2- 0.4 MINUTE
1- 0.2 MINUTE
0- 0.1 MINUTE

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
115/1139 73/473 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN GROUND SPEED (BCD KNOTS)
15- STATUS
14- STATUS
13- 2000 KNOTS
12- 1000 KNOTS
11- 800 KNOTS
10- 400 KNOTS
9- 200 KNOTS
8- 100 KNOTS
7- 80 KNOTS
6- 40 KNOTS
5- 20 KNOTS
4- 10 KNOTS
3- 8 KNOTS
115/1139 2- 4 KNOTS
1- 2 KNOTS
0- 1 KNOT
116/1140 74/474 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL LRN BANK COMMAND

PROCESSOR NO 2 LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 8A HEX, BITS 30-19
14- 90.0 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- BANK COMMAND VALID = 1
2- BANK COMMAND AVAILABLE = 1
1-0- NOT DEFINED
117/1141 75/475 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL B6 HEX, BITS 28-19
15- 8 DOTS (MSB)
14- 4 DOTS
13- 2 DOTS
12- 1 DOT
11- 0.5 DOT
10- 0.25 DOT
9- 0.125 DOT
8- 0.0625 DOT
7- 0.03125 DOT
6- 0.015625 DOT
5- 0.0078125 DOT
4- 0.00390625 DOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
118/1142 76/476 ANALOG I/O GENERAL LRN DESIRED TRACK

PROCESSOR OR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
DIGITAL I/O 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
PROCESSOR NO 2
119/1143 77/477 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 6-WIRE STATUS
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR MULTIPLE BITS
15- NOT DEFINED
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- APPROACH MODE = 1
11- HSI VALID = 1
10- TRUE MODE = 1
9- “FROM” IN VIEW
8- “TO” IN VIEW
7- MESSAGE ALERT
6- CROSSTRACK WARN
5- DEAD RECKONING
119/1143 4- WAYPOINT ALERT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
120/1144 78/478 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN WIND VELOCITY (BINARY KNOTS)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR AND LRN 6-WIRE LABEL B0 HEX, BITS 31-20
DIGITAL I/O THE STATUS INCORPORATES THE WIND VELOCITY
PROCESSOR NO 1 ALONG WITH THE WIND DIRECTION STATUS. 0 IF
VALID AND 1 IF INVALID.
15- VALID = 0 IF WIND DATA IS VALID
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- 256 KNOTS (MSB)
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3-0- NOT USED
121/1145 79/479 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN WIND DIRECTION

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR AND LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 70 HEX, BITS 31-20
DIGITAL I/O BINARY ANGULAR FORMAT IN DEGREES. WIND
PROCESSOR NO 1 ANGLE TRUE FROM WHICH THE WIND IS BLOWING.
MAG VAR CORRECTED IF LRN REFERENCE IS MAG.
WIND WITH AIRPLANE HEADING.
122/1146 7A/47A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN MAGNETIC VARIATION (MAG VAR)
BINARY ANGULAR DATA. THE MAG VAR DATA IS
ALREADY CORRECTED FOR EAST OR WEST
VARIATION. THEREFORE, ADD THE MAG VAR TO THE
DATA TO BE CORRECTED.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
123/1147 7B/47B DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN DATA FLAG

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- DISTANCE VALID (LABEL 80 HEX)
14- GROUND SPEED VALID (LABEL 50 HEX)
13- TIME-TO-GO VALID (LABEL 40 HEX)
12- WIND VELOCITY AND WIND DIRECTION VALID
(LABELS 70, 80 HEX)
11-0- NOT DEFINED
124/1148 7C/47C DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP MODES
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- RA TEST
14- DH CONTROL
13- SECTOR WITH MAP MODE
12- SECTOR MODE
11- HSI MODE
10- ELAPSED TIME
9- SPEED
8- TIME-TO-GO
7- WIND
6- VNAV
5- WX SWITCH
124/1148 4- DCP CAT II MODE B
3- ALT ALERT
2- MAP RANGE BITS 2 1 0 RANGES
1- MAP RANGE 0 0 0 RNG 0
0 1 0 RNG 2
0 1 1 RNG 3
1 0 0 RNG 4
1 0 1 RNG 5
125/1149 7D/47D ANALOG I/O GENERAL DCP MODE (ACTIVE)

PROCESSOR 15- RA TEST
14- DH CONTROL
13- MAP MODE
12- SECTOR MODE
11- HSI MODE
10- ELAPSED TIME
9- SPEED
8- TIME-TO-GO
7- WIND
6- VNAV
5- WX SWITCH
4- NOT USED
3- ALT ALERT
2- MAP RANGE BITS 2 1 0 RANGES
0 1 0 RNG 2
0 1 1 RNG 3
1 0 0 RNG 4
1 0 1 RNG 5

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
126/1150 7E/47E DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP ELAPSED TIME (MINUTES/SECONDS) AND
PROCESSOR NO 1 STATUS
15- M/S 80
14- M/S 40
13- M/S 20
12- M/S 10
11- M/S 8
10- M/S 4
9- M/S 2
8- M/S 1
7- ROM FAULT
6- RAM FAULT
5- SWITCH SHIFT REGISTER FAULT
4- AUX SHIFT REGISTER FAULT
3- SWITCH AUX SHIFT REGISTER FAULT
2- EN TX LABEL 86 = 1 (DCP ONLY)
1- CAT II REQUEST
0- DSP = 1, DCP = 0
DSP-84 DEFINITIONS
7- PAD = 0
6- PAD = 0
5- RESERVED COMPOSITE DOWN
4- RESERVED COMPOSITE UP
3- RESERVED HOVER MODE
2- ENABLE TX LABEL 86 = 1
126/1150 1- CAT II A REQUEST
0- DSP IDENT = 1
127/1151 7F/47F ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE DCP ET (MINUTES/SECONDS) AND STATUS
128/1152 80/480 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP ET (HOURS/MINUTES)

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- H/M 80
14- H/M 40
13- H/M 20
12- H/M 10
11- H/M 8
10- H/M 4
9- H/M 2
8- H/M 1
7-0- SPARE
129/1153 81/481 ANALOG I/O GENERAL ACTIVE DCP ET - HOURS/MINUTE

PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 128/1152

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
130/1154 82/482 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP BEARING SENSOR SELECT

PROCESSOR NO 1 DSP-84 SINGLE BEARING POINTER SELECT
15- LRN2
14- LRN1
13- ADF2
12- ADF1
11- VOR2
10- VOR1
9- TCN 2
8- TCN 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
131/1155 83/483 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP PRESELECT COURSE SENSOR

PROCESSOR NO 1 SELECT
15- LRN2
14- LRN1
13- ADF2
12- ADF1
11- VOR2
10- VOR1
9- TCN 2
8- TCN 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
132/1156 84/484 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP ACTIVE COURSE SENSOR SELECT
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- LRN2
14- LRN1
13- ADF2 (TCN2 - DSP-84)
12- ADF1 (TCN1 - DSP-84)
11- VOR/LOC2
10- VOR/LOC1
9- MLS 2
8- MLS 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
133/1157 85/485 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP MENU CURSOR MASK

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- LRN2
14- LRN1
13- ADF2
12- ADF1
11- VOR/LOC2
10- VOR/LOC1
9- MLS 2
8- MLS 1
THE FOLLOWING BITS ARE FOR THE DSP-84 ONLY;
FOR ALL OTHER CONTROLLERS THESE ARE LOGIC 0.
7- RESERVED SINGLE BEARING POINTER MENU
6- RESERVED PRESET COURSE MENU
5- RESERVED ACTIVE COURSE MENU
4- RESERVED DOUBLE BEARING POINTER MENU
3- SINGLE SENSOR = 1
2- SPARE STRAP 16 (P2-50)
1- PRESET COURSE CONTROL
0- ACTIVE COURSE CONTROL

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
134/1158 86/486 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP BCD MONTH AND DAY DATE
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 80 MONTHS
14- 40 MONTHS
13- 20 MONTHS
12- 10 MONTHS
11- 8 MONTHS
10- 4 MONTHS
9- 2 MONTHS
8- 1 MONTH
7- 80 DAYS
6- 40 DAYS
5- 20 DAYS
4- 10 DAYS
3- 8 DAYS
2- 4 DAYS
1- 2 DAYS
0- 1 DAY
135/1159 87/487 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ANNUNCIATORS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- ANNUN INPUT 24
14- ANNUN INPUT 23
13- ANNUN INPUT 22
12- ANNUN INPUT 21
11- ANNUN INPUT 20
10- ANNUN INPUT 19
9- ANNUN INPUT 18
8- ANNUN INPUT 17
7- ANNUN INPUT 16
6- ANNUN INPUT 15
5- ANNUN INPUT 14
4- ANNUN INPUT 13
3- ANNUN INPUT 12
2- ANNUN INPUT 11
1- ANNUN INPUT 10
0- ANNUN INPUT 9
136/1160 88/488 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ANNUNCIATORS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- ANNUN INPUT 8
14- ANNUN INPUT 7
13- ANNUN INPUT 6
12- ANNUN INPUT 5
11- ANNUN INPUT 4
10- ANNUN INPUT 3
9- ANNUN INPUT 2
8- ANNUN INPUT 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
137/1161 89/489 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ACTIVE COURSE DATA

PROCESSOR NO 1 SCALING FACTOR OF 360/4096

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
138/1162 8A/48A DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP BCD YEAR FOR THE DATE
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 80 YEARS
14- 40 YEARS
13- 20 YEARS
12- 10 YEARS
11- 8 YEARS
10- 4 YEARS
9- 2 YEARS
8- 1 YEAR
7-0- NOT DEFINED
139/1163 8B/48B DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP PRESELECTED COURSE DATA

140/1164 8C/48C DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP BCD CPCI

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- D3 CPCI DIGIT 1
14- D2
13- D1
12- D0
11- D3 CPCI DIGIT 2
10- D2
9- D1
8- D0
7- D3 CPCI DIGIT 3
6- D2
5- D1
4- D0
3- D3 CPCI DIGIT 4
2- D2
1- D1
0- D0
141/1165 8D/48D DIGITAL I/O GENERAL SELECTED HEADING

142/1166 8E/48E DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP BCD CPCI

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- D3 CPCI DIGIT 5
14- D2
13- D1
12- D0
11- D3 CPCI DIGIT 6
10- D2
9- D1
8- D0
7-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
143/1167 8F/48F DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP DECISION HEIGHT (BINARY 0 TO 999 FEET)
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- RESERVED
14- RESERVED
13- 512 FEET (MSB)
12- 256 FEET
11- 128 FEET
10- 64 FEET
9- 32 FEET
8- 16 FEET
7- 8 FEET
6- 4 FEET
5- 2 FEET
4- 1 FOOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
144/1168 90/490 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE DCP DECISION HEIGHT (BINARY 0 TO 999
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR FEET)
145/1169 91/491 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP SPARE

PROCESSOR NO 1 15-8- SPARES
7-0- NOT DEFINED
146/1170 92/492 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- FREQ VALID = 1
14- DISTANCE VALID = 1
13- (0,1) SEARCH, (1,0) PRETRACK
11- DME HOLD ON = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
9- (0,1) CHANNEL 1 ACTIVE
7-0- NOT DEFINED
147/1171 93/493 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME FREQUENCY - CHANNEL 1 BCD
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 80 MHz
14- 40 MHz
13- 20 MHz
12- 10 MHz
11- 8 MHz
10- 4 MHz
9- 2 MHz
8- 1 MHz
7- 0.8 MHz
6- 0.4 MHz
5- 0.2 MHz
4- 0.1 MHz
3- 0.08 MHz
2- 0.04 MHz
1- 0.02 MHz
0- 0.01 MHz

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
148/1172 94/494 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 1

PROCESSOR NO 1 NAUTICAL MILES

PROCESSOR NO 1 BCD NAUTICAL MILES
15- 800 NMI
14- 400 NMI
13- 200 NMI
12- 100 NMI
11- 80 NMI
10- 40 NMI
9- 20 NMI
8- 10 NMI
7- 8 NMI
6- 4 NMI
5- 2 NMI
4- 1 NMI
3- 0.8 NMI
2- 0.4 NMI
1- 0.2 NMI
0- 0.1 NMI
150/1174 96/496 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME STATUS - CHANNEL 2

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- FREQ VALID = 1
11- DME HOLD ON = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
151/1175 97/497 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME FREQUENCY - CHANNEL 2

PROCESSOR NO 1 BCD



DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
154/1178 9A/49A DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 (TTG AND VELOCITY)
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- TIME-TO-GO AND VELOCITY VALID = 1
14- PAD = 0
11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
155/1179 9B/49B DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME TIME-TO-GO - CHANNEL 1

PROCESSOR NO 1 BCD MINUTES
15- PAD = 0
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- 100 MINUTES
11- 80 MINUTES
10- 40 MINUTES
9- 20 MINUTES
8- 10 MINUTES
7- 8 MINUTES
6- 4 MINUTES
5- 2 MINUTES
4- 1 MINUTE
3- 0.8 MINUTE
2- 0.4 MINUTE
1- 0.2 MINUTE
0- 0.1 MINUTE
156/1180 9C/49C DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME GROUND SPEED - CHANNEL 1

PROCESSOR NO 1 BCD KNOTS
15- PAD = 0
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- 800 KNOTS
10- 400 KNOTS
9- 200 KNOTS
8- 100 KNOTS
7- 80 KNOTS
6- 40 KNOTS
5- 20 KNOTS
4- 10 KNOTS
3- 8 KNOTS
2- 4 KNOTS
1- 2 KNOTS
0- 1 KNOT

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
157/1181 9D/49D DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME STATUS - CHANNEL 2 (TTG AND VELOCITY)
14- PAD = 0
11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
158/1182 9E/49E DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME TIME-TO-GO - CHANNEL 2

159/1183 9F/49F DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME GROUND SPEED - CHANNEL 2

160/1184 A0/4A0 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 IDENT

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- IDENT VALID = 1
14- ANALOG AND 568 DATA
11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
161/1185 A1/4A1 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 1

PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR THE ASCII CHARACTER WILL HAVE 20H SUBTRACTED
FROM IT, ROTATED TWICE TO THE LEFT (WITH
TRAILING 0’S), AND PUT IN THE POSITION SHOWN.
THE CHARACTER WILL BE USED DIRECTLY IN EFIS
AS THE CHARACTER ADDRESS.
15- 1 = INVALID, 1ST CHARACTER ONLY
14-12 PAD = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5- CHARACTER
4- CHARACTER (LSB)
3-0- PAD = 0

PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 161/1185


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE

165/1189 A5/4A5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME IDENT STATUS - CHANNEL 2

13- (0,1) = SEARCH, (1,0) = PRETRACK
12- (0,1) = SEARCH, (1,0) = PRETRACK
11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
166/1190 A6/4A6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME IDENT - CHANNEL 2

15- 1 = INVALID, 1ST CHARACTER ONLY
14-12 PAD = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5- CHARACTER
4- CHARACTER (LSB)
3-0- PAD = 0



170/1194 AA/4AA DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O DME 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
171/1195 AB/4AB DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O DME 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
172/1196 AC/4AC DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O VOR 429 DATA

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- GS VALID = 1
14- LOC VALID = 1
13- FREQUENCY VALID = 1
12- BEARING VALID = 1
11- MAINT WORD VALID = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
9- ILS MODE (1 = ILS, 0 = VOR)
8- NOT DEFINED
7- ILS GS IN TEST = 1
6- ILS LOC IN TEST = 1
5-1- NOT DEFINED
0- MARKER SENS, LOW = 1
173/1197 AD/4AD DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O VOR 429 BEARING FROM A/C TO STATION
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
15- 180 DEGREES MSB
14- 90 DEGREES MSB
13- 45 DEGREES MSB
12- 22.5 DEGREES MSB
7- 0.703125 DEGREE MSB
173/1197 6- 0.3515625 DEGREE MSB
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE MSB
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE MSB
3- PAD
2- INNER MARKER ON = 1
1- MIDDLE MARKER ON = 1
0- OUTER MARKER ON = 1
174/1198 AE/4AE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VOR 429 FREQUENCY MHZ (BCD)
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- PAD
14- 40 MHz
13- 20 MHz
12- 10 MHz
11- 8 MHz
10- 4 MHz
9- 2 MHz
8- 1 MHz
7- 0.8 MHz
6- 0.4 MHz
5- 0.2 MHz
4- 0.1 MHz
3- 0.08 MHz
2- 0.04 MHz
1- 0.02 MHz
0- 0.01 MHz

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
175/1199 AF/4AF DIGITAL IO VOR 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION

PROCESSOR NO 3 2’S COMPLEMENT DDM (FULL SCALE = 0.175 DDM)
15- 0.8 DDM MSB
14- 0.4
13- 0.2
12- 0.1
11- 0.05
10- 0.025
9- 0.0125
8- 0.00625
7- 0.003125
6- 0.0015625
5- 0.00078125
4- 0.000390625
3- PAD
2- PAD
1- PAD
0- PAD
176/1200 B0/4B0 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O VOR 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (PROCESSED)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DOTS (POSITIVE = FLY UP)
177/1201 B1/4B1 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VOR 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION
PROCESSOR NO 2 2’S COMPLEMENT DDM
POSITIVE = FLY RIGHT (FULL SCALE = 0.155)
15- 0.4 DDM HSB
14- 0.2
13- 0.1
12- 0.05
11- 0.025
10- 0.0125
9- 0.00625
8- 0.003125
7- 0.0015625
6- 0.00078125
5- 0.000390625
4- 0.0001953125
3- PAD
2- PAD
1- PAD
0- PAD
178/1202 B2/4B2 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O VOR 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (PROCESSED)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
179/1203 B3/4B3 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL SPARE
PROCESSOR NO 1
PROCESSOR NO 1
PROCESSOR NO 1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
182/1206 B6/4B6 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O LRN VERTICAL DEVIATION

PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT
15- 16384 FEET (MSB)
14- 8192 FEET
13- 4096 FEET
12- 2048 FEET
11- 1024 FEET
10- 512 FEET
9- 256 FEET
8- 128 FEET
7- 64 FEET
6- 32 FEET
5- 16 FEET
4- 8 FEET
3- 4 FEET
2- 2 FEET
1- 1 FOOT
0- 0.5 FOOT
183/1207 B7/4B7 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O LRN 429 PITCH COMMAND
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
184/1208 B8/4B8 RESERVED
185/1209 B9/4B9 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VOR DATA STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- VOR VALID = 1
14- FREQ VALID = 1
13- 2/5 TUNE ENABLE = 1
12- MARKER SENSE LOW = 1
11- ROT MOD FILTER ACTIVATION = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
186/1210 BA/4BA DIGITAL I/O GENERAL MARKER BEARING
PROCESSOR NO 1 FROM A/C TO STATION AND MARKERS
187/1211 BB/4BB DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VOR BEARING

PROCESSOR NO 1 FROM A/C TO STATION

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
188/1212 BC/4BC DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VOR FREQUENCY (BCD)

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- PAD = 0
14- 40 MHz
13- 20 MHz
12- 10 MHz
11- 8 MHz
10- 4 MHz
9- 2 MHz
8- 1 MHz
7- 0.8 MHz
6- 0.4 MHz
5- 0.2 MHz
4- 0.1 MHz
3- 0.08 MHz
2- 0.04 MHz
1- 0.02 MHz
0- 0.01 MHz
189/1213 BD/4BD DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ILS STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- GS VALID = 1
14- LOC VALID = 1
13- PAD = 0
12- MARKER SENSE LOW = 1
11- GLS/NO, NO = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
190/1214 BE/4BE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VOR GLIDESLOPE DEV
GS DEV PERCENT/100 DDM (FULL SCALE = 0.175)
15- 0.8 DDM (MSB)
14- 0.4 DDM
13- 0.2 DDM
12- 0.1 DDM
11- 0.05 DDM
10- 0.025 DDM
9- 0.125 DDM
8- 0.0625 DDM
7- 0.03125 DDM
6- 0.015625 DDM
5- 0.0078125 DDM
4- 0.00390625 DDM
3- PAD = 0
2- INNER MARKER ON = 1
1- MIDDLE MARKER ON = 1
0- OUTER MARKER ON = 1
191/1215 BF/4BF DIGITAL I/O GENERAL GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION
PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT DOTS

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
192/1216 C0/4C0 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL LOCALIZER DEVIATION

LOC DEV PERCENT/100 DDM (FULL SCALE = 0.155)
15- 0.40 DDM (MSB)
14- 0.2 DDM
13- 0.1 DDM
12- 0.05 DDM
11- 0.025 DDM
10- 0.125 DDM
9- 0.0625 DDM
8- 0.03125 DDM
7- 0.015625 DDM
6- 0.0078125 DDM
5- 0.00390625 DDM
4- 0.001953125 DDM
3-0- PADS = 0
193/1217 C1/4C1 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VOR LOCALIZER DEVIATION

PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT DOTS
194/1218 C2/4C2 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS RATES (BODY AXIS) STATUS
PROCESSOR NO 2 15- DATA VALID = 1
14- PAD = 0
13- DG MODE ON = 1
12- STRUT SWITCH GROUND = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- PAD = 0
195/1219 C3/4C3 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS PITCH RATE

PROCESSOR NO 2 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES/SECOND
15- 256 DEGREES/SECOND (MSB)
14- 128 DEGREES/SECOND
9- 4 DEGREES/SECOND
8- 2 DEGREES/SECOND
7- 1 DEGREE/SECOND
6- 0.5 DEGREE/SECOND
196/1220 C4/4C4 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS ROLL RATE


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
197/1221 C5/4C5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS YAW RATE

198/1222 C6/4C6 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS ACCELERATIONS (BODY AXIS)
PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT
15- DATA VALID = 1
14- PAD = 0
13- DG MODE = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-5- PAD = 0
4- AHRS BODY AXIS ACCELERATION VALID = 1
3-0- PAD = 0
199/1223 C7/4C7 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 10 G’S (MSB)
14- 5 G’S
13- 2.5 G’S
12- 1.25 G’S
11- 0.625 G’S
10- 0.3125 G’S
9- 0.15625 G’S
8- 0.0390625 G’S
7- 0.01953125 G’S
6- 0.009765625 G’S
5- 0.0048828125 G’S
4- 0.00244140625 G’S
3- 0.001220703125 G’S
2- 0.0006103525625 G’S
1- 0.00030517678125 G’S
0- 0.000152588390625 G’S
200/1224 C8/4C8 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS LATERAL ACCELERATION

PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT G’S
201/1225 C9/4C9 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS NORMAL ACCELERATION

202/1226 CA/4CA DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS ACCELERATIONS STATUS
15- DATA VALID = 1
14- PAD = 0
13- DG MODE ON = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
203/1227 CB/4CB DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS ALONG HEADING ACCELERATION

204/1228 CC/4CC DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS CROSS HEADING ACCELERATION

205/1229 CD/4CD DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS VERTICAL ACCELERATION

206/1230 CE/4CE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS ATTITUDE STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- ATTITUDE VALID = 1
14- HEADING VALID = 1
13- RESERVED (REV MODE 2)
12- REV MODE 1, ON = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
207/1231 CF/4CF DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS PITCH ATTITUDE

14- 90.0 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- 0.0439453125 DEGREE
2- 0.02197265625 DEGREE
1- 0.010986328125 DEGREE
0- 0.0054931640625 DEGREE
208/1232 D0/4D0 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS ROLL ATTITUDE

PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
209/1233 D1/4D1 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS MAGNETIC HEADING


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
210/1234 D2/4D2 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS CONTROL STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 2 15- ATTITUDE VALID = 1
14- HEADING VALID = 1
13- RESERVED (REV MODE 2)
12- REV MODE 1, ON = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1 (STIM)
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
211/1235 D3/4D3 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS MAGNETIC HEADING

212/1236 D4/4D4 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS LATITUDE

213/1237 D5/4D5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS STIM MODE

DIFFERENCE LEFT COMPASS CARD SLAVING AND 2-
DIGIT STIM MODE
15- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
7- 10 DEGREES DIFF LEFT (MSB)
6- 5 DEGREES DIFF LEFT
5- 2.5 DEGREES DIFF LEFT
4- 1.25 DEGREES DIFF LEFT
3- 0.625 DEGREE DIFF LEFT
214/1238 D6/4D6 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ADI STIM DISPLAY

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- IF = 1, STIM XX IN VIEW ON ADI
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- NOT DEFINED
3-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
215/1239 D7/4D7 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY HSI STIM DISPLAY

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- IF = 1, STIM XX IN VIEW ON HSI
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- NOT DEFINED
3-0- NOT DEFINED
216/1240 D8/4D8 ANALOG I/O GENERAL ADF BEARING ANALOG

PROCESSOR AIOP SYNCHRO DATA
217/1241 D9/4D9 RESERVED
218/1242 DA/4DA DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ANNUNCIATIONS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- GLIDESLOPE EXTENSION
14- GLIDESLOPE CAPTURE
13- GLIDESLOPE ARM
12- NAV 1 CAPTURE
11- NAV 1 ARM
10- SPEED HOLD
9- ALTITUDE PRESELECT CAPTURE
8- ALTITUDE PRESELECT ARM
7-0- NOT DEFINED
219/1243 DB/4DB DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ANNUNCIATIONS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- VERTICAL SPEED
14- CLIMB
13- GO-AROUND PITCH
12- GO-AROUND ROLL
11- PITCH
10- ROLL
9- VNAV CAPTURE
8- VNAV ARM
7- APPROACH CAPTURE
6- APPROACH ARM
5- SYNC SWITCH
4- REPORT CODE BAD
3- ALTITUDE HOLD
2- IAS HOLD
1- MACH HOLD
0- TEST

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
220/1244 DC/4DC DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ANNUNCIATIONS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- NAV 2 CAPTURE
14- NAV 2 ARMED
13- SPARE
12- AP CAPTURE ABORT
11- ALTITUDE PRESELECT CAPTURE
10- ALTITUDE PRESELECT TRACK
9- CROSS-CHANNEL SYNC
8- CERT
7- BACK COURSE
6- DEAD RECKONING
5- HEADING SELECT
4- HEADING HOLD
3- TURBULENCE
2- TRANSFER
1- DESCENT
0- HALF BANK
221/1245 DD/4DD DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ANNUNCIATIONS
PROCESSOR NO 1 15-11- SPARES 10- NAC TEST
9- V-BAR IN VIEW
8- STEERING VALID
7- RADIO COUPLED
6- RUDDER OUT OF TRIM
5- AILERON OUT OF TRIM
4- ELEVATOR OUT OF TRIM
3- YAW DAMPER DISCONNECT
2- AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT
1- PITCH TRIM FAIL
0- YAW TRIM FAIL
222/1246 DE/4DE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS MODE STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- HEADING BUG SYNC = 1
14- SPARE
13- STANDBY MODE ON = 1
12- ROLL STEERING IN VIEW
11- PITCH STEERING IN VIEW
10- AIRCRAFT WEIGHT HEAVY
9- AIRCRAFT WEIGHT MEDIUM
8- AIRCRAFT WEIGHT LIGHT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
223/1247 DF/4DF DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS SPARE

224/1248 E0/4E0 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS SPARE


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
225/1249 E1/4E1 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS MODE STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- REVERSE
14- GO-AROUND
13- ENGAGE YAW DAMPER
12- ENGAGE AUTOPILOT
11- SOFT RIDE
10- DESCENT
9- TRIM RUN
8- AUTOPILOT FAIL
7- LEVEL
6-0- SPARES
226/1250 E2/4E2 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS STEERING STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- ALTITUDE REFERENCE VALID = 1
14- PITCH STEER VALID = 1
13- ROLL STEER VALID = 1
12-11- PAD = 0
10- RESERVED (TEST)
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
227/1251 E3/4E3 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ALTITUDE REFERENCE
PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT BIASED +24 576 FEET
15- 32768 FEET (MSB)
14- 16 384 FEET
13- 8192 FEET
12- 4096 FEET
11- 2048 FEET
10- 1024 FEET
9- 512 FEET
8- 256 FEET
7- 128 FEET
6- 64 FEET
5- 32 FEET
4- 16 FEET
3- 8 FEET
2- 4 FEET
1- 2 FEET
0- 1 FOOT
228/1252 E4/4E4 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS PITCH STEER

229/1253 E5/4E5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ROLL STEER


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
230/1254 E6/4E6 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS VS/IAS/MACH REFERENCE STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- VS REF: DSPLY ON CMD = 1
14- IAS REF: DSPLY ON CMD = 1
13- MACH REF: DSPLY ON CMD = 1
12- VS BUG: SLAVE = 1
11- IAS BUG: SLAVE = 1
10- RESERVED TEST
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
231/1255 E7/4E7 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE

PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT FEET/MINUTE
232/1256 E8/4E8 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS REFERENCE IAS

PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT KNOTS
233/1257 E9/4E9 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS REFERENCE MACH NUMBER
15- 1.024 MACH NUMBER (MSB)
14- 0.512 MACH NUMBER
234/1258 EA/4EA DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY “TO” WAYPOINT SYMBOL
PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR 15- VALID = 1
14-9- NOT DEFINED
8- SYMBOL
7- SYMBOL
6- SYMBOL
5- SYMBOL
4- SYMBOL
3-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
235/1259 EB/4EB TREND VECTOR LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION DATA

15- (-20.48) G’S
14- 10.24 G’S
13- 5.12 G’S
12- 2.56 G’S
11- 1.28 G’S
10- 0.64 G’S
9- 0.32 G’S
8- 0.16 G’S
7- 0.08 G’S
6- 0.04 G’S
5- 0.02 G’S
4- 0.01 G’S
3-0- NOT DEFINED
236/1260 EC/4EC ANALOG I/O GENERAL MAGNETIC VARIATION (FROM 429 OR 6-WIRE)
237/1261 ED/4ED DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O MFD JOYSTICK X-VALUE

PROCESSOR/MFD PROCESSOR NO 2 2’S COMPLEMENT VGU’S
JOYSTICK 15- 2048 VGU’S (MSB)
14- 1024 VGU’S
13- 512 VFU’S
12- 256 VGU’S
11- 128 VGU’S
10- 64 VGU’S
9- 32 VGU’S
8- 16 VGU’S
7- 8 VGU’S
6- 4 VGU’S
5- 2 VGU’S
4- 1 VGU’S
3- PAD = 1
2- PAD = 1
1- PAD = 1
0- PAD = 1
238/1262 EE/4EE DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O MFD JOYSTICK Y-VALUE

PROCESSOR/MFD PROCESSOR NO 2 2’S COMPLEMENT VGU’S
JOYSTICK 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 237/1261
239/1263 EF/4EF DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MFD JOYSTICK RANGE

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT VGU’S
240/1264 F0/4F0 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MFD JOYSTICK ANGLE DEGREES


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
241/1265 F1/4F1 ANALOG I/O NONFLASHING FLAGS

PROCESSOR 15- RADIO ALTITUDE FLAG
14- AIR DATA COMPUTER FLAG
13- HEADING FLAG
12- ATTITUDE FLAG
11- DCP FLAG
10- CROSS-SIDE FLAG
9- FLIGHT DIRECTOR FLAG
8-0- NOT DEFINED
242/1266 F2/4F2 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY LRN SELECTED DATA (429 OR 6-WIRE)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 1 = ONSIDE LRN IN APPROACH MODE
14- 1 = ONSIDE LRN IN CROSSTRACK MODE
13- LRN TACAN
12- LRN WAYPOINT ALERT
11- DP LRN WAYPOINT ALERT
10- WAYPOINT ALERT RESET
9- ANALOG I/O CHECKSUM VALID
8- DP NAV APPROACH MODE
7- AP CAPTURE ABORT ANNUN
6- ONSIDE LRN RNAV
5- ADF MODE CONTROL
4- ARINC 429 ADF
3- DC SIN/COS ADF
2- AC SYNCHRO ADF
1- ADF STRAP 34
0- ADF STRAP 15
243/1267 F3/4F3 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O CAT II STATUS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AND 15- ACTIVE COURSE NOT ONSIDE LOC
DISPLAY 14- RADIO ALTITUDE FLAG
PROCESSOR 13- AIR DATA FLAG
12- LOCALIZER FLAG
11- GLIDESLOPE FLAG
10- HEADING FLAG
9- ATTITUDE FLAG
8- DCP FLAG
7- CROSS-SIDE FLAG
6- BACK COURSE
5- TRUE HEADING
4- FCS IN GO-AROUND
3- HSI IN MAP FORMAT
2- CROSS-SIDE ATTITUDE SELECTED
1- CROSS-SIDE HEADING SELECTED
0- COMPOSITE

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AND 15- HDG COMPARE WARN
DISPLAY 14- LOC COMPARE 13- GLIDESLOPE COMPARE WARN
PROCESSOR 12- DUAL DRIVE TRANSFER
11- CROSS-SIDE AIR DATA
10- EXCESSIVE GS DEV BELOW 200 FEET
9- APPR ONSIDE AP COUPLED
8- NOT DEFINED
7- FD FLAG ONSIDE AP COUPLED
6- ATT FLAG ONSIDE AP COUPLED
5- HEADING FLAG
4- GS CAPTURE AND LOC FLAG
3- GS CAPTURE AND GS FLAG
2- ATT COMPARATOR WARN
1- AP DISCONNECT
0- EXCESSIVE LOC DEV BELOW 200 FEET

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AND 15-0- NOT DEFINED
DISPLAY
PROCESSOR

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AND 15-0- NOT DEFINED
DISPLAY
PROCESSOR

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AND 15- CAT II MODE A
DISPLAY 14- CAT II MODE B
PROCESSOR 13- CAT II LAMP TEST
12- CAT II LAMP TEST ARMED
11- CAT II GREEN LAMP
10- CAT II AMBER LAMP
9- CAT II REQUEST ENABLE FOR DCP
8- NOT DEFINED
7- EXCESS LOC DEV MODE A
6- EXCESS LOC DEV MODE B
5- EXCESS GS DEV MODE A
4- EXCESS GS DEV MODE B
3- IAS DEV ENABLE
2- EXCESS DEV ENABLE
1- RADIO ALTITUDE < 40 FEET
0- GS CAPTURE, AP ENGAGED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- CAT II CONDITION #1 FAIL
14- CAT II CONDITION #2 FAIL
13- RADIO ALTITUDE < 200 FEET
12- CAT II CONDITION #1 FAILURE
11- NOT DEFINED
10- NOT DEFINED
9- NOT DEFINED
8- NOT DEFINED
7- GROUND SPEED/VS/TTG CALCULATION
6- NOT DEFINED
5- NOT DEFINED
4- RADIO ALTITUDE DATA ON SCALE
3- DECISION HEIGHT ANNUN HYSTERESIS
2- RADIO ALTITUDE FILTER TRACK DOWN
1- NOT DEFINED
0- NOT DEFINED
249/1273 F9/4F9 CAT II GS CAPTURE

15-8- NOT DEFINED
7- GLIDESLOPE CAPTURE
6- ATTITUDE SENSOR TYPE CONFLICT
5-0- NOT DEFINED
250/1274 FA/4FA ANALOG I/O DISPLAY CROSSTRACK DEVIATION

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- (-1024) NAUTICAL MILES
14- 512 NMI 13- 256 NMI
12- 128 NMI
11- 64 NMI
10- 32 NMI
9- 16 NMI
8- 8 NMI
7- 4 NMI
6- 2 NMI
5- 1 NMI
4- 0.5 NMI
3- 0.25 NMI
2- 0.125 NMI
1- 0.0625 NMI
0- 0.03125 NMI

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
251/1275 FB/4FB DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP 1 EPROM CHECKSUM

PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR 15- 32768 FEET
14- 16384 FEET
13- 8192 FEET
12- 4096 FEET
11- 2048 FEET
10- 1024 FEET
9- 512 FEET
8- 256 FEET
7- 128 FEET
6- 64 FEET
5- 32 FEET
4- 16 FEET
3- 8 FEET
2- 4 FEET
1- 2 FEET
0- 1 FEET
252/1276 FC/4FC DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP 2 EPROM CHECKSUM

253/1277 FD/4FD ANALOG I/O DISPLAY AIOP EPROM NO 1 CHECKSUM

254/1278 FE/4FE ANALOG I/O DISPLAY AIOP EPROM NO 2 CHECKSUM

255/1279 FF/4FF TREND VECTOR DISPLAY TREND VECTOR EPROM CHECKSUM

256/1280 100/500 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY VNAV CONFIGURATION STRAPS AND SOURCE
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR SELECTION
15- NOT DEFINED
14- NOT DEFINED
13- OFF (INHIBIT VNAV)
12- CSDB VNAV
11- ARINC 429 VNAV FROM LNV
10- ARINC 561 VNAV FROM LNV
9- VNAV STRAP 37
8- VNAV STRAP 18
7- NOT DEFINED
6- CSDB VNAV ENABLED
5- ARINC 429 VNAV ENABLED
4- ARINC 561 VNAV ENABLED
3-0- NOT DEFINED
257/1281 101/501 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY MLS SPEED

258/1282 102/502 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY MLS TIME-TO-GO


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
259/1283 103/503 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL LRN 429 ILS APPROACH MODE VALID BITS
PROCESSOR NO 2 15- GLIDESLOPE VALID = 1 (LRN LABEL 3E HEX)
14- LOCALIZER VALID = 1 (LRN LABEL DE HEX)
13- ILS FINAL COURSE VALID (429 LABEL 105)
12- PSEUDO ILS FINAL COURSE VALID (429 LABEL 110)
11-0- NOT DEFINED
260/1284 104/504 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL LRN GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION

PROCESSOR NO 2 LRN 429 LABEL 3E HEX
2’S COMPLEMENT DDM
GS DEV PERCENT/100 DDM (FULL SCALE = 0.175)
15- 0.8 DDM (MSB)
14- 0.4 DDM 13- 0.2 DDM
12- 0.1 DDM
11- 0.05 DDM
10- 0.025 DDM
9- 0.125 DDM
8- 0.0625 DDM
7- 0.03125 DDM
6- 0.015625 DDM
5- 0.0078125 DDM
4- 0.00390625 DDM
3-0- NOT DEFINED
261/1285 105/505 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL LRN GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION

PROCESSOR NO 2 LRN 429 LABEL 3E HEX
2’S COMPLEMENT DOTS
15- 8.0 DOTS (MSB)
14- 4.0 DOTS
13- 2.0 DOTS
12- 1.0 DOT
11- 0.5 DOT
10- 0.25 DOT
9- 0.125 DOT
8- 0.0625 DOT
7- 0.03125 DOT
6- 0.015625 DOT
5- 0.0078125 DOT
4- 0.00390625 DOT
3- 0.001953125 DOT
2- 0.0009765625 DOT
1- 0.00048828125 DOT
0- 0.000244140625 DOT

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
262/1286 106/506 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL LRN LOCALIZER DEVIATION

PROCESSOR NO 2 LRN 429 LABEL DE HEX
LOC DEV PERCENT/100 DDM (FULL SCALE = 0.155)
15- 0.4 DDM
14- 0.2 DDM
13- 0.1 DDM
12- 0.05 DDM
11- 0.025 DDM
10- 0.125 DDM
9- 0.0625 DDM
8- 0.03125 DDM
7- 0.015625 DDM
6- 0.0078125 DDM
5- 0.00390625 DDM
4- 0.0001953125 DDM
3-0- NOT DEFINED
263/1287 107/507 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL LRN LOCALIZER DEVIATION

PROCESSOR NO 2 LRN 429 LABEL DE HEX
2’S COMPLEMENT DOTS
264/1288 108/508 ANALOG I/O FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS

PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED
265/1289 109/509 ANALOG I/O FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS

266/1290 10A/50A ANALOG I/O FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS

267/1291 10B/50B ANALOG I/O FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS

268/1292 10C/50C ANALOG I/O MFD MAP STATUS

269/1293 10D/50D ANALOG I/O MFD VOR COURSE

270/1294 10E/50E ANALOG I/O MFD TACAN COURSE


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
271/1295 10F/50F DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN HEADING BUG

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 82 HEX
15- 180 DEGREES (MSB) SIGN BIT
14- 90 DEGREES
13- 45 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- 0.0439453125 DEGREE
2- NOT DEFINED
1- 1 = VALID
0- 1 = NEW DATA, 0 = DATA HAS NOT CHANGED
272/1296 110/510 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O DCP HEADING SYNC

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 180 DEGREES (MSB) SIGN BIT
14- 90 DEGREES
13- 45 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- 0.0439453125 DEGREE
2-0- NOT DEFINED
273/1297 111/511 ANALOG I/O DISCRETES, CALCULATED

274/1298 112/512 SPARE
275/1299 113/513 ANALOG I/O DISCRETES, CALCULATED

276/1300 114/514 ANALOG I/O LNV CONFIGURATION

277/1301 115/515 ANALOG I/O LNAV


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
278/1302 116/516 ANALOG I/O ACTIVE COURSE SENSOR

PROCESSOR 15- LRN 2
14- LRN 1 13- ADF 2
12- ADF 1
11- VOR/LOC 2
10- VOR/LOC 1
9- MLS 2
8- MLS 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
279/1303 117/517 ANALOG I/O PRESET COURSE SENSOR

PROCESSOR 15- LRN 2
14- LRN 1 13- ADF 2
12- ADF 1
11- VOR/LOC 2
10- VOR/LOC 1
9- MLS 2
8- MLS 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
280/1304 118/518 ANALOG I/O BEARING SENSOR

PROCESSOR 15- LRN 2
14- LRN 1 13- ADF 2
12- ADF 1
11- VOR/LOC 2
10- VOR/LOC 1
9- MLS 2
8- MLS 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
281/1305 119/519 ANALOG I/O MENU MASK

PROCESSOR 15- LRN 2
14- LRN 1 13- ADF 2
12- ADF 1
11- VOR/LOC 2
10- VOR/LOC 1
9- MLS 2
8- MLS 1
7- BEARING MENU
6- SECOND COURSE MENU
5- ACTIVE COURSE MENU
4- PAD = 0
3- PAD = 0
2- PAD = 0
1- SECOND COURSE CONTROL
0- ACTIVE COURSE CONTROL
282/1306 11A/51A ANALOG I/O LNV FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODE


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
283/1307 11B/51B ANALOG I/O DISCRETES, CALCULATED

14- NOT DEFINED
13- 1 = ADI 2ND VERT DEVIATION POINTER IN VIEW
12- 1 = ADI VERTICAL DEVIATION SCALE IN VIEW
11- 1 = ADI VERTICAL DEVIATION POINTER IN VIEW
10- 1 = ADI VERTICAL DEVIATION FLAG IN VIEW
9- NOT DEFINED
8- NOT DEFINED
7- ACTIVE LATERAL DEVIATION WAYPOINT ALERT
6-0- NOT DEFINED
284/1308 11C/51C ANALOG I/O DISCRETES, CALCULATED

14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- 1 = CROSS-SIDE VERT DEVIATION DATA
(1 = YELLOW)
11- 1 = BACK COURSE IN VIEW
10- NOT DEFINED
9- NOT DEFINED
8- NOT DEFINED
7- ADI POINTER TYPE
6- ADI POINTER TYPE
5- ADI POINTER TYPE
4- ADI POINTER TYPE
BITS 7 6 5 4 ADI POINTER TYPE

0 0 0 0 BLANK
0 0 0 1 VNAV
0 0 1 0 GLIDESLOPE
0 0 1 1 MLS
0 1 0 0 ALTITUDE
3-0- NOT DEFINED
285/1309 11D/51D ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ADI VERTICAL NAV

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR VGU’S
15-0- NOT DEFINED
286/1310 11E/51E DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O DIAGNOSTIC MODE

PROCESSOR PROCESSORS NO DESIGNATES THE TEST MODE/DIAGNOSTIC PAGE
1 AND NO 2 WHICH IS ACTIVE
15- FCS MODE = 1
14- ADC MODE = 1
13- AHRS MODE = 1
12- XPG MODE = 1 (ENTERED THROUGH RA TEST)
11- VIR MODE = 1
10- DME MODE = 1
9-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
287/1311 11F/51F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIAGNOSTIC VALID

PROCESSORS NO PROCESSOR 15- FCS VALID = 1 (FCS LABEL 70)
1 AND NO 2 14- ADC VALID = 1 (ADC LABEL F5)
13- AHRS VALID = 1 (AHRS LABEL F5)
12- NOT DEFINED
11- VIR VALID = 1 (VIR LABEL F5)
10- DME VALID = 1 (DME LABEL F5)
9-0- NOT DEFINED
288/1312 120/520 SPARE
289/1313 121/521 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY COMPARATOR FLASH

9- DP IAS COMPARATOR IN VIEW CTL BIT
8-0- NOT DEFINED
290/1314 122/522 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DOUBLE BEARING POINTER SELECTION
7- LNAV 2
6- LNAV 1
5- ADF 2
4- ADF 1
3- VOR 2
2- VOR 1
1- TCN 2
0- TCN 1
291/1315 123/523 ANALOG I/O DIOP TO DSP DISCRETES, CALCULATED

292/1316 124/524 ANALOG I/O DIOP TO DSP DIRECT TO BEARING

293/1317 125/525 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O GREENWICH MEAN TIME FOR EXTENDED DATA
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR NO 1 PAGES
15- VALID = 1
14- 40 TENS OF HOURS (MSB)
13- 20
12- 10
11- 8 UNITS OF HOURS
10- 4
9- 2
8- 1
7- 80 TENS OF MINUTES
6- 40
5- 20
4- 10
3- 8 UNITS OF MINUTES
2- 4
1- 2
0- 1
294/1318 126/526 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O ILS FINAL COURSE

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 105

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
295/1319 127/527 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O PSEUDO ILS FINAL COURSE
296/1320 128/528 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DIOP 2 STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 2 15- 429 VNAV BUS MONITOR VALID
14- 561 VNAV BUS MONITOR VALID
13-0- NOT DEFINED
297/1321 129/529 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O FMS MANUFACTURER’S IDENT CODE
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR NO 1 429 LABEL 371
15-13- NOT DEFINED
12- 16 UNS SOFTWARE VERSION
11- 8 1 = 302
10- 4 2 = 303
9- 2
8- 1
7- 32
6- 16
5- 8
4- 4
3- 2
2- 1
1- PAD = 0
0- PAD = 0
298/1322 12A/52A DIGITAL I/O GENERAL IAS REFERENCE MARKERS STATUS WORD
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- VR, 1 = DISPLAY
14- VF, 1 = DISPLAY
13- V1, 1 = DISPLAY
12- V2, 1 = DISPLAY
11- A, 1 = DISPLAY
10- B, 1 = DISPLAY
9- C, 1 = DISPLAY
8- MACH REFERENCE, 1 = DISPLAY
7- VR, 1 = ADJUST
6- VF, 1 = ADJUST
5- V1, 1 = ADJUST
4- V2, 1 = ADJUST
3- A, 1 = ADJUST
2- B, 1 = ADJUST
1- C, 1 = ADJUST
0- MACH REFERENCE, 1 = ADJUST

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
299/1323 12B/52B DIGITAL I/O GENERAL IAS REFERENCE MARKERS IAS/MACH REFERENCED
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- VR, 0 = IAS/1 = MACH
14- VF, 0 = IAS/1 = MACH
13- V1, 0 = IAS/1 = MACH
12- V2, 0 = IAS/1 = MACH
11- A, 0 = IAS/1 = MACH
10- B, 0 = IAS/1 = MACH
9- C, 0 = IAS/1 = MACH
8- MACH REFERENCE, 0 = IAS/1 = MACH
7- 8 BINARY ADJUST BITS
6- 4
5- 2
4- 1
3-0- NOT DEFINED
300/1324 12C/52C DIGITAL I/O GENERAL IAS REFERENCE MARKER VR

PROCESSOR NO 1 KNOTS
15- 512 KNOTS
14- 256 KNOTS
13- 128 KNOTS
12- 64 KNOTS
11- 32 KNOTS
10- 16 KNOTS
9- 8 KNOTS
8- 4 KNOTS
7- 2 KNOTS
6- 1 KNOT
5- 0.5 KNOT
4- 0.25 KNOT
3- NOT DEFINED
2- COLOR BITS 2 1 0 COLOR
1- COLOR 0 0 0 BLACK
0- COLOR 0 0 1 BLUE
0 1 0 GREEN
0 1 1 CYAN
1 0 0 RED
1 0 1 MAGENTA
1 1 0 YELLOW
1 1 1 WHITE
301/1325 12D/52D DIGITAL I/O GENERAL IAS REFERENCE MARKER VF

302/1326 12E/52E DIGITAL I/O GENERAL IAS REFERENCE MARKER V1

303/1327 12F/52F DIGITAL I/O GENERAL IAS REFERENCE MARKER V2

304/1328 130/530 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL IAS REFERENCE MARKER A


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
305/1329 131/531 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL IAS REFERENCE MARKER B

306/1330 132/532 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL IAS REFERENCE MARKER C

307/1331 133/533 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL IAS REFERENCE MARKER MACH REF
PROCESSOR NO 1 MACH NUMBER
15- 1.024 MACH
14- 0.512 MACH
13- 0.256 MACH
12- 0.128 MACH
11- 0.064 MACH
10- 0.032 MACH
9- 0.016 MACH
8- 0.008 MACH
7- 0.004 MACH
6- 0.002 MACH
5- 0.001 MACH
4- 0.0005 MACH
3- NOT DEFINED
2- COLOR
1- COLOR
0- COLOR
308/1332 134/534 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL SECONDARY IAS/MACH RANGE MARKERS, STATUS
PROCESSOR NO 1 WORD
15- R1 1 = DISPLAY
14- R2 1 = DISPLAY
13- R3 1 = DISPLAY
12- R4 1 = DISPLAY
11- R5 1 = DISPLAY
10- R6 1 = DISPLAY
9- R7 1 = DISPLAY
8- R8 1 = DISPLAY
7- R1 1 = MACH
6- R2 1 = MACH
5- R3 1 = MACH
4- R4 1 = MACH
3- R5 1 = MACH
2- R6 1 = MACH
1- R7 1 = MACH
0- R8 1 = MACH

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
309/1333 135/535 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL RANGE MARKER STARTING POINT R1

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 512
14- 256
13- 128
12- 64
11- 32
10- 16
9- 8
8- 4
7- 2
6- 1
5- 0.5
4- 0.25
3- NOT DEFINED
2- COLOR BITS 2 1 0 COLOR
1- COLOR 0 0 0 BLACK
0- COLOR 0 0 1 BLUE
0 1 0 GREEN
0 1 1 CYAN
1 0 0 RED
1 0 1 MAGENTA
1 1 0 YELLOW
1 1 1 WHITE
310/1334 136/536 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL RANGE MARKER LENGTH R1

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 128
14- 64
13- 32
12- 16
11- 8
10- 4
9- 2
8- 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED

PROCESSOR NO 1 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 309/1332


314/1338 13A/53A DIGITAL I/O GENERAL RANGE MARKER LENGTH R3

315/1339 13B/53B DIGITAL I/O GENERAL RANGE MARKER STARTING POINT R4

316/1340 13C/53C DIGITAL I/O GENERAL RANGE MARKER LENGTH R4

317/1341 13D/53D DIGITAL I/O GENERAL RANGE MARKER STARTING POINT R5


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
318/1342 13E/53E DIGITAL I/O GENERAL RANGE MARKER LENGTH R5

319/1343 13F/53F DIGITAL I/O GENERAL RANGE MARKER STARTING POINT R6




PROCESSOR NO 1 PERCENT BIAS ABOVE STALL SPEED USED FOR AOA
CALCULATIONS
15- 1
14- 0.5
13- 0.25
12- 0.125
11- 0.0625
10- 0.03125
9- 0.015625
8- 0.0078125
7- 0.00390625
6- 0.001953125
5- 0.0009765625
4- 0.00048828125
3- 0.000244140625
2- 0.0001220703125
1- 0.00006103515625
0- 0.000030517578125
324/1348 144/544 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL RANGE MARKER LENGTH R8 (NOT USED)
325/1349 145/545 ANALOG I/O LNV PSEUDO LOC ANNUNCIATION CODES

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
326/1350 146/546 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY 429 FMS APPROACH PRESELECT VERTICAL DEV
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT VGU’S
15- 2048 VGU’S (MSB)
14- 1024 VGU’S
13- 512 VGU’S
12- 256 VGU’S
11- 128 VGU’S
10- 64 VGU’S
9- 32 VGU’S
8- 16 VGU’S
7- 8 VGU’S
6- 4 VGU’S
5- 2 VGU’S
4- 1 VGU’S
3- 0.5 VGU’S
2- 0.25 VGU’S
1- 0.125 VGU’S
0- 0.0625 VGU’S
327/1351 147/547 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O LATERAL AND VERTICAL DEVIATIONS STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 1 15- LATERAL DEVIATION VALID = 1
14- VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID = 1
13- DEVIATION TYPE, 1 = LINEAR
12- BACK LOC 1 = ON
11- LOC FREQ 1 = ON
10- PAD = 0
9- LRU IDENT
8- LRU IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
328/1352 148/548 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O LATERAL DEVIATION

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 8 DOTS (SIGN)
14- 4 DOTS
13- 2 DOTS
12- 1 DOT
11- 0.5 DOT
10- 0.25 DOT
9- 0.125 DOT
8- 0.0625 DOT
7- 0.03125 DOT
6- 0.015625 DOT
5-0- NOT DEFINED
329/1353 149/549 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O VERTICAL DEVIATION

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 1 VERT DEV IN DOTS, 75 mV = 1 DOT

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
330/1354 14A/54A ANALOG I/O GENERAL MAP SELECT

PROCESSOR 15- LRN2 ACTIVE
14- LRN1 ACTIVE
13- ADF2 ACTIVE
12- ADF1 ACTIVE
11- VOR/LOC2 ACTIVE
10- VOR/LOC1 ACTIVE
9- LRN2 PRESELECT
8- LRN1 PRESELECT
7- ADF2 PRESELECT
6- ADF1 PRESELECT
3- MENU PRESELECT
2- COURSE CONTROL DOT PRESELECT
1-0- NOT DEFINED
331/1355 14B/54B DIGITAL I/O GENERAL IAS REFERENCE MARKERS/RANGE LABEL MONITOR
PROCESSOR NO 1 VALIDS
15- RANGES (LABEL AD HEX) VALID
14- REFERENCE MARKERS (LABEL AC HEX) VALID
13-0- NOT DEFINED
332/1356 14C/54C DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O 582 TACAN CHANNEL NUMBER AND STATUS BITS
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 128 TCN CHANNEL NUMBER
14- 64
13- 32
12- 16
11- 8
10- 4
9- 2
8- 1
7-4- NOT DEFINED
3- LABEL VALID = 1
2- TCN SELECT 1 = TCN1, 0 = TCN2
1- 1 = X, 0 = Y
0- 1 = TEST
333/1357 14D/54D DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O 429 TACAN CHANNEL NUMBER AND STATUS BITS
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 128 TCN CHANNEL NUMBER
14- 64
13- 32
12- 16
11- 8
10- 4
9- 2
8- 1
7-4- NOT DEFINED
3- LABEL VALID = 1
2- NOT DEFINED
1- 1 = X, 0 = Y
0- 1 = TEST
334/1358 14E/54E ANALOG I/O GENERAL CALCULATED DISCRETES


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
335/1359 14F/54F ANALOG I/O GENERAL SECOND COURSE ERROR

12- PRESET COURSE VALID = 1
11-0- NOT DEFINED
336/1360 150/550 ANALOG I/O GENERAL REFERENCE SPEED NUMBER

337/1361 151/551 ANALOG I/O GENERAL REFERENCE ANNUNCIATOR

338/1362 152/552 ANALOG I/O GENERAL ACTIVE MARKER

10- OUTER MARKER IN VIEW
9- MIDDLE MARKER IN VIEW
8- INNER MARKER IN VIEW
7-0- NOT DEFINED
339/1363 153/553 ANALOG I/O GENERAL IAS REFERENCE POINTER

340/1364 154/554 ANALOG I/O GENERAL FAST/SLOW REFERENCE SPEED

341/1365 155/555 ANALOG I/O GENERAL FMS GS VC

342/1366 156/556 ANALOG I/O GENERAL CALCULATED DISCRETES


344/1368 158/558 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY MAP DISTANCE (HIGH BITS)

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR ACTIVE DISTANCE TO THE “TO” WAYPOINT TAKEN
FROM THE 429 OR 561 LRN
15- VALID = 0 IF 6-WIRE AND ANALOG; IF DIST ONLY
IS VALID. IF 6-WIRE ONLY; IF DIST, BEARING, AND
CRS ARE VALID. IF 429; IF DIST, BEARING, AND
DESTRACK ARE VALID.
14- 0
13- 0
12- 0
11- 0
10- 0
9- 0
8- 0
7- 4096 NMI (MSB)
6- 2048 NMI
5- 1024 NMI
4- 512 NMI
3- 0
2- 0
1- 0
0- 0

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
345/1369 159/559 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY MAP DISTANCE (LOW BITS)

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR ACTIVE DISTANCE TO THE “TO” WAYPOINT TAKEN
FROM THE 429 OR 561 LRN
15- 256 NMI
14- 128 NMI
13- 64 NMI
12- 32 NMI
11- 16 NMI
10- 8 NMI
9- 4 NMI
8- 2 NMI
7- 1 NMI
6- 0.5 NMI
5- 0.25 NMI
4- 0.125 NMI
3- 0.0625 NMI
2- 0.03125 NMI
1- 0.015625 NMI
0- 0.0078125 NMI
346/1370 15A/55A DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O MLS LABELS IN TEST 1 = IN TEST
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- NOT DEFINED
14- NOT DEFINED
13- DIAGNOSTIC (NOT USED) LABEL 1D HEX
12- MLS FREQUENCY LABEL B8 HEX
11- AZIMUTH LABEL 9E HEX
10- BACK AZIMUTH ANGLE LABEL 7E HEX
9- CHANNEL SELECTION LABEL 78 HEX
8- GLIDEPATH LABEL 1E HEX
7- NOT DEFINED
6- NOT DEFINED
5- NOT DEFINED
4- BACK AZIMUTH DEV LABEL 07 HEX
3- GLIDEPATH DEV LABEL 56 HEX
2- FRONT AZIMUTH DEV LABEL 96 HEX
1- LOCALIZER DEVIATION LABEL DE HEX
0- GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION LABEL 3E HEX
347/1371 15B/55B ANALOG I/O GENERAL FMS SELECTED HEADING


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
348/1372 15C/55C DIGITAL I/O GENERAL TREND VECTOR GEN ACCEL VECTOR
PROCESSOR NO 2 15- 512 KNOTS (MSB)
14- 256 KNOTS
13- 128 KNOTS
12- 64 KNOTS
11- 32 KNOTS
10- 16 KNOTS
9- 8 KNOTS
8- 4 KNOTS
7- 2 KNOTS
6- 1 KNOTS
5- 0.5 KNOT
4- 0.25 KNOT
3- 0.125 KNOT
2- 0.0625 KNOT
1- 0.03125 KNOT
0- 0.015625 KNOT
349/1373 15D/55D DIGITAL I/O GENERAL TREND VECTOR GEN ACCELERATION

PROCESSOR NO 2 15-0- NOT DEFINED
350/1374 15E/55E DIGITAL I/O GENERAL TREND VECTOR GEN DIGITAL ACCELERATION
PROCESSOR NO 2 15- (-20.48) G’S
14- 10.24 G’S
13- 5.12 G’S
12- 2.56 G’S
11- 1.28 G’S
10- 0.64 G’S
9- 0.32 G’S
8- 0.16 G’S
7- 0.08 G’S
6- 0.04 G’S
5- 0.02 G’S
4- 0.01 G’S
3-0- NOT DEFINED
351/1375 15F/55F DIGITAL I/O GENERAL TREND VECTOR GEN STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 2 15- NOT DEFINED
14- LA VALID = 1
13- VECTOR CALCULATION VALID = 1
12- DRAW HAT = 1
11-0- NOT DEFINED
352/1376 160/560 SPARES

THRU THRU
358/1382 166/566

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE

PROCESSOR 15- DP ADC TEST ANNUN IN VIEW = 1
14- ACTIVE MACH VALID = 1
13- ACTIVE STRUT COMPRESSED = 1
12- DP MACH DISPLAY IN VIEW = 1
11- DP ACCEL DISPLAY IN VIEW = 1
10- DP ACCEL FLAG IN VIEW = 1
9- ACTIVE ADC TEST = 1
8-0- NOT DEFINED
360/1384 168/568 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DIGITAL ACCELERATION/MACH NUMBER

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MACH ACCEL
15- 20.48 -20.48
14- 10.24 10.24
13- 5.12 5.12
12- 2.56 2.56
11- 1.28 1.28
10- 0.64 0.64
9- 0.32 0.32
8- 0.16 0.16
7- 0.08 0.08
6- 0.04 0.04
5- 0.02 0.02
4- 0.01 0.01
3-0- NOT DEFINED
361/1385 169/569 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O LATITUDE LOW WORD (TO)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 0.002746582
14- 0.001373291
13- 0.000686646
12- 0.000343323
11- 0.000171661
10-0- NOT DEFINED
362/1386 16A/56A DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O LATITUDE LOW WORD (TO+1)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR NO 1 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 361/1384
363/1387 16B/56B DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O LATITUDE LOW WORD (TO+2)
364/1388 16C/56C DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O LATITUDE LOW WORD (PRES POSITION)
365/1389 16D/56D DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O LONGITUDE LOW WORD (TO)
366/1390 16E/56E DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O LONGITUDE LOW WORD (TO+1)
367/1391 16F/56F DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O LONGITUDE LOW WORD (TO+2)
368/1392 170/570 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O LONGITUDE LOW WORD (PRES POSITION)

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
369/1393 171/571 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O EFIS 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
370/1394 172/572 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O EFIS 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
371/1395 173/573 TREND VECTOR DIGITAL I/O LONG ACCELERATION (CONVERTED) BINARY 2’S
PROCESSOR NO 2 COMPLEMENT
15- 6.631299736 G’S
14- 3.315649868 G’S
13- 1.657824934 G’S
12- 0.828912467 G’S
11- 0.414456234 G’S
10- 0.207228117 G’S
9- 0.103614058 G’S
8- 0.051807029 G’S
7- 0.025903515 G’S
6- 0.012951757 G’S
5- 0.006475879 G’S
4- 0.003237939 G’S
3- PAD = 0
2- PAD = 0
1- PAD = 0
0- LA MONITOR FAULT 1 = VALID
372/1396 174/574 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O AHRS 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
373/1397 175/575 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O AHRS 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
374/1398 176/576 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O ADF 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR NO 1 15-0-NOT DEFINED
375/1399 177/577 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O ADF 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
376/1400 178/578 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O TCN 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS
377/1401 179/579 DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O TCN 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTICS

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
378/1402 17A/57A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AIRSPEED BUGS IN VIEW (WITHIN RANGE OF THE
PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR SCALE)
ACTIVE NORMALIZED AOA FROM ANALOG, CSDB, OR
429
15- VR
14- VF
13- V1
12- V2
11- A
10- B
9- C
8- MACH REF
7-0- NOT DEFINED
379/1403 17B/57B DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O TCN STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- DIST BUS VALID = 1
14- GSPD BUS VALID = 1
13- TTG BUS VALID = 1
12- BRG BUS VALID = 1
11- DIST SSM VALID = 1
10- GSPD SSM VALID = 1
9- TTG SSM VALID = 1
8- BRG SSM VALID = 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
380/1404 17C/57C DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O TCN DISTANCE TO STATION (NAUTICAL MILES)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- 512 NMI MSB
14- 256 NMI
13- 128 NMI
12- 64 NMI
11- 32 NMI
10- 16 NMI
9- 8 NMI
8- 4 NMI
7- 2 NMI
6- 1 NMI
5- 0.5 NMI
4- 0.25 NMI
3- 0.125 NMI
2-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
381/1405 17D/57D DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O TCN DISTANCE TO STATION (BCD NAUTICAL MILES)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- 1 = VALID DISTANCE SSM
14- 400 NMI MSB
13- 200 NMI
12- 100 NMI
11- 80 NMI
10- 40 NMI
9- 20 NMI
8- 10 NMI
7- 8 NMI
6- 4 NMI
5- 2 NMI
4- 1 NMI
3- 0.8 NMI
2- 0.4 NMI
1- 0.2 NMI
0- 0.1 NMI
382/1406 17E/57E DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O TCN TIME TO STATION (BCD MINUTES)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15-1- = VALID TTG SSM
14- 400 MIN MSB
13- 200 MIN
12- 100 MIN
11- 80 MIN
10- 40 MIN
9- 20 MIN
8- 10 MIN
7- 8 MIN
6- 4 MIN
5- 2 MIN
4- 1 MIN
3-0- NOT DEFINED
383/1407 17F/57F DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O TCN BEARING TO STATION DEGREES
384/1408 180/580 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O TCN GROUND SPEED (BCD)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- 1 = VALID GSPD SSM
14- 4000 KN MSB
13- 2000 KN
12- 1000 KN
11- 800 KN
10- 400 KN
9- 200 KN
8- 100 KN
7- 80 KN
6- 40 KN
5- 20 KN
4- 10 KN
3- 8 KN
2- 4 KN
1- 2 KN
0- 1 KN

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
385/1409 181/581 SPARES (10 LOCATIONS)

THROUGH THROUGH
394/1418 18A/58A
395/1419 18B/58B ANALOG I/O DISPLAY TCN DESIRED TRACK DEGREES

396/1420 18C/58C ANALOG I/O DISPLAY TCN BEARING TO WAYPOINT DEGREES

397/1421 18D/58D ANALOG I/O DISPLAY MAP DISTANCE (HIGH BITS)

398/1422 18E/58E ANALOG I/O DISPLAY MAP DISTANCE (LOW BITS)

399/1423 18F/58F ANALOG I/O DISPLAY TCN STATUS

400/1424 190/590 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY TCN DISCRETE

401/1425 191/591 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY TCN DISCRETE

402/1426 192/592 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY TCN STATION
403/1427 193/593 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME 429 STATUS, CHANNEL 1
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- FREQUENCY VALID = 1, LABEL B8
14- DISTANCE VALID = 1, LABEL 41
13- TTS/GS VALID = 1, LABEL 40/50
12- IDENT VALID = 1, LABEL 03
11- DME HOLD ON = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
9- MAINTENANCE WORD VALID = 1, LABEL 17
8- BCD GSP VALID = 1, LABEL 50
7- TUNED TO MLS
6-0- NOT DEFINED
404/1428 194/594 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME 429 CHANNEL 1 CHARACTER 1

11- CHARACTER MSB
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5- CHARACTER
4- CHARACTER
3-0- NOT DEFINED


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE


408/1432 198/598 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME 429 CHANNEL 1 TIME TO STATION
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR (BCD MINUTES)
15- PAD
14- PAD
13- 200 MIN
12- 100 MIN
11- 80 MIN
10- 40 MIN
9- 20 MIN
8- 10 MIN
7- 8 MIN
6- 4 MIN
5- 2 MIN
4- 1 MIN
3- 0.8 MIN
2- 0.4 MIN
1- 0.2 MIN
0- 0.1 MIN
409/1433 199/599 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME 429 CHANNEL 1 GROUND SPEED (BCD)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- PAD
14- PAD
13- 2000 KN
12- 1000 KN
11- 800 KN
10- 400 KN
9- 200 KN
8- 100 KN
7- 80 KN
6- 40 KN
5- 20 KN
4- 10 KN
3- 8 KN
2- 4 KN
1- 2 KN
0- 1 KN

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
410/1434 19A/59A DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME 429 CHANNEL 1 DISTANCE
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- 256 NMI
14- 128 NMI
13- 64 NMI
12- 32 NMI
11- 16 NMI
10- 8 NMI
9- 4 NMI
8- 2 NMI
7- 1 NMI
6- 0.5 NMI
5- 0.25 NMI
4- 0.125 NMI
3- 0.0625 NMI
2- 0.03125 NMI
1- 0.015625 NMI
0- 0.0078125 NMI
411/1435 19B/59B DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME DISTANCE CHANNEL 1 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- 800 NMI MSB
14- 400 NMI
13- 200 NMI
12- 100 NMI
11- 80 NMI
10- 40 NMI
9- 20 NMI
8- 10 NMI
7- 8 NMI
6- 4 NMI
5- 2 NMI
4- 1 NMI
3- 0.8 NMI
2- 0.4 NMI
1- 0.2 NMI
0- 0.1 NMI
412/1436 19C/59C DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME FREQUENCY CHANNEL 1 (BCD MHZ)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- 80 MHZ
14- 40 MHZ
13- 20 MHZ
12- 10 MHZ
11- 8 MHZ
10- 4 MHZ
9- 2 MHZ
8- 1 MHZ
7- 0.8 MHZ
6- 0.4 MHZ
5- 0.2 MHZ
4- 0.1 MHZ
3- 0.08 MHZ
2- 0.04 MHZ
1- 0.02 MHZ
0- 0.01 MHZ

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
413/1437 19D/59D DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME 429 STATUS, CHANNEL 2
414/1438 19E/59E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME 429 CHANNEL 2 CHARACTER 1

415/1439 19F/59F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME 429 CHANNEL 2 CHARACTER 2

416/1440 1A0/5A0 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME 429 CHANNEL 2 CHARACTER 3


418/1442 1A2/5A2 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME 429 CHANNEL 2 TIME TO STATION
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR (BCD MINUTES)
419/1443 1A3/5A3 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME 429 CHANNEL 2 GROUND SPEED (BCD)
420/1444 1A4/5A4 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME 429 CHANNEL 2 DISTANCE
421/1445 1A5/5A5 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME DISTANCE CHANNEL 2 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES)
422/1446 1A6/5A6 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME FREQUENCY CHANNEL 2 (BCD MHZ)
423/1447 1A7/5A7 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME 429 STATUS, CHANNEL 3


426/1450 1AA/5AA DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME 429 CHANNEL 3 CHARACTER 3

427/1451 1AB/5AB DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME 429 CHANNEL 3 CHARACTER 4

428/1452 1AC/5AC DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME 429 CHANNEL 3 TIME TO STATION (BCD
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR MINUTES)
429/1453 1AD/5AD DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME 429 CHANNEL 3 GROUND SPEED (BCD)
430/1454 1AE/5AE DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME 429 CHANNEL 3 DISTANCE

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
431/1455 1AF/5AF DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME DISTANCE CHANNEL 3 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES)
432/1456 1B0/5B0 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DME FREQUENCY CHANNEL 3 (BCD MHZ)
433/1457 1B1/5B1 ANALOG I/O GENERAL VOR BEARING 2’S COMPLEMENT (DEGREES)
434/1458 1B2/5B2 ANALOG I/O GENERAL VOR DISTANCE CHANNEL 1 (NAUTICAL MILES)
435/1459 1B3/5B3 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY VOR MAP STATUS

6- SIDE BIT, 1 = COPILOT, 0 = PILOT
5- VALID = 1 (NAV GENERIC VAL .AND. VOR BRG VAL)
4- VALID = 1 (DME GENERIC VAL) .AND. (DME DIST
VAL) .AND. (.NOT.DME HOLD)
3-0- NOT DEFINED
436/1460 1B4/5B4 ANALOG I/O GENERAL DME IDENT STATUS (CHANNEL 1)

PROCESSOR 15- IDENT VALID = 1
13- 01 SEARCH, 10 PRETRACK
12- 01 SEARCH, 10 PRETRACK
11- PAD
10- TEST ON = 1
9- 01 CHANNEL 1 ACTIVE
8- 10 CHANNEL 2 ACTIVE
3-0- NOT DEFINED
437/1461 1B5/5B5 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY IDENT CHARACTER 1




441/1465 1B9/5B9 ANALOG I/O GENERAL HOVER STATUS

PROCESSOR 15- HOVER SELECTED = 1
14- HOVER VALID = 1
13-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
442/1466 1BA/5BA ANALOG I/O GENERAL HOVER VY (KNOTS)

PROCESSOR 15- 8 KN
14- 4 KN
13- 2 KN
12- 1 KN
11- 0.5 KN
10- 0.25 KN
9- 0.125 KN
8- 0.0625 KN
7- 0.03125 KN
6- 0.015625 KN
5- 0.0078125 KN
4- 0.00390625 KN
3- 0.001953125 KN
2- 0.0009765625 KN
1- 0.00048828125 KN
0- 0.000244140625 KN
443/1467 1BB/5BB ANALOG I/O GENERAL HOVER VX (KNOTS)

444/1468 1BC/5BC SPARES (13 LOCATIONS)

THRU THRU
456/1480 1C8/5C8
457/1481 1C9/5C9 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O REFERENCE +5 VOLT POWER

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 10 V (MSB)
14- 5 V
13- 2.5 V
12- 1.25 V
11- 0.625 V
10- 0.3125 V
9- 0.15625 V
8- 0.078125 V
7- 0.0390625 V
6- 0.01953125 V
5- 0.009765625 V
4- 0.0048828125 V
3- 0.00244140625 V
2- 0.001220703125 V
1- 0.0006103515625 V
0- 0.00030517578125 V
458/1482 1CA/5CA ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O REFERENCE +28 VOLT POWER
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 1 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 457/1481
459/1483 1CB/5CB ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O REFERENCE +15 VOLT POWER
460/1484 1CC/5CC ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O REFERENCE -15 VOLT POWER
461/1485 1CD/5CD ANALOG I/O DISPLAY HOVER MODE X DEVIATION


DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
462/1486 1CE/5CE ANALOG I/O DISPLAY HOVER MODE Y DEVIATION

463/1487 1CF/5CF ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ANALOG VOR BEARING ANGLE (DEGREES)
464/1488 1D0/5D0 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ANALOG VOR LOCALIZER DEV (DOTS) SENSE:
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR POSITIVE = STEER LEFT
465/1489 1D1/5D1 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ANALOG VOR GLIDESLOPE DEV (DOTS) SENSE:
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR POSITIVE = STEER DOWN
466/1490 1D2/5D2 DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O BOX FAULTS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR NO 2 429 LABEL 350 DIAGNOSTIC WORD
15- 1 = DP VALID
14- 1 = DIOA VALID, ONSIDE DPU, MPU PILOT SIDE
13- 1 = DIOB VALID, ONSIDE DPU, MPU PILOT SIDE
12- 1 = AIOP VALID, ONSIDE DPU, MPU PILOT SIDE
11- 1 = DIOA VALID, MPU COPILOT SIDE
10- 1 = DIOB VALID, MPU COPILOT SIDE
9- 1 = AIOP VALID, MPU COPILOT SIDE
8- 1 = TVG VALID
7- 1 = TCAS VALID
6- 1 = MFD VALID
5- PAD
4- 1 = RDR RASTER VALID
3-0- NOT DEFINED
467/1491 1D3/5D3 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE DESIRED TRACK (DEGREES)

468/1492 1D4/5D4 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PRESELECTED DESIRED TRACK (DEGREES)

469/1493 1D5/5D5 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O DSP-84 STRAP DATA

PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 15
14- STRAP 14
13- STRAP 13
12- STRAP 12
11- STRAP 11
10- STRAP 10
9- STRAP 9
8- STRAP 8
7- STRAP 7
6- STRAP 6
5- STRAP 5
4- STRAP 4
3- STRAP 3
2- STRAP 2
1- STRAP 1
0- STRAP LABEL VALID = 1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
470/1494 1D6/5D6 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY SINGLE/DUAL ANNUN FORMAT

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 0 = DUAL, 1 = SINGLE
15-10- NOT DEFINED
9- BEARING 2 ANNUN
8- BEARING 1 ANNUN
7- AUTOPILOT LATERAL CAPTURE
6- AUTOPILOT LATERAL ARM
5- PRESELECTED NAV ARM
4- ACTIVE NAV ANNUN
3-0- NOT DEFINED
471/1495 1D7/5D7 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE NAV TACAN CHANNEL NUMBER
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 128 TCN CHANNEL NUMBER
14- 64
13- 32
12- 16
11- 8
10- 4
9- 2
8- 1
7-4- NOT DEFINED
3- LABEL VALID = 1
2- NOT DEFINED
1- 1 = X, 0 = Y
0- 1 = TEST
472/1496 1D8/5D8 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PRESELECTED NAV TACAN CHANNEL NUMBER
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 128 TCN CHANNEL NUMBER
14- 64
13- 32
12- 16
11- 8
10- 4
9- 2
8- 1
7-4- NOT DEFINED
3- LABEL VALID = 1
2- NOT DEFINED
1- 1 = X, 0 = Y
0- 1 = TEST
473/1497 1D9/5D9 ANALOG I/O GENERAL AUX ANNUNCIATOR DATA 2

474/1498 1DA/5DA ANALOG I/O GENERAL CASE RELATED ACT 2ND SOURCE BRG ANGLE
PROCESSOR DEGREES

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
475/1499 1DB/5DB DISPLAY CALCULATED DISCRETE

PROCESSOR 15- SECOND BEARING MENU MODE
14- SECOND BEARING MENU IN VIEW
13- SECOND BEARING FLAG IN VIEW
12- SECOND BEARING POINTER IN VIEW
11-10- NOT DEFINED
9- TRUE/MAG
8-0- NOT DEFINED
476/1500 1DC/5DC ANALOG I/O DISPLAY BEARING/MENU SOURCE TYPE
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD
14- BEARING SOURCE TYPE
9- MENU COLOR, 1 = YELLOW, 0 = GREEN
8- MENU SOURCE TYPE
7- MENU SOURCE TYPE
6- MENU SOURCE TYPE
5- MENU SOURCE TYPE
4- MENU SOURCE TYPE
3-0- PAD
477/1501 1DD/5DD DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS TRUE HEADING

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 429 LABEL 33 HEX
478/1502 1DE/5DE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DIAGNOSTICS — CHANNEL 2

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- BYTE 2 (MSB)
14- BYTE 2
13- BYTE 2
12- BYTE 2
11- BYTE 2
10- BYTE 2
9- BYTE 2
8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6- BYTE 1
5- BYTE 1
4- BYTE 1
3- BYTE 1
2- BYTE 1
1- BYTE 1
0- BYTE 1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
479/1503 1DF/5DF DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DIAGNOSTICS — CHANNEL 2

14- BYTE 4
13- BYTE 4
12- BYTE 4
11- BYTE 4
10- BYTE 4
9- BYTE 4
8- BYTE 4
7- BYTE 3 (MSB)
6- BYTE 3
5- BYTE 3
4- BYTE 3
3- BYTE 3
2- BYTE 3
1- BYTE 3
0- BYTE 3
480/1504 1E0/5E0 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DIAGNOSTICS — CHANNEL 2
14- BYTE 5
13- BYTE 5
12- BYTE 5
11- BYTE 5
10- BYTE 5
9- BYTE 5
8- BYTE 5
7- NOT DEFINED
6- NOT DEFINED
5- NOT DEFINED
4- LABEL F3 HEX DATA VALID = 1
3- NOT DEFINED
2- NOT DEFINED
1- NOT DEFINED
0- NOT DEFINED

14- BYTE 2
13- BYTE 2
12- BYTE 2
11- BYTE 2
10- BYTE 2
9- BYTE 2
8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6- BYTE 1
5- BYTE 1
4- BYTE 1
3- BYTE 1
2- BYTE 1
1- BYTE 1
0- BYTE 1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE

14- BYTE 4
13- BYTE 4
12- BYTE 4
11- BYTE 4
10- BYTE 4
9- BYTE 4
8- BYTE 4
7- BYTE 3 (MSB)
6- BYTE 3
5- BYTE 3
4- BYTE 3
3- BYTE 3
2- BYTE 3
1- BYTE 3
0- BYTE 3

14- BYTE 5
13- BYTE 5
12- BYTE 5
11- BYTE 5
10- BYTE 5
9- BYTE 5
8- BYTE 5
7- NOT DEFINED
6- NOT DEFINED
5- NOT DEFINED
3-0- NOT DEFINED
484/1508 1E4/5E4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 LATITUDE FOR “TO” WAYPOINTS
485/1509 1E5/5E5 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 LATITUDE FOR “TO+1” WAYPOINTS
486/1510 1E6/5E6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 LATITUDE FOR “TO+2” WAYPOINTS
487/1511 1E7/5E7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 LONGITUDE FOR “TO” WAYPOINTS
488/1512 1E8/5E8 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 LONGITUDE FOR “TO+1” WAYPOINTS

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
489/1513 1E9/5E9 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 LONGITUDE FOR “TO+2” WAYPOINTS
490/1514 1EA/5EA DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AIR DATA COMPUTER ALTITUDE STATUS
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- PRESSURE ALTITUDE VALID = 1
14- BARO ALTITUDE VALID = 1
13- PAD = 0
12- STRUT SWITCH, GROUND = 1
11- RESERVED SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
491/1515 1EB/5EB DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC PRESSURE ALTITUDE (FEET)

PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT BIASED +24576 FEET
492/1516 1EC/5EC DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC ALTITUDE (BCD FEET)

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 80 000 FEET
14- 40 000 FEET
13- 20 000 FEET
12- 10 000 FEET
11- 8000 FEET
10- 4000 FEET
9- 2000 FEET
8- 1000 FEET
7-0- NOT DEFINED
493/1517 1ED/5ED DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC ALTITUDE (BCD FEET)
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 800 FEET
14- 400 FEET
13- 200 FEET
12- 100 FEET
11- 80 FEET
10- 40 FEET
9- 20 FEET
8- 10 FEET
7- 8 FEET
6- 4 FEET
5- 2 FEET
4- 1 FOOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
494/1518 1EE/5EE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC BAROALTITUDE

PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT BIASED +24576 FEET

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
495/1519 1EF/5EF DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC VERTICAL SPEED/IAS STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- VERT SPEED VALID = 1
14- IAS VALID = 1
13- PAD = 0
12- ADC VALID = 1
11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
496/1520 1F0/5F0 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC VERTICAL SPEED

497/1521 1F1/5F1 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC INDICATED AIRSPEED

498/1522 1F2/5F2 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC IAS (BCD)

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 8000 KNOTS (MSB)
14- 4000 KNOTS
13- 2000 KNOTS
12- 1000 KNOTS
11- 800 KNOTS
10- 400 KNOTS
9- 200 KNOTS
8- 100 KNOTS
7- 80 KNOTS
6- 40 KNOTS
5- 20 KNOTS
4- 10 KNOTS
3- 8 KNOTS
2- 4 KNOTS
1- 2 KNOTS
0- 1 KNOT
499/1523 1F3/5F3 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (TAS)/ISA DIFFERENTIAL
PROCESSOR NO 1 STATUS
15- TAS VALID = 1
14- ISA DIFFERENTIAL VALID = 1
13- PAD = 0
11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
500/1524 1F4/5F4 DIGITAL I/O ADC TAS (KNOTS)

15- 1024 KNOTS
14- 512 KNOTS
13- 256 KNOTS
12- 128 KNOTS
11- 64 KNOTS
10- 32 KNOTS
9- 16 KNOTS
8- 8 KNOTS
7- 4 KNOTS
6- 2 KNOTS
5- 1 KNOT
4- 0.5 KNOT
3- 0.25 KNOT
2- 0.125 KNOT
1- 0.0625 KNOT
0- 0.03125 KNOT
501/1525 1F5/5F5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (BCD)

502/1526 1F6/5F6 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ISA DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- 512 DEGREES CELSIUS (MSB)
14- 256 DEGREES CELSIUS
6- 1 DEGREE CELSIUS
5- 0.5 DEGREE CELSIUS
503/1527 1F7/5F7 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC MACH STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- MACH DISPLAY VALID = 1
14- MACH TRUE VALID = 1
13- PAD = 0
12- MACH DISPLAY TRUE = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
504/1528 1F8/5F8 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC MACH NUMBER (DISPLAY)

15- 1.024 MACH
14- 0.512 MACH
13- 0.256 MACH
12- 0.128 MACH
11- 0.064 MACH
10- 0.032 MACH
9- 0.016 MACH
8- 0.008 MACH
7- 0.004 MACH
6- 0.002 MACH
5- 0.001 MACH
4- 0.0005 MACH
3- 0.00025 MACH
2- 0.000125 MACH
1- 0.0000625 MACH
0- 0.00003125 MACH
505/1529 1F9/5F9 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC MACH NUMBER (TRUE)

PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT MACH NUMBER
506/1530 1FA/5FA DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC VS/IAS BUG STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- VS BUG VALID = 1
14- IAS BUG VALID = 1
13- VS REFERENCE BUG AVAILABLE = 1
12- IAS REFERENCE BUG AVAILABLE = 1
11- ADC-86 = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
507/1531 1FB/5FB DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC VERTICAL SPEED BUG

508/1532 1FC/5FC DIGITAL I/O ADC IAS BUG

509/1533 1FD/5FD DIGITAL I/O ADC SAT/VMO/MMO STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- STATIC AIR TEMP VALID = 1
14- VMO/MMO VALID = 1
13- OVERSPEED WARNING ON = 1
12- OVERSPEED TEST ON = 1
11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
510/1534 1FE/5FE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC STATIC AIR TEMP (SAT)
PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES CELSIUS
15- 512 DEGREES CELSIUS (MSB)
6- 1 DEGREE CELSIUS
511/1535 1FF/5FF DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC MAX ALLOWABLE AIRSPEED (VMO/MMO)
512/1536 200/600 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC TAT/PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 1 15- TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE VALID = 1
14- PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE VALID = 1
13- RESERVED
12- RESERVED
11- PRESELECTOR 1 = CROSS-SIDE
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
513/1537 201/601 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC TOTAL AIR TEMP (TAT)
PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES CELSIUS
514/1538 202/602 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE

PROCESSOR NO 1 2’S COMPLEMENT FEET
515/1539 203/603 ANALOG I/O GENERAL GYRO PITCH ANGLE

PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
516/1540 204/604 ANALOG I/O GENERAL GYRO ROLL ANGLE
517/1541 205/605 ANALOG I/O GENERAL GYRO HEADING ANGLE

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
518/1542 206/606 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP BCD CPCI

PROCESSOR NO 1 15-D3 CPCI DIGIT 7
14-D2
13-D1
12-D0
11-D3 CPCI DIGIT 8
10-D2
9-D1
8-D0
7-D3 CPCI DIGIT 9
6-D2
5-D1
4-D0
3-D3 CPCI DIGIT 10
2-D2
1-D1
0-D0
519/1543 207/607 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP TYPE
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- TYPE
14- TYPE
BITS 15 14 TYPE
0 0 DCP
0 1 DSP
1 0 CHINESE DSP
1 1 NOT USED
13-8- VERSION
BITS 13 12 11 10 9 8 VERSION
0 0 0 0 0 0 BLANK (DSP-85T)
0 0 0 0 0 1 A
0 0 0 0 1 0 B (DSP-85B/C/D/E)
(-001, -004)
0 0 0 0 1 1 C (DSP-85B/C/D/E)
(-005, -006)
0 0 0 1 0 0 D (DSP-84)
0 0 0 1 0 1 E (DSP-85V)
0 0 0 1 1 0 F
0 0 0 1 1 1 G
7-0- NOT DEFINED
520/1544 208/608 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1 (CSDB)
14-8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 1
521/1545 209/609 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1 (CSDB)

14-8- BYTE 4
7- BYTE 3 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 3

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
522/1546 20A/60A DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1 (CSDB)

14-8- BYTE 5
7-5- NOT DEFINED
3-0- NOT DEFINED
523/1547 20B/60B DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
14-8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 1
524/1548 20C/60C DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
14-8- BYTE 4
7- BYTE 3 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 3
525/1549 20D/60D DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
14-8- BYTE 5
7-5- NOT DEFINED
3-0- NOT DEFINED
526/1550 20E/60E DIGITAL I/O GENERAL NAV DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
14-8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 1
527/1551 20F/60F DIGITAL I/O GENERAL NAV DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)

14-8- BYTE 4
7- BYTE 3 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 3
528/1552 210/610 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL NAV DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)

14-8- BYTE 5
7-5- NOT DEFINED
3-0- NOT DEFINED
529/1553 211/611 SPARE (3 LOCATIONS)

THRU THRU
531/1555 213/613
532/1556 214/614 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)

14-8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE

14-8- BYTE 4
7- BYTE 3 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 3

14-8- BYTE 6
7- BYTE 5 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 5
14-8- BYTE 7
7-5- NOT DEFINED
3-0- NOT DEFINED
536/1560 218/618 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS DIAGNOSTICS
(CSDB) PROCESSOR NO 2 15- BYTE 2 (MSB)
14-8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 1
537/1561 219/619 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
14-8- BYTE 4
7- BYTE 3 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 3
538/1562 21A/61A DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)
14-8- BYTE 6
7- BYTE 5 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 5
539/1563 21B/61B DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS DIAGNOSTICS (CSDB)

14-8- BYTE 7
7-5- NOT DEFINED
3-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
540/1564 21C/61C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN WIND DIRECTION

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR AND LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 70 HEX, BITS 31-20
DIGITAL I/O WIND ANGLE TRUE FROM WHICH THE WIND IS
PROCESSOR NO 1 BLOWING. BINARY ANGULAR FORMAT, DEGREES.
MAG VAR CORRECTED IF LRN REF IS MAG. WIND
WITHOUT AIRPLANE HEADING.
14- 90 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- 0.0439453125 DEGREE
2-0- NOT DEFINED
541/1565 21D/61D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN CROSSTRACK DEV

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR PROCESSED LRN 6-WIRE LABEL C0 HEX, BITS 28-19
NAUTICAL MILES, RIGHT/LEFT OF COURSE
INFORMATION IS LOCATED IN LOCATION 022/1046.
15- (-1024) NMI
14- 512 NMI
13- 256 NMI
12- 128 NMI
11- 64 NMI
10- 32 NMI
9- 16 NMI
8- 8 NMI
7- 4 NMI
6- 2 NMI
5- 1 NMI
4- 0.5 NMI
3- 0.25 NMI
2- 0.125 NMI
1- 0.0625 NMI
0- 0.03125 NMI

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
542/1566 21E/61E ANALOG I/O GENERAL LRN VERTICAL DEV

PROCESSOR OR PROCESSED LRN 6-WIRE LABEL F2 HEX, BITS 28-19
DIGITAL I/O DOTS
PROCESSOR NO 2 15- 8 DOTS (MSB)
14- 4 DOTS
13- 2 DOTS
12- 1 DOT
11- 0.5 DOT
10- 0.25 DOT
9- 0.125 DOT
8- 0.0625 DOT
7- 0.03125 DOT
6- 0.015625 DOT
5- 0.0078125 DOT
4- 0.00390625 DOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
543/1567 21F/61F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED MAPS TEXT

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- COLOR BITS 15 14 COLOR
14- COLOR 0 0 GREEN
0 1 YELLOW
1 0 CYAN
1 1 RED
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5-0- PADS = 0

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
544/1568 220/620 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY PLAN MODE

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15- 1 = REMOTE SITE RCV AND VALID
14- PAD =0
13- PAD =0
12- PAD =0
11- PAD =0
10- COLOR BITS 10 9 COLOR
0 0 GREEN
0 1 YELLOW
1 0 CYAN
1 1 RED
8- SYMBOL
7- SYMBOL
6- SYMBOL
5- SYMBOL
4- SYMBOL
BITS 8 7 6 5 4 SYMBOL
0 0 0 0 0 WAYPOINT
0 0 0 0 1 VOR
0 0 0 1 0 AIRPORT
0 0 0 1 1 NDB
0 0 1 0 0 ALTITUDE INTERCEPT
0 0 1 0 1 NO SYMBOL
0 0 1 1 0 VORTAC
0 0 1 1 1 FAN MARKER
BITS 8 7 6 5 4 SYMBOL
0 1 0 0 0 INTERSECTION
0 1 0 0 1 AIRPORT 2
0 1 0 1 0 AIRCRAFT
0 1 0 1 1 AIRCRAFT CARRIER
0 1 1 0 0 SUBMARINE
0 1 1 0 1 DESTROYER
0 1 1 1 0 RADAR SITE
0 1 1 1 1 TANK
1 0 0 0 0 UNDEFINED
3-0- NOT DEFINED
545/1569 221/621 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY PLAN MODE TEXT (12 LOCATIONS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR THE DATA WILL BE CONVERTED FROM ASCII TO A
556/1580 22C/62C FORM USED TO ADDRESS DIRECTLY THE
CHARACTER IN THE CHARACTER GENERATOR PROM.
THE ASCII DATA WILL HAVE 20H SUBTRACTED FROM
IT. THE DATA WILL BE ROTATED TWO BITS TO THE
LEFT(WITH TRAILING 0’S) AND THEN POSITIONED AS
SHOWN BELOW.
15-12- PADS = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5-0- PADS = 0

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
557/1581 22D/62D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 0
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR UP TO 14 POINTS CAN BE PLOTTED.
558/1582 22E/62E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FROM AIRCRAFT (OR TUBE CENTER IN PLAN
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR MODE) TO THE POINT.
2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES. IF NUMBER IS
POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST OF THE
AIRCRAFT. NOTE THAT IF DISTANCE IS GREATER
THAN 600 NMI, POINT IS FLAGGED AS INVALID SO
DISPLAY PROCESSOR WILL NOT HAVE TO
DETERMINE IF IT IS ON SCREEN. ALL 16 BITS ARE
USED FOR PLOTTING.
15- (-1024) NMI
14- 512 NMI
13- 256 NMI
12- 128 NMI
11- 64 NMI
10- 32 NMI
9- 16 NMI
8- 8 NMI
7- 4 NMI
6- 2 NMI
5- 1 NMI
4- 0.5 NMI
3- 0.25 NMI
2- 0.125 NMI
1- 0.0625 NMI
0- 0.03125 NMI
559/1583 22F/62F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FROM AIRCRAFT (OR TUBE CENTER IN PLAN
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR MODE) TO THE POINT.
2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES. IF NUMBER IS
POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THENORTH OF THE
AIRCRAFT.
560/1584 230/630 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 0 (12 LOCATIONS)
571/1595 23B/63B FORM USED TO ADDRESS DIRECTLY THE
LEFT (WITH TRAILING 0’S) AND THEN POSITIONED AS
SHOWN BELOW.
15-12- PADS = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5-0- PADS = 0
572/1596 23C/63C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 1
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
573/1597 23D/63D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 1

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES. IF NUMBER IS
AIRCRAFT.
574/1598 23E/63E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 1

POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH OF THE
AIRCRAFT.
575/1599 23F/63F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 1 (12 LOCATIONS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
586/1610 24A/64A
587/1611 24B/64B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 2
588/1612 24C/64C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 2

AIRCRAFT.
589/1613 24D/64D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 2
AIRCRAFT.
590/1614 24E/64E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 2 (12 LOCATIONS)
601/1625 259/659
602/1626 25A/65A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 3
603/1627 25B/65B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 3

AIRCRAFT.
604/1628 25C/65C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 3

AIRCRAFT.
605/1629 25D/65D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 3 (12 LOCATIONS)
616/1640 268/668

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
617/1641 269/669 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 4
618/1642 26A/66A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 4

AIRCRAFT.
619/1643 26B/66B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 4

AIRCRAFT.
620/1644 26C/66C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 4 (12 LOCATIONS)
631/1655 277/677
633/1657 279/679 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 5

AIRCRAFT.
634/1658 27A/67A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 5

AIRCRAFT.
635/1659 27B/67B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 5 (12 LOCATIONS)
646/1670 286/686

AIRCRAFT.
649/1673 289/689 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 6

AIRCRAFT.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
650/1674 28A/68A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 6 (12 LOCATIONS)
661/1685 295/695

AIRCRAFT.
664/1688 298/698 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 7

AIRCRAFT.
665/1689 299/699 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 7 (12 LOCATIONS)
676/1700 2A4/6A4
677/1701 2A5/6A5 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 8
678/1702 2A6/6A6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 8

AIRCRAFT.
679/1703 2A7/6A7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 8

AIRCRAFT.
680/1704 2A8/6A8 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 8 (12 LOCATIONS)
691/1715 2B3/6B3
692/1716 2B4/6B4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 9
693/1717 2B5/6B5 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 9

AIRCRAFT.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
694/1718 2B6/6B6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 9

AIRCRAFT.
695/1719 2B7/6B7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 9 (12 LOCATIONS)
706/1730 2C2/6C2
707/1731 2C3/6C3 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 10
708/1732 2C4/6C4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 10

AIRCRAFT.
709/1733 2C5/6C5 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 10

AIRCRAFT.
710/1734 2C6/6C6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 10 (12 LOCATIONS)
721/1745 2D1/6D1
722/1746 2D2/6D2 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 11
723/1747 2D3/6D3 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 11

AIRCRAFT.
724/1748 2D4/6D4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 11

AIRCRAFT.
725/1749 2D5/6D5 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 11 (12 LOCATIONS)
736/1760 2E0/6E0
737/1761 2E1/6E1 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 12

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
738/1762 2E2/6E2 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 12

AIRCRAFT.
739/1763 2E3/6E3 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 12

AIRCRAFT.
740/1764 2E4/6E4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 12 (12 LOCATIONS)
751/1775 2EF/6EF
752/1776 2F0/6F0 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 13
753/1777 2F1/6F1 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 13

AIRCRAFT.
754/1778 2F2/6F2 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 13
AIRCRAFT.
755/1779 2F3/6F3 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 13 (12 LOCATIONS)
766/1790 2FE/6FE
767/1791 2FF/6FF DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AIRCRAFT SYMBOL POSITION IN PLAN MODE IF
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR DISTANCE IS GREATER THAN 600 NMI, THEN THE
POINT IS FLAGGED INVALID SO THE AIRCRAFT
SYMBOL IS NOT PLOTTED.
15- 1 = VALID
14-11- PADS = 0
9- COLOR 0 0 GREEN
0 1 YELLOW
1 0 CYAN
1 1 RED
8- SYMBOL (DEFINED IN DEC LOCATION 544/1568)
7- SYMBOL
6- SYMBOL
5- SYMBOL
4- SYMBOL
3-0- PADS = 0

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
768/1792 300/700 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FROM TUBE CENTER TO AIRCRAFT
POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST OF THE TUBE
CENTER.
769/1793 301/701 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FROM TUBE CENTER TO AIRCRAFT
TUBE CENTER.
770/1794 302/702 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY “TO” WAYPOINT IDENT (12 LOCATIONS)
781/1805 30D/70D FORM USED TO ADDRESS DIRECTLY THE
SHOWN BELOW.
15- 1 = ROTATE IN PROGRESS, DON’T PLOT DATA.
14-12- PADS = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5-0- PADS = 0

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
782/1806 30E/70E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 0 IF
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR WAYPOINT INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE AND VALID
ON HIGH-SPEED 429 BUS, IT WILL BE PLACED HERE.
THE FORMAT WILL BE SIMILAR TO THE ABOVE
EXTENDED ITEMS. THE FIRST POINT WILL BE
PLOTTED USING DISTANCE-TO-GO AND BEARING-TO-
WAYPOINT. THE CRS LINE INTO FIRST WAYPOINT
WILL BE PLOTTED USING DESIRED TRACK. THE
SECOND WAYPOINT WILL BE PLOTTED IN
REFERENCE TO THE FIRST WAYPOINT. THE THIRD
WAYPOINT INFORMATION IS GIVEN IN RELATION TO
THE SECOND WAYPOINT. IF INVALID OR DISTANCE IS
GREATER THAN 600 NMI, THAT POINT IS FLAGGED
AND PLOTTING IS STOPPED AT PREVIOUS POINT.
15- 1 = 429 WAYPOINT VALID (CRS VALID)
14- 1 = POINT ON SCREEN (DIST VALID)
13- 1 = DRAW INBOUND LINE
12-11- PADS = 0
9- COLOR 0 0 GREEN
0 1 YELLOW
1 0 CYAN
1 1 RED
7- SYMBOL
6- SYMBOL
5- SYMBOL
4- SYMBOL
3-0- NOT DEFINED
783/1807 30F/70F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 0
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES
784/1808 310/710 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 0
785/1809 311/711 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 0
THRU THRU PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR (12 LOCATIONS)
796/1820 31C/71C THE DATA WILL BE CONVERTED FROM ASCII TO A
FORM USED TO ADDRESS DIRECTLY THE
SHOWN BELOW.
15-12- PADS = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5-0- PADS = 0

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
797/1821 31D/71D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 1
798/1822 31E/71E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 1
799/1823 31F/71F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 1
811/1835 32B/72B 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 785/1809
812/1836 32C/72C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 2
813/1837 32D/72D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 2
814/1838 32E/72E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 2
815/1839 32F/72F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 2
826/1850 33A/73A 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 785/1809
827/1851 33B/73B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 3
828/1852 33C/73C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 3
829/1853 33D/73D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 3
830/1854 33E/73E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 3
841/1865 349/749 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 785/1809
842/1866 34A/74A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 4
843/1867 34B/74B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 4
844/1868 34C/74C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 4

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
845/1869 34D/74D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 4
857/1881 359/759 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 5
858/1882 35A/75A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 5
859/1883 35B/75B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 5
860/1884 35C/75C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 5
873/1897 369/769 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 6
874/1898 36A/76A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 6
875/1899 36B/76B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 6
890/1914 37A/77A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 7

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
917/1941 395/795 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY “FROM” EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR IF WAYPOINT INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE AND
VALID ON HIGH-SPEED 429 BUS, IT WILL BE PLACED
HERE. THE FORMAT WILL BE SIMILAR TO THE ABOVE
EXTENDED ITEMS. THE FIRST POINT WILL BE
PLOTTED USING DISTANCE-TO-GO AND BEARING-TO-
WAYPOINT. THE CRS LINE INTO FIRST WAYPOINT
WILL BE PLOTTED USING DESIRED TRACK. THE
SECOND WAYPOINT WILL BE PLOTTED IN
REFERENCE TO THE FIRST WAYPOINT. THE THIRD
WAYPOINT INFORMATION IS GIVEN IN RELATION TO
THE SECOND WAYPOINT. IF INVALID OR DISTANCE IS
GREATER THAN 600 NMI, THAT POINT IS FLAGGED
AND PLOTTING IS STOPPED AT PREVIOUS POINT.
15- 1 = 429 WAYPOINT RECEIVED AND VALID
14- 1 = POINT ON SCREEN, LINE DRAWN
13-11- PADS = 0
9- COLOR 0 0 GREEN
0 1 YELLOW
1 0 CYAN
1 1 RED
7- SYMBOL
6- SYMBOL
5- SYMBOL
4- SYMBOL
3-0- NOT DEFINED
918/1942 396/796 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY “FROM” EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE
919/1943 397/797 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY “FROM” EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE
920/1944 398/798 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY “FROM” EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT
931/1955 3A3/7A3 THE TEXT PLOTTED NEXT TO “FROM” WAYPOINT CAN
BE IDENT OR UP TO 12 CHARACTERS OF TEXT.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
932/1956 3A4/7A4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS BACK AZIMUTH DEVIATION (DOTS)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL 07 HEX
15- 8 DOTS (MSB)
14- 4 DOTS
13- 2 DOTS
12- 1 DOT
11- 0.5 DOT
10- 0.25 DOT
9- 0.125 DOT
8- 0.0625 DOT
7- 0.03125 DOT
6- 0.015625 DOT
5-0- NOT DEFINED
933/1957 3A5/7A5 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS GLIDEPATH ANGLE (DEGREES)

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL 1E HEX
934/1958 3A6/7A6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS GLIDEPATH ANGLE DEVIATION (DOTS)
15- 8 DOTS (MSB)
14- 4 DOTS
13- 2 DOTS
12- 1 DOT
11- 0.5 DOT
10- 0.25 DOT
9- 0.125 DOT
8- 0.0625 DOT
7- 0.03125 DOT
6- 0.015625 DOT
5- 0.0078125 DOT
4- 0.00390625 DOT
3- 0.001953125 DOT
2- 0.0009765625 DOT
1-0- NOT DEFINED
935/1959 3A7/7A7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS CHANNEL SELECTION (BCD)
15-
14- 400
13- 200
12- 100
11- 80
10- 40
9- 20
8- 10
7- 8
6- 4
5- 2
4- 1
3-0- PADS = 0
936/1960 3A8/7A8 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS BACK AZIMUTH ANGLE (DEGREES)

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
937/1961 3A9/7A9 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS FRONT AZIMUTH COMPENSATED DEVIATION
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR (DOTS)
MLS 429 LABEL 96 HEX
938/1962 3AA/7AA DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS AZIMUTH ANGLE (DEGREES)

939/1963 3AB/7AB DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS DME FREQUENCY

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL B8 HEX
15- DISPLAY = 1 ENABLE, = 0 DISABLE
14- NAV MODE BITS 14 13 NAV MODE
13- NAV MODE 0 0 VOR
0 1 ILS
1 0 MLS
1 1 SPARE
12- DME MODE BITS 12 11 10 DME MODE
11- DME MODE 0 0 0 STANDBY
10- DME MODE 0 0 1 DIRECTED
FREQUENCY 1
0 1 0 DIRECTED
FREQUENCY 2
0 1 1 DIRECTED
FREQUENCY 3
1 0 0 HOLD FREQUENCY 1
1 0 1 HOLD FREQUENCY 2
1 1 0 FREE SCAN (NOT
USED)
1 1 1 SPARE
9- NOT DEFINED
8- IDENT = 1 AUDIO ON, = 0 AUDIO OFF
7-0- NOT DEFINED
940/1964 3AC/7AC DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS DME FREQUENCY MLS 429 LABEL B8 HEX
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR 15-
14- 40
13- 20
12- 10
11- 8
10- 4
9- 2
8- 1
7- 0.8
6- 0.4
5- 0.2
4- 0.1
3- 0.08
2- 0.04
1- 0.02
0- 0.01

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
941/1965 3AD/7AD ANALOG I/O IAS SCALE SELECTION

PROCESSOR 15- COMBINED AIR DATA FLAG
14- 1 = 50-DEGREE UP CHEVRON IN VIEW
13- 1 = 35-DEGREE DOWN CHEVRON IN VIEW
12-10- PADS = 0
9- 1 = DIGITAL HEADING IN VIEW (COMPOSITE)
8- 1 = DIGITAL HEADING IN VIEW (COMPOSITE)
7- IAS REFERENCE (DIGITAL) IN VIEW
6- IAS FLAG IN VIEW
5- HIGH-SPEED IAS SCALE SELECT
4- LOW-SPEED IAS SCALE SELECT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
942/1966 3AE/7AE IAS SCALE SELECTION

15- PAD = 0
14- EXCESSIVE GLIDESLOPE DEV UP IN VIEW
13- EXCESSIVE GLIDESLOPE DEV DOWN IN VIEW
12- EXCESSIVE LOCALIZER DEV RIGHT IN VIEW
11- EXCESSIVE LOCALIZER DEV LEFT IN VIEW
10- 1 = IAS MASTER WARN
9- 1 = LAC-80 FLAG IN VIEW
8- 1 = MACH NUMBER IN VIEW
7- 1 = IAS REFERENCE BUG IN VIEW
6- 1 = EXCESSIVE IAS DEV SPEED UP
5- 1 = EXCESSIVE IAS DEV SLOW DOWN
4- 1 = IAS WARN
3-0- NOT DEFINED
943/1967 3AF/7AF IAS POINTER DISPLACEMENT

VGU’S
15- (-2048) VGU’S (MSB)
14- 1024 VGU’S
13- 512 VGU’S
12- 256 VGU’S
11- 128 VGU’S
10- 64 VGU’S
9- 32 VGU’S
8- 16 VGU’S
7- 8 VGU’S
6- 4 VGU’S
5- 2 VGU’S
4- 1 VGU’S
3-0- NOT DEFINED
944/1968 3B0/7B0 VMO POINTER DISPLACEMENT BOTTOM OF VMO

LINE
VGU’S
945/1969 3B1/7B1 VMO POINTER DISPLACEMENT TOP OF VMO LINE

VGU’S

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
946/1970 3B2/7B2 IAS REFERENCE POINTER PLACEMENT

VGU’S
947/1971 3B3/7B3 TREND VECTOR LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION DATA (DIGITAL)

G’S
15- (-20.48) G’S (MSB)
14- 10.24 G’S
13- 5.12 G’S
12- 2.56 G’S
11- 1.28 G’S
10- 0.64 G’S
9- 0.32 G’S
8- 0.16 G’S
7- 0.08 G’S
6- 0.04 G’S
5- 0.02 G’S
4- 0.01 G’S
3-0- NOT DEFINED
948/1972 3B4/7B4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY CALCULATED DISCRETES, AMD STRAPS #

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR DETERMINED BY STRAPS 11 AND 36
15- 0 = 6-WIRE, 1 = 429 ACTIVE
14- 0 = SECONDARY LRN PORT, 1 = PRIMARY LRN
PORT
13- 0 = TRUE, 1 = MAG
12- HDG# BITS 12 11 HDG#
11- HDG# 0 0 = 4
0 1 = 1
1 0 = 2
1 1 = 3
10- ATT# BITS 10 9 ATT#
9- ATT# 0 0 = 1
0 1 = 1
1 0 = 2
1 1 = 3
8- NAVAID SELECT IN VIEW = 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
949/1973 3B5/7B5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL MLS FLAGS

PROCESSOR NO 2 MLS 429 LABEL VALID MONITOR
15- BACK AZIMUTH DEVIATION 07 HEX VALID = 1
14- GLIDEPATH ANGLE 1E HEX VALID = 1
13- GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION 3E HEX VALID = 1
12- GLIDEPATH ANGLE DEVIATION 56 HEX VALID = 1
11- MLS CHANNEL 78 HEX VALID = 1
10- BACK AZIMUTH ANGLE 7E HEX VALID = 1
9- FRONT AZIMUTH DEVIATION 96 HEX VALID = 1
8- AZIMUTH 9E HEX VALID = 1
7- DME FREQUENCY DISCRETE B8 HEX VALID = 1
6- LOCALIZER DEVIATION DE HEX VALID = 1
5-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
950/1974 3B6/7B6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR PROCESSED LRN 429 LABEL 95 HEX, TCN 429 LABEL
81 HEX, RNAV LOW-SPEED 429 LABEL 41 HEX
HIGH 3 BITS
15- VALID = 0 IF 429 DISTANCE, BEARING, AND
DESIRED TRACK ARE VALID
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- NOT DEFINED
11- NOT DEFINED
10- NOT DEFINED
9- NOT DEFINED
8- NOT DEFINED
7- 4096 NMI (MSB)
6- 2048 NMI
5- 1024 NMI
4- 512 NMI
3-0- NOT DEFINED
951/1975 3B7/7B7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR PROCESSED LRN 429 LABEL 95 HEX, TCN 429 LABEL
81 HEX, RNAV LOW-SPEED 429 LABEL 41 HEX
LOW 12 BITS
15- 256 NMI (MSB)
14- 128 NMI
13- 64 NMI
12- 32 NMI
11- 16 NMI
10- 8 NMI
9- 4 NMI
8- 2 NMI
7- 1 NMI
6- 0.5 NMI
5- 0.25 NMI
4- 0.125 NMI
3-0- NOT DEFINED
952/1976 3B8/7B8 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 BEARING TO WAYPOINT

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL B2 HEX
2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES. MAG VAR CORRECTED IF
LRN MAG REFERENCED.
953/1977 3B9/7B9 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 MAGNETIC VARIATION

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL E6 HEX
2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES. ADD MAG VAR TO THE
DATA TO BE CORRECTED, WEST VARIATION =
POSITIVE.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
954/1978 3BA/7BA DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT
BCD NAUTICAL MILES
15- 80 NMI
14- 40 NMI
13- 20 NMI
12- 10 NMI
11- 8 NMI
10- 4 NMI
9- 2 NMI
8- 1 NMI
7- 0.8 NMI
6- 0.4 NMI
5- 0.2 NMI
4- 0.1 NMI
3-0- NOT DEFINED
955/1979 3BB/7BB DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT
BCD NAUTICAL MILES
15- STATUS BITS 15 14
14- STATUS 1 1 VALID
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- 8000 NMI
10- 4000 NMI
9- 2000 NMI
8- 1000 NMI
7- 800 NMI
6- 400 NMI
5- 200 NMI
4- 100 NMI
3-0- NOT DEFINED
956/1980 3BC/7BC DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 BANK COMMAND

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 8A HEX
14- 90.0 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- BANK COMMAND VALID = 1
2- BANK COMMAND AVAILABLE = 1
1-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
957/1981 3BD/7BD DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN 429 CROSSTRACK DEVIATION
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR DOTS
958/1982 3BE/7BE DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 WIND DIRECTION

959/1983 3BF/7BF DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 WIND VELOCITY

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL B3 HEX
BINARY KNOTS
15- VALID = 0 IF WIND DATA IS VALID
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- 256 KNOTS
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
960/1984 3C0/7C0 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 CROSSTRACK DEVIATION
2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES
POSITIVE = FLY RIGHT
15- (-1024) NMI
14- 512 NMI
13- 256 NMI
12- 128 NMI
11- 64 NMI
10- 32 NMI
9- 16 NMI
8- 8 NMI
7- 4 NMI
6- 2 NMI
5- 1 NMI
4- 0.5 NMI
3- 0.25 NMI
2- 0.125 NMI
1- 0.0625 NMI
0- 0.03125 NMI
961/1985 3C1/7C1 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 VERTICAL DEVIATION
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL F2 HEX
DOTS

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
962/1986 3C2/7C2 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 TIME-TO-GO

BCD MINUTES
15- STATUS 1 = VALID
14- 400 MINUTES
13- 200 MINUTES
12- 100 MINUTES
11- 80 MINUTES
10- 40 MINUTES
9- 20 MINUTES
8- 10 MINUTES
7- 8 MINUTES
6- 4 MINUTES
5- 2 MINUTES
4- 1 MINUTE
3-0- NOT DEFINED
963/1987 3C3/7C3 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 GROUND SPEED
HEX BCD KNOTS
15- STATUS 1 = VALID
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- 800 KNOTS
10- 400 KNOTS
9- 200 KNOTS
8- 100 KNOTS
7- 80 KNOTS
6- 40 KNOTS
5- 20 KNOTS
4- 10 KNOTS
3-0- NOT DEFINED
964/1988 3C4/7C4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 GROUND SPEED
BCD KNOTS
15- 8 KNOTS
14- 4 KNOTS
13- 2 KNOTS
12- 1 KNOT
11- 0.8 KNOT
10- 0.4 KNOT
9- 0.2 KNOT
8- 0.1 KNOT
7-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
965/1989 3C5/7C5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHS 429 ACCELERATIONS (BODY AXIS)
PROCESSOR NO 2 15- ACCELERATION DATA VALID = 1
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- STRUT SWITCH, GROUND = 1
11- NOT DEFINED
10- NOT DEFINED
9- NOT DEFINED
8- NOT DEFINED
7- NOT DEFINED
6- NOT DEFINED
5- NOT DEFINED
4- AHS ATTITUDE BUS VALID = 1
3-0- NOT DEFINED
966/1990 3C6/7C6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS 429 LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR AHS 429 LABEL 9B HEX
2’S COMPLEMENT G’S
15- 10 G’S (MSB) SIGN BIT
14- 5 G’S
13- 2.5 G’S
12- 1.25 G’S
11- 0.625 G’S
10- 0.3125 G’S
9- 0.15625 G’S
8- 0.078125 G’S
7- 0.0390625 G’S
6- 0.01953125 G’S
5- 0.009765625 G’S
4- 0.0048828125 G’S
3- 0.00244140625 G’S
2- 0.001220703125 G’S
1- 0.0006103525625 G’S
0- 0.00030517678125 G’S
967/1991 3C7/7C7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS 429 LATERAL ACCELERATION

968/1992 3C8/7C8 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS 429 NORMAL ACCELERATION

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR AHS 429 LABEL DB HEX
969/1993 3C9/7C9 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS 429 ATTITUDE TEST MODE
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR AHS 429 LABEL 0B, 2B, 33, AB HEX
15- MAG HEADING IN TEST = 1
14- TRUE HEADING IN TEST = 1
13- PITCH IN TEST = 1
12- ROLL IN TEST = 1
11-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
970/1994 3CA/7CA DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS 429 PITCH ATTITUDE

971/1995 3CB/7CB DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS 429 ROLL ATTITUDE

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR AHS 429 LABEL AB HEX
972/1996 3CC/7CC DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 MAGNETIC HEADING

973/1997 3CD/7CD DIGITAL I/O GENERAL MLS 429 ILS DATA

PROCESSOR NO 2 MLS 429 LABEL 3E DE HEX
15- GLIDESLOPE VALID = 1 LABEL 3E HEX
14- LOCALIZER VALID = 1 LABEL DE HEX
13-0- NOT DEFINED
974/1998 3CE/7CE DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION
GS DEV 100 PERCENT (FULL SCALE = 0.175)
15- 0.8 DDM (MSB)
14- 0.4 DDM
13- 0.2 DDM
12- 0.1 DDM
11- 0.05 DDM
10- 0.025 DDM
9- 0.0125 DDM
8- 0.00625 DDM
7- 0.003125 DDM
6- 0.0015625 DDM
5- 0.00078125 DDM
4- 0.000390625 DDM
3-0- NOT DEFINED
975/1999 3CF/7CF DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DOTS)

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
976/2000 3D0/7D0 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL DE HEX
LOC DEV 100 PERCENT (FULL SCALE = 0.175)
15- 0.4 DDM (MSB)
14- 0.2 DDM
13- 0.1 DDM
12- 0.05 DDM
11- 0.025 DDM
10- 0.0125 DDM
9- 0.00625 DDM
8- 0.003125 DDM
7- 0.0015625 DDM
6- 0.00078125 DDM
5- 0.000390625 DDM
4-0- NOT DEFINED
977/2001 3D1/7D1 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DOTS)
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL DE HEX
978/2002 3D2/7D2 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY ADF BEARING

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR ADF 429 LABEL 4E HEX
14- 90.0 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- 0.0439453125 DEGREE
2- NOT DEFINED
1- NOT DEFINED
0- BEARING VALID = 1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
979/2003 3D3/7D3 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY ADF FREQUENCY

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR ADF 429 LABEL 58 HEX
BCD KNOTS
15- STATUS, 1 = VALID
14- 2000 KNOTS
13- 1000 KNOTS
12- 800 KNOTS
11- 400 KNOTS
10- 200 KNOTS
9- 100 KNOTS
8- 80 KNOTS
7- 40 KNOTS
6- 20 KNOTS
5- 10 KNOTS
4- 8 KNOTS
3- 4 KNOTS
2- 2 KNOTS
1- 1 KNOT
0- 1 = 0.5, 0 = 0.0
980/2004 3D4/7D4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY PRESENT POSITION LATITUDE

DEGREES
981/2005 3D5/7D5 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY PRESENT POSITION LONGITUDE

DEGREES
982/2006 3D6/7D6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY TRUE HEADING FOR EXTENDED PAGES
DEGREES
983/2007 3D7/7D7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DRIFT ANGLE

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 8B HEX
DEGREES
984/2008 3D8/7D8 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DESIRED TRACK

DEGREES
CORRECTED IF IN MAG MODE FOR EXTENDED PAGES
985/2009 3D9/7D9 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY TRACK

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL D3 HEX
DEGREES

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
986/2010 3DA/7DA DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN FLAGS

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN LABEL VALID FLAGS
15- NOT DEFINED
14- PP LATITUDE 13 HEX VALID = 1
13- DESIRED TRACK 32 HEX VALID = 1
12- TRUE HEADING 33 HEX VALID = 1
11- PITCH COMMAND 4A HEX VALID = 1
10- WPT LATITUDE 63 HEX VALID = 1
9- DRIFT ANGLE 8B HEX VALID = 1
8- PP LONGITUDE 93 HEX VALID = 1
7- DISTANCE “TO” 95 HEX VALID = 1
6- BEARING “TO” B2 HEX VALID = 1
5- TRACK ANGLE D3 HEX VALID = 1
4- WPT LONGITUDE E3 HEX VALID = 1
3- MAG VAR E6 HEX VALID = 1
2- VERTICAL DEV F2 HEX VALID = 1
1- NOT DEFINED
0- WPT HEADER 8C HEX VALID = 1
987/2011 3DB/7DB DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS FLAGS
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR AHS LABEL VALID FLAGS
15- MAG HEADING 0B HEX VALID = 1 BUS
MONITOR
14- TRUE HEADING 33 HEX VALID = 1 BUS
MONITOR
13- PITCH 2B HEX VALID = 1 BUS
MONITOR
12- LATERAL ACCEL 5B HEX VALID = 1 COMPOSITE
11- LONG ACCEL 9B HEX VALID = 1 COMPOSITE
10- ROLL AB HEX VALID = 1 BUS
MONITOR
9- NORM ACCEL DB HEX VALID = 1 COMPOSITE
8- NOT DEFINED
7- MAG HEADING SSM VALID = 1
6- TRUE HEADING SSM VALID = 1
5- PITCH SSM VALID = 1
4- ROLL SSM VALID = 1
3-0- NOT DEFINED
988/2012 3DC/7DC DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY WIND DIRECTION
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR AND LRN 429 LABEL 73 HEX
DIGITAL I/O 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
PROCESSOR NO 1

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
989/2013 3DD/7DD ANALOG I/O DISPLAY CROSS-SIDE ANNUNCIATIONS FOR ADI AND HSI
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 1 = PDATA ON ADI
14- 1 = XFR ON ADI
13- 1 = CDRV ON ADI
12- 1 = XADC ON ADI
11- 1 = XCTL ON ADI
10- = 0 SPARE
9- = 0 SPARE
8- = 0 SPARE
7- 1 = PDATA ON HSI
6- 1 = XFR ON HSI
5- 1 = CDRV ON HSI
4- 1 = XCTL ON HSI
3-0- NOT DEFINED
990/2014 3DE/7DE ANALOG I/O DISPLAY SELECTED WIND VELOCITY
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- VALID = 0 IF WIND DATA IS VALID
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- 256 KNOTS (MSB)
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3-0- NOT USED
991/2015 3DF/7DF ANALOG I/O DISPLAY SELECTED WIND DIRECTION
992/2016 3E0/7E0 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY AIR DATA COMPUTER IAS

993/2017 3E1/7E1 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY AIR DATA COMPUTER SCALED MACH
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT MACH
15- 1.024 MACH (MSB)
14- 0.512 MACH
13- 0.256 MACH
12- 0.128 MACH
11- 0.064 MACH
10- 0.032 MACH
9- 0.016 MACH
8- 0.008 MACH
7- 0.004 MACH
6- 0.002 MACH
5- 0.001 MACH
4- 0.0005 MACH
3- 0.00025 MACH
2- 0.000125 MACH
1- 0.0000625 MACH
0- 0.00003125 MACH

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
994/2018 3E2/7E2 ANALOG I/O AIR DATA COMPUTER MODE

14- NOT DEFINED
13- XADC SELECT 1 = ONSIDE
12- 1 = IAS EXCESSIVE DEVIATION ENABLE
11- 1 = INHIBIT AIRSPEED OR FAST/SLOW SCALE
10- 1 = ENABLE REFERENCE AIRSPEED FAST/SLOW
SCALE
9- 1 = AOA SCALE IN VIEW
8- 1 = ANALOG FAST/SLOW IN VIEW
7- NOT DEFINED
6- NOT DEFINED
5- NOT DEFINED
4- NOT DEFINED
3- NOT DEFINED
2- STRAP 13
1- STRAP 23
1- STRAP 27
995/2019 3E3/7E3 ANALOG I/O ATT, HDG, AND LRN STRAPS
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- NOT DEFINED
11- STRAP 38 ATTITUDE AND HEADING SOURCE
STRAPS
10- STRAP 35
9- STRAP 24
8- STRAP 14
7- NOT DEFINED
6- STRAP 32 LRN SOURCE STRAPS
5- STRAP 31
4- STRAP 6
3- STRAP 5
2- STRAP 4
1- STRAP 36 X AND Y ANNUN STRAPS
0- STRAP 11
996/2020 3E4/7E4 ANALOG I/O ATTITUDE AND HEADING SOURCE AND ANNUN
PROCESSOR 15- 1 = GYRO ATTITUDE
14- 1 = AHRS ATTITUDE
13- 429 ATTITUDE
12- NOT DEFINED
11- GYRO HEADING
10- AHRS HEADING
9- 429 HEADING
8- NOT DEFINED
7- ATT1 ATTITUDE ANNUN
3- HDG1 HEADING ANNUN

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
997/2021 3E5/7E5 ANALOG I/O ATTITUDE AND HEADING SOURCE AND ANNUN
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- LNAV ANNUN CODE
11- LNAV ANNUN CODE
10- LNAV ANNUN CODE
9- LNAV ANNUN CODE
8- LNAV ANNUN CODE
7- LOW-SPEED 429 TACAN
6- ARINC 568 AND ANALOG TACAN
5- ALL ARINC 561 6-WIRE
4- ARINC 561 AND ANALOG
3- 1 = HIGH-SPEED 429
2-0- NOT DEFINED
998/2022 3E6/7E6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS MAGNETIC HEADING

999/2023 3E7/7E7 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN STATUS

PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL BD HEX
15- 1 = FMS ARM FOR APPROACH
14- 1 = ARINC 429 LNAV/VNAV APPROACH SCALING
13- 1 = DISPLAY SECOND COURSE
12- 1 = ILS GUIDED APPR, 0 = FMS GUIDED APPR
11- DEAD RECKONING
10- 1 = WAYPOINT ALERT
9-0- NOT DEFINED
1000/2024 3E8/7E8 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN STATUS
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL BD HEX
15- 1 = STATUS RECORD VALID
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- 1 = HSI NAV WARN
11- 1 = TRUE, 0 = MAG
10- 1 = MESSAGE ALERT
9- PAD = 0
8- 1 = SELECTED CROSSTRACK WARN
7- 1 = “FROM” IN VIEW
6- 1 = “TO” IN VIEW
5- NOT DEFINED
4- NOT DEFINED
3- NOT DEFINED
2- 1 = PLAN MODE
1- NOT DEFINED
0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
1001/2025 3E9/7E9 DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT

HIGH BITS BCD
15- 8000 NMI
14- 4000 NMI
13- 2000 NMI
12- 1000 NMI
11- 800 NMI
10- 400 NMI
9- 200 NMI
8- 100 NMI
7- 80 NMI
6- 40 NMI
5- 20 NMI
4- 10 NMI
3-0- NOT DEFINED
1002/2026 3EA/7EA DISTANCE TO “TO” WAYPOINT

LOW BITS BCD
15- 8 NMI
14- 4 NMI
13- 2 NMI
12- 1 NMI
11- 0.8 NMI
10- 0.4 NMI
9- 0.2 NMI
8- 0.1 NMI
7-0- NOT DEFINED
1003/2027 3EB/7EB DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME IDENT STATUS — CHANNEL 3

11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
1004/2028 3EC/7EC DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME FREQUENCY STATUS — CHANNEL 3
PROCESSOR NO 1 15- FREQUENCY VALID = 1
11- DME HOLD ON = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
1005/2029 3ED/7ED DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DISTANCE — CHANNEL 3

15- 800 NMI
14- 400 NMI
13- 200 NMI
12- 100 NMI
11- 80 NMI
10- 40 NMI
9- 20 NMI
8- 10 NMI
7- 8 NMI
6- 4 NMI
5- 2 NMI
4- 1 NMI
3- 0.8 NMI
2- 0.4 NMI
1- 0.2 NMI
0- 0.1 NMI
1006/2030 3EE/7EE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME FREQUENCY — CHANNEL 3

PROCESSOR NO 1 BCD MHz
15- 80 MHz
14- 40 MHz
13- 20 MHz
12- 10 MHz
11- 8 MHz
10- 4 MHz
9- 2 MHz
8- 1 MHz
7- 0.8 MHz
6- 0.4 MHz
5- 0.2 MHz
4- 0.1 MHz
3- 0.08 MHz
2- 0.04 MHz
1- 0.02 MHz
0- 0.01 MHz

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
1007/2031 3EF/7EF DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME CHARACTER 1 — CHANNEL 3

PROCESSOR NO 1 THE ASCII CHARACTER WILL HAVE 20H SUBTRACTED
15- 1 = INVALID, FIRST CHARACTER ONLY
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5- CHARACTER
4- CHARACTER
3-0- PADS = 0
1008/2032 3F0/7F0 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME CHARACTER 2 — CHANNEL 3



1011/2035 3F3/7F3 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DISTANCE — CHANNEL 3

15- 256 NMI (MSB)
14- 128 NMI
13- 64 NMI
12- 32 NMI
11- 16 NMI
10- 8 NMI
9- 4 NMI
8- 2 NMI
7- 1 NMI
6- 0.5 NMI
5- 0.25 NMI
4- 0.125 NMI
3- 0.0625 NMI
2- 0.03125 NMI
1- 0.015625 NMI
0- 0.0078625 NMI

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
1012/2036 3F4/7F4 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME TIME-TO-GO AND VELOCITY — CHANNEL 3
14- PAD = 0
13- (0,1) SEARCH, (1,0) TRACK
12- (0,1) SEARCH, (1,0) TRACK
11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
7- NOT DEFINED
1013/2037 3F5/7F5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME TIME-TO-GO — CHANNEL 3
15- PAD = 0
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- 100 MINUTES
11- 80 MINUTES
10- 40 MINUTES
9- 20 MINUTES
8- 10 MINUTES
7- 8 MINUTES
6- 4 MINUTES
5- 2 MINUTES
4- 1 MINUTE
3- 0.8 MINUTE
2- 0.4 MINUTE
1- 0.2 MINUTE
0- 0.1 MINUTE
1014/2038 3F6/7F6 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME VELOCITY — CHANNEL 3

15- PAD = 0
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- 800 KNOTS
10- 400 KNOTS
9- 200 KNOTS
8- 100 KNOTS
7- 80 KNOTS
6- 40 KNOTS
5- 20 KNOTS
4- 10 KNOTS
3- 8 KNOTS
2- 4 KNOTS
1- 2 KNOTS
0- 1 KNOT

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
1015/2039 3F7/7F7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED PAGE DATA ADDRESS

PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR DIOP1 WILL SET BIT 15 = 1 IF DATA IS AVAILABLE.
DISPLAY PROCESSOR WILL CLEAR THE VIR AFTER
DATA IS READ. THIS WORD CONTAINS THE ADDRESS
WHERE TO PUT THE EXTENDED PAGE DATA.
15- VALID = 1
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- 256 (MSB) ADDRESS FOR EXTENDED PAGE
CHARACTERS
11- 128
10- 64
9- 32
8- 16
7- 8
6- 4
5- 2
4- 1
3-0- NOT DEFINED
1016/2040 3F8/7F8 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED PAGE DATA
14- COLOR 0 0 GREEN
0 1 YELLOW
1 0 CYAN
1 1 RED
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5-0- PADS = 0
1017/2041 3F9/7F9 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY FLIGHT DIRECTOR ANNUNCIATORS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- FCC-85 RUDDER MISTRIM ANNUN
14- FCC-85 AILERON MISTRIM ANNUN
13- FCC-85 ELEVATOR MISTRIM ANNUN
12- APS-65 TRIM ANNUN
11- SYNC ANNUN
10- = 0 (GROWTH)
9- = 0 (GROWTH)
8- 1 = FORMAT B
7- = 0 (GROWTH)
6- = 0 (GROWTH)
5- = 0 (GROWTH)
4- SUBMODE (B/C)
3-0- PADS = 0

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
1018/2042 3FA/7FA ANALOG I/O DISPLAY MACH NUMBER

1019/2043 3FB/7FB SELECTED LRN WIND DIRECTION

15-0- NOT DEFINED
1020/2044 3FC/7FC SELECTED LRN WIND VELOCITY

15-0- NOT DEFINED
1021/2045 3FD/7FD DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY WXP DATA
PROCESSOR NO 1 PROCESSOR 15- G4 BITS 15 14 13 GAIN
14- G2 0 0 0 G-3
13- G1 0 0 1 G-2
0 1 0 G-1
0 1 1 G+0
1 0 0 G+1
1 0 1 G+2
1 1 0 G+3
1 1 1 BLANK
12- STABILIZATION 1 = BLANK, 0 = DISPLAY USTB
11- AUTOTILT 0 = BLANK, 1 = DISPLAY A
10- TILT SIGN 0 = +, 1 = -
9- TILT 8.00 DEGREES MAGNITUDE
8- TILT 4.00
7- TILT 2.00
6- TILT 1.00
5- TILT 0.50
4- TILT 0.25
3- 0 = BLANK TILT (30 SECONDS), 1 = DISPLAY TILT
2-0- PADS = 0
1022/2046 3FE/7FE DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY ESTIMATED TIME TO DESTINATION VIA FLIGHT
PROCESSOR NO 2 PROCESSOR PLAN
15- VALID = 1
14- 4096 MINUTES (MSB) SIGN BIT
13- 2048 MINUTES
12- 1024 MINUTES
11- 512 MINUTES
10- 256 MINUTES
9- 128 MINUTES
8- 64 MINUTES
7- 32 MINUTES
6- 16 MINUTES
5- 8 MINUTES
4- 4 MINUTES
3- 2 MINUTES
2- 1 MINUTE
1-0- PADS = 0

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
NO 2 SIDE NO 2 SIDE
1023/2047 3FF/7FF ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (ACTIVE)

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 1 = VALID TRUE AIRSPEED
14- 000 KNOTS
13- 512 KNOTS
12- 256 KNOTS
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3- 0.5 KNOT
2- 0.25 KNOT
1- 0.125 KNOT
0- 0.0625 KNOT

Table 5-12. MFD RAM Locations With Definitions.
LOCATION DEFINITION
000-239 The 240 characters last displayed on the MFD in PAGE, EMG, or RMT mode (upper 8 bits only).
240 (Note 1) X position of joystick
241 (Note 1) Y position of joystick
242 MFD MODES

11- Enter joystick position (active for 20 ms)
10- Not used
9- Not used
8- Radar
7- NAV
6- Remote
5- Page
4- Emergency
3-0 Not used
243 Remote Mode Joystick and Select

11- RMT 1
10- RMT 2
9- RMT 3
8- RMT 4
7- Joystick left
6- Joystick down
5- Joystick right
4- Joystick up
3-0 Not used
244 Remote Mode Selected Device

11-8 Not used
7- RMT 1
6- RMT 2
5- RMT 3
4- RMT 4
3-0 Not used
245 Selected Range When No Radar

HEX RANGE (NM)
700 600
600 300
500 200
400 100
300 50
200 25
100 10
000 5
246 Menu Mode (RMT or NAV only)

11- Menu Mode Active
10-0 Not used
247 Selected NAV Sources

11- Not used
10- Not used
9- HDG
8- Not used
7- LRN 1
6- LRN 2
5- VOR 1
4- VOR 2
3-0 Not used

Table 5-12. MFD RAM Locations With Definitions.
LOCATION DEFINITION
248 (Note 2) MFD Internal Test 1

Word
253 (HEX)
010 RD1 Register
020 MDE Register
030 See Word 253
040 Lower RAM “1” Check address
050 Lower EEPROM Address
060 Lower EEPROM Address

Word
253 (HEX)
010 RD2 Register
020 JOYSW Register
030 See Word 253
040 Lower RAM “1” Check address
050 Upper EEPROM Address
060 Upper EEPROM Address

Word
253 (HEX)
010 RD3 Register
020 PGESW Register
030 See Word 253
040 Diagnostic Data
050 No Data
060 No Data
251 (Note 2) MFD Internal Test 2, SELSW Register
252 (Note 2) MFD Internal Test 2, RDPSW Register
253 (Notes 2 and 3) MFD Internal Test 1 Mode Counter

HEX VALUE
010 RD Register Contents Displayed
020 MDE, JOYSW, PGESW Registers Contents Displayed
030 Joystick X and Y Position Data Displayed (240 and 241)
040 RAM and Diagnostic Data Displayed
050 EEPROM Addresses Displayed (Data out of MFD)
060 EEPROM Addresses Displayed (Data into MFD)
254 Not used
255 MFD Software REV Number

11-4 REV Number
3-0 Not used
Note 1: All words use upper 8 bits of MPR except these which use all 12 bits.
Note 2: These words are only valid if the MFD is placed in selftest.
Note 3: The test mode counter is incremented by holding the top select button for longer than 5 seconds.

Figure 5-3. RAM Map
Figure 5-4. Control Interface

Figure 5-5. DPU to EFD (EADI and EHSI) Interface
Figure 5-6. Radar Interface
<date> 5-193/(5-194 blank)

æ#523-0775969-003118
ûú7l_ed_Yi
9ebb_di
EFIS-84
Electronic Flight
Instruments Systems
Bulletins
Service Bulletins and Service Information Letters

(Refer to latest edition/addendum of the General
Aviation Equipment Service Bulletin/Information
Letter Index 523-0766944 for up-to-date listing.)
SB/SIL
Number Unit Title Date
1-83R2 EFIS-85( )/86( ) Forced-Air Cooling System Installation June 30/83

1-87 EFIS-85( )/86( ) EFIS CRT Maintenance Schedule and Brightness Oct 2/87
Measurements
2-89R1 EFIS-85( )/86( ) Identification of EFIS System, Associated System Oct 20/89
Installation Manual, and Pilot’s Guide
2-93 EFIS-84 ARINC 429 LRN Input Port Speed Selection May 26/93
NOTICE: This title page replaces title page dated 20 May 1992.

Beechcraft 1900D Efis-84

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Beechcraft 1900D Efis-84

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Beechcraft 1900D Efis-84

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ûú7l_ed_Yi#<#9ecckd_YWj_edi

Collins General Aviation Division

March 30, 1995

TO: HOLDERS OF COLLINS EFIS-84 ELECTRONIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENT SYSTEM MANUAL

3RD EDITION HIGHLIGHTS

This publication includes:

General Information 523-0775964

Collins General Aviation Division

INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS

The material in this publication is subject to change. Before attempting any

SOFTWARE COPYRIGHT NOTICE

© 1993-1995 Rockwell Collins, Inc.

All Software resident in this equipment is protected by copyright.

We welcome your comments concerning this publication. Although every effort

General Information 3/0 30 Mar/95 1 10 Dec/96

1.1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Page No Issue Page No Issue Page No Issue

* Title ......................................... 30 Mar 95 * 1-9............................................. 30 Mar 95 * 1-33 .......................................... 30 Mar 95

RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF

REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

1st Ed 11 Jul 90 None

2nd Ed 20 May 92 None

1st Rev 28 Apr 93 None

3rd Ed 30 Mar 95 SIL 2-93

1.1 INTRODUCTION temperature warning output that can drive an ex-

Revised 30 March 1995 1-1

Figure 1-1. EFIS-84 Electronic Flight Instrument System

Revised 20 May 1992 1-2

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered.

EQUIPMENT COLLINS DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER UNITS REQUIRED

2-TUBE 3-TUBE 4-TUBE 5-TUBE

EFD PART NUMBER COLOR BEZEL TRIM RING

Revised 30 March 1995 1-3

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered.

EQUIPMENT COLLINS DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER UNITS REQUIRED

2-TUBE 3-TUBE 4-TUBE 5-TUBE

TYPE COLLINS PART NUMBER USED WITH

TYPE COLLINS PART NUMBER USED WITH

TYPE COLLINS PART NUMBER USED WITH

Revised 30 March 1995 1-4

1.3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS b. Input Signals and Format (Table 1-5)

Revised 20 May 1992 1-5

Table 1-2. EFIS System Specifications.

Maintenance requirement On condition

Storage Category F2: –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185°F)

Revised 30 March 1995 1-6

Table 1-3. EFIS System Specifications.

Operational Tested at 6 g peak

Crash safety Tested at 15 g (11 ms duration)

Vibration Categories PKS and MNO

Category M. Certified for fuselage or equipment rack mounting in a single or mul-

Category O. Certified for equipment rack mounting in a fixed-wing turbojet or turbofan

Fungus resistance Category X. Fungus resistance test not performed.

Salt spray Category X. Salt spray test not performed.

Revised 20 May 1992 1-7

Table 1-3. EFIS System Specifications.

DPU-84 6.4 kg (14.1 lb)

DSP-84 1.31 kg (2.9 lb)